Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Prologue Arc

17 years before the current time, Malvolio D. Shocker was born in Foosha Village, the very same island the legendary Monkey D. Luffy was from. As a child, Shocker had spiky pink hair, and wore a simple black T-shirt with shorts and sandals. An orphan since birth, the village people tended to ignore him more than he would have liked, so he decided to be a delinquent and play practical jokes in order to get their attention, which only made them angrier. His favorite prank involved splashing their houses with green paint, his favorite color, and graffiti-ing insulting words on various walls and establishments. When his only true friend and big sister figure, Makino, tried to tell him that he’s only making enemies, he said that as long as people took notice of him, he didn’t care if they liked him or not.

9 years ago, when he was 8 years old, the genius Dr. Vegulus Vegapunk arrived at Foosha in order to continue his Duplication Grand Series, a global tour showing off his newest creation. He had developed a system to reproduce Devil Fruits that have already been eaten by extracting the lineage factor from the original eater, synthesizing it, and infusing it with a fruit vessel. By manipulating their DNA, he was able to mass produce artificial fruit abilities, and he called them Duplication Fruits, or Duplis for short. Everyone was amazed, and Vegapunk was awarded a massive house in the village, as he was planning to stay for a week before moving on. Shocker, after being bullied and egged on by the village bullies, Punkie, Bucky, and Sirius, decided to prove himself to the others by sneaking into the house and trying to steal one of the duplis.

The house Vegapunk was staying in was a bit ways up on a hill, slightly isolated from the rest of the village. He ran right up to it, then found the door locked, so he climbed through the window. He saw a table with all sorts of colorful fruits on it, and he got his hands on a purple one. Just then, Vegapunk stepped out of the darkness, and berated him for trying to steal. Shocker explained to him he just wanted to prove himself to the others, but Vegapunk furiously scolded him, stating that is not a justification for breaking and entering, or for stealing.

However, at that moment, a trio of mountain bandits barged into the house, and said they were going to hold Vegapunk for ransom. Vegapunk readied an arm cannon, but one of them pointed a gun at Shocker and said to not move if he wanted the kid to survive. After looking at the fruit Shocker held in his hand, Vegapunk thought to himself for a bit. Vegapunk quietly told Shocker to eat the fruit he had, which he did, then asked the bandits if his kidnapping was the wisest choice they could have made. The bandits, confused, began talking amongst themselves, wondering how much Vegapunk’s head would go for. The old man shouted at the bandits that they didn’t have the guts to shoot a little kid. When the lead bandit got irritated and shot Shocker, the bullet bounced back, rebounding off of his body and hitting the bandit in the arm. Vegapunk then quickly disposed of the other two. When Shocker asked Vegapunk how he isn’t dead, he explained that the fruit he ate is a Gomu Gomu Dupli (Gum Gum Dupli), which allowed his body to become rubber and therefore be immune to bullets. Shocker mentioned it is the sweetest thing he ever tasted, and Vegapunk merely smirked and said he is sure it is.

A week later, Vegapunk decided there is nothing to be done about Shocker eating his dupli, and decided to leave without pressing charges, though he reprimanded Shocker once more, telling him stealing is bad. As his ship set sail, Shocker shouted that he’d become much stronger now that he has an ability. Vegapunk simply responded that he couldn’t wait to see it, and thought to himself how he hoped that he would be able to see Shocker again when he had grown up. As the little island became a speck to the scientist, he wondered what sort of grand journey Shocker would go on, and he was sure the boy would shake the world to its foundation.

Village Orphan

Malvolio D. Shocker

World's Most Brilliant Scientist and Inventor

"Futuristic Genius" Dr. Vegulus Vegapunk

Chapter Text

9 years later, in the present day, a young man is heard shouting in the village, the sound resounding from Mayor Woop Slap’s house. The villagers simply roll their eyes, stating nothing has changed in 9 years. The wall of the mayor’s house suddenly breaks as someone comes crashing through it. A teenager emerges from the dust, holding a piece of meat. His hair is spiked out and pink. He wears a black, sleeveless vest, kept open to expose his chest and six-pack abs. He sports large beige pants held up by a simple brown belt, wristbands on both arms, and sandals. As Woop Slap berates him for taking his food, Shocker is reintroduced as the village troublemaker and self-claimed protector, mentioning the mayor had invited him to his house for lunch. Woop Slap complains that he had called a formal meeting with Shocker to tell him to stop taking others’ food under the pretense of lunch, and Shocker merely laughs, stating it is the old man’s fault for not being clear as Woop Slap hits him with his cane.

Village Protector (Self-Proclaimed)

Malvolio D. Shocker (age 17)

A few hours later, a villager at the port flags the arrival of a pirate crew to the rest of the town. Shocker says he’ll deal with them, since that’s what he had been training for, but Makino excitedly says she knows the ship that is coming. As the ship gets closer, the lion-shaped figurehead of the Thousand Sunny looks out onto the island. The village is surprisingly being visited by none other than the Straw Hat Pirates themselves, and their captain, the 2nd, and current, pirate king, Monkey D. Luffy. As Luffy jumps off and lands in front of the crowd, he shouts that it is good to be back home, then notices Shocker staring in awe at him and smiles. As they disembark, a massive cheer is heard and an equally massive party is thrown in honor of Luffy finally returning home with his friends.

Straw Hat Pirates Captain

Second Pirate King

"Straw Hat" Monkey D. Luffy

By this point, Shocker had trained with his fruit for nearly a decade, but he is still shocked by how menacing they all look. However, as he gets to know them in the bar, Shocker is shocked to discover how pirates could be so easygoing. Shocker had grown up hearing of Luffy, but this is his first time actually meeting him. The crew’s sniper, Usopp, tells him about how not every pirate has to be a dangerous raider. When Shocker looks confused, Usopp tells him that they fight when they need to, and really are just one large family. Chopper agrees, stating that even honorary members who can't be with them at that moment, like Vivi, are all considered as part of the crew. Standing on a table, Brook is telling jokes while Chopper and Carrot laugh enthusiastically. As Brook is about to make a skull joke about how the village made his skin tingle, Nami cuts in annoyed, saying she already knows he is going to say he doesn’t have skin. Brook sits in the corner, sad his punchline is taken, and Nami annoyedly tells him to get over himself.

Straw Hat Pirates Sniper

“God” Usopp

Straw Hat Pirates Doctor

“Cotton Candy Lover” Tony Tony Chopper

Straw Hat Pirates Musician

“Soul King” Brook

Straw Hat Pirates Lookout

“White Streak” Carrot

Straw Hat Pirates Navigator

“Weather Witch” Nami

Brook then recovers, stating nothing could bring down his spirits as he had seen Yamato’s panties earlier. Yamato, drinking sake with Jinbe on another table, laughs and tells Brook those weren’t hers, but Nami’s, with Jinbe nervously stating that this encounter would not end well. Nami punches out Brook, calling him a creep, and as Brook is badly hurt by the attack, Chopper cries that he needs a doctor, with Carrot reminding him he is their doctor. 

Straw Hat Pirates Chronicler

“Oni Princess” Yamato

Straw Hat Pirates Helmsman

“Knight of the Sea” Jinbe

At the counter where Makino is busy cleaning cups, Sanji, with love in his eyes, tells her he could help her with anything she needed, before stating he could be her shining knight while Makino simply giggles a bit nervously. Sanji turns to Luffy at the counter and says the latter never told him the woman he had been raised by is so charming. Luffy, competing with Shocker to see who could eat more of the bar’s largest food option, the Meat Festival, pauses his meal and says Makino isn’t the one who raised him. Sanji exclaims, wondering who did, before being shown Curly Dadan’s wanted poster. He then sits in the corner, disappointed that she isn’t a beautiful lady, and said she eerily reminds him of Big Mom. Drinking, Zoro says it is only natural for a fool like him to make such a dumb mistake, and soon the duo are bickering, calling eachother “moss-head” and “curly-brows” and threatening to slice and kick the other.

Straw Hat Pirates First Mate

“Pirate Hunter” Roronoa S. Zoro

Straw Hat Pirates Cook

“Black Leg” Vinsmoke Sanji

Meanwhile, Robin pokes Shocker, then uses her abilities to sprout hands on multiple parts of his face and stretch it out before allowing it to snap back into place. Robin finds it interesting, telling Luffy that this boy had the same ability as him. Franky responds, saying Vegapunk must have perfected his developmental technology on devil fruits years before the Pacifista or Seraphim came into play. He then wonders aloud if she thinks ALL of Luffy’s abilities were copied, and Robin responds that she doesn't know, but she finds it hard to believe so, as mythical zoans work differently. Luffy, of course, does not really care. He tells Shocker that if that is the case, then he should use his powers to try and eat more of the Meat Festival. Shocker asks whether he didn’t think that is too much food, and Luffy said that because of their body, they’d go back to normal no matter how much they ate. As the duo indulge, Franky says to leave enough for everyone else.

Straw Hat Pirates Archaeologist 

“Devil Child” Nico Robin

Straw Hat Pirates Shipwright 

“Cyborg” Franky

Most people in the village remember Luffy, and as such they ask him numerous questions about his journey. As Shocker continues to watch the crew, he becomes inspired. He believes that if Luffy was able to get so much fame and recognition as a pirate, then surely he can as well. After gathering courage, he turns to Luffy and asks him to let him join the Straw Hats. All the other members stop what they are doing, holding their breaths. Luffy, remembering how Shanks had said no to him all those years ago, decides to give Shocker a chance. He says he can, provided Shocker defeats him in a duel. Shocker, being naive, eagerly accepts, and jumps at him right then in the bar, but Luffy merely punches him through the roof. Luffy says sorry to Makino for her bar and that Franky would fix it in seconds, with Franky stating to SUPER leave it to him.

Over the course of the next few days, Shocker is beaten a total of 103 times, all of them being one hit ko’s. He tries jumping Luffy from bushes, getting the drop on him from trees, and even coming full force, flailing his arms. Each and every time, Luffy would knock him out in a single hit. At this point, Shocker decides that he will not be able to catch up to Luffy, and wants to give up. However, Luffy tells him that since dreams never die, he shouldn’t give up on his dream and instead go fulfill it. If he wants to become a great pirate, he wouldn’t need to do so on his crew, but rather he should go and start one himself. This motivates Shocker to become a pirate in his own right.

A week later, the Straw Hats gather their things onto the Sunny and prepare to leave, the village seeing them off. As Sanji and Brook lament having to say goodbye to Makino and are dragged onboard by Franky, Shocker runs up to Luffy and asks him what they are planning to do. Luffy told him their adventure isn’t over, and besides, he isn’t going to be the only one gunning for the Pirate King title. As Shocker says he would take it from him for sure, Luffy gives Shocker his signature straw hat, telling him to hold onto it for him as a parting gift. Shocker promises he will keep that hat until the day he surpasses them. As the Straw Hats leave, Nami asks Luffy if he is sure he wants to give away the straw hat, as he had gotten that from his mentor, Shanks. Luffy responds saying it is about time to pass it on, and it is what Shanks would have wanted. 3 days after that, Shocker is ready to leave Foosha and create his very own pirate crew in the hopes of becoming the pirate king. He gets on a small raft, and with loads and loads of meat, he sets off on his journey to find friends and climb the ranks of piracy.

Chapter Text

G10 Arc

As the days go by, Shocker becomes increasingly bored just drifting on the open sea. The initial thrill of his adventure has worn off, and the endless stretch of water offers little excitement. By the end of the second day, he has already eaten all the food he brought with him. Shocker sighs in frustration, realizing that the sea isn't as exciting as he had imagined. He had spent the last nine years training his Gomu Gomu Dupli, mastering his abilities to become strong, and now he is disappointed to see that this is all the sea has to offer at the moment. One day, as Shocker lies lazily on his raft, the wind suddenly snatches his hat and sends it floating atop the water. Without hesitation, Shocker stretches his arm, his rubbery limb extending to grab the hat before it drifts too far. As he retrieves it, he notices that the sea is an unnatural shade of green. Curious, he wonders about its cause but quickly dismisses it, deciding it must be a sign to name his crew the “Green Devil Pirates.” After all, green is already his favorite color. With his hat secured and his raft still intact, Shocker has nothing else to do but relax. 

The gentle rocking of the waves lulls him into a peaceful state as the sea slowly drifts him toward an island. As the island comes into view, Shocker spots a moderately fortified building near the shore. His stomach growls loudly, reminding him that he hasn't eaten in days. Eager to get some food, Shocker steers his raft toward the docks, completely unaware that the location is a marine base known as G10. The townspeople near the port notice Shocker's small boat approaching. Seeing that it's just a tiny raft, they assume he's just a fisherman and pay him little mind. They’re wary of any newcomers, especially after the incident a week earlier when a young boy had challenged and slashed down the marine leader before disappearing into hiding somewhere on the island. But Shocker's humble arrival doesn’t raise any alarms, and they allow him to dock without issue.

Shocker steps onto the dock, stretching his legs after days at sea. The town is lively, with people bustling about, going about their daily routines. It’s his first time being away from home, and everything feels new and exciting. He takes in the sights with wide eyes, marveling at the different buildings, the people, and the general atmosphere of the town. As he wanders through the lively streets, a small floral shop catches his eye. The shop is filled with vibrant flowers of all shapes and colors, many of which he has never seen before back home. Shocker steps inside, marveling at the strange and beautiful blooms. He spends a few moments examining the flowers, fascinated by the variety and uniqueness of each one, before stating that just like at home, the flowers here are boring.

Leaving the floral shop, Shocker continues his exploration and soon finds himself drawn to a large aquarium near the center of town. The massive glass tanks are filled with sea creatures of all kinds, from colorful fish to large, intimidating sharks. His eyes light up as he stares at the fish swimming gracefully behind the glass, briefly wondering if he could eat them. As he voices this, a nearby marine guard quickly tells him to not even think about it, as it’s illegal. Shocker apologizes hastily, and walks out. However, his stomach soon reminds him of his primary goal - finding real food.

As he walks through the streets, his nose catches the scent of something delicious. Following the aroma, he ends up at a restaurant serving seafood and pork. The sight of the food makes his mouth water, and he eagerly orders a massive feast. He devours everything in sight, practically emptying the restaurant's kitchen. By the time he's finished, he leans back in his chair, completely satisfied.

However, when the waiter asks how he plans to pay for the meal, Shocker freezes. He feels his pockets and realizes he doesn’t have a single berry on him. Panic starts to set in as he debates making a run for it. Just as he’s about to bolt, a young man with red hair in bangs steps forward and hands some money to the waiter, paying for Shocker’s meal. The man wears a white inner t-shirt, a light blue hoodie over it, and jeans. Curiously, the young man has three katanas sheathed in the side loop of his belt. Shocker looks at him in surprise and asks who he is. The man introduces himself as Todoroki Adam, explaining that he paid for Shocker’s meal because he likes the way Shocker does whatever he wants without a care in the world. 

Shocker grins, thanking Adam for the kindness. However, he can’t help but notice the three swords at Adam's waist and asks why he carries them. Adam gives a short, guarded response, saying it's his business, and Shocker respects his privacy, replying that it’s fair enough. Feeling a connection with Adam, Shocker quickly extends an invitation for him to join his crew. But Adam's response is a resounding no, stating there’s no way he would ever become a pirate. Shocker is taken aback by the intensity of Adam’s refusal and wonders about the reason behind his hatred for pirates. Adam, however, simply tells Shocker to drop it, making it clear that he won’t be joining him, no matter what. Undeterred by the rejection, Shocker shrugs it off, figuring that Adam must have his reasons. However, he asks him again after a slight pause, with Adam becoming comically angrily, asking him if he's deaf.

Wandering Swordsman

Todoroki Adam

Chapter Text

Even after eating, Shocker knows he’ll need more food to sustain himself for the rest of his journey. Ignoring Adam’s initial refusal, he asks where else he could steal food from. Adam, slightly exasperated, tells him the only place left is the marine base’s kitchen. Without hesitation, Shocker bolts out of the restaurant, thanking Adam for the tip. As Adam yells after him, warning that he’ll definitely get caught, Shocker simply grins and assures him not to worry, declaring that he’s strong enough to handle it. Adam watches him go, shaking his head at the boy’s quirky and bizarre nature, before shrugging it off—deciding it isn’t his problem to deal with.

Shocker wastes no time putting his plan into action. He uses Gomu Gomu no Rocket to stretch his arms and propel himself over the high gates of the marine base, landing with ease on the other side. As he observes guards moving in and out of the base, he quickly assesses the situation, spotting an open window. With a swift jump, he clings to the side of the building, then swings inside. Once inside, Shocker sneaks around the base, staying close to the walls and ducking out of sight whenever he hears footsteps approaching. His sense of direction and luck guide him to the kitchen without any trouble, where he immediately starts stuffing a sack full of food—bread, meat, fruits, and anything else he can find. However, just as he’s about to leave, a group of marine chefs burst into the kitchen, catching him in the act. One of them quickly sounds the alarm, and more marines rush into the room, surrounding him. They open fire, but Shocker just laughs as the bullets bounce harmlessly off his rubbery body, telling them that it tickles. The marines, having never encountered a Devil Fruit user, mistake him for some kind of monster. 

Seeing that bullets are useless, one of the marines shouts for the others to cut him down with their swords. A unit of swordsmen steps forward, their blades drawn as they close in on Shocker. Just when it looks like he’s cornered, Adam suddenly appears, wielding his three swords, with one clenched between his teeth. He swiftly counters their attacks, parrying their blades with ease. Shocker, surprised but grateful, asks Adam why he’s there. Adam nonchalantly replies that he figured he might as well take the opportunity to steal some food too.

Together, the duo fights their way out of the base, fending off wave after wave of marines. As they make their escape, they dash through the town, the marines in hot pursuit. Shocker spots his raft at the dock and tells Adam to dive for it. The two leap onto the raft, setting sail just as the marines reach the shore. The marines shoot at them, but Shocker stands in front of his new friend and easily fends off the bullets until they are too far to be reached. Laughing as they leave their pursuers behind, Shocker feels the thrill of the adventure, while Adam, still catching his breath, suddenly realizes with a start that he’s boarded the wrong boat. His expression shifts from relief to horror as he remembers that all his belongings are still on his dingy, which is now being searched by the marines.

Shocker bursts out laughing at Adam’s misfortune, teasing him that it looks like he has no choice but to stay with him. Adam is initially irritated, demanding that Shocker turn back so he can retrieve his things. But as they sail farther away, Shocker’s carefree attitude and unshakable conviction start to wear down Adam’s resistance. Reluctantly, Adam resigns himself to his new fate, realizing that this strange, rubbery boy might just be his first friend in years. As Adam’s thoughts drift to the past, his flashback begins, revealing the events that led him to this moment…

Move Index

Chapter Text

18 years ago, Adam was born in Tafu Village in the East Blue. When he was a child, just 10 years old, he and his closest friend, Techi, decided that they would both become explorers. They wanted to create a crew of explorers together and sail off to find the poneglyphs. The two boys trained everyday in school to be strong, with Adam being a sniper and Techi being a sword user. However, one day, marines came to the island due to a distress call about some pirates. After falsely believing that there was a pirate crew in the town, they ordered everyone to evacuate. However, they barely gave any time for this to occur before opening fire, destroying the majority of the village. As all the other villagers ran away, Techi would not budge, looking earnestly at the incoming battalion. Adam tugged at his arm, pleading with him to leave with him and abandon the village, stating they can always rebuild. However, Techi stood his ground, screaming that he would never be the world's greatest swordsman if he lets people push him around, stating everybody's tale starts somewhere.

Unfortunately, a marine mistook what he said as a war cry. Frantically pointing his gun in the general direction, he mistook Techi for a pirate, and shot and killed the boy. As Adam watches in horror, Techi's body slumped to the ground without a word, falling on the ground next to his friend. Adam, unable to process the event, entered a state of catatonic shock. He became so engulfed by uncontrollable rage that he grabbed Techi’s special grade sword, the Kuro Kusanagi, and slashed down every marine that was there, the blade slicing through the fodder easily, much to the horror of the other villagers. As he killed the last marine, his rage subsided as he looked at the bloodbath surrounding him. Seeing so many corpses pooled together was too much for him, and Adam collapsed from shock soon after.

When Adam awoke a week later, he saw that his white hair had been dyed permanently red by the blood of the marines he had killed. Peering out from the window of the house he was resting in, he saw that the village was in the process of being rebuilt. However, with Techi dead, he depressively reasoned that he no longer had any reason to stay. Adam decided to abandon home and go on his own journey. Grabbing Techi's sword, he vows to pursue Techi’s dream of the greatest swordsman in his place. Techi’s older sister, Mika, begged him to stay, but Adam said he wouldn’t stop until he is the best, and in order to do so, he couldn’t stay there. He abandoned the ranged weaponry he used to use and became a sword user. For the next 8 years of his life, he merely voyaged around, challenging marines and pirates alike to fight, until he arrived at G10 a week ago.

After telling Shocker his story, he sighs and tells the pirate that now he understands why he can't come with him. Adam states he has a mission of his own, and that he needs to focus on that and therefore cannot be a pirate with him. However, Shocker simply smiles. He tells the swordsman that he finds his drive admirable, and that his end goal is so similar to someone he met recently. He tells Adam that he really does want him to join, but he would understand if he didn't. Thinking to himself for a while, Adam comes to a realization. He sighs and tells the pirate he would not mind joining his crew after all. He says that his dream doesn’t really require him to be any specific occupation, so he supposes sailing the seas could work. Besides that, he states if the current world's greatest swordsman is a pirate, then he has a higher chance of meeting him being a pirate himself. Shocker turns to him with sparks in his eyes and jumps on him, cheering for his very first crew mate. With his new and first real friend by his side, Shocker sets off in the small boat toward places unknown.

Chapter Text

Verdant Greene Arc

The pair continue on their way to the next island, though they have no idea where they’re going, as neither of them have even the faintest clue how to navigate. They drift for days, alternating between arguing over which direction to try next and lying on the deck, letting the current take them where it wants. Food supplies start to run low. Shocker complains loudly about having to eat plain rice three days in a row, while Adam points out that at least they still have water. By the fourth day, they spot land in the distance—lush, green, and peaceful-looking. As they draw closer, they see the name on the port: Verdant Greene.

At first glance, the island seems quiet. A line of caravels—big, sturdy ships—are docked along the massive stone port. Adam notes it is oddly grand for such a small town. As Shocker ties the boat down, Adam asks the nearby dockmaster why so many big ships are just sitting there. The dockmaster, an older man with a wide-brimmed hat and a stoic look, says that long ago, a wealthy family that once lived on the island donated all these ships. Since then, they’ve been kept pristine as the town's pride and joy. Shocker raises a brow at that, muttering how it's a waste if they’re never used.

They step off the dock and walk into the town proper. Shocker exclaims at its beauty, with cobblestone paths, old stone houses with ivy climbing their walls, and flower boxes on windowsills. But despite the serene look, something feels off to him. Adam agrees, noting that the streets are too quiet. People peek out from behind curtains or turn their backs when the two walk by. Shocker loudly complains about being hungry and asks some vendors for food, but no one gives them so much as a nod. Adam watches them with a frown, then tells Shocker not to take it personally—that regular townsfolk are bound to be cautious around strangers, especially when they might pose a threat.

Just as Shocker scoffs and prepares to pound on another door, someone taps him on the shoulder. A girl with long, blue hair tied in a flowing ponytail greets him with a small smile. She wears a yellow sundress and sandals, and there's a calm confidence in her posture. She introduces herself as Angel and says she saw them sailing near the island earlier in the day. Figuring Verdant Greene would be their next stop, she decided to intercept them before someone else did. Angel tells them that most people here fear newcomers—especially after what the town's been through—but she wants to help. She adds that if they plan to stick around, they’ll need to do it quietly.

Verdant Greene Resident

Angel

Angel leads them through winding back alleys and into a cozy, vine-covered cottage nestled between two larger homes. As they disappear inside, a pair of tall, winged figures watch from a nearby rooftop. One of them quietly says that the captain will want to know about this, and the other nods before leaping off the roof to report what they’ve seen.

Inside, Angel pours them glasses of lemonade and explains the situation. The island is currently under the rule of the Fallen Monk Pirates, a ruthless group that came from the Grand Line and made the East Blue their playground. Their leader, “Mad Monk” Urouge, is a terrifying brute who once sailed among the Worst Generation and boasts a bounty of 108,000,000 beli. Shocker seems ready to leap out the door and go punch him right away, but Angel tells them it’s more complicated than that. Urouge mostly leaves the townspeople alone, only showing up once in a while to remind them who’s in charge—or when he’s bored.

Adam asks if she’s really okay living under a pirate crew like that, and Angel just laughs. She says that it's true that things are rough sometimes, but most people here have learned to adapt. Besides, it’s not like she can do anything about it. Shocker, oddly quiet for once, just shrugs and says that if Urouge isn’t messing with her directly, then he doesn't really mind. The tension eases as Angel serves them a freshly cooked lunch—simple but delicious. They spend the next couple of hours eating, chatting, and playing a few rounds of cards. Shocker keeps trying to cheat, but Angel catches him every time. For the first time in a while, the two travelers feel like they're not just surviving—but actually having fun.

Chapter Text

A few hours later, Adam is taking a nap, and Shocker has just woken up. he yawns, stating he has to use the bathroom. As he wanders around the small house he sees a number of sea charts and navigational tools plastered and strewn all around her house. Thinking he found the bathroom, he enters Angel's room and finds her seemingly saddened, with her head face down on the table. She quickly tightens up and smiles, asking him what he's doing here. He ignores her question, asking her why there are so many charts and stuff around. Angel tries to laugh off the question, stating it is nothing important. However, Shocker looks at her intently, telling her to tell him what's really happening, as he wants to know. At that moment, she breaks down in front of him, telling him she is a member of Urouge’s crew, much to his shock. As her tears flow, Angel’s flashback is revealed.

Angel was born 16 years before the current time. She lived with her mother on an isolated island in the East. Despite not knowing anyone else, they lived a happy, isolated life, free from the pressures of society. As Angel asked her mother why they were always alone, her mother told her she just preferred living this way, and that she would never leave her daughter all alone. However, one day when Angel was 7 years old, her mother seemingly disappeared. She looked all around the small island, but could not find her mom anywhere. Because the small isle was otherwise uninhabited, Angel’s immediate thought was that she abandoned her; her biggest fear had come true. Her mother had left her one of the few boats they had and some supplies, but apart from that, everything was gone. Angel spent days crying from the sense of abandonment and her new terrifying reality of being alone. After a few days, she wiped her tears and decided that at some point she would have to stop moping and leave the island. And so she did. She vowed to explore every single island in the world until she found her mother again. Angel sailed away in that small raft for the next 9 years, hopping from town to town, until she reached the island which housed Verdant Greene. 

She tried to stay there for some time, until she realized that the island was under the control of pirates, specifically the Fallen Monk Pirates led by the “Mad Monk” Urouge. A dangerous pirate and a former member of the Worst Generation, Urouge had fled the Grand Line in search of an island to takeover with his crew. They had pillaged quite a few islands before arriving at Verdant Greene. The island’s villagers were too scared to do anything about it, and they knew the price for helping Angel hide was steep, but they still did so out of the kindness of their hearts. Angel decided to go confront him, and walked alone towards his huge mansion. As she was brought into his home, Angel asked why he was doing this, and that he should leave the people alone. Urouge told her that because he was essentially the island’s peacekeeper, he could do what he wanted. Angel tried to attack him with a knife she kept in her pocket, but the pirate captain simply flicked her away, telling her that he did not want to have to kill her. He dragged her back to her temporary house, stating if she valued her life she would leave the next day. However, as he was about to leave, he saw her map of the world, noting her skills for cartography. Urouge said that he would make a deal with her, saying that he would leave the other islanders alone if Angel became his navigator. Angel was scared, but she wanted to give back to the people who had helped her so much, so she reluctantly agreed. Since then, she stayed with them, acting as a pirate while the others were oblivious to the fact she did it for them.

In the present day, Shocker is enraged that someone would do that to the village, especially to Angel, who he by now considered his friend. He decides that he is going to beat up Urouge, and asks Adam if he is awake. Adam, who heard the story from the other room, agrees, stating he is also tagging along. Angel wipes her tears and thanks them, stating that she never had friends before, and that she will help in the ways she can. She explains how she used to be taught the Rokushiki techniques by the birkans, some of whom knew how to use it, but that even though she is trained to fight she’s still weaker than them. Shocker says it is ok, and that any help she can provide will be more than fine. He tells her to leave it to them, as he and Adam walk toward the mansion determinedly.

Former Worst Generation

Captain of the Fallen Monk Pirates

"Mad Monk" Urouge

Bounty: 108,000,000

Chapter Text

As Adam and Shocker approach the massive mansion, Adam starts to consider their options. He wonders aloud if they should come up with some sort of strategy before barging in. Shocker, never one for overthinking, dismisses the idea with a grin and promptly kicks down the door, smashing it open with a loud crash. He turns to Adam and asks with a smirk how that works as a strategy. Adam just shakes his head, amused by his friend's straightforward approach. The grand entrance reveals a spacious hall, lavishly decorated but eerily silent. Inside, a group of Birkans mill about, though they are shocked at the sudden loud entrance. A few wonder what is going on, while others state it cannot possibly be an invasion, as all of the townspeople are too scared to act. 

Shocker scans the room and quickly decides that his target must be the biggest guy around. Without a second thought, he lunges forward and throws a powerful punch right at Urouge’s face, catching the massive man completely off guard. The impact sends Urouge staggering back a step, his surprise evident. His forces are shocked to see him so easily floored, but Adam simply grins, stating it seems the man he chose to follow has the strength to back up is claims, after all. The two birkans who had been observing from the roof earlier exclaim to Urouge that these are the intruders they had told him about.

Urouge himself recovers quickly and stares down at Shocker, asking who he is. Shocker grins and confidently declares that he’s the guy who’s going to beat him up. Urouge’s gaze shifts behind Shocker to where Angel stands, hanging back slightly. A smirk spreads across Urouge’s face as he asks Angel if she’s really going to betray them. Angel, her voice full of determination, shouts back that she’s going to be set free here and now, and that she’s leaving his crew for good. Urouge’s smile widens, a dangerous gleam in his eyes. He calmly tells his First-Mate, Chabu, to prepare the crew because they’re about to annihilate some pests.

The hall quickly fills with the full presence of the Fallen Monk Pirates, all 98 members of the crew emerging from various corners of the mansion. Adam and Angel spring into action, their movements fluid and precise. Angel unleashes her Rankyaku, the powerful slicing wind attacks cutting through the ranks of the crew with ease. Adam, with his three swords drawn, meets the oncoming wave of enemies head-on. As the pirates close in on him, he taunts them, asking if they’re so eager to lose. He then performs his Santoryu: Tatsu Maki, a powerful spinning attack that creates a whirlwind of slashes, taking out a large number of the crew in one devastating move. As the dust settles, Chabu descends from above, landing lightly on his feet. Angel calls out a warning to Adam, telling him that Chabu is a master of the Kōtō no Ken (Soaring Sword Style), a technique that allows him to fly and use his speed to outmaneuver opponents. Adam tightens his grip on his swords as Chabu begins to circle him, his movements quick and agile. Chabu flits around, avoiding Adam’s strikes with ease, his speed making him a difficult target to hit.

Chabu, curious about their motives, asks Adam why they chose to oppose the Fallen Monk Pirates. Adam’s response is simple yet profound. He states that he doesn’t need a reason to fight for a friend. Angel, hearing this, feels a surge of emotion and tears up at Adam’s words. But Adam isn’t done. He smirks and adds that since Chabu is a sword user, it automatically makes him an enemy worth defeating. With a sudden burst of speed, Chabu darts around Adam, moving too fast for him to track. Before Adam can react, Chabu strikes with Kōtō no Ken: Chūsha Hori, a precise, high-speed thrust that cuts deep into Adam’s side. Blood drips from the wound, but instead of recoiling, Adam grits his teeth and smiles. He flexes his muscles, trapping Chabu’s sword within the wound, preventing him from pulling it out.

Seizing the moment, Adam counters with a point-blank Hyaku Pound Ho, a powerful projectile slash that sends Chabu flying back. Not giving Chabu a chance to recover, Adam launches into his finishing move—Santoryu Ogi: Sanzen Sekai. With incredible speed and precision, he slashes through the air, creating a vortex of cutting force that overwhelms Chabu. The attack lands with devastating power, and Chabu crumples to the ground, defeated.

As the battle ends, Urouge looks on with a mix of anger and surprise at how quickly his crew has been decimated. He states that they're all useless, wondering how they could have lost when there are only three enemies. Adam, panting from the exertion, wipes the blood from his side and nods to Angel, signaling that their part in this fight is over. Shocker, always eager for action, steps forward, ready to take on Urouge next.

Move Index

Chapter Text

For Shocker, facing Urouge is proving to be an uphill battle from the start. Urouge reveals that his devil fruit, the Kushū Kushū no Mi (Revenge Revenge Fruit), allows him to grow stronger with every hit he takes. As Shocker unleashes his barrage of attacks, he soon realizes that his attacks seem to be having no effect. Every time he attacks, Urouge's muscles bulk up, making him an even more formidable opponent. Urouge attempts to crush Shocker into the ground, but Shocker barely manages to dodge the attack by darting to the side. He tries kicking Urouge in the back, but the Birkan turns around and grabs his foot, before waving him around and slamming him into the floor. 

As his frustration rises, Shocker attempts to unleash his signature technique, the Gomu Gomu no Gatling. With lightning speed, he lands a flurry of blows on Urouge, hoping to overwhelm him. But to his dismay, each strike only bolsters Urouge's strength further. With a menacing grin, Urouge retaliates with Karma no Mukui, slamming into Shocker and sending the Green Devil captain hurtling through the air and crashing into a nearby pillar, blood spilling from his lips.

As Shocker slides down the pillar, Urouge asks if his demonstrated strength was enough to make the pirate give up. However, despite the odds stacked against him, Shocker smiles and refuses to back down. Based on quick thinking, he formulates a plan to outsmart Urouge's formidable power. Recognizing that Urouge only amplifies the damage he can anticipate, Shocker realizes that catching him off guard was the key to victory.

With newfound resolve, Shocker curls his rubbery legs into springs, before unleashing a flurry of rapid movements, darting around the battlefield with unparalleled agility. Utilizing his Gomu Gomu no Bane technique, he leaps and bounds across the mansion, too fast for the slower-minded Urouge to anticipate. Confusion flashes across Urouge's face as Shocker blurs past him. Then, with pinpoint precision, Shocker seizes the opportunity to deliver the decisive blow. He bounds off the ceiling and punches Urouge from above with a devastating Gomu Gomu no Hammer. As Urouge feels himself get punched, he wonders how this boy managed to figure out his ability so quickly. The force of the blow drives Urouge into the ground, the floor breaking as his weight crashes into it.

As Urouge swims in and out of consciousness, Shocker pants heavily, before raising his hands and screaming. He states that this is just his first win on his way to being the king of the pirates. Angel, watching him, becomes moved by his strength and passion. She walks up towards the large man defeated on the floor, and declares to him that she’s permanently leaving his crew. As Shocker and Adam watch her, Angel simply sighs and turns towards them, telling them it’s time to go. As the trio leave, Angel gives a final glance to her former captor.

Move Index

Chapter Text

After the fight, Verdant Greene is saved. Chabu and the rest of the Fallen Monk crew had taken Urouge to their ship and drifted off already. The town holds a feast in honor of the two pirates. As she eats, the citizens thank Angel. When she asks them why, they tell her they knew all along she had joined up with Urouge to protect them, and are eternally grateful. The girl begins to weep, wondering what she did to deserve such people in her life, but her villagers simply hold her and tell her she can be free to do what she truly wants to do. The villagers additionally states that they plan to give her and her friends a present the next day. As the feast wears on, Angel has so much fun she decides she wants to stay with her newfound friends and join them on their adventure. She asks Shocker if that's ok. Shocker simply smiles and says of course he would love to have her, and Adam says she proved herself. Angel wipes her tears away and is happy she made friends.

Early in the morning the next day, she packs her things and leaves a note to the others in her house. When the pair wake up, they read the note, which tells them to hurry and sneak to the port where she can steal one of the huge caravels in the docks. They run quickly and see a huge ship with a white bust of the sea god Neptune as its figurehead. Angel comes to the prow and tells them that this is the Stormy White, the most famous and well-maintained of all of Verdant Greene’s prized ships. As she tells them to get onboard quickly, some villagers notice them stealing the ship and begin running to intercept them. However, the ship has already taken off, and Angel shouts to them, thanking them all for taking her in and sorry for stealing. The villagers mutter, but then realize they were planning on giving them the Stormy White anyway, so it all worked out. And, with a third crewmate and an amazing new ship, the Green Devil Pirates continue on to the next adventure.

Chapter Text

Sniper Island Arc

Now that Angel has joined them, since she has a compass with her, the small crew of 3 are able to at least somewhat know that they are on the right track to somewhere. Angel proves to be very helpful. Not only is she a near expert when it comes to navigation, but she also subscribes them to the News Coo delivery system so they can get important newspapers and read up on major global events. The addition of a huge ship is welcome as well, with Shocker jumping around the vessel and claiming he’s a real pirate now. Adam tells him they still need a pirate flag, and Angel says they can try to find a painter on the next island. After a few days of sailing, soon enough they see a fairly large island with high mountain ranges surrounding a small town in the center. 

As they land at the docks, a young man with long blue hair tied in a ponytail and a yellow hoodie is fishing and hurries over to meet up with them, oblivious to the fact they were pirates as they have no flag. The boy introduces himself as Taco, and Shocker laughs out loud, asking him why he is named after a food, while Angel and Adam think to themselves that he’s laughing and yet is named after electricity. Taco says they look around his age, and wonders what they are doing on a ship like that. Shocker happily exclaims that they are pirates, before Adam and Angel shush him angrily. Taco tells them not to worry, stating he doesn’t care if they are pirates because they seem to be good people.

Angel wonders how he can say that as he doesn't know them, but Taco says that if they were the evil type of pirates they wouldn't bother being so friendly and easygoing. He then adds that even if they do turn out to be evil, he'll simply have to stop them, as he is this town's hero. Adam looks on embarrassed, stating that it seems the title is self-proclaimed, though Shocker, who had done the same when he was back home, says that must mean he is strong then. Taco simply waves off the question and tells them to follow him to his home.

As they enter his small wooden house, they meet his father, a nice man who offers them the fish he had caught earlier that day for lunch. They thank him for the food, then enjoy a nice conversation about the island as they eat. Taco informs them that on Sniper Island, everyone trains to become a top-notch sharpshooter, and the giant mountain ranges are filled with training spots for the people. Excited at the news, the crew decides to find themselves a sniper. Meanwhile, Taco’s father gets the newspaper and shows Taco, telling him the next issue is here. Taco jumps up excitedly and snatches the paper from his father’s hands. As Shocker asks why he’s so excited, Taco shows them a comic he likes to read in the paper called Sogeking, the Heroic Sniper. After witnessing him in action, Taco tells Shocker his dream is to become a hero in order to save others. Taco’s father sighs, mentioning they are out of water, and Taco hurriedly assures him he would get some before running out of the room. His father smiles with pride, stating he is such a good kid, even though he has lived through a lot. When Angel asks what he means, his father tells the three pirates what had happened to Taco years ago, as his flashback is revealed. 

Village Boy

Taco

Chapter Text

17 years before the current time, Taco is born on Sniper Land, the place that unbeknownst to Usopp actually does exist, a land where everyone lived to become top notch snipers. His father was a sniper of incredible skill, and his mother was right behind him. His mom began training Taco from a very little age, and the two of them usually went out to the ranges together. However, one day when he was 9 years old, he and his mother were walking in the mountains. They had just finished a training session, and Taco complained that his gun wasn't working properly. His mother smiled and told him he was doing well and that he’d just need more practice, and so she promised to train him again the next day. However, Taco was impatient, and shot a bullet from his gun into the mountainside above them. It had enough force to dislodge a rock formation, causing a huge rockslide. His mom had already calculated the end result: if they didn’t move, they would be crushed. However, she only had enough time to whisper to him she knew he would become a sniper of legendary proportions, before pushing him away just before the rocks crushed her. He tried to remove the boulders, but was not strong enough to do so on his own. Taco cried and cried, and his father did as well when he eventually found him in the evening. For years, Taco kept beating himself up over the incident, even though his dad would tell him it wasn’t his fault. During this time, he abandoned the gun for a slingshot. And he vowed that he would become a hero in order to protect those he loved. 

As the flashback ends, Shocker thinks hard about everything he has just heard. Angel voices her condolences, and Adam merely closes his eyes. His father thanks them for being Taco’s friends, even if it is only for the day. Shocker then decides that this isn’t where their friendship would end. As Adam asks what he means, Shocker says they have found their sniper. Taco’s father looks at the time and suddenly realizes Taco had been gone for a long while, and asks the trio if they would look for him. Shocker, of course, agreed. 

Little did they know the trouble they would have later on. At the opposite shore, the ship of the White Dog Pirates lands on the beach. Their captain, Dane “the Great”, a pirate with an 11,000,000 beli bounty, walks out of their ship. He is a tall man, with long, shaggy, white-blond hair and canine-like eyes. He wears a purple kimono with long flowing sleeves, and the same color pants and boots. He barks and says that today is the day their plan to kidnap the women and children and force the snipers to pay ransom would be enacted. He sends his 3 top officers, Bull, Husker, and Labra, to scout the island and report back. 

Shocker and the others find Taco at a tree in the park, trying to help an old lady get her cat back. He tries climbing, but doesn’t know how, embarrassing himself in front of everyone. However, Shocker says he got it, and stretches his arm into the tree and grabs the cat, bringing it down sharply onto its owner’s head. The old lady shrieks, stating Shocker to be a monster, and Taco exclaims his own surprise. He tells them he ate a magical fruit that allows him to stretch, and the old lady mentions she thought the devil fruits were myths, before shrugging and thanking him. Shocker smiles, but Taco is sad, feeling that if he couldn’t even save a cat from a tree, how could he possibly save people when it mattered in more drastic situations. Suddenly, they hear a scream coming from the local bar and run to see what is happening.

Chapter Text

Shocker and the others come across the White Dog officers on the street, harassing the bar owner and demanding to know where the village leader is. Shocker simply walks up to them and asks why they are so hairy, a sore point for all three of them. They attack him, but he easily punches them back, much to their surprise, as they did not expect anyone to be able to fight them. Bull mentions they needed to report back to their captain asap, and they run toward the beach. As Shocker and the others wonder about them, a worried Taco mentions that he knows of their crew, as he had heard of their captain’s bounty before.

Taco runs to the beach, with the others following him, and as they arrive at the downward-sloping path leading to the beach, Taco sees their ship and realizes what is about to happen. Taco then tells them that he would need to fight them alone, because though everyone in the village could protect themselves against bandits, they weren’t ready to handle pirates. He tells the crew to run back to his village and help them evacuate. Shocker then gets mad and punches Taco. As Taco asks what that was for, Shocker tells him that he can put more than just his life on the line, and that they are friends and so they would help him. He then laughs and says that besides that, they are strong, and he quite frankly is looking for a fight. Though they sigh about Shocker’s thirst for fighting, Adam and Angel both agree to help as well. Taco tears up and thanks them, then grins and says it's time to go. 

As the quartet run down to the beach to stop them, the forces of the White Dogs start uphill to face them. Angel then shows off her use of Rokushiki, using Rankyaku: Arashi to create a swarm of air blades that take out a large majority of them easily. Taco then notices Bull, Husker, and Labra, jumping from behind their crewmates to attack his new friends. They wield sharp weapons: fang extensions, a sword, and a tail axe respectively. As they lunge at each of them, Taco quickly fires some Namari Shots to stop their charge. As the crew thank him, Dane himself cuts Shocker with massive claw extensions. Shocker told him to let him take care of Dane. As Adam, Angel, and Taco continue fighting off the grunts, Adam tells Taco to go help Shocker, since they can handle the small fries on their own. 

Shocker finds that while Dane isn’t too strong, he is pretty fast, dodging his Gomu Gomu no Pistol and Gomu Gomu no Gatling attacks pretty easily before slashing at him with Ufu Sensō . Dane then uses Great Swipe , but Shocker manages to backflip out of the way. Meanwhile, Angel is busy with the grunts, who couldn’t catch her because of her Soru . She used Shigan to dispatch them easily, saying that they aren’t even worth her time if she’s being honest. She asks Adam if he needs any help. The swordsman responds that this is like child’s play to him, as he is seen holding off all three of the top officers at once, parrying all their attacks easily. Labra tells the others he feels insulted, and Husker states they need to use their combined attack if they want to win. They get into a triangular position around him, and then they switch positions with each other in a clockwise motion, so fast their movement causes a triangular mini tornado to be formed. They named the attack Sankaku Pack Hunt, and when Bull shouts go, all three of them converge on Adam to pierce him from three sides. Angel is worried about him. However, as the dust settles, she sees Adam has caught each of them on one of his blades, holding them all close to him. Adam then tells them that their tornado is good, but his is better, before finishing them off by flinging them in the air using Santoryu: Tatsu Maki.

Move Index

White Dog Pirates Canine Officer

Bull

White Dog Pirates Canine Officer

Husker

White Dog Pirates Canine Officer

Labra

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, the clash between Shocker and Dane is fast-paced. Shocker tries attacking with Gomu Gomu no Gatling, trying to take Dane out quickly. However, Dane easily weaves between the rapid punches and kicks him in the stomach. As Shocker regains his posture he rushes at Dane, who dodges and kicks him into the sky. However, Shocker stretches his kick from the air and slams Dane into the beach with it. As he lands, Dane informs him that he barely felt anything. Shocker smirks, stating he’ll make sure this one does. Shocker slams him with a powerful Gomu Gomu no Bazooka, the force of the impact sends Dane hurtling backward, crashing into the side of his own ship.

But Dane does not stay down for long. With a steely resolve, he grabs a table in his quarters and uses it to rise to his feet. As he gets up, his eyes lock onto a syringe lying on the nearby table. In a bold move, Dane seizes it, declaring to Shocker that he will face a true monster from that moment onward. He injects himself with the superdrug Code K9-11, also known as the Beast Booster, a substance that pushes his muscles beyond their natural limits, transforming him into an imposing behemoth.

Confident in his newfound strength, Dane taunts Shocker, warning him that he will need to be hospitalized after their encounter. With lightning speed, he vanishes from sight, reappearing behind Shocker in the blink of an eye. With a savage kick, he sends Shocker reeling, boasting that his enhanced speed makes him untouchable. Appearing above Shocker, Dane uses his devastating technique, Inu no Crusher, bringing his claws crashing down on Shocker as he bashes him into the ground. As Shocker staggers to his feet, blood trickling from his wounds, Dane's laughter echoes across the battlefield, mocking Shocker's lack of renown.

But Shocker, spitting blood to the side, rises to his feet with unwavering determination, his resolve unyielding. With a defiant glare, he smirks and declares to Dane that he won’t be defeated by someone so weak. Infuriated by his comment, Dane unleashes his primal fury, tapping into the depths of his instincts with Yaban’na Kyōran. He lets his reflexes take over as he attacks Shocker with a barrage of slashes. Blood spurts from Shocker’s cuts, as Dane stands above him, howling.

But just as Dane prepares the finishing blow, a sudden interruption shatters his focus. Taco unleashed a Tar Shot, blinding Dane and throwing him off balance. Seizing the opportunity, Shocker thanks Taco for the opening he provided. With unparalleled speed, Shocker slams into Dane’s gut with Gomu Gomu no Bullet. With a forceful impact, he collides with Dane's torso, sending shockwaves rippling through the air as the air is knocked out of Dane’s lungs. He crumples to the ground, defeated once and for all.

As the dust settles, Shocker stands victorious, smiling at Taco and giving him a thumbs up. Taco nods back at him, happy that he was able to help. 

Move Index

White Dog Pirates Captain

Dane "the Great"

Bounty: 11,000,000

Chapter Text

Later on, in the local park, the Green Devils and Taco recount their battle to the villagers in the town square. The crew had tied up the White Dog Pirates and handed them over to village authorities, who told them that the marines would come for them later that night. While Taco thanks the Green Devils, Shocker tells the village he and his friends had merely watched, as Taco had sniped them off one by one by himself, with Angel agreeing, stating it was the most amazing thing she had ever witnessed. The whole village cheers for Taco, claiming him to be a hero, and Taco tears up out of happiness. 

Later on, Taco follows them to their ship. He had packed his bags and said goodbye to his father, as he told his dad he plans to set sail and travel around the East Blue, trying to become a hero for everyone and anyone in need. Adam mentions that since the marines will be coming soon, they need to go. Taco thanks the crew for helping him see what heroes really felt like. Shocker tells him to hurry up and get on his ship before they leave him. Taco, confused, asks whether they still wanted a legendary sniper, to which Angel smiles and says they already found one. Tears well up in Taco's eyes again, and he shouts a promise to them, stating he will become a hero with their help. As he jumps on the ship, Taco becomes an official member of the crew, and they set off together to their next adventure.

Chapter Text

Restaumer Arc

On the seafaring diner Restaumer, a young man, the manager, walks between tables, dishing out food. He has short, orange, spiky hair and wears blue-tinted glasses and a gold earring on his right ear. He wears a black t-shirt with a large, baggy, green coat over it. The coat has white fur on the hood, and he accompanies it with dark brown pants and black shoes. He walks elegantly through the sea of tables and gives customers their orders. Suddenly, a large man barges in, demanding they give him food immediately. The manager calmly walks over to him by the door and literally kicks him forcefully out the door, stating that food is a privilege and he will not serve a man who does not treat food and food makers with respect.  

On their way to the next island, Taco draws the Green Devil flag for the sail. Shocker thanks him and says everything seems to be going well so far on his journey. As everyone is hungry, Shocker decides to make lunch. However, he uses up all the ingredients they collectively have in his giant soup, and the others are shocked to see that they now have no supplies left. Luckily, Restaumer comes into sight, and they decide to disembark and go inside. The manager, who introduces himself as Yato, tells them that they serve everyone who treats them with respect, be they pirates, world government, or just regular people. Shocker asks him to be the cook on his crew, to which he quickly says no way, as he doesn't want to leave his position. He also blushes heavily when he sees Angel, and said that her meal would be free. Just then, Yato hears stirring from the back room and freezes.

Restaumer Manager

Yato

Chapter Text

A few minutes later, with a loud clanging of pots and pans, one of the ship's chef comes outside, a burly man with flour dusting his apron. He approaches Yato with a grave expression, informing him in a gruff voice that their captain and owner, Caleb, has finally waken up from his fevered sleep. A relieved expression flashes on Yato's face, and without a moment's hesitation, he dashes towards the quarters where Caleb rests, Shocker trotting eagerly at his heels. The rest of the crew exchange concerned glances before following after their captain, wondering who they might find in the back room.

Inside the dimly lit quarters, Yato stands by Caleb's bedside, his former expression now replaced with worry. He recounts the events of the past few days to the assembled crew, explaining how Caleb had fallen gravely ill and slipped into unconsciousness. Caleb is a weathered-looking older man, with long brown hair, wearing an aviator’s jacket and a black sash. He stirs weakly, his voice hoarse as he inquires about the status of their diner. Yato reassures him with a gentle smile, promising that their business is still afloat despite the owner’s absence, and that he himself is taking care of it. Caleb offers a weak nod of gratitude before succumbing to another bout of coughing, his frail form trembling with the effort.

Panic flares in Yato's eyes as Caleb slips into unconsciousness once more. He begs with the crew, desperately wondering if any of them are doctors. Angel simply shakes her head regretfully, admitting that none among them knew anything about medicine, and Taco agrees, stating that they need to find a doctor for their ship as soon as possible. Adam, intrigued, questions Yato about the old man’s story. Yato's gaze softens as he merely says that he owes the man a great debt, as he had saved his life when he was younger.

Taco, listening intently to Yato's tale, widens his eyes as he recognizes the name of Captain Caleb. He remembers hearing news about the notorious pirate who had once terrorized these very waters, and wonders if this is really the same person, a frail figure now fighting for his life. Yato confirms Taco's suspicions, stating that it is indeed him, but he left that life behind him after becoming a chef.

As the crew takes in this revelation, their thoughts are interrupted by the urgent arrival of another crew member, his face flushed with panic. He blurts out news of an impending threat, telling nato that the man he had kicked out a few hours earlier is back and is here to fight. With a surge of anger, Yato bolts from the quarters, the rest of the crew hot on his heels. Emerging onto the deck, they are met with a sight that sends a shiver down their spines: a monstrous warship looms on the horizon, its towering silhouette casting a shadow over their own ship and the floating diner. At its helm, “Mechanized” Armande is introduced, a cyborg pirate with a 16,000,000 beli bounty. He wears a huge suit of red mecha-armor and tells them to hand over all their valuables, and not doing so will result in their immediate eradication.

Former Caleb Pirates Captain

Restaumer Owner

Caleb

Chapter Text

As the crew stares down the massive warship, Shocker can't help but grumble about how Armande just had to ruin his lunch. Adam chimes in with a hopeful notion that a ship that huge must have some kind of doctor onboard, or at least a cabin where their medicine is, giving them a fighting chance of saving Caleb. Yato wastes no time, immediately devising a plan of action. He assigns Angel and Taco to sneak around and find the doctor's cabin, while he, Shocker, and Adam will take on Armande and his crew head-on.

As the duo slip into the belly of the enemy ship, Adam asks Yato if he’s sure he wants to do this, since there’s a risk that Restaumer or the people on it may be endangered. Yato, however, brushes off the doubt, reminding Adam that he’s defending his home and that's all the motivation he needs, and that besides, that would only happen if they lose. Shocker asks if he’s strong, and with a smirk, Yato tells him to judge for himself. He unveils his unique fighting style, the Kickbox Style, a manner of fighting solely using a variety of kicks that send foes flying. He kicks grunts back powerfully into the sea. He then somersaults over some grunts and kicks them away, before turning and using a roundhouse kick on some more. Shocker states his method of fighting is cool, and Yato tells him he learned it from Caleb. Adam easily cuts more pirates down, telling Shocker to leave the small fries to him. Shocker, thanking him, rushes towards Armande and stretches his hands back, warning Armande that this might hurt. He then slams into Armande solidly with Gomu Gomu no Bazooka, denting the large man’s iron body as he coughs some blood. 

Back on the enemy ship, Angel and Taco find themselves in a maze of corridors, dodging pirates left and right as they search for the elusive doctor's cabin. When they are sighted, they use Namari Shot and Rankyaku respectively to take them out from long range. Despite the danger, they can't help but marvel at the bizarre amenities they come across, from saunas to disco rooms to indoor gyms. But as they stumble upon Armande's private quarters, complete with a shockingly narcissistic portrait of him posing naked, their amusement turns to horror. As they fail to find what they are looking for, Angel complains that they’ll be there forever, and they can’t afford to get caught. This prompts Taco’s mind, with the boy stating he may have a plan after all.

Armande Pirates Captain

"Mechanized" Armande

Bounty: 16,000,000

Chapter Text

Armande gasps for air, but then smirks, asking Shocker if that’s all he’s got. He leans forward with a powerful punch, augmented by his fist made of steel. As Armande's attack connects with Shocker, sending him staggering back, the air fills with the deafening roar of gunfire as weapons sprout from Armande's armored body. Bullets surge toward Yato and Adam, but Shocker leaps into action, using his rubbery body as a shield to deflect the deadly projectiles. The bullets ricochet off him, striking Armande's crew and turning the tide of battle in their favor as many go them groan in pain. Yato turns to Adam with a mix of awe and confusion, asking how Shocker can take such an attack. Adam reveals it's all thanks to Shocker's mysterious fruit power.

Unfazed by Armande's onslaught, Yato, Shocker, and Adam press forward, determined to confront their foe head-on. Armande, seeing them plough through his crew, decides that he has had enough. He unveils his latest weapon—a deadly smoke bomb, Shinkei Bakugeki, designed to paralyze anyone who breathes it in as the gas shuts down their nervous system. With grim resolve, Armande hurls the bomb towards them, showing no concern for his own crew. As the bob explodes and the gas fills the deck, Shocker, Adam and Yato drop, paralyzed. However, to Shocker’s horror, Armande’s men do to, complaining to their captain that they can’t move. Shocker's anger reaches new heights as he states that Armande isn’t a real captain, as a captain knows the value of and cares for his crewmates. Though taking a tremendous effort, Shocker manages to move, dragging himself towards Armande, who states it should be impossible. As Shocker defies the paralysis, he shouts at Yato, stating that if he could move, Yato should too, since he’s protecting his own crew and saving his captain.

Meanwhile, deep within the enemy ship, Angel and Taco coerce a hesitant crew member into leading them to the ship's doctor. The man initially refuses, but he is quickly beaten up by Angel, who says she’ll make sure he never walks again if he doesn’t help, scaring him while Taco watches, embarrassed. As the man tells them to follow him, Taco makes a note to never get on Angel’s bad side, as Angel merely smiles, proud of herself. Arriving in the doctor’s cabin, they confront the timid physician, demanding a cure for Caleb's illness. Angel relays Caleb's symptoms, while Taco frets about their friends' well-being above deck. Angel simply tells him to stop worrying, since they have some of the strongest friends there are, and as long as Shocker’s there, they won’t lose.

Above deck, Shocker's impassioned plea strikes a chord with Yato. He wonders to aloud why Shocker is bothering so much, as he notes the Green Devil captain is a complete stranger, and yet he has such a strong drive to save Restaumer. Shocker merely says Yato and the Restaumer folks were nice to him, and besides, he still needs to get revenge on Armande for ruining lunch. As Adam embarrassedly says he could have left out the last part, Yato smirks, before beginning to move as well, stating that he can’t be showed up by him. As he struggles to rise, Yato’s memory is stirred as he thinks back to when Caleb saved him, and his flashback is revealed.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Yato lived as the son of King Clement and Queen Bonnie, despot rulers of the Parfait Kingdom in the East Blue. Growing up as a prince, his family tried to impart their disturbing practices on him, like using slaves and shooting whoever they wanted simply for getting in their way, but he had always hated the way his family treated people. His passion lied in cooking, but his parents forbade him from preparing food because it is “beneath him” as a prince, and they had people who did that for them. However, he had continued the practice in secret. He had continued to endure his family, until one day he could it take no more. 7 years ago, at around age 11, a ship happened to be passing by the island, and he decided to escape and stow away on it.

Through eavesdropping, he found it was a traveling circus troupe, the Beetle Juice Circus. He was quickly discovered, and brought to the ringleader, who at first wanted to throw him out. Yato pleaded with him, asking him for any job they could provide him, but the ringleader wouldn't budge, stating that times were tough and they could not take on a kid. However, Yato quickly stated that he could be of help in the kitchen, as he thinks he knows some dishes and could help prepare things. The ringleader simply sighed, stating that they needed some help in the kitchen anyway, and agreed to let Yato stay there. After a few months on board, his food was so good that he became the head chef despite being decades younger than everyone else. Many who frequented the circus even stated that they didn't go to the circus for the circus itself, but rather to try Yato's cooking.

However, he would not last that long there, as a few months later the circus ship would be attacked by the Caleb Pirates under their captain, Caleb. They stole the passengers' money and valuables, slashing down any guards who tried to get in their way. As. the ringleader attempted to call the marines, Caleb broke his hand with a. swift kick. As the man yells in pain, Caleb states he had heard there was a crazy good cook somewhere on board, and he wanted to try out the food for himself, for free of course. The pirate whistled as he searched for the kitchen, finally finding it towards the back of the vessel. Entering, he viciously kicked all the chefs in his path that rushed him. He then spotted some grilled ribs, still on the barbecue. As he tasted them, he cried tears of joy, having never tasted anything like it. They were so good, Caleb said he would cease the entire attack and leave then and there if the person who made that food became his crew’s cook. As Yato showed himself, the other members of the Caleb Pirates started laughing, stating a child could never do that and it is all a big joke, but Caleb told them to shut up, as he could see through the look in Yato’s eyes he wasn’t joking. Yato agreed to join because he didn’t want anything bad to happen to the others, but he soon found out that Caleb and his crew weren’t generically evil, like some other pirates. During the next 7 years with them, Yato taught them all his cooking secrets, and in exchange Caleb taught him his special style of attack, the Kickbox Style, which he learnt during his stay on the Kamabakka Kingdom a while ago. And a few years after teaching the Caleb Pirates how to prepare exquisite dishes, Caleb decided to retire from piracy and open up a diner with Yato as the head chef and manager.

As Armande screams at his his men to get up, Yato rises shakily, stating that he owes the old man a debt that can't be repaid, so the least he can do is deal with losers like Armande who would dare terrorize his home. Armande pops an axe out of the back of his suit, preparing to decapitate Shocker as he state that if he wants something done, he'll have to do it himself. However, at that moment, Adam parries it and cuts the handle, sending the blade part flying as he tells Armande to not forget about him. Shocker inflates himself with Gomu Gomu no Fusen, and Yato bounces off of Shocker's stomach at high velocity and finishes Armande with First Kick, a powerful flying kick attack straight at the stomach, called that because it is the very first technique Caleb had taught him. The kick is so powerful it crumbles and breaks through the red armor, knocking the wind out of Armande and causing him to crash through his own mast.

Chapter Text

Back on Restaumer, in Caleb's quarters. Angel gives the medicine to Caleb, who takes it shakily and thanks her. As Yato bows to them, thanking them deeply for all their help, Shocker says no problem, while Taco states that their journey in getting the medicine was super dangerous and he should indeed be thanking him, though Adam tells him to knock it off. As they wait a few hours for the remedy to take effect, Taco and Shocker goof off, and Yato asks Adam if they're always like this. The swordsman simply sighs and confirms, though states he wouldn't want it any other way. Shocker stops running around and strikes up a conversation with Yato, telling the man he’s really strong and he’ll be able to protect his diner for a long time to come. Yato thanks him for believing in him, and for helping them fight. Soon enough, they hear a creak from the main quarters, and Caleb is revealed to be alive and well, though he will be paralyzed from the waist down for the rest of his life because of the potency of the medicine, and as such emerges in a wheelchair pushed around by a chef. Yato asks if he’s alright, but his captain merely whacks him on the head and laughs, telling him that he’s as full of life as ever. 

Armande’s crew had taken their fallen leader and retreated, their large ship far from the Restaumer by now. Many wonder what to do, as Armande treated them horribly, but they also knew they were not strong enough to survive on their own. However, at that moment, a loud siren is heard, and Armande's crew is flanked by two marine battleships to either side. As they all raise their hands up, a marine captain hops on board, seeing Armande in a daze. As he enquires about who took Armande out, his scared crew members stated it was a terrifying man named Shocker, a man in a straw hat who leads a crew called the Green Devils. The captain merely scratches his head, thinking to himself...

When talking privately to Yato on the railing overlooking the ocean, Caleb tells the young manager that he won’t be able to complete his dream of becoming a world renowned chef because of both his paralysis and his want to stay in the East. Yato states that he's just being lazy, since they both know something as small as paralysis isn't going to hinder him. However, Caleb becomes serious, asking Yato to take up the dream for him, asking him to become the best chef in the world in his stead. telling him Yato would need to travel the globe for that dream to happen. Yato sighs and tells the older man that if he was going to fire him, he could have just told him that. He then smiles and tells Caleb he’ll see his dream out till the end, and Caleb tells him he’s sure he’ll succeed. 

As the Green Devils receive a heap of provisions as thanks for fighting off Armande, Yato goes to Shocker and tells him he is willing to be their chef if he still needs one. Shocker smiles and jumps on him, welcoming him to the crew, while the others smile. As the crew get on the Stormy White, they toast to Yato’s joining, and their ship drifts off to the next island.

Chapter Text

Loguetown Arc

The five friends venture on until they reach Loguetown, a huge sprawling city with multiple attractions. As Shocker asks what Loguetown is, Yato says that as a pirate he ought to know it, as it was the birthplace and death place of the First Pirate King, Gol D. Roger. Adam tells them that he heard this is the closest place to Reverse Mountain, the entrance to the Grand Line that they would need to go into if they wish to continue their journey. Taco asks Shocker how he doesn’t know all this, since it’s his dream first and foremost to be a pirate, but Shocker tells him he was kind of sheltered as a kid so he didn’t know much about the world. As they arrive on the island’s dock, Angel divides up some of the money they have between them and tells them the money is for sightseeing and shopping. Angel then gives them all 3 hours to be back at the ship so that they could set sail and enter the Grand Line. With that, they all race off to different parts of the city.

Chapter Text

Yato doesn’t have the chance to go far, because the marketplace where they sell fresh food is near the port. He buys some food supplies, then hears that they are having a cooking tournament with a giant Rainbow Carp as the prize. Yato imagines all the amazing meals he can make using it, and vows he’ll win it for the crew. He enters the competition and makes high-class meals, blowing the judges away and advancing quickly to the finals. However, he sees a large man named Tub, who sets himself up as Yato’s main adversary. Tub makes bets with the other chefs, telling them that if they lose, they have to give all their chef equipment to him and quit being a chef. Yato, mad, decides to do something about it. He walks up to Tub innocently, and Tub gruffly asks what he wants. Yato becomes serious and makes a new bet with Tub, saying that if he loses, he has to give everyone’s stuff back. As the main judge announces that Yato and Tub are in the finals, he says they must prepare a full course meal. As they begin, Yato vastly outclasses Tub, making an incredible appetizer, entree, meal, and dessert that is so good it makes some of the judges cry. Tub, embarrassed, promises Yato he’ll pay, and moves to punch him. Yato sighs and easily takes Tub out with Bicycle Kick, a simple backwards kick to his forehead, telling him no one should have to give up on chef hood. The others then cheer as Yato wins the carp, and thank him for helping them.

Chapter Text

Taco is walking along a street, peering into some shop windows, when he sees a teenage girl on the other side of the road. A street thug bursts from an alleyway and steals her bag, pushing her down. Taco, trying to be helpful, quickly takes out his slingshot and hits the thug with Namari Shot in the back, hurting him and causing him to spin around, then finishing him with another, right to his forehead. The girl thanks him and asks who he is, to which he responds he is a hero. She invites him to her house and introduces herself as Carol. Her father, a man named Daddy Masterson, greets him and invites him to eat lunch with them. Taco happily agrees, smelling a good stew being brewed. As they eat, however, Taco sees a movement out the corner of his eye. Taco gets out his sling and shoots a piece of lead right at Masterson’s own bullet, milliseconds away from hitting his face. Taco asks what the hell is wrong with him, but Masterson merely responds that he is testing a potential legendary sniper. When Taco asks what he means, Masterson says he has intuition for individuals with amazing sniping talent and he thinks Taco may very well be the first promising one in a long time. With that, Masterson gives him a new slingshot made of obsteel, a new type of steel that surfaced around 6 years ago. Taco asks about it, and the ex-marine tells him obsteel is highly reactive to fire and can cause quite the devastating explosion, but in exchange it is one of the most durable substances in the world, third only to seastone and diamond. Taco thanks the man, and promises he’ll live up to his expectations.

Chapter Text

Angel is browsing for new clothes. As she complains about not finding anything she likes, an old lady offers to give her a new haircut, which she agrees to. After spending 30 minutes going back and forth between wanting to cut her hair and not, they decide to just keep it in two long ponytails. Angel thanks her, then walks to a nearby store where they are selling adventuring gear. The old lady appears again, scaring her, and says it looks like she is looking for something. Angel irritatedly asks her why she keeps following her, but the old lady merely replies she owns all the stores on this particular street. After Angel sighs and tells her she is looking for a map, as she and her friends are trying to get to the Grand Line and she wants to navigate it, the old lady tells her they won’t get far in the Grand Line using a map or a compass. When Angel asks why, the old lady hands her a Log Pose. The old lady says that Log Poses are used in the Grand Line, as they are devices that record the magnetic fields of islands and point to the next one. As Angel seems a bit confused, the old lady continues, stating that the magnetic fields cause regular compasses to go haywire, and that the Log Pose is the best and safest way of traversing the Grand Line. She states that different islands have varying degrees of set times (how long it takes for the Log Pose to pick up the next island’s signal), so they should be prepared to stay at different islands for a while. Angel wonders how the old lady knows so much about the Grand Line, and the lady even tells Angel what they needed to do in order to actually get through Reverse Mountain and into the Grand Line.

Chapter Text

Adam walks into an arms shop, looking around at some of the katanas on the racks. Inside, the owner of the shop, Ipponmaru, is cleaning. Adam asks him if he can recommend any good swords, and he shows Adam his stock. However, none of the regular katanas interested him; Adam wants a seemingly isolated special blade that is on a raised pedestal. Ipponmaru says he’s not sure that is a good idea, seeing as that blade is cursed, but Adam retorts he doesn’t care and he’ll take on whatever curse it has. Ipponmaru wants to give it to Adam after witnessing his conviction, but he tells the swordsman he is under orders from his father to not give it away. Adam tells him the only fair way is to have fate decide. Ipponmaru tells him the sword, the Nidai Kitetsu, is a cursed blade, the one they call “the blade with a life of its own”. Adam asks how he acquired it, and Ipponmaru tells him a famous swordsman had brought it to his father years ago. True to its name, as Adam tries to grab it, the sword hovers for a bit, then has a skirmish with Adam in the shop. It is quite strong, causing Adam to have to twist and turn, crashing into some displays. However, Adam allows it to cut him on the arm in order to grasp it. The sword obeys him and goes still. Adam wonders about the sword, and Ipponmaru excitedly states that it must have sensed how serious Adam was by the way he allowed it to cut him. The Nidai is gifted to Adam, with Ipponmaru telling him to never give it up no matter what.

Chapter Text

Shocker is running through the town, looking at all sorts of interesting sights. He then gets bored of being on the street, and seeks a change of perspective, so he uses Gomu Gomu no Rocket to launch himself atop the buildings. As he hangs onto a pole and wonders where to go next, he spots the scaffolding where THE Gold Roger, was killed. He remembers the Straw Hats telling him stories about how Roger is the man who started the Great Pirate Era. As he swings and lands on the top, the young man admires the view, wondering what kind of life the First Pirate King led.

However, his moment of reflection is suddenly interrupted by two marine guards at the bottom of the scaffolding, who order him to come down. Shocker, not ready to leave just yet, asks them to wait for a minute. Realizing that this place is significant, he sees it as the perfect opportunity to declare his dream. Shocker takes a deep breath, filling his lungs with determination, and shouts at the top of his voice that he will become the next Pirate King.

The marines below become terrified, stating that they had to arrest the kid for saying something like that. As other marines get called in, some note that the boy looks familiar. The marines at the scaffolding hold up a piece of paper, then state in shock that he is THAT pirate. They shout at him over a megaphone, telling “Green Hat Shocker” to come down. Shocker wonders why they’re calling him green hat, and shouts that his name is Malvolio D. Shocker and to remember him. As they begin to shoot at him, he realizes they aren’t joking around, and effortlessly leaps over them and lands on one of their heads, knocking out the other marine and taking the paper from him. Filled with joy and excitement after seeing the paper, he runs away, escaping from the marines immediately around him, though more begin to give chase.

Chapter Text

As he runs through the streets, each of his crewmates see him from their respective locations and realize what’s happening. As they fall in line, each member berates Shocker for causing so much havoc on what was meant to be a nice peaceful day before their journey. Shocker apologizes, but says he has news to share. Adam tells him to wait until they’re back on the ship. Taco screams that the marines are right behind them, and Adam and Yato slash and kick at some stalls to cause them to stumble, with the latter apologizing to the vendors.

As the crew arrive back on the ship, Shocker pushes it quickly out to sea using a well-placed Gomu Gomu no Bazooka. As he stretches onto the ship and laughs, Angel beats him up angrily, telling him she was having fun before he ruined her day. Taco says that it better be important. Shocker apologizes again, but raises the paper he had stolen. It was his very own first wanted poster, with “Green Hat” Malvolio D. Shocker having accrued a bounty of 33,000,000 beli for defeating Dane “the Great” and “Mechanized” Armande.

Everyone is shocked, and everyone is happy for him except Angel, who realizes that it means now they are sure to die because marines would be chasing them. Taco tells him having a bounty is the first step to being a great pirate, and Adam explains that if they knew about Urouge as well as Dane and Armande, it would probably be way higher. Shocker wonders where "Green Hat" comes from, and Adam tells him that an epithet usually comes from aspects of the captain or the crew. He figures that they took the "green" from their crew name and combined it with the fact he's wearing Luffy's straw hat, though they can't call him "straw hat" to avoid confusion. Yato tells them enough chit chat, and as Angel sets them a course into Reverse Mountain, they decide to put their hands in the center and affirm their dreams. To become a world renowned chef, to become the next pirate king, to become the world’s best swordsman, to find her mother, and to become a hero, the five friends sail on to Reverse Mountain, and get ready to brave the Grand Line, the world’s most dangerous seas.

Chapter Text

Karakuri Island Arc

As the friends sail toward Reverse Mountain, Angel tries to explain to the boys how getting into the Grand Line works. She had heard from the old lady in Loguetown that Reverse Mountain is one of the only two ways of entering the Grand Line. Rivers from the four blues run to the top of the mountain, then flow together down the slope to the Grand Line’s official entrance. She then tells them about the Log Pose, explaining the concept to them. However, all four of the boys just look at her confused, stating that they had no idea what she is talking about, irritating her as she tells them to pay attention. Shocker laughs and says it’s fine, since he trusts her, and that as his navigator he’ll leave those decisions up to her.

As the crew arrive at Reverse Mountain and begin to ascend it, the ship rocks and creaks under pressure, facing strong currents and turbulent waters. Suddenly, it careens to the left, and Shocker stretches and pushes off the left wall to avoid their ship being smashed by the rocks. As they brace themselves, Angel says Reverse Mountain has the potential to destroy their ship. Taco exclaims he is going to die, and Adam grabs Shocker as the latter flies off the mast. As they get to the top and then descend, the rivers constantly toss the Stormy, causing them to almost fall off multiple times. After 30 minutes, the group emerges from the mountain, rattled but luckily unscathed. As they begin to pick themselves up, they see a lighthouse at the base of the mountain. 

As the crew wonder why a random lighthouse is located here, an old man hobbles out of the house and stares at them for a long time, before irritatedly asking them what they want. Shocker asks the old man for his name, and he introduces himself as Crocus, the lighthouse guardian. He tells the crew that there used to be a giant whale named Laboon who he lived with, but ever since he reunited with “Soul King” Brook, he went to live with the Straw Hats. Shocker perks up at hearing the names of his mentors, and tells Crocus he saw the Straw Hats not too long ago. Crocus, remembering that the Straw Hats had passed by him on their way back, thinks to himself that this is the boy Luffy entrusted his hat to. 

Crocus stares at them for a long time again, unnerving Angel. He then asks the Shocker what his goal is. The boy responds that he’s going to surpass Luffy and become the 3rd Pirate King. Crocus promptly laughs, telling him that it is as good a dream as any to have, and then pulls out a piece of paper, telling the boy that this is what he must surpass. As Shocker takes the paper, he is shocked to see that it is Luffy’s latest wanted poster, placing the Second Pirate King at a whopping 5,600,000,000 beli mark. The rest of the crew is dumbfounded, comparing it to Shocker’s measly 33,000,000. Shocker remains quiet for a bit, but then smirks. He tells Crocus that now he knows where his goal is, and he will surpass that number in no time. 

Crocus smiles as well, and states that confidence is a great attribute to have. He then asks if his crew has a doctor. Taco responds no, and Crocus tells them to make sure to find one, as in the Grand Line, they would most definitely be needing one. Just then, Angel’s log pose picks up some island’s magnetic field and points to a direction. As the Green Devils prepare to leave, Shocker thanks Crocus for the advice, and Crocus hallucinates slightly, seeing both Roger and Luffy in Shocker. With that, the Green Devils follow the Log Pose to their very first island in the Grand Line.

Lighthouse Guardian

Crocus

Chapter Text

On Karakuri Island, a bipedal blue cat walks into a lab holding bags of groceries. The owner of the lab, a man named Helzen, tells him to shut the door. Helzen has slicked back black hair and a black mustache that is commonly mistaken for nose hair. He wears an immaculate white lab coat. The cat, introduced as Zane, places the groceries on the table, then asks the scientist if he knows what day it is. After Helzen repeatedly forgets, Zane says excitedly it is his birthday, and that he was thinking they could celebrate together. The man tells him not now, as he has important work to do, and that maybe tomorrow they can do something. Zane looks down and says ok, and leaves in a dejected state toward the town. 

Meanwhile, the Green Devils finally land on Karakuri Island after hours and hours bored at sea. Shocker is excited, and then immediately feels really cold, as Yato explains to them the different weather and season patterns on the Grand Line, stating this one is clearly a winter island. As they enter the town, they learn from the villagers that this is Vegapunk’s hometown, intriguing Shocker as the scientist’s name is brought up. They go into the town, eat some snow cones, and buy jackets and scarves. As they exit the clothes shop, they see Zane walking on the street. Amazed that a cat has learned to walk upright, Shocker rushes over to him and says hi. Taco tells Shocker to stop being an idiot, as a cat wouldn’t respond, but they are all shocked when Zane responds back. Shocker introduces himself, telling the cat he is a pirate, and Zane simply responds that he must be so free. 

Zane then asks them if they want to see something amazing, and the crew follow him to the town square, where a massive tree stands, its branches filled with festive lights. As they marvel at the beautiful sight, Zane then sprouts wings and begins to fly around the tree, shocking the others. As he descends, he tells them he ate the Tori Tori no Mi, Model: Swan (Bird Bird Fruit, Model: Swan) when he was younger.

He lands, but then begins to tear up as the Green Devils wonder what’s wrong. Shocker asks if he’s ok, and Zane, sniffing, tells them he’s glad he can share his birthday with others, even if they are strangers. When Adam asks if he didn’t have any other friends, Zane explains that his best friend and mentor is a scientist, but he ignored his birthday in favor of scientific advancements. Angel says that that is horrible, but Zane says he’s used to it, as it’s been that way for years. Yato asks how he can consider him his friend. Zane responds that Helzen took him in when he was a kid, and didn’t know any better. As he tells the crew his story, his backstory is revealed.

Zane was born 15 years ago (in human years), a cat on Karakuri Island, the same birthplace as the ingenious Dr. Vegapunk. He stayed in the Future Country Baldimore, living in the streets with others of his kind. However, one day when he was still a kitten, he was taken to an advanced research lab by Dr. Nikolas Helzen, one of Dr. Vegapunk’s ex-lab assistants. Helzen, having been a part of MADS when it was active, specifically studied animal evolution, and wished to see whether he could artificially make animals evolve into different states, performing dangerous and painful experiments on multitudes of animal species. As he walked through the lab, holding Zane by the scruff of his neck, the scientist claimed that he had developed a path of evolution where animals talk in human language, and ran a series of tests with Zane as the subject. However, the experiments were brutal, subjecting Zane to extensive pain for a whole year, until the scientist accomplished his goal and Zane was able to speak. When he realized that the experiment was through, Helzen threw the cat out. But Zane kept returning to the lab, showing up day after day to Helzen’s confusion and frustration. 

The man learned soon enough that a side effect of all those combined experiments was that Zane’s brain was altered to think and act like a human as well as talk like one. Due to his relatively young age, the cat thought of Helzen as his father figure. So Helzen decided to keep him and raise him to be his lab assistant. However, Zane was frequently forgotten by Helzen as he got caught up in work. But of course, as Zane has no basis for reference, the cat merely believed this is what happened to all human children. And so he continued to live with Helzen, aiding him with his experiments where possible.

Talking Cat

Zane

Former MADS Scientist

Evolutionary Biology Expert

Dr. Nikolas Helzen

Chapter Text

Shocker, after hearing the story, is completely angered, and asks Zane to show him the way to Helzen’s lab. Zane asks why, and Shocker says he’s going to punch him for being so cruel. Zane hurriedly says not to, and that he is fine, but Shocker says he can tell from his eyes that he’s lying and hurt. Shocker then asks Zane what he wants, and Zane says he really wants to leave that place so he could explore the world. Shocker tells him to join them then. Zane asks if he really could, and he sees the rest of them smiling at him, telling him they’ll support his decision. Zane ecstatically says he wants to, but still needs to go confront Helzen. Shocker tells him to lead the way, as he’ll follow him to make sure everything’s alright. 

Helzen, hearing a loud banging on his door, is surprised when Shocker punches through it easily and walks in. Zane, walking behind him, tells Helzen he has decided to leave and travel with Shocker. Helzen angrily tells Zane that he is overreacting because of his birthday, and that he promised they’ll do something another time. Zane then breaks down, stating it isn’t just that, but constantly devaluing him. Helzen shouts that he needs his lab assistant, and Shocker asks Helzen how he can be so ignorant. Helzen then recognizes Shocker from his bounty database, and tells him that becoming a pirate is a crime and promptly attempts to shoot Shocker. The bullet merely ricochets off of his body, shocking Zane. Shocker stretches his arm and takes the pistol from Helzen’s hand, as Zane turns into his hulking Muscle Boost form. Helzen wonders if he’s sure this is the best idea, and Zane says he’s thought about it all, punching him in the gut. Zane says that is for all the pain he’s been through, then thanks the man for raising him. Zane then leaves the lab with his doctoring tools in his green knapsack. 

As Shocker turns to go, Helzen pleads with Shocker to take care of Zane, as he knows Zane would never voluntarily leave and expand his horizons if he didn’t push him. Shocker asks the man why he’s been so mean to him all this time, and Helzen states that he wasn’t trying to be, but noticed he gets caught up in work too often. Helzen believes that a change in location and exploration in general will be good for Zane, and was finding the best way to tell him that before they showed up. Shocker turns back to him and smiles, telling him it would be his pleasure and he isn’t such a bad guy after all. 

On the Stormy, Shocker presents Zane to the crew. Zane tells them he’s decent at being a scientist, but he thinks he can best use his abilities to be the crew’s doctor. Yato tells them that the recruitment of a new friend warrants a toast. They all drink together, and have a party on the ship celebrating Zane’s birthday. For the first time, Zane doesn’t feel neglected or alone, but happy to be part of a family. With a new companion on board, the Stormy White leaves Karakuri behind, and the crew sails off to their next adventure.

Chapter Text

Cressaluna Island Arc

As the crew continue on their journey, Yato and Shocker begin to eye Zane, the former with intrigue and the latter with hunger. Zane makes sure to tell the two he is not emergency food, and that no one would be eating him ever. Yato tells the cat not to worry, as they are just joking, but Shocker says not him, leaving Zane to comically panic about Shocker being his captain. Shocker, remembering his role, orders Adam to slice Zane up, and the swordsman, not paying attention, says sure, leaving Zane to wonder about what kind of crew he joined. Meanwhile, as Taco fishes over the railing, Angel remembers to subscribe them to a new delivery service, the Bounty Coo, which will fly them their new bounties whenever they get updates. She sees it fitting as Shocker has received his first bounty now. 

As they sail on, they see a man holding onto pieces of a raft. Zane, being a doctor first and foremost, pleads with Shocker to make sure he’s alright. Shocker grabs onto the man and brings him on board. The man has brown skin, a rugged black beard, and wears a red turban and tattered clothes. As Zane checks him, he tells them the man’s lungs are partially blocked by seawater, and that he can choke if they don’t do something about it. Shocker says no problem, and punches the man in the gut, causing the water to spout from his mouth. As the man groggily wakes up, they ask him for his name. He introduces himself as Bobo, a ship ferryman. He tells the crew he was trying to ferry people to a certain island, when suddenly a large tide came out of nowhere and destroyed his raft. He doesn’t know what happened to the others. Angel finds this weird, but Adam guesses it's regular on the Grand Line.

As Adam asks where the man was trying to get to, he points his finger ahead of them and says there. As they all turn in the direction he indicates, suddenly, a gloomy-looking forested island came into view rather quickly. Taco, beginning to be creeped out, asks Bobo why anyone would want to go there. He waits for a response, but gets none. When they turn around to address Bobo, the man is gone, scaring Angel, Taco, and Zane. Adam wonders what happened, and Yato ponders if he was a ghost. Shocker says it is definitely weird, but that they are already at the island so they may as well explore it.

Ferryman

Bobo

Chapter Text

The crew dock on the island’s beach, a nice, warm area with a path leading to the gloomy woods’ entrance. They decide to create a plan. Yato says he and Taco will stay and guard the Stormy, while the others go off and explore the island. He gives them a Den Den Mushi, of which he had some thanks to taking them from Restaumer, and tells them to call in case they need them as backup. He then tells them it is late afternoon, and they should come back to the ship by at least midnight. Shocker, already forgetting his words, runs off into the deep jungle, with the others not far behind. 

The jungle is a weird place, to say the least. Not only is it gloomy and hard to navigate, but what almost sounds like voices whispers at the crew. The four friends get lost often, having no way of knowing where they are going. Zane then has the idea of using his Wing Boost to fly up to the top of the forest and see what he can. The cat flies upward and spots a village in a clearing nearby, so the group heads in that direction. On their way, they are stopped by a giant rat monster wearing a purple tutu and bow on its head. It tries to eat them, and as Angel screams, terrified, Zane says he’ll take care of it, getting ready to fight. However, Shocker hits it with Gomu Gomu no Pistol, knocking it out easily.

As Adam says that was almost too easy, Shocker smiles and Zane states dejectedly he was so ready to prove his worth to the crew in combat. Angel asks how Zane has so many transformations anyway, and the cat explains that as a result of the evolutionary experiments Dr. Helzen performed on him, he can access possible future evolutionary pathways for cats. Shocker says that that's way too complicated for him to understand, and Adam says that that's freaky, angering Zane as the cat says not to ask him then.

Chapter Text

As the friends emerge from the thicket and enter the village, they are greeted by no one. As they walk around, they see a blind in one window quickly shutter. A voice from inside the house tells them to go inside. As they oblige, they meet the village chief, Moka, and a few of the village elders. Moka is an old, bald man, with tan skin, a long white beard, and ears that droop downward. The chief tells them they are currently on Cressaluna Island, an island shaped like a crescent moon. Regularly, their people do not interact with the rest of the world, and they are left alone as well. Unfortunately, he tells them tragedy befell them in the form of a cult group a week prior. The group had said they didn’t want anything from the village, and had even left the village peacefully as a show of good faith. But the next thing the villagers knew, their shadows were gone for some reason. And now they are forced to live inside during the day, because, as they unfortunately found out the other day, if they stepped out into the sun, they would burn up and cease to exist. 

Angel wonders how something like that is possible, and Adam wonders if it has to do with someone’s ability. After hearing all this, Shocker makes a decision based on Zane’s asking, stating that they’ll see if this other group has something to do with it, but only in exchange for two months worth of meat. Adam told Shocker they wouldn’t agree to terms like that so easily, but Moka just says alright, shocking Adam. Moka tells them his two sons, Bobo and Zalt, had gone looking for them the day before but haven’t returned. Zane perks up at Bobo’s name, telling the old man they met Bobo at sea, but haven’t seen him since. Angel asks the elders where to start looking, and Moka tells them the old Lunala Temple, an ancient site near the village, may be the best place to go. The crew thank him and leave in the direction he shows them.

Village Chief

Moka

Chapter Text

After eventually arriving, they see a massive stone monument with bricks eroded and moss growing everywhere. Shocker is eager to rush inside, and enters quickly, the others not too far behind. However, as they are running down the corridors, they hear two voices coming and duck behind a wall. A shirtless man with dog features wearing jeans and a blue-haired youth wearing green priest clothes come into view. As the blue-haired man tells the dog-man to hurry up, the latter responds he could have sworn he heard something. His partner tells him to shut up and hurry, as their leader needs them to do their job, and the dog-man shrugs, following his friend out the entrance. Angel tells them to follow, but be quiet, and the party of four stealthily reaches the temple’s peak, an open space under the night sky.

Peering from behind some rocks, they see the leader of the crew in a mask, surrounded by some grunt members. The man talks, asking a pink-haired woman with pigtails and a short black dress where Tolu and Yuzuki went. The girl tugs on her fishnet stockings and blushes, telling the man the other two had already started heading for the village as planned. The man seems familiar to Adam for some reason, but he can’t place his finger on who. Shocker, unable to wait patiently any longer, bursts out from the rock they are hiding behind and tells the group their culting days are over, much to his friends’ shock. The masked man laughs, stating they aren’t a cult, but a pirate crew. He takes off his mask, revealing his face, and Adam recognizes him at once. He is a young man whose black hair is tied in a spiky ponytail, wearing a green jacket, a beige cloak, and an earring on his right ear. A giant broadsword is strapped to his back. He is introduced as Mulin “of the Shadows”, captain of the Phantom Crook Pirates.

Phantom Crook Pirates Captain

Swordsman

Mulin "of the Shadows"

Chapter Text

Adam asks what he’s doing here, and Shocker asks his friend how he knows this guy. Adam tells him they’ve met multiple times in the past few years, back when he was challenging swordsmen in the East Blue, and that no matter how many battles they had, they could never determine a clear victor. Mulin tells Adam it’s been quite a while, and he never expected him to go into the Grand Line. Adam angrily asks what he’s doing on Cressaluna, and what his goal is, though Mulin simply states that it’s none of his concern. Angel asks if he has something to do with the villagers’ shadows disappearing, and Mulin once again responds that he doesn't have to answer them. He then calls over to the pink-haired woman, who is introduced as Brenda Cherry, and tells her to go kill the villagers, claiming they’re useless and aren’t enough for his plans. As Cherry obliges, she whistles, and the giant rat monster from before jumps up onto the temple. She is introduced as Angelina, Cherry’s pet and a member of the crew as well. Cherry jumps on her back, and Angelina uses her giant tail as a propeller, the duo flying off into the distance. 

Shocker realizes they want to kill the villagers, and shouts that they are going to give him food and he can’t let them die. Angel and Zane tell Shocker to stay, as they can follow Cherry and stop her. As Zane goes into his Wing Boost and carries Angel, Shocker thanks them, telling them to leave the rest to him and Adam. As Shocker moves, Mulin swings his massive blade, while Adam tells Shocker to look out as Mulin is a skilled swordsman. The grunts split up, some of them heading towards Adam, and others trying to get in Shocker’s way. The Green Devil captain uses Gomu Gomu no Gatling and takes them out easily. Shocker then tries to punch Mulin, but Mulin states Shocker isn’t the only one with an ability, and uses Brick Bats to push him back. He is revealed to have eaten a Kage Kage Dupli (Shadow Shadow Dupli), a paramecia allowing him to manipulate shadows. He uses Kagemane to connect his and Shocker's shadows, freezing Shocker in place. As Shocker complains about not being able to move, Mulin takes out his sword and severs Shocker’s shadow using Kage no Reaper, forcefully taking his shadow and leaving Shocker to fall off the temple in a state of unconsciousness. 

As the grunts advance toward Adam, he uses Rokyaku Yonju Pound Ho , blasting them back with a compressed air slash. However, after seeing Shocker lose, Adam rushes Mulin and they clash, his three blades pushing back against Mulin’s. Adam swears to Mulin that he’ll defeat him, and swipes at the man. Mulin springs back, placing distance between the two, telling Adam he is at a disadvantage because his sword gives him reach. Adam wonders where he got that sword from, as it was not the same blade he had seen in their past encounters. Mulin tells him that upon entering the Grand Line, he had stolen the blade from the very first island they visited. He tells him that it’s so strong because it is the famed Cleaver, one of the 21 O Wazamono swords. He recognizes Adam’s Kuro Kusanagi, stating that it too seems to be one, but that his is much more powerful. As they clash again, Mulin says he’s been playing into his hands the whole time, and catches Adam with Kagemane. He then stabs Adam painfully in the torso, telling him he lost because he is too weak to face him, before kicking him off the temple. As some of the grunts begin to wake up, Mulin looks down at the jungle where his enemies fell, and briefly has a flashback to his younger self, training with a sword, before stating how much of a pain this was, shaking his head, and walking away.

Move Index

Phantom Crook Pirates

Brenda Cherry

Chapter Text

Adam lands on top of Shocker, who is just recovering from his bout of unconsciousness. Shocker asks Adam if he’s ok, and Adam says he’s fine, with only his pride being hurt. Shocker says not to worry, as they can take care of him for sure, but Adam tells him no, that it is now personal for him and he wants to deal with Mulin. Shocker smiles and says sure, stating he has no intention of taking the battle from his friend. The swordsman tells him to go to the village, as the duo they had seen in the temple’s corridors are heading that way, and Shocker tells him to leave it to him, and that he should just head back to the temple and beat Mulin up. Adam thanks him, and heads for the temple, promising Shocker he’ll get his shadow back. 

As they separate, Shocker runs toward the village, hoping that they haven’t been killed yet and wonders what kind of bad people would hurt those who offer food. As he arrives in the village, he meets up with Zane and Angel. He asks what’s happening, and the cat tells him they had seen Cherry and Angelina fly off toward the beach, supposedly to get something and come back. As they wonder what they could be doing, they spot Angelina flying in from above, holding a huge bucket of something. When one piece of the bucket’s contents rains down near Angel, she sees green slime reduce the spot into nothing. She deduces it must be some sort of corrosive acid. Then with horror, she realizes the Phantom Crooks’ plan is to throw the acid on the village people. 

As the trio think of how best to deal with the problem, Shocker has an idea. With Zane and Angel’s help, they round up all the village people toward the center of the village. Shocker tells them to pack together as tightly as possible, then uses Gomu Gomu no Bane to jump high enough to meet the oncoming acid. He then inflates himself with Gomu Gomu no Fukuranda Fūsen, which causes the acid to bounce off his body and spread to only hit the huts on the outer sides of the village, and not the people at the center. As he falls screaming, Angel says he is quite badly burned, but Zane tells her not to worry, as his emergency med kit is enough to patch up the major damage, all while numbing the pain with a sedative. Cherry, flustered that their plan didn’t work, begins to throw a tantrum on Angelina’s head, causing the rat to look up at her master in confusion.

Move Index

Chapter Text

As the villagers cheer, from a side of the forest, the dog-man and the blue-haired man from earlier emerge into the clearing. The latter berates the former, telling him that next time he should admit when they’re lost so that they don’t waste time. The dog-man apologizes, stating he thought he knew, his partner calling him an idiot. The duo are introduced as Tolu and Yuzuki respectively, members of Mulin’s crew, with Tolu being a dog mink and Yuzuki being the user of the Nami Nami no Mi (Wave Wave Fruit). As Yuzuki continues to insult Tolu, the mink interrupts him, asking if the villagers are meant to still be alive. As Yuzuki looks up in shock, he realizes Cherry and Angelina must have failed. 

As the duo walk towards the villagers, up above, Cherry tells Angelina that they’ll try again, and the duo fly toward the beach. Angel asks where they’re going, and Tolu, being a kind-hearted but slow mink, accidentally tells them that they’re probably going to prepare another bucket of acid, since Angelina can produce it herself through her spit. As Yuzuki angrily tells him to stop blurting their secrets to the enemy, Angel tells Zane they can’t let them try again. Zane agrees, and the duo fly off after them, telling Shocker to deal with the other two. Shocker grins and says no problem, turning to Yuzuki and Tolu.

As the fight begins, Shocker plays the defensive, dodging Tolu’s Eleclaw attacks and Yuzuki’s Wave Shot . He hits Tolu with Gomu Gomu no Muchi in the face, and is aiming a Gomu Gomu no Rifle when his powers stop working. He looks up and sees he is stuck in Yuzuki’s Wave space. Yuzuki explains that the powers of his paramecia allow him to create spherical blue spaces where inside, other people’s devil fruit abilities are disabled. However, Yuzuki makes a large error, believing Shocker to be powerless without his rubber body. Shocker smirks and punches him hard in the face, knocking him out in one hit and telling him he trained his body for years to have the strength necessary to make his fruit work. With Yuzuki defeated, he turns to Tolu, whose claws are still flowing with Electro. The derpy mink tells Shocker he’ll avenge his friend, but as he says that, Shocker notices a small fly buzzing around Tolu’s face. Shocker tells Tolu he has something on his face, which causes Tolu to touch himself with the claws, thus electrocuting and defeating himself. As the mink falls, he coughs and tells Shocker he tricked him, with Shocker retorting that there really was a fly right there. Shocker wonders if the dog-man is an idiot, but then shakes his head and remembers Adam needs back up, and begins running toward the temple.

Move Index

Phantom Crook Pirates

Yuzuki

Devil Fruit: Nami Nami no Mi

Phantom Crook Pirates

Dog Mink

Tolu

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, Zane and Angel hone in on Cherry and Angelina. Cherry notices them and panickedly tells her rat to hurry, but the large rat merely squeaks, unable to go faster. Angel uses Rankyaku to hit Angelina out of the sky, with the duo spiraling and landing on the beach. As Cherry gets up, Angel stands in front of her, telling her she will be her opponent. Meanwhile Angelina towers over Zane, almost laughing. As she squeaks, Zane translates, telling Angelina he’s a pirate in his own right and he’ll show her. 

Zane goes into his Claw Boost , a form placing emphasis on his long claws, and slashes at Angelina. As the rat moves to bite him, he switches to Muscle Boost and holds her mouth open, moving out of the way before punching her back. Angelina spits acid at Zane, but he transforms into Leg Boost this time, and uses his long legs to jump away and dodge. The rat rushes him, trying to hit him with a body slam, but Zane switches back into Muscle Boost and stops Angelina in her tracks, before throwing her up into the air. Angelina spits multiple globs of acid at him, coming down like rain, but he jumps up dodging the acid and changes to Claw Boost once more. The cat tells Angelina that as a member of the Green Devil Pirates, he can’t be weak, and uses Tsumekiri to finish off the giant rat. 

Meanwhile, Angel uses Soru to move away and dodge Cherry’s whip, hitting her once with Shigan . Cherry flails her whip in a wave-like motion, telling the other girl she cares about her crew too much to lose, and that her whip will ensnare Angel for eternity. Angel tells her to shut up with all the weird crap, using her Rankyaku: Arashi to cut up her whip. Cherry reveals she has another one, and recognizes Angel’s legs as where most of her attacks come from. She lashes out, catching hold of her leg with her whip. Angel decides she doesn't have another choice but to use a new attack she had been training: Rankyaku : Tatsumaki. By spinning around on her hands, she siphons her Rankyaku into a tornado, drawing in and slicing Cherry before slamming her back onto the beach, defeated. 

The two friends look at their opponents, seemingly knocked out, and congratulate each other on winning. They then pass out, exhausted from their battles and running around all day, but happy they won. As they sleep, however, both Cherry and Angelina have barely enough strength in them to hold knives to their throats. Cherry crazily puts her mouth to Angel’s ear, whispering that even if they go down, they would take them with them. However, a voice behind them tells them that fighting after one has already been defeated is embarrassing. A Namari Shot hits Cherry’s hand painfully, causing her to drop her weapon. At the same time, Yato kicks the giant rat so hard she flies deep into the jungle. As dawn begins to rise, Yato complains that it is already nearly 6 am, stating they stayed way past the time they agreed on, with Taco mentioning at least they know they are alright. Angel and Zane stir in time to see their friends, but Yato is mad and tells them to take them to the village so they could wait for Adam and Shocker.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, Shocker arrives at the bottom of the temple. He hears some rustling in the trees, and wonders if he is imagining things. As he turns to enter the temple, a short masked man attacks him from afar with a blowgun, telling him to stay out of Mulin’s way. The dart narrowly misses his head. Shocker tries to punch him, but he keeps hiding in the trees. The man introduces himself as Zalt, and Shocker asks if he isn’t one of Moka’s sons. Zalt says he is, but he never condoned the isolationist nature of the village, and has thus teamed up with Mulin. Shocker asks what his plan actually is, and Zalt tells him Mulin’s master plan is to insert all the shadows of the villagers into a giant dead monster that is stored deep underneath the temple, all in the hopes that he can defeat it himself and prove himself to his own swordmaster. Shocker says that that’s a stupid reason for going through all of this, but Zalt silences him, stating that by selling out his village, he was promised the spot as chief. 

At the top of the temple, a bloodied Adam is hearing the same story. As Mulin recounts his tale, he tells Adam that he comes from Shimotsuki Village in the East Blue. He trained at the Isshin Dojo there, and his teacher, Koushiro, used to tell him stories of his time in the Grand Line, and that he once fought a giant monster for three whole days, but never managed to beat it. Mulin had told him he would find that monster and kill it to prove that he has surpassed his teacher, with Koushiro simply wishing him luck. In the present, Mulin states that since he found out the monster is dead, the shadows are meant to reanimate it. Adam smiles and thanks Mulin for revealing his master plan. He runs down to the temple’s underground, with Mulin close behind. Adam emerges into a dark chamber lit by torches, and sees the corpse of a giant scaly monster slumped against the wall. As Mulin asks what he’s planning, Adam vows that he’ll cut it up. 

Mulin, saying he will never allow that, brings out Cleaver and imbues it with shadow energy, telling Adam if he gets hit by the sword, his shadow will be stolen, just like his friend’s. They fight to a stand still, clashing repeatedly before holding each other in the middle of the room. Mulin tells Adam he can’t beat him with his ability, and traps him in Black Box. He prepares to kill Adam, when Zalt bursts through the wall by a punch from Shocker, and slams into Mulin. Shocker calls Adam, asking where he is. When Adam realizes his captain is there to help him, he easily cuts himself free of the Black Box, then jumps up and cuts the monster’s body to pieces using Multicut. Mulin screams no, but Adam does not relent, and soon the monster’s corpse is in tatters and piles everywhere. Mulin, infuriated, states that Adam has just ruined his dream, and attacks Adam in a blind rage. Adam calmly tells Mulin a swordsman never shows such wild expression, effortlessly slicing him down with Ittoryu Iai: Shishi Sonson. 

As Mulin realizes his grand plan has failed, Adam talks to him, telling him there is no need for all of this, and that he didn’t have to prove himself to anyone. Mulin states of course he has to, as how else would he make his master proud, but Adam tells him he can make him proud by walking the path of the blade in a more noble way. He says that granted, they are pirates, but in the swordsman world, there is a code of conduct. Briefly flashing back to an image of his master Koushiro telling him about the code of all swordsmen, Mulin sighs and releases everyone’s shadows, including Shocker’s, and now that the sun is up, Shocker excitedly runs through the hole he had made and jumps up, basking in the sunlight. As the villagers worry in their houses, one notices his shadow is back, and steps into the sun, ecstatic that he did not burn up. As he calls the others, everyone comes outside and the villagers are happy to finally be able to live normally again, causing Angel’s group, who had just arrived, to smile.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Later, on the outskirts of the village, Mulin, Adam, and Shocker talk. Mulin had tied up Zalt, exchanging him for Tolu and Yuzuki, who had been captured by the villagers following their defeat. Mulin calls Cherry on his Den Den Mushi, telling her to prepare the ship, as they’re about to leave. He shakes Adam’s hand, thanking him for helping him reprioritize his goals. Shocker asks what he’s going to do, and Mulin says that if he wants to prove himself to his master, he will use his skills to take the most prestigious title in the world: the pirate king. Shocker tells him he’ll be the one to become the next pirate king, and Mulin retorts that that makes them rivals then. He turns to go, but looks back one last time, telling Shocker he hopes to meet him again. 

When Shocker and Adam get back to the village, there is a huge celebration for the Green Devil Pirates for saving them. Yato is angry at them at first for making him worry, but Shocker, while stuffing his face, tells Yato everything went well in the end and to relax and enjoy the celebration. As they eat, Bobo returns to the village. When Angel asks him where he went, he tells them that in reality, he wasn’t ferrying people to the island, but was trying to escape. When he had first heard of the curse, he ran away because he didn’t want his shadow stolen. Adam calls him a coward, but Moka simply hugs his son, thanking him for returning. Moka then turns to Zalt and tells him that he’ll spend a long time atoning for selling them out, with Zalt wincing. 

The villagers also give them even more food than they already have, cementing them as friends in Shocker’s mind. As they load the cargo onto their ship, Moka thanks them again. Shocker tells Moka that they’ll be sure to come back and check on them, with the old man telling them they’ll be waiting. With their goodbyes said, the crew gets on the Stormy White and sets sail towards their next adventure.

Chapter Text

Deshroom Arc

A few days later, the Green Devil Pirates find themselves enjoying some downtime on the ship. Yato skillfully prepares prime ribs, enticing the crew with the mouthwatering aroma. Zane is engrossed in studying medicine, deepening his knowledge and skills. Angel, on the other hand, carefully examines the log pose and her map, tracing the journey they have embarked on so far.

Meanwhile, Taco and Shocker engage in a lively conversation while fishing. Shocker expresses his excitement about the eccentric and fascinating individuals they have encountered in the Grand Line, looking forward to meeting more unique characters. Taco, slightly irritated, responds that their encounters haven't always been smooth and questions the merits of seeking out even more interesting people. Their banter continues as they focus on their fishing rods, hoping to catch something remarkable.

To their surprise, the duo manages to hook something unexpected. Shocker eagerly wants to reel it in swiftly, but Taco advises him to employ finesse and patience. As they engage in an argument, their fishing line yields a surprising catch. Instead of a fish, they pull up a teenage girl dressed in a vibrant orange dress. The girl, with shoulder-length brown hair, red lipstick, white gloves, and a flower-shaped pendant necklace, emerges from the water with a mix of frustration and dampness. Shocker, still captivated by the strangeness of the Grand Line, humorously comments that the fish in these waters are truly extraordinary. Angrily, the girl clarifies that she's not a fish, catching everyone's attention.

As Daisy wrings water from her dress and gratefully accepts a warm cup of cocoa from Yato, the crew gathers around to introduce themselves. Zane, displaying his medical expertise, checks Daisy's condition, surprised to find her perfectly fine despite the circumstances. Adam, curious about her predicament, inquires why she ended up in the water. Daisy explains that she was at the port of her hometown, simply looking to buy some food when someone pushed her into the water. She recounts drifting for what she estimates to be at least five miles and reveals that her home country, Deshroom, lies in the same general direction indicated by their log pose. Angel turns to Shocker, seeking his input on what they should do. With a hearty laugh, Shocker suggests that since they are already headed in that direction, they might as well drop Daisy off in Deshroom.

Chapter Text

They arrive about an hour later, docking at the port of a fairly large seaside town. As they get off the ship and get ready to explore, Shocker asks Zane if he's coming. The cat tells hims that he thinks someone should stay on the ship just to make sure things are fine, and that he had some medicinal research to do anyway. The rets of the crew walks through Morelobiko, and they see that the houses, trees, and roads are all made of mushrooms or mushroom-like textures. Even the people they see walking around seem to look like mushrooms, with compressed bodies, and some even having multiple legs. Daisy explains that practically all of Deshroom is made up of giant mushrooms everywhere, as this is the homeland of the Kinokobito race, essentially mushroom people. Shocker tells her she doesn’t look like a mushroom, and Daisy informs them that her family does look humanoid, but have kinokobito blood in them due to their ancestry. As the crew venture around Morelobiko Town, they see that the buildings are all hollowed-out, and that many of the vendors sell different varieties of mushrooms. As Shocker picks one up, Yato kicks it out of his hand and tells him that it is a Wake-shroom, a mushroom that can keep you awake but eventually causes one to die. As Shocker backs away in a hurry, the chef informs him it's quite the dangerous drug. 

As they continue walking through the square, they run into three thugs with tattoos of a saber-toothed tiger head on their bodies. Daisy attempts to hide, but the thugs see her and, after whispering a bit, train guns at her and tell her to go with them. When Shocker asks what their problem is, the thugs tell him to move if he doesn't want to die. As Shocker tells them to make him, they shoot at him, but the bullets simply bounce off his rubbery body, shocking them. Shocker quickly dispatches two of them, with the third retreating and stating he is going to call an individual only known as “the Big Boss'', and that they would deal with them. Daisy, though happy they were defeated, explains to the crew that they are members of the Saber Nation, a large crime syndicate who are currently attempting to overthrow the royal family and take over the country. When Angel asks her how she knows all this, she tears up and reveals to them that she is Sarasa Daisy, Crown Princess of Deshroom, leaving the crew dumbfounded.

Chapter Text

Daisy tells them the plot unfolding in her country. About a month ago, the Saber Nation came unobtrusively to the island and made Morelobiko their home base. At first, they were harmless, just going about business and selling wares to the townsfolk. But soon, Big Boss and their crew started hitting caravans with precious metals and resources, stealing them all. Then, only yesterday, Big Boss had stormed the royal castle in the capital city of Shiitakebiko, and had captured her father, King Rio, and her older sister, Princess Rose. After they made the capital their new base of operations, Daisy fled the city and headed toward Morelobiko to try and reach the marines. That’s when she was pushed into the water earlier today. 

Adam asks her what the marines said, as they are pirates and not heroes, but she tells them Big Boss got to them first, tricking them into thinking they are a simple business person. Yato says while he does want to help, their actions may cause them to be targetsfor the Navy too. However, Shocker, enraged, decides to help Daisy. When Taco asks if he’s sure, Shocker says to think of it as helping out a friend. He is disgusted by the Saber Nation’s way of doing things and claims that he and his crew would definitely beat them, with the crew confirming.

However, as they say this, they hear the ground rumble behind them and see dust rise as at least 300 grunts armed with cutlasses come into view. They part the way for the Big Boss, and a woman walks through the middle. She wears a floral shirt tied right above her belly button, a large brown jacket with fur trimmings, and white jeans. She has long, auburn hair, and earrings in the shape of a saber tooth tiger’s head. She introduces herself as the leader of the Saber Nation, Deville Cruella.

Saber Nation Leader

Deville Cruella

Chapter Text

When Daisy asks how she found her, Cruella tells her her information network across the kingdom is vast, and that she was easily spotted entering the town yesterday. She then looks at the Green Devils and asks Daisy if they are the ones she found to save her. As Shocker introduces himself to her, Cruella perks up when she hears his dream of becoming the pirate king. She then smiles and tells them that unfortunately for them, they got mixed with the wrong people, and set her men on them. 

As her grunts rush them, Adam asks if Shocker's sure they can fight all of these opponents simultaneously. Shocker states that he plans to, and rushes the group, his crew following him. During the battle, the crew valiantly fights as hard as they can, taking out about a third of the enemy forces. But there are simply too many. The crew is overwhelmed, with thugs grabbing them and binding them in chains. Shocker, as the only one free, uses Gomu Gomu no Gatling and breaks through the grunts, trying to punch Cruella head-on. However, the woman simply smiled and a purplish portal opened up in front of her. As Shocker’s punch enters it, he suddenly feels himself get punched in the face, and launches himself into a nearby stall. 

As Angel cries for Shocker, Cruella figures they must be wondering what her ability is. She tells them she ate the Kusho Kusho no Mi (Void Void Fruit), a paramecia fruit that allows the user to create voids, portals through which they can teleport and store what they wish. She then tells the crew that although they will be captured and handed to the marines as a show of her good faith, she will see to it that Shocker dies. As the crew watches in horror, Cruella creates a Void underneath Shocker that swallows him up, then points to the air above the sea a long distance away. She opens the void there and lets Shocker splash into the water, drowning because of his powers. Adam and Yato struggle against their bonds, shouting for Shocker, and Angel screams. She coldly states it will be the last time they meet, and to greet the sea devil for her. She then turns around, telling her remaining men it’s time to leave, before creating a void to Shiitakebiko and walking through it. As the rest of the crew and Daisy are pushed through, Taco looks back and worries for his captain.

Chapter Text

As Shocker drowns, he desperately tries to stay afloat but realizes he doesn’t have the strength. As he flounders in the water, he can't believe this is how his story will end, drowning while his friends remain are captured. Luckily, he feels something tug at his vest, and as he is pulled out of the water, he sees none other than Zane, who flies him out of the water and lands them on the Stormy. As Shocker coughs up water, Zane does what he can to treat him, telling Shocker he is lucky she didn’t try to kill him another way. As Shocker thanks Zane for the save, Zane quickly remembers how he had heard something splash in the water and was shocked to see it was his captain. Zane says he thought he could be more help staying back on the ship, but because of him all their friends are captured, and he begins to cry. Shocker tells him to stop crying, because it isn’t over yet. Shocker thanks Zane for his help, then determinedly says they’re going to get their friends back and beat the Saber Nation, with Zane agreeing. 

In the capital city of Shiitakebiko, Yato and Angel are shoved into a warehouse. One of the thugs tries to touch Angel, but Yato angrily kicks him away. The thug laughs and says to hang tight as the marines are arriving to pick them up in a few days. As they laugh and lock the door, Yato angrily yet weakly kicks the door, though because of its reinforced steel it doesn’t budge. Angel asks if he thinks Shocker’s alright, and Yato tells her he’s sure he found a way out, and that Zane is still with him, slightly reassuring the navigator. Meanwhile, in another warehouse, Adam simply sits and relaxes while Taco paces the large space. Taco talks aloud, telling himself to calm down because Shocker and Zane are surely on their way. Adam tells him to shut up, as he is trying to sleep, and Taco berates him for not caring. Adam suddenly opens his eyes menacingly, telling Taco that Shocker is his first friend in a long time and he believes in him, and to never doubt him like that again. As Taco apologizes, Adam says if they had their swords and sling respectively, they may have been able to escape. Taco looks toward the door and prays for Shocker to be alright. 

Back in Morelobiko, after talking to a few people, they discover Shiitakebiko is at least a day’s journey away from the port town, and that navigating the Portabello Forest isn’t going to be easy. As they ask around for caravans to take them there, no one offers, as everyone is now scared that their caravan will be hit next. As the duo sighs, they enter the forest, massive brown mushrooms with yellow spots looming over them. Shocker tells Zane he can just fly them there, but Zane states that he doesn't want to alert any Saber Nation stragglers or caravans Cruella had left behind, and that besides, it does tire him out. They spend hours walking through the winding path, braving pollen showers that cause them to sneeze and fighting giant beetle monsters. That night, Zane wakes up to hear Shocker training next to some rocks. Shocker busts a rock, panting heavily. The cat asks Shocker what he’s doing, and Shocker responds he is going to level up so that he will be strong enough to protect his friends.

Chapter Text

The next day, Zane decides they can risk flying, and so he carries Shocker above the forest and they eventually see Shiitakebiko on the horizon. By the time the duo arrive, it is early afternoon. They see Shiitakebiko is separated into sections. The center of town is where the main plaza and market place is. The north is where the Deshroom Palace is located. Toward either side of the palace are tall battlement towers where sentries stand watch. And toward the south of the city, where the route coming from the forest would have taken them, are a number of large warehouses. As the duo land on the roof of a house nearby, Shocker asks Zane where he thinks their friends are, and Zane sniffs the air, telling him he can faintly smell Angel’s perfume. As he flies up to one of the windows and peers through, he sees that Yato and Angel are inside and gets excited. He quickly confirms that the warehouse next to theirs housed Adam and Taco before returning to Shocker, telling his captain that besides Daisy, all their friends are being held there. Zane also reports that since Adam’s swords are gone, they can assume all their equipment was confiscated. Shocker says that means they just have to find their weapons and then break them out, and jumps off the building, running straight for the area, much to Zane’s shock.

A squadron of grunts guard the warehouses, with some complaining to their friends that this is easily the most boring task they have. One asks another why this is necessary, since Shocker’s dead, and his colleague shrugs, stating they just didn’t argue with the Big Boss. Suddenly, they hear a scream, and their eyes pop out of their heads as they see Shocker charging straight for them. He takes them all out in seconds, leaving only one conscious. Shocker menacingly tells him to point him in the direction of his friends’ stuff, and the guard shakily points to a warehouse across the street. As Zane flies over, he’s surprised that Shocker actually had the foresight to ask one of the guards and keep one conscious. 

Shocker then knocks the guard out, and they run to the building. As Shocker busts it open, they see Adam’s swords, Angel’s log pose, and Taco’s slingshot all laid out on a table. As they grab their crew’s equipment, they hear a blaring siren. Zane tells Shocker they must have figured out they are here and called the Big Boss, but Shocker says this makes it easier, because now they don’t have to sneak around. Zane sighs and says they never really sneaked around in the first place, before following his friend outside.

As Shocker punches the warehouse door clean off the walls, Taco happily cries and says he knew he was alive. Adam asks if they got the keys to their cuffs, and Shocker is dumbfounded as he didn’t think of that. Taco sighs, but Adam says that it’s fine since he got his swords, and asks Shocker to give him the Nidai. As Adam concentrates on controlling the Nidai, he has a bit of difficulty, but manages to cut his steel restraints, then easily cutting Taco’s. As the quartet rush outside, they see a mob of guards barely a minute away. As Adam enters the other warehouse to free the other two, Zane gives Taco his slingshot. They back up as the mob charges towards the door, but then Yato emerges from the warehouse, kicking a large number of them away. As Adam slices the rest down and the six friends reunite, Zane smiles and says it’s good to be back together. Angel says they aren’t done, as there’s still something they need to do. Adam tells Shocker to give the word and they’ll follow him. Shocker shouts that they’re going to defeat the Saber Nation, with all his friends shouting in agreement.

Chapter Text

They run through the town to the north, where the palace is. Angel tells them Daisy is probably being kept in the palace itself. The crew is about to start up the steps of the palace when a card as sharp as a shuriken lands in front of Shocker and forces him back. Standing at the top of the palace entrance are four individuals. They introduce themselves as the top officers of the Saber Nation. Rufus is a young man dressed in red masquerade clothes, a red mask and bicorne hat on his head. He has long golden hair, white gloves, and a small pouch on his waist. Orc is a top-heavy man only wearing brown shorts and a yellow sweater tied around his waist, his torso and arms bare to show his abs and muscles. He has shaggy green hair pointing like a porcupine from his skull, and has on black face paint on his chin. Spike is a young man with spiky blond hair and a piercing smile. He wears an open, sleeveless blue vest with fur around the trims, and blue gloves, paired with brown pants and combat boots. A pair of steel knuckle braces are attached to his fists. Finally, Agria, the one who threw the card, is a woman with white hair in a bob cut and a dark-blue ribbon on her head. She wears a white dress, and is covered by a cloak of white feathers. They all look to be in their late teens.

Agria tells the Green Devils they won’t let them through. Orc smirks and asks why pirates think they can stop their operation, while Rufus laughs and muses their futility. Spike tells them they’re talking too much, and that they should just go and handle them already, leaping down at the group and the knuckle braces revealing concealed retractable claws. As he pounces on them, the crew scatters. Spike looks at Zane and slashes at him, forcing him to go into Wing Boost and fly toward the western towers with Spike following him. Taco tries to shoot at Spike with a pebble, but one of Agria’s cards gets in the way, and Rufus jumps in front of Taco, telling him he’ll be his opponent. However, as he begins to spit poetry, Taco simply sidesteps him and runs after Zane, irritating Rufus and causing him to chase Taco. Orc tries to slam his strong fists into them, but Yato face-kicks him through some buildings all the way to the center of the town, near the marketplace. He tells the others he will deal with him and runs off. Angel parries Agria’s card shurikens with her Soru and Shigan combo, allowing Shocker and Adam to go inside the palace. She tells Agria that she will beat her no matter what. 

Inside the palace’s anteroom, Shocker and Adam run across, trying to reach the throne room, when Adam senses something. He manages to catch a sword blade just in time, and sees a young man with black hair covering one of his eyes, and black cloak. He is introduced as Veil, the leader of the top officers, and says he’s their worst nightmare. Adam takes him on to let Shocker reach the throne room. As the Green Devil captain enters, Cruella awaits him, with the royal family tied up behind her. As the Big Boss merely smirks, wondering out loud how he managed to survive, Shocker breathes heavily, preparing himself to fight.

Saber Nation Top Officer

Rufus

Saber Nation Top Officer

Orc

Saber Nation Top Officer

Spike

Saber Nation Top Officer

Agria

Saber Nation Top Officer

Veil

Deshroom Crown Princess

Rose

king of Deshroom

Rio

Chapter Text

On the ground near the battlement towers, Zane is flying away from Spike, who tells the cat to come back and fight him like a man, with Zane stating he isn’t one. As Spike jumps onto a wall and pushes off from it to attack, Zane quickly uses Claw Boost to try and parry Spike’s claws. However, Spike, being quite fast, finds an opening in Zane’s defense, slashing and grazing his shoulder. As Zane tries to hit him back, he soon realizes his opponent may simply be too fast for him. Meanwhile, Taco was originally following Zane to help him out, but now is simply running away from Rufus, telling the Saber officer he’s crazy if he thinks he’ll listen to all his poetry. Rufus runs after him, telling him it isn’t proper etiquette to ignore the ramblings of an enemy. As Taco runs toward one of the huge battlement towers, he sees a small ball whiz past his ear, right before the ball explodes and sends him crashing into the battlement wall. He looks back, but Rufus is gone. Thinking he may be able to get a better vantage point up on the battlement, he clubs the stairs leading to the top.

As Taco gets to the top, he quickly takes out two sentinels with Namari Shots , then looks over the railing. He sees Zane and his opponent still fighting below, though neither of them seems to be getting the upper hand. As Taco lines a shot and prepares to hit Spike, a voice from atop one of the columns tells him he is so predictable. As Taco looks around in horror, Rufus is already sitting there. Down below, Zane notices Taco on the battlement above and decides the best course of action is to team up. He quickly goes into Wing Boost and flies toward Taco, asking his friend if he is alright. Just as Taco is about to respond, Spike, irritated that his opponent simply left, leaps from the ground to the top of the battlement, shocking the two Green Devils. Rufus tells him that the jump must have been at least 80 meters, and that he must really want to fight then. Spike responds that he’s been waiting for a fight for too long now. Rufus tells them they may as well work together, since their respective opponents have opted to do so, and Spike agrees. 

As they fight on the roof, Zane and Taco witness Spike and Rufus’s excellent teamwork. Spike fights in close combat, attempting to stab at them with his claws. Meanwhile, when one of the two of them seem to have the drop on Spike, Rufus would back his partner up with a Bakumono ball, a small pellet that explodes upon impact, claiming his perfect aim and throwing arm are unmatched. The boys switch their strategy, with Zane flying Taco around as he tries to snipe them from above, a technique they called Jet Sniper . However, Spike kicks them out of the air, and as they land on the roof, another Bakumono detonates, blasting them back. As Spike says he hasn’t felt this alive in a while, Rufus merely smirks and tells the Green Devils it will be easy for the world to forget them, as they aren’t powerful enough to begin with. Zane and Taco realize at the same time that they need to combine their strengths in order to win. Rufus tells Spike to move back, since his explosive balls only go off with direct hard impact. 

However, this time Taco is ready for him. When Rufus shoots another explosive ball, Taco aims his Namari Shot at a trajectory whereby it hits the ball into his hand without it exploding. Taco calls over to Zane, telling him to trap their enemies. Zane obliges and reveals a new form, Defense Boost, whose fuzzy fur draws their opponents in and makes it hard for them to escape. Taco tells Zane he doubted they could beat them in a straight up fight, so they need to use the field to their advantage. He uses the exploding ball he has to create a new attack: Bakuhatsu Shot, and shoots it right at the roof floor, the huge explosion causing it to crumble. As Zane goes into Wing Boost and flies Taco to safety, they watch the tower crash down on their enemies, burying them. 

Zane, not wanting to kill people if they can help it, uncovers the duo in Muscle Boost . While they are still alive, they are blacked out, with them each having a few broken bones. Taco and Zane high-five, proud of their victory, and turn to leave. However, Taco looks back at Rufus’s pouch and thinks to himself…

Chapter Text

In front of the palace, Angel is having a hard time of her own. She is seen bleeding a bit from where Agria’s cards had slashed her. She tries to use Soru in order to dodge the Card Shurikens, but they still manage to slice her arms painfully. Agria uses Card Shuriken: Akuma no Odori, and Angel manages to stop them just in time by using Shigan: Cho Gatling. Angel then uses Geppou and bounces around the air, using it as a jumping point to make her Shigan hit stronger. Agria winces as the finger pieces her shoulder. As Angel jumps back and lands on the steps, Agria asks her which of the Rokushiki techniques she knows. Angel replies she has the most trouble mastering Tekkai, but states that their current fight is her perfect training. 

Agria tells her to stop taking her lightly, and uses Card Shuriken: Curve Lane, sending two cards at Angel in a curving manner, making it harder for Angel to track. Angel tries to use Tekkai, but can feel it not working due to her core not being strong enough, and avoids using Kami-e instead. As Agria keeps launching her cards, Angel tries to focus her energy on defense, and gradually feels less pain when the cards sliced her arms and legs. She then notices that Agria keeps moving positions while they fight, and notices she’s been picking up her cards where they fell. Angel surmises Agria has a limited number of cards in her deck, and that if she could make her lose all her cards, she would be defenseless. 

Becoming incredibly snarky, Angel goads Agria into a flustered state, telling her she knows the Saber officer’s final attack will make use of all her cards at once, and that she shouldn’t even try as she is ready for that. Angry, Agria falls for the trick, telling Angel to survive if she can, and uses Card Shuriken: Shirashi , all her cards swirling at Angel in a storm-like motion. At that moment, Angel centers herself and uses Tekkai successfully, feeling no damage as the cards past her. As Angel uses Soru and gets right in Agria’s face, she congratulates Agria for falling for her trick, and uses two Shigans and then a basic kick in rapid succession. She then tells Agria that it is her turn to unleash an ultimate attack, and begins to swirl around on her side. As Agria’s is drawn in by the force of the vacuum-like effect, Angel attacks with Rankyaku : Amenedachi . As the attack slices Agria, defeating her, Angel thanks the other girl for helping her evolve.

Move Index

Chapter Text

In the plaza, Orc gets up, stating his head is pounding and whoever hit him just now is strong without a doubt. As Yato calmly walks toward him, he asks if he’s the one who dared attack him. Yato sighs and states that fighting brutes is boring to him. Orc tells him to get ready, and rushes Yato. As they fight to a standstill, Orc’s fists against Yato’s feet, Orc muses how fun crushing his body will be. Orc swings his arm, but Yato lands on his arm and kicks him in the face. Orc, enraged, brings his fists together and smashes the ground to try and get him, but Yato jumps up above him and delivers a Comet Kick to Orc’s head. As Yato lands on the ground hands-first, he spins on his hands, kicking Orc with Party Table Kick Course . He then tries to hit Orc with Bouquet Kick, an upward launching kick, but Orc grabs his leg and smashes him into the ground, then tosses him up and uses Home Run: Grand Slam , a simple yet powerful punch that launches Yato through several buildings. 

As Yato gets up shakily, he feels a sharp pain and notes that that attack must have broken at least 2 of his ribs in the process. As he dusts himself off, Orc lands in front of him, telling the chef he will not blame him if he gives up, as he is the definition of strength. Yato tells him that he clearly does not know strength if he’s its best representation. As Orc stands confused, Yato tells him having all the physical strength in the world is useless if one uses it without thinking. Orc tells him he’s had enough talking, and slams his fist into the ground, breaking it and dislodging a multitude of rocks. He swings his arm once, using Home Run: Renshū-yō Kikan Jū and shoots all the rocks at Yato at high speeds. Yato quickly kicks all of them away, even kicking the last one back at Orc’s face. 

They then fight each other to another standstill again. Yato gets in close and pushes Orc back using Sheep Kick , followed quickly by Bicycle Kick , Orc skidding across the ground. Orc, in his rage, smashes through some stalls run by street vendors, and even injures a lady in the process. As the lady begs Orc not to hurt her, Orc glares at her shop, before annihilating it with one punch. As the woman cries, Yato becomes infuriated, stating an oaf like him can never understand the care between a food maker and their food, and that he’s just trampled on sacred grounds. Orc laughs and is about to grab the lady, but Yato kicks him back hard, yelling at him to not touch food if he won’t respect it. As Orc rushes in and uses a powerful Dynamic Punch to slam Yato into the ground, the Green Devil chef uses Reception Kick to catch the punch, then begins to flip and spin in the air. Yato thinks to himself that Reception is mainly used to block or offset attacks, but that with so much strength behind Orc’s attack, he can use that momentum and counter. He then kicks Orc with Counter Kick , kicking him in the face so hard he is launched through several buildings before lying down, defeated. As Yato walks away, he tells Orc that he used his strength against him, and that he should remember that.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Inside the main hall, Adam has been fighting Veil, and is seen with some slash marks around his body, bleeding. As he tries to attack Veil, the man seems to disappear and reappear at will, making it harder to fight off his sword attacks. Adam tries to slash at him, but Veil disappears and reappears by Adam’s side, telling the swordsman his conviction is weak before slicing his side. Adam buffs up his biceps using Ichi-Gorilla and Ni-Gorilla , then tries attacking with Nigori-Zake . However, Veil reveals he possesses Tekkai : Zenryoku, and as the blades clang harmlessly on his skin, Veil tells him he has the perfect iron defense. 

Adam tries to attack from a distance, closing the gap with Sanbyaku Nanajugo Pound Ho , but he fails to get past the Tekkai . He then tries to use Santoryu : Oni Giri , followed quickly by Nitoryu : Cross Slash , both to no avail. Veil uses his sword and flicks him away upward, and Adam tries to come down using Nitoryu: Nigiri: Koro , which is parried in Veil’s sword. Veil then disappears again, moving almost as one with the room’s shadows, before striking Adam in the chest using Sakkaku-kiri. Adam tries one more slash, but Veil’s perfect defense once again blocks his attack. As Adam pants, Veil tells him that this is the fate of those who attempt to fight their organization. He tells Adam that if he gives up, he will make sure his death is painless, but Adam refuses, stating there’s no way he’ll lose. Suddenly, Adam feels a pull at his hand, and sees the Nidai Kitetsu almost fighting to get out of his grasp. He begs the Nidai, telling it he needs its power to win. As he throws the sword, however, it goes limp and clatters on the floor. 

In an instant, Veil is in front of him, and pierces him through the torso. Veil tells Adam he’ll die knowing his final attack was an utter failure. However, Adam in his head states he has to trust the sword, and that it needed to be more of a partnership with the blade. As Veil is ready to kill him, he suddenly feels pain as he is slashed from behind, shocking and confusing the man. It is revealed that the Nidai Kitetsu moved on its own, but in accordance with its master’s will. As Veil shakily rises, asking how this is possible, Adam says he understands his blade’s soul, and it's telling him to beat Veil. As Veil slashes down at him desperately, Adam blocks his sword with his other two blades, before disarming Veil. He then brings his hand down, the Nidai Kitetsu on Veil’s other side mirroring his movement, and uses Itoryu: Nidai no Tate Slash to defeat the officer, breaking through his Tekkai: Zenryoku. As Adam picks up the Nidai, he silently thanks it for following him.

Move Index

Chapter Text

In the throne room, Shocker looks behind Cruella and sees the king of Deshroom, Rio, tied to a chair. He is a rather large man, wearing a red crown with the letter “R” on it and wearing blue robes. His bushy mustache makes Shocker laugh, as he likens it to nose hair. Rio asks his daughters if they know who the boy is, and whether he was part of Cruella's gang. Daisy, who is behind her father, exclaims excitedly that Shocker has come to save them, but her sister Rose, who looks similar to Daisy but with blond hair and a pink dress, tells Daisy to stop being naive, as they have lost. When Daisy asks what she means, clearly hopeful, Rose tells her with despair that she’s seen Cruella fight, and no one who she could have brought can stand up to her. Cruella smirks and asks Shocker if he heard, but Shocker refutes it, stating he’ll beat her. Cruella tells him that this will only end one way, but Shocker charges forth regardless.

However, as they fight, Cruella's void powers prove hard for Shocker to avoid. No matter what he attempts to do, she seems to be able to do something to counter it. He starts the fight being on the defensive, his fists up to parry attacks but waiting for her to make the first move. Cruella acknowledges this, and uses Void: Kunai Spikes, creating a void on the ground below Shocker, forcing him to jump up as kunai shoot out of the ground. However, while he’s still in the air, she uses Void: Shuriken Ame and creates a void from which a rain of shurikens pour down on him. The sharp weapons continuously cut him and as he bleeds, he drops to the floor. He tries going on the offensive with a Gomu Gomu no Pistol, only to have his fist go into a void and then hit him in the stomach. When he tries Gomu Gomu no Muchi and Stamp, the same thing happens, with Cruella redirecting his attacks to hit himself in the face and causing him to slam into a wall. 

King Rio and the princesses struggle against their bonds, but Cruella tells them to wait their turn, and that she’ll get back to them once she finishes Shocker off. Daisy screams that Shocker won’t lose, but Cruella tells her he already has, and that the only thing she wants to hear from the royal family is their terms for surrendering the country to her. As Shocker kneels, panting, he thinks about his training, wondering if he isn’t strong enough yet. Cruella applauds Shocker, stating she isn’t entirely sure how he’s not dead. She then tells Shocker that she’s happy he didn’t die from drowning, as it means she’d be able to finish him off herself in front of the family, to show them there’s no hope for them. As Shocker tells her he and his friends will beat them, Cruella giggles, telling the Green Devil captain that his friends have no hope of surviving, and that when the marines arrive, she’ll ensure that they are taken to Impel Down, a prison whose conditions are akin to hell itself. 

However, by threatening Shocker’s crew, she commits her biggest mistake. Shocker angrily yells that his friends would never lose to an organization like this, and that he himself will protect his crew. The captain rises and begins to lumber towards Cruella. The Big Boss gets mad that Shocker hasn’t given up hope, and opens a void, releasing a tirade of kunai and shuriken at him. Despite many of the weapons making impact, slicing at his arms and legs, Shocker continues approaching Cruella. As he gets in front of her, he hits her solidly with Gomu Gomu no Rifle , causing her to cough up a bit of blood and pushing her back into a wall. He jumps up and tries using Gomu Gomu no Yari , which disappears into a void. However, learning his lesson, he quickly retracts the attack before she has a chance to counter, and grabs onto her and hits her with Gomu Gomu no Missile. As Cruella stumbles, Shocker tells her that he’ll evolve himself if that’s what it takes to protect his friends, and mentions something called Gear, but before anything could happen, Cruella panickedly gives up, confusing Shocker.

Move Index

Chapter Text

When Shocker, still in a rage, asks what she means, Cruella repents stating she’ll halt her attack on Deshroom. Shocker asks her why, and Cruella tells him he’s won, that he proved he is stronger than her after all, and that she doesn’t fancy her chances of fighting him in a prolonged battle. True to her word, she sends a distress call to the members of her crew on her Den Den Mushi and tells everyone to stand down. While many are confused, they ultimately do so, with the Green Devils, who had regrouped, wondering why. Back in the throne room, Cruella starts tearing up. When Shocker asks her what is wrong, and why she did all of this, she tells Shocker she was so close to actualizing her dream. She says she was gathering vast amounts of resources and men in order to take down Kaido, “King of the Beasts”, one the Yonko who had taken over her home country of Wano. 

As her flashback begins, 35 years before the current time, Cruella was born in Wano Country. Ever since she could walk, she had been trained to be a kunoichi, or female ninja. She enrolled in the ninja academy, and her three closest friends were three boys named Kashi, Gaito, and Ozumo. As they learned together, they each had their own interests, but all dreamed of serving Wano country someday. She was also a close follower of the Kozuki family, following their exploits. She particularly adored Kozuki Oden, who after hearing stories about him she deemed a national hero, despite him being a pirate. However, when she was 10 years old, Kaido and his crew officially took over Wano Country after killing Oden. As Cruella’s teacher at the ninja academy was replaced, the new headmaster told them all they would be ninjas serving Lord Orochi. Cruella, who hated that idea and wanted Wano to be free, quit being a ninja and escaped on a departing pirate ship, which was the ship of a crew called the Saber Pirates. 

She tried hiding in different parts of the ship, but she was caught in a matter of hours. As the crew’s First-Mate asked for permission to throw her overboard, the captain told them they may as well get a reward out of the stowaway, and forced her to treat her like a slave, threatening death if she did not comply. For a week, she allowed the captain to treat her this way, and even though the other members were clearly opposed to it, they could not do much, as their captain ruled through fear. However, in reality this was all a ruse, an act Cruella put up to get closer to the captain's quarters, where she had found out he kept a devil fruit that she wanted to steal. 

When she was mopping up the floors in his chambers one day, he apparently neglected her enough to trust her in his room alone and left. Cruella ate the devil fruit, which turned out to be the Kusho Kusho no Mi. As she kicked the door open, the captain’s speech was cut short as all the other members wondered what was happening. As the crew’s captain told her to start scrubbing the deck for her insolence, she merely replied no, and used her void powers to throw the captain overboard. The crew members watch as their captain is eaten by a Sea King almost immediately. As the other members looked at her with fear in their eyes, she told them that they were free to either follow her, or follow him, implying she would kill them too. The crew members, understanding the situation, decided to make her their new captain. As she continued her pirating ways, she also gained his 10,000,000 bounty. Over the course of the next 25 years, her crew would become stronger and gain more and more people, though always being hidden in the shadows so as to never raise awareness to the marines or World Government. During this time, she also changed from being the Saber Pirates to being the Saber Nation, a crime syndicate with the goal of overcoming even the toughest pirates, though through illegal means, all for the overall goal of liberating Wano Country.

Back in the present, she admits that part of her nature of building her underground syndicate was to make it so the marines couldn’t track her, which meant cutting herself off from the world, so she has no idea how the world is, but that she’s sure that thanks to his insurmountable strength, Kaido is still ruling Wano and needs to be taken out. Shocker tells her calmly that Kaido is not only defeated, but now dead, telling her that Wano Country is well and truly free. At first, she yells at Shocker, calling him a liar, but Shocker touches his straw hat and tells her he received the hat from the person who beat him, having heard the story from Luffy and his crew during their stay on Foosha. 

At this, Cruella cries, tears freely flowing as she realizes her people, her friends and family, are really free, and tells him thank you for informing her. Shocker tells her he isn’t going to kill her, but she should find something else to do. As Shocker begins to leave, King Rio states that that is great and all, but asks when they would be released, with Daisy and Rose calling Shocker an idiot for not releasing them sooner. Shocker laughs and tells Cruella to let them go, too. As he turns and walks away, Cruella stops him, telling him that the power he has is reminiscent of a certain devil fruit. Shocker told her it is a dupli, a sort of copy of Monkey D. Luffy’s Gomu Gomu no Mi. Cruella explains she once had a limited partnership with Vegapunk, so she knew vaguely of the science behind duplis, but Vegapunk had told her that the real name of Luffy’s devil fruit is the Hito Hito no Mi, Mythical Model: Nika, a mythical zoan. Shocker asks her what that means, and Cruella responds that he didn’t eat a Dupli, but the actual Gomu Gomu no Mi, causing Shocker to freeze and wonder why Vegapunk had had the fruit with him then all those years ago. As Cruella attempts to reason, he smiles and says he doesn't really care, since it is in the past anyway, and that he needs to look toward the future.

Chapter Text

Later that evening, on the outskirts of the city, Cruella speaks to all the members of the Saber Nation. She tells them that she has decided to dissolve the organization. Veil asks her what happened, and she says they could choose to stay together if they wish, but it will be without her. When Agria asks her what she plans to do, Cruella says she will follow a new dream, which is to find out the whole truth about devil fruits and their creation via the poneglyphs. Orc wonders why she’s interested in those, and she tells them she’s heard tales of the first devil fruit in a tavern one day when she was younger, and wishes to learn more about their origins. Veil tells her poneglyphs aren’t easy to find, and she states once she finds someone who could read the ancient scripts, she could begin to map out the truth about devil fruit abilities, before stating it is vital for her to meet Nico Robin of the Straw Hat Pirates. 

That night, the royal family held a massive celebration for the members of the Green Devil Pirates as thanks for saving Deshroom. Shocker stuffs his face, stating that he doesn’t usually enjoy vegetables, but that these are the best mushrooms he’s ever eaten, with Taco telling him to have manners and not finish everything. Yato marvels at the food, wondering how they could prepare mushrooms in such a way that they tasted like other things, and Princess Rose tells the crew that the kingdom’s famous chameleoshrooms can take on the taste and smell of whatever food they are cooked alongside. As Zane snacks on fish-tasting chameleoshrooms, Adam drinks some shroom beer, and states that he’s never had alcohol with such a kick before. Rio asks them if there’s any other way he can thank them, and Angel’s eyes light up, stating that money would be a good way since they are running low on cash, with Taco telling her to stop.  

That night, in the giant room provided for the crew, Angel tells them that as pirates, they will need to get back to Morelobiko by the next day in order to secure their ship and leave before marines show up. Zane tells them it’s quite a long journey, but Adam tells them they’ll just have to run nonstop. As the crew wake up the next morning and prepare to leave, the royal family arrives to say bye. Daisy hugs Shocker, thanking him for freeing her country, and Shocker tells her not to mention it. Rose, who has taken a liking to Adam, tells him to come back, but he says it’s not really in his plan. Rio regrets that he can’t give them any money, as outright endorsement and support of piracy won’t look good to the World Government, but Angel tells him they understand. As Yato says they need to get going, they say their final goodbyes to the royal family and start down the road to Shiitakebiko’s exit.

No sooner have they left the city than Cruella appears in front of them. As the crew impulsively get into action stances, she tells them to calm down, as she is offering to take them through a void straight to the ship. Adam unsheathes a sword, telling her they have no reasons to trust her, and she tells them that whether they choose to believe her or not, the marines have arrived a day early, and that soon they’ll find their ship and capture it. She opens a void and motions for the others to walk through it. Though weary at first, Shocker agrees, and they go through it, cutting out hours of travel. 

As they arrive at the port, they see that Cruella wasn’t lying, and that two marine ships are indeed on their way to the island. As they get on their ship, Cruella then removes a large bag of coins from one of her voids. When Angel asks what it is, she smiles and tells them she stole some money from the palace treasury for them. Adam asks her why she’s so intent on helping them, and Cruella admits it is because she wants to join the crew. All the others are completely shocked, with Taco stating she was just fighting them yesterday, and Adm stating no way they would trust her. However, Shocker agrees immediately, much to the confusion of the others. As Adam asks why, Shocker says he can tell by the way they talked yesterday that she is a good person, and that besides, she brought them a present. Angel and Zane state they can’t argue with that logic, and Zane carries the large bag onto the ship in Muscle Boost . 

As the Stormy leaves Deshroom's port, the marines spot them and begin to open fire, but Cruella proves herself to them by opening a void and capturing all their cannonballs, returning it back to them and crunching holes in their vessels. As Shocker laughs, Angel tells them it is time to go, and with a new member helping them, the crew set off for their next adventure.

Chapter Text

World Figures Arc

Monkey D. Luffy, with the help of his faithful crew of 11, managed to do the impossible and become the Pirate King, with the largest bounty for pirates in history, a bounty of 5,600,000,000 beli. He initiated a new pirate era, where the goal and mindsets shifted from exploring to find the One Piece to gathering power in order to challenge and defeat Luffy himself. The Straw Hats became the crew of the pirate king, and the Straw Hat Grand Fleet, as his major fighting force, made it their goal to spread Luffy’s word around and uphold his reputation as fierce, powerful, and loyal supporters. The Straw Hats themselves now reside in the New World, though their adventure is far from over, as there are many pirates fighting them still and they continue to travel around the world, finding new places and visiting old ones. Also notably, some of the crew have not yet completed their goals yet. For the Straw Hats, the adventure continues. 

Many of the old Yonko got replaced by new beings, a new incarnation of the group, with the title now signifying the four pirates with the best chance of defeating Luffy and the Straw Hats. In fact, of the 7 Yonko previously known, only Blackbeard and Luffy are still alive and active. Whitebeard remains dead, and Red-Haired Shanks was killed by Blackbeard a bit prior to Luffy achieving his dream. The remnants of the Red Hair Pirates now act much like the remnants of the Whitebeard Pirates, retired in the New World and doing their own thing, but opting to not having anyone become their new captain. Benn Beckman himself told them to live freely, as it is what Shanks would have wanted. 

After Kaido was defeated by the Ninja-Mink-Pirate-Samurai Alliance, he was eventually captured and taken to Level 7, a new level of Impel Down made especially for him. He would later be killed by “Dragon Hunter” Dravvo, a powerful and previously-unknown pirate who infiltrated Impel Down by himself for the express purpose of killing Kaido, as well as freeing the All-Stars and making them join his crew. Once this news was spread, the World Government made Dravvo one of the Yonko. The other major Beasts Pirates members, however, did not join their former superiors. While King, Queen, and Jack joined up with Dravvo’s own crew, the Creature Pirates, Hawkins, Apoo, Drake, and the Flying Six Headliners escaped from the Wano prisons and went their own ways. While Sasaki and Who’s Who reclaimed their old pirate crews, Drake managed to convince Black Maria, Ulti, and Page One to join his Drake Pirates.

Meanwhile, Big Mom would also meet a similar end. After she managed to survive the war on Onigashima, she returned to Totto Land to find it in shambles. With Pudding kidnapped, Caesar and the Germa escaped, and a large portion of her territory frozen, Big Mom focused her remaining forces on tending to and repairing Totto Land. However, a few years later, another female pirate named Otsu Radiance infiltrated Totto Land, claiming there wasn’t enough room on the seas for two powerful ladies. With her forces, she invaded the land and fought Big Mom, and after a long, arduous battle, managed to kill Linlin. Radiance and her crew then took over Totto Land, but changed and expanded it. She gave a chance for the Big Mom Pirates to escape and leave. They did, and subsequently became known as the Smoothie Pirates, with Charlotte Smoothie taking the helm. Katakuri left his siblings to journey alone, needing to clear his head and see the world for himself. They were all degraded to below Yonko status, while Radiance, who would gain the epithet of Mother, took Big Mom’s place as one of the yonko. 

As aforementioned, Blackbeard is the only one of the old yonko apart from Luffy still confirmed alive, but he too suffered from degrading. Following his loss to Luffy on the shores of Laugh Tale, Blackbeard retreated with his crew to recuperate. Soon enough, following Luffy’s status as the pirate king, Blackbeard was demoted to the class of a regular pirate, and he and his crew, while still quite powerful, commanded nowhere near as much influence and power they had before. He now roams the New World, waiting for his chance to enter the spotlight once more. 

No one knows what became of Buggy and his pirate crew, as shortly after becoming one of the Yonko, he disappeared just as suddenly as he arrived following the Throne War. However, the Cross Guild was confirmed to be dissolved.

As for Trafalgar Law, after seeing that Luffy achieved his dream of becoming the pirate king, he invited fellow supernovas to come and talk. Despite their general hate for and rivalry with each other, everyone attended except for Luffy, Zoro, and Urouge, who decided he wanted to go back to the East Blue instead. After Law, Bege, Kidd, Bonney, Apoo, Drake, and Hawkins spoke to each other, with multiple arguments mainly from Kidd and Apoo, they decided that the Kidd, Bonney, Fire Tank, On Air, Drake, and Hawkins Pirates would all merge into the Heart Pirates and become one massive crew fleet. Law purposely let the government see their new decision so that all those names coming together would cause a big enough threat for them to be seen as a crew of a yonko, which Law took the title of. The marines had not seen such a gathering of powerful pirates into a singular unit since the days of Rocks, but since Law had no interest in world domination or becoming the pirate king, they let him be for the time being.

Chapter Text

As for the Seven Warlords of the Sea, ever since their dissolution they were also considered regular pirates, for the most part. Sir Crocodile and his main companion Mr. 1 are still at large somewhere on the Grand Line, their Cross Guild initiative with Mihawk and Buggy having failed. Gecko Moria, as a member of Blackbeard’s crew, found himself retreating alongside the former emperor. Bartholomew Kuma is now safely back with the Revolutionaries, whose mission to save him from Mary Geoise was a success and he’s been in hiding ever since. Donquixote Doflamingo as well as his pirate crew are all still in Impel Down. Following the Cross Guild’s dissolution, Mihawk returned to the Muggy Kingdom, where he awaits Zoro’s challenge to face him, Perona still with him. Similarly, Boa Hancock and the Kuja Pirates still operate on Amazon Lily, their rebuilding efforts being nearly complete from the destruction that occurred 5 years ago. The only other warlord no one knows what happened to is Edward Weevil, who disappeared along with his mother. 

The marines had changes of their own. Firstly, due to his inability to stop the uprising of a new pirate king, as well as an outrageous action detailed a bit later, Sakazuki was fired from the position of Fleet Admiral. He has since joined up with the World Government in an attempt to continue stopping pirates, his burning justice still very much alive. Meanwhile, Borsalino was given a new role as Mission Officer due to his age. Fujitora, now known by his name Issho, has become the Fleet Admiral via Sengoku’s recommendation. With Aramaki having disappeared following his epiphany during the Throne War, all three admiral positions were empty. Two members of the Marines were promoted to the position, becoming known as Shirokami and Momozumi, White Wolf and Pink Rat respectively. A new recruit to the marines came in the form of the final Admiral Mitori, or Green Bird, a woman with near-master levels of sword skills and a useful devil fruit. 

However, the biggest change is the death of Vice Admiral Monkey D. Garp. During the aforementioned war at the Holy Land that pit the marines and the World Government against the alliance of pirates and Revolutionaries, Garp saw his grandson, Luffy, about to be killed by then-Fleet Admiral Akainu, much in the same way as Portgas D. Ace was. Having resolved to never lose family again, Garp jumped in the way of Akainu’s magma fist, sacrificing himself for Luffy’s future. His grave is erected in his hometown, Foosha Village. Following his death, his closest friends, Sengoku and Tsuru, both quit the marines. 

As for the Revolutionaries, they mainly stay in the dark. Dragon’s revolution ended up being successful. After teaming up with Luffy and his forces, Dragon fought against the entire World Government, battling the Cipher Pols and the Gorosei. After toppling the Gorosei’s supreme fighting styles, and assassinating Im, king of the world, the World Government system is reestablished, with a world official named Ronce taking over as Chairman, and getting rid of the Celestial Dragon system entirely. However, there is still injustice in the world, and so the light of the revolution is never extinguished. Dragon, Kuma, Koala, and the regional commanders reside in Ivankov's home of Kamabakka Kingdom. Along with Inazuma and Hack, they lead operations at the base, while Sabo is still out at sea to try and meet up with Luffy again. 

It is presumed that Arlong, Don Krieg and Kuro are in prison. The ex-members of Baroque Works are still retired from piracy and own a restaurant in Alabasta. Bellamy has also retired from piracy. Caesar Clown is still at large in the New World. Most notably, Enel was rejected from the moon by the automatas, and crashed down on the Blue Sea. At around the same time, Rob Lucci was running away from the World Government, who after firing him hunted him down for the information he knew. They were both recruited into the ranks of the Mother Pirates, the crew of the aforementioned Yonko Otsu Radiance. 

The friends, families, and allies of the Straw Hats all continue to prosper. A golden statue of Zoro wielding his three swords is erected in Shimotsuki Village, with the Isshin Dojo praising him. In Cocoyashi Village, Nojiko has become their mayor as Genzo has retired. Similarly, Kaya has become mayor of Syrup Town and has fallen in love with Usopp, who promised to return to see her periodically. Zeff and the Baratie staff became huge and relocated to the entrance of the Grand Line so that their popular restaurant could get more customers. Dalton continues to support the Straw Hats’ exploits, with Dr. Kureha wishing Hiruluk could see Chopper now. After helping the crew, Saul remains on Elbaf, becoming their librarian. In Water 7, Iceberg and the Galley-La company work on new blimp technology that can make space travel more accessible to all. After reuniting with Brook, Laboon followed the Straw Hats back to the New World and is now their pet. 

In terms of kingdoms, many promotions have happened. Vivi became queen of Alabasta following her father’s death. Similarly, Viola, Leo, and Fukaboshi have become the rulers of the Dressrosa, Tontatta, and Ryugu kingdoms, respectively. Up on Skypiea, Wyper and Conis get married out of both love and the will to unite their two races of sky people. The ex-members of the Roger Pirates all met up to have one final drink together on Sabaody, where Rayleigh thought about how much Luffy grew and how much he saw both Roger and Shanks in Luffy.

Chapter Text

Shellport Town Arc

Near a random island in the New World, a fleet of marine ships are seen cruising through the water. On board different vessels are Vice Admirals Strawberry, Yamakaji, Dalmatian, Onigumo, and Momonga. As they surround a certain pirate ship, some marines on Onigumo’s ship begin to fear. Onigumo tells them to steel their resolve, and that he will shoot any of them obstructing the law by not engaging. One of the sailors pleads to the Vice Admiral, telling him this is no regular pirate crew, but it is the Straw Hats, the crew of the Second Pirate King, but Onigumo states bluntly and coldly of course he knows that before promptly calling the other four Vice Admirals. Oniguma asks if they are ready, and the other four respond they are. Onigumo tells Momonga to give them a fair warning.

Momonga gets on a Den Den Mushi and begins his announcement by telling the Straw Hats that they are surrounded by the marines, and that a Buster Call has been ordered to eliminate them if necessary. Momonga tells them to come quietly, as he does not wish to shed any blood, but that if they choose to fight, the full force of the Buster Call will be unleashed on them. On the Thousand Sunny, Nami screams that it is the marines and Usopp tells Luffy they need to flee. Chopper then reprimands the two, telling them that the crew of the pirate king could never flee, and Usopp, remembering himself, says that he meant they should make a strategic retreat, though Chopper and Nami know that isn’t what he meant. Carrot tells her Chobro that he look so brave, but that all the same, there are a lot of them to fight.

Robin wonders whether a full Buster Call is necessary, and shudders at the thought of having to face such a nightmare once again. Franky merely laughs and states that that is how they know they made it to the top of piracy, and that Robin shouldn’t worry, since they’ve gotten through this ordeal multiple times before. Jinbe tells Franky to hold on, as they are not yet sure what to do without guidance from their captain. He acknowledges both fleeing and fighting as options, but says that the decision ultimately comes down to Luffy. Brook laughs and states Jinbe is as correct as ever, though they know Luffy’s answer, and that besides, running away would mean he doesn’t have an audience to try his new song out on. Yamato butts in, stating that it is no problem for her and that if Luffy wants she can handle things with help from Zoro and Sanji, asking the two what they think. As Zoro cleans his sword, Sanji swoons over Yamato and tells her she has his full support. Zoro calls him an erotic idiot and Sanji claps back that he’s a mossy bastard. Zoro asks Luffy what he wants to do. As Luffy finishes eating a huge chunk of meat, he grins and says they are going to fight.

As Usopp and Nami grumble, the others begin to move. Jinbe tells them that since there’s five ships, they should split up in pairs and each take one, while the former duo state they will provide cover fire and protect the Sunny (though Zoro notes they are just trying to get out of fighting). As the Marines begin to shoot cannonballs, Nami notes that they could make things way harder. Usopp tells her then they should put out their cannons, and promptly shoots Hissatsu Midoriboshi: Elbath , a bucket leaf pop green that pours mountains of water onto the ships’ cannons. As Usopp tells her water will make them useless, his bounty of 1,500,000,000 is revealed. Nami brings out Zeus, telling him it is time to rain, and uses May Rain Spark, dampening the powder kegs and putting out the matches. Nami tells Usopp she did him one better, as her bounty is revealed to be 627,000,000.

As Carrot lands on her ship, she notes that this is what she’s been training for, putting on her clawed gauntlets and using Eleclaw: Fusion Chain , scratching each Marine in succession and causing a chain of electrocution. Her bounty is revealed to be 670,000,000. As Yamato’s bounty is revealed to be 2,373,000,000, Yamato tells the Marines she hasn’t gone all out in a while, and she wants to try this move. She jumps into the air, twirling her kanabo, and brings it down on Strawberry using Sekai no Kaihō-sha: Nehan so hard his head flattened a bit. As Chopper goes Monster Point , he thinks to himself how he wishes Caesar could see him now, and then grows out his fur into spikes and attacks with Monster Point: Togatta Kegawa Palme , his bounty shown to be an even 1,000,000. Momonga tells Jinbe that he knows the Warlords system no longer exists, but Jinbe simply tells Momonga he’s sorry but his role is the helmsman of the Straw Hat Pirates, before using Gyojin Karate: Sazanaraseiken , slamming the shockwaves into the ground and rupturing the vessel and all the Marines on it. As Jinbe dives into the water, he is revealed to have a bounty of 3,480,000,000. Franky laughs as he fights, telling the Marines that what he is about to use is Vegapunk’s technology and he hopes they like it, going into his super pose to initiate Franky Super Shinkuuma, drawing some Marines into his vacuum hands before launching them into their colleagues at high speeds. His bounty of 839,000,000 is shown as he laughs.

Brook laughs and tells the Marines they are in for a treat, and runs back and forth across the deck, creating ice javelins that stab at the Marines, dubbing it the Soul Parade: Mozart no Hyōga .  The attack scatters into painful shards at the same time as he sheaths his sword, his 843,000,000 bounty revealed. Robin smirks and tells the Marines she has no reason to fear anymore, and uses Gigante Fleur: Gyōjin Karate: Sea Serpent Thrust , pummeling the Marines and their ship. As she asks Sanji to finish up for her, her bounty is revealed to have increased to a massive 2,790,000,000. Sanji obliges, then burns up and says that they interrupted him making food for the ladies, using Ifrit Jambe: Skillet Burst , upper-kicking Dalmatian so hard he flies upward. His bounty of 3,600,000,000 is revealed as he states he hates dogs. Zoro easily slices through the rank-and-file with a single sword slash, and Onigumo rears his eight swords, ready for battle. Zoro smirks and says he hasn’t used Santoryu in a while, and goes for En-Ō Santōryū: Ryū no Mai, spinning like a massive dangerous tornado before rushing Onigumo and defeating him easily. Zoro then grins, with his bounty revealed to be the same as Sanji’s.

As Luffy gets excited, he attacks the Marines with Gomu Gomu no Roc Gatling , before honing in on Yamakaji and bashing him into the ground using Gomu Gomu no Red Roc . As Yamakaji lies in defeat, Luffy says he isn’t done yet, and slingshots himself into the air before going into Gear Fifth and using Gomu Gomu no Gigant , turning himself into a giant. As Zoro realizes in irritation he is going to do it again, he tells the others to fall back to the Sunny, and they oblige, before Luffy decimates the Buster Call by stepping on it. As the marines float around in the water and some of the Vice Admirals hold onto pieces of driftwood, Luffy laughs and yells at them to bring Koby or “Smoky” if they want a serious chance at catching him, then says even better, to bring both, with his massive bounty of 5,600,000,000 reiterated. As Luffy gets back on their ship and Franky prepares a Coup de Burst, a Marine reports back to HQ that their mission to subdue the Pirate King failed, and in New Marineford, a shadowed individual simply says they will catch them next time.

On the Thousand Sunny, Luffy says that is the most fun he’s had in a while. Zoro shares the sentiment, and thanks Luffy for not instantly knocking them all out with his Conqueror’s Haki. Jinbe asks where to next, and Luffy thinks hard, wondering what they should do next. He asks his crew how many of them had achieved their dreams, and he notes that it is himself, Usopp, Robin, Franky, Brook, Carrot, and Yamato. Zoro says that Mihawk is still waiting for him, but that it is not really something they can help him with. Sanji states they could go on an adventure to find the All-Blue, and Nami notes that in the meantime she can finish her map. Luffy smiles and says sure, stating that for him, as long as he kept adventuring with his friends, his dream would always be complete. 

The Green Devil Pirates float along the Grand Line. In her spare time, Cruella catches up on the bigger details of the world that she missed after being cut off for 10 years, including the Summit War of Marineford, the deaths of Whitebeard and Fire Fist Ace, the abolition of the Warlords system, the fall of the Beasts and Big Mom Pirates, the Throne War, the death of Red-Haired Shanks, and of course, Monkey D. Luffy becoming the Pirate King. As she reads all the news, she is fascinated that so many things have happened.

Meanwhile, the rest of the crew begin to get used to having an ex-enemy on board. Cruella, for her part, does what she can to prove that she is now on their side. She helps Adam train, and aids Angel in navigation. She finds a friend in Zane, who also shares her love of reading and learning new things. As she sits in the kitchen one day, talking to Yato as he washes some plates, he asks her how her powers worked in terms of range. Cruella tells him she can send them to anywhere she can see herself, or anywhere she’s been to before, provided she can clearly visualize the place. Yato tells her that will be useful, making Cruella smile and blush. As Angel walks in, she asks the older woman what her role on the crew will be. Cruella tells her she can plan pretty well, having led a large organization, so she can be their strategist. Angel thinks that is wonderful, as she states with Shocker as their captain, they will definitely need one.

Soon enough, a few days after their fight with the Saber Nation, Taco realizes the wood of the Stormy White is beginning to fall off. Cruella states their ship is in need of repair, and says they should try to find a shipwright on the next island they get to.

Move index

Chapter Text

As the crew follows Angel’s log pose, they end up landing on a small island that houses a settlement known as Shellport Town. Cruella recognizes it as a colorful inventor town where many geniuses create ingenious technology and machines, said to be the birthplace of science. Shocker says that Vegapunk is the only scientist he knows, and Cruella tells them Vegapunk popularized science and inventing when he came into play, but that Shellport’s residents had started years before Vegapunk was even born. As they dock the ship, Angel splits the group up into sections, each with a specific task to complete while there. She and Adam will ask around town for someone who can fix their ship, and Shocker and Yato will stock up on food supplies. The other three will remain on the ship and protect it. 

A bit later, Yato is seen carrying bags, telling Shocker to hurry up. Shocker, looking through windows in stores around them, tells him he’s right behind him. As he passes a pair of old men, he overhears their conversation regarding a legendary shipwright. When he asks the old men who this shipwright is, they tell him he was called “Jordan”. Shocker thanks them and rushes to their ship, following his chef. When the crew gather again and debrief, Angel tells them they striked out in finding a shipwright. Shocker then tells them they can have Jordan fix it. As everyone stares at him and asks who Jordan is, he tells them of what he had heard from the old men, and that apparently he’s a legendary shipwright and inventor.

The others are skeptical, but Adam says he had heard much of the same thing after talking to an elderly female cat mink. In a short flashback, Adam is seen having a conversation with the mink, who tells him Jordan was a close friend of her husband’s who had died 10 years ago. Adam asks where her husband is, but the mink tells him he’s left the island to try and rendez-vous with their son. In the present, Adam hands them a flier he had received from the mink, telling them it’s plastered all around town. As Cruella reads the flier, she tells them it says he’s the “Cryogenic Genius”. When no one else understands what that signifies, she tells them it must mean that Jordan is dead, but either his body or brain or something is preserved in a cryogenic state somewhere on the island. Angel, shocked, asks if that is possible, but Cruella tells them if there were ever a group of scientists capable of such a feat, it’s the Shellport inventors. 

Angel tells them that regardless, they need to find something, so she tells them Shocker, Adam, and herself will go into the village and try again. As the trio look around the town, they see a massive building, by far the biggest one on the island, looming ahead of them. A street vendor tells them that the building is the Shellport Museum of Science, where tons of inventions made over the years are stored. As Adam thanks him, Shocker’s eyes light up and he tells Adam and Angel he has a plan. When Angel worriedly asks what he’s going to do, Shocker says that if Jordan is preserved somewhere, then he can’t really be dead, and so they just needed to steal him and awaken him. Angel screams at how bad an idea that is, but Shocker already bolts for the museum.

Chapter Text

As Shocker gets to the museum door, he sees giant marble busts of crocodiles lining all around the museum. He wonders about this for a moment, then decides it’s not important and heads for the entrance. Two marine guards ask for his ticket, but he easily smashes their heads together and runs into the building. As he runs around the large area, he spots an exhibit that says “Cryogenic Genius Chamber”. A large steel door blocks his path, but he kicks it down using Gomu Gomu no Stamp. As he peers inside through the dust, he shivers and realizes how cold it is inside the chamber. He then sees a singular jar filled with liquid, and in it, what looks like a brain. Figuring this is his objective, he stretches and grabs the jar, before turning and running back.

As he runs back through the museum, some marines flank him, holding some remotes. As they press red buttons, certain exhibits of the museum begin to move, such as a mechanical tyrannosaurus and robotic suit of armor. As Shocker is confused, the guards state that most things in the museum have been programmed by the Shellport inventors to defend the area, and that using those remotes they can control their creations. However, Shocker merely exclaims how cool that is, before jumping to avoid the tyrannosaurus' bite and bringing it down with a single Gomu Gomu no Yari . As he lands, the suit of armor charges at him with a sword. Shocker easily sidesteps and uses Gomu Gomu no Bullet to punch a hole in the armor. 

Shocker heads for the entrance but a group of marines get in his way. Luckily, they are taken out by Angel and Adam, who ask Shocker if he’s an idiot. As he laughs and thanks them, the trio rush back towards the docks. Meanwhile, at a marine base not too far from Shellport, a rotund man receives a call from the museum and picks it up, bluntly asking the guards what they want. The marines who Shocker had beat explain the situation, then plead with him to assist them, as they have identified the culprit as “Green Hat” Shocker. As the man is revealed to be Sentomaru, captain of the Marine’s Science Unit, he grumbles and tells them he’s on his way. As he tells his men to move, he mentions the seraphim are still busted from the Throne War, and to deploy a squadron of pacifista. One of his men informs him only one pacifista is currently ready for battle, as the rest are getting upgraded. He exasperatedly shouts fine.

As the trio run through the town, Adam asks what the point of stealing the jar is, as they have no way of possibly reviving him. Shocker says he’s sure Zane can figure it out. As they reach the docks, cannonfire is heard, and the crew see Sentomaru’s marine vessel shooting at them. Boarding the Stormy, Taco tells Shocker they need to leave now. Shocker merely hands the jar to Zane, telling him to take a look at it, before using Gomu Gomu no Rocket to propel himself onto the marine ship. Angel asks if he’s braindead, but Cruella states he must be stalling the ship so that they can depart, though Adam tells her she’s giving him too much credit.

As Shocker lands on the ship, he bowls into a group of marines, taking them down. More surround him, but he uses Gomu Gomu no Gatling to take care of the soldiers. As Sentomaru steps up, the large man tells him today will be the day he’s imprisoned. Shocker smirks and attacks with another Gomu Gomu no Gatling, but as his fists meet Sentomaru’s palms, he finds them being blocked. Sentomaru then hits him with his palm, sumo style, and pushes Shocker into the mast. As Shocker gets up, he states that that attack had hurt him real bad for some reason, though blunt damage should be reduced because of his fruit. Sentomaru stands in front of him and brings his huge axe down, with the Green Devil captain jumping out of the way at the last moment. 

As he lands, he is directly in the pacifista’s line of fire, and the cyborg charges a hand lazer. However, Shocker’s eyes light up, and he says that he really wants a robot too, and grabbing it, he smashes its head on the deck using Gomu Gomu no Supplex . As Sentomaru moves to intercept, Shocker follows it up with Gomu Gomu no Fusen, inflating himself and flinging the pacifista right onto the Stormy, much to the shock of his crew. Sentomaru tells him they’re not done, but Shocker smiles and tells the man he has to go now, stretching his arm onto his ship and jumping on board. As Sentomaru shouts in outrage, the Stormy White turns and heads out the harbor, off to sea.

Move Index

Marine Science Unit Captain

Sentomaru

Chapter Text

On the ship, the crew wonder what to do with the pacifista. Cruella looks at the brain and wonders aloud whether it would be possible to fix the brain into the body and revive Jordan that way, since his consciousness would be stored. Zane tells them that from the little knowledge Helzen had told him about pascifistas, they are on some level human, and that it may be possible if they perform a brain transplant. As Zane goes into Muscle Boost to take the body to his doctor’s cabin, Shocker gives a thumbs up and says that was his plan the whole time, with Adam and Yato irritatedly stating they know he made that up.  

A few hours later, the rest of the crew are relaxing on the deck, when Zane and Cruella emerge. As Adam asks how it went, Zane smiles and tells him to see for himself, and following them, the huge robot walks awkwardly out onto the deck. As he looks around, wondering where he is, he introduces himself to the crew as Jordan. He wonders why he’s on a ship, as he could have sworn he was dead. Cruella tells him he was, in a sense, and tells him they revived him in a different body. Sure enough, as he looks at his reflection in the mirror, he exclaims at how different he looks, and wonders why he resembles “Kuma the Tyrant”. Cruella tells him it’ll take too long to explain right now, but asks him what the last thing he remembers is. After thinking for a moment, Jordan tells them what had happened to him, and his flashback is revealed. 

40 years before the current time, Jordan was born in Shellport Town. Ever since he was a child, he showed great potential to be a shipwright, something that not that many people did in his town. Realizing he could make lots of money in the future by building ships, he decided to dedicate his life to its practice. He would commonly not only build ships himself, but also repair and enhance other vessels with some of his inventions. He never cared who the ship was for; as long as he was paid enough, he would happily help anyone who needed it. His best friend was a cat mink named Linbergh Sr., an inventor who specialized in steampunk. The duo commonly worked together, and were soon known as Shellport’s Construction Duo. Jordan also learned of a man named Dr. Vegapunk, and he decided his dream would be to invent technology on the same level as him. 

However, when he was 30, CP5 arrived on the island. They came in search of him because one of the ships he had created for the World Government had accidentally killed a celestial dragon. As the members of CP5 discussed, they mention how even though it was the celestial dragon’s own fault he got himself killed, they were still ordered to execute Jordan for having “planned criminal activity”. As they approached his house, Jordan, who had heard of their arrival, tried to run. He ran to the docks, trying to board one of the ships, but CP5 easily caught up to him. As they apprehend him, the government agents tell him his death will show the rest of the town what happens when one tries to kill a Celestial Dragon. Jordan protested, stating he never meant to, but the agents did not listen. 

As Jordan was brought to the town square, the townsfolk attempted to save him, but were pushed back by the government agents. The duo who had caught Jordan announced that he was found guilty of the murder of a Celestial Dragon, and that he will be executed for his crimes. As Lindbergh cried for his friend, Jordan told him to continue his legacy for him, before having his heart stabbed in front of the town. Lindbergh Sr., wishing to honor his friend, developed a cryogenic chamber, and he decided to store Jordan’s brain in the chamber in stasis. He then decided to honor his friend’s memory by putting it up as an exhibit in the Shellport Museum, so people knew of the legendary Jordan’s existence. His brain has since gone on to be known as Shellport’s National Treasure.

As his story ends, Adam tells Jordan he heard from an old cat that he had died 10 years ago. Jordan is shocked that his old buddy Lindbergh Sr. and his wife are still alive, but says they have always been tough minks. Taking off the hat that all pacifista wear, he wonders how much the world changed in the time he was gone. He then asks the crew why he’s on a ship, and Shocker, smiling, tells him they are pirates and want to recruit him as their shipwright. At first, Jordan looks apprehensive, wishing to return to his home, but then he notices that the ship is in desperate need of repair. He shakes his head, stating that won’t do at all, and shows them his amazing shipwright skills, patching the wood expertly. As Taco marvels about how good he is, the man laughs heartily and claims he will join them because the Stormy is a high-maintenance ship and they would need a great shipwright to handle it. Shocker jumps on him and welcomes him to the crew, with Jordan laughing and exclaiming his catchphrase, “GREAT!” The crew toast to their new member, and the Green Devil Pirates sail off to their next adventure.

Great Shipwright and Inventor

Jordan (10 Years Ago)

Chapter Text

Germa Arc

A few days later, the Green Devils continue on their journey. On the ship, Jordan, having done some repairs to his face so that he looked younger and different than the regular pacifistas, shows Taco and Zane the key to making repairs on the ship, and tells them that no matter what, they have to make sure their keel never breaks. Jordan then wonders what this body of his can do, with Zane telling him that he’s a cyborg now and he can fight. Jordan points at a rock in the water nearby, and accidentally blows it up with his lazer, shocking himself while Taco and Zane exclaim how cool he is. Jordan asks Taco to show him their weapons stash, as he plans to modify himself, implementing attacks that he can control more easily.

The rest of the crew are all doing their own thing, with Shocker sleeping because of how bored he is. Adam is training alone inside, and Cruella walks in the room, hoping to find a quiet place to read. As they greet each other, Cruella, ever intrigued by her new cremates, asks the swordsman why he likes using the Three Sword Style, as it is not very common in the world. She adds that to her knowledge, Roronoa Zoro is the only other person in the world to use it. Adam mentions that Zoro is partially the reason he began using Three Sword Style, but that it also involved someone he knew in his past, as he begins to flashback to a few years ago.

By this point, Adam, now using two swords, was well on his way on his goal to challenge and defeat all the swordsmen in the East Blue. He had sailed around on his raft, hopping from island to island, finding and taking down every island’s strongest swordsmen. On this particular day, he was relaxing on his boat when his stomach growled loudly. He looked into his pack, then sighed when he realized he didn’t have much food left. Adam resolved he’d make sure to get some food from the next place he went to. Whether he would steal it or buy it, he wasn’t yet sure.

Later that day, he arrived at a small island with an even smaller town, and went on shore to look for food. Inside the local tavern, he met a man named Soto, who was a regular civilian but a major sword enthusiast. Soto asked him why he came all the way to their small village, and Adam replied he was a simple wanderer looking for fights. As Adam’s food arrived, the barkeep told him the staggering price, and Adam nervously realized he couldn’t afford that. Soto, understanding his predicament, quickly paid for his meal, stating that fellow enthusiasts should help each other out. The duo had an amicable lunch together, talking of swords and their different meito ranks. As they ate, Adam read the latest newspaper, where he saw a picture of Roronoa Zoro wielding three swords at once, to which he mentioned he thought it was impractical. Soto told him that despite what he thought, Zoro was one of the world’s strongest swordsmen, and Adam said he’d fight him when the time comes.  

As they finished up their food, a bandit swordsman entered the bar. The bandit mentioned he had heard someone was going around challenging swordsmen, and he challenged Adam to a duel. Soto told Adam not to trust him, as bandits were known for their lies, but Adam said he had to believe in honor and the swordsman’s code. A few minutes later, Adam stared down the bandit across the road. Adam tells the swordsmen he’s ready, and the bandit beckons him forth. However, as Adam was about to attack, about 20 more bandits appeared and overwhelmed him. They then started beating him, causing him to bleed. Soto, not wanting Adam to get hurt, attempted to save him with a broom, but was beaten up and captured. As Adam is left beaten on the floor, he swore he would save Soto no matter what.

In the bandits’ wooden shack they were using as a hideout, Soto is being tortured as the bandits told him to lead them to his house so they could swipe his valuables. The older man screamed out in pain as the bandits beat him up. However, he said he still had faith that Adam would come and help him. The bandits laughed, stating he had no hope left because Adam had no connection to Soto, so if he was smart he would have run away by then. Another bandit mentions that Adam wasn’t exactly lawful himself, so it’s not like he was a hero or anything.

Suddenly, the entire hideout was cut into pieces, the walls and roof all crumbling around them. The bandits were confused, but stepping out of the dust was Adam, wielding two swords in either hand and the Kuro Kusanagi in his mouth, telling the bandits to guess again. He then advanced on them, telling them if they were smart, they would have never messed with him in the first place, before slashing and defeating all of them in mere moments. As he untied and helped Soto down, Soto asked him why he was using three swords. Adam merely smirked and said he was doing what was practical in order to save a friend.

As the flashback ended, Cruella smiles and thanks Adam for being vulnerable with her. Adam simply states they were crewmates now, and that they need to be able to trust each other.

Chapter Text

A few hours later, the crew arrive at what seems to be a small country. As they dock in the harbor, they see some giant snails in the distance, with Zane wondering what they’re doing there. Shocker jumps down onto the wooden docks platform and is greeted by two soldiers holding rifles. They are wearing gray suits with the number 66 emblazoned in orange on it, and white cowls with sunglasses. As the soldiers tell Shocker to identify himself, Angel jumps down before Shocker can expose them and tells them they’re travelers looking to rest for a few days in the town. The soldiers tell her that there is an inn further in the town, and that they should take care to not make trouble in town, lest they be imprisoned.

As the rest of the crew disembark, Adam asks Jordan if he’s coming, but the shipwright responds that being relatively new, he wishes to stay with the ship and make sure it is safe for the night. As he heads below deck, the rest of the crew head into town. As they look around, Cruella notices a castle on the outskirts of the town, a few kilometers away. Atop its tallest pillar, a flag with the same number as before, 66, flies high, to which Cruella vaguely recognizes, but cannot place her finger on. Meanwhile, a mysterious man in silhouette watches them from on top of a building. He reports on a Den Den Mushi that the target has been sighted. 

The next day, the crew wake up and decide to split up. Cruella suggests the boys head back to the ship and check on Jordan, while she and Angel continue looking around town. They oblige, and Shocker tells them they need to get Jordan to eat some of the food they had the evening before, as it was amazing. However, as they reach their ship, they are all horrified, as they find Stormy impaled by large iron rods. Lots of wood is splintered off, but thankfully the keel isn’t broken so it can still sail. They rush into the ship and find Jordan badly beaten, his arm also impaled by iron. His metal body protected him, guaranteeing his survival, but the large man is still badly injured. As Zane patches him up to the best of his ability, Jordan tells the others what had happened. That night, a man had crept onto the ship and ransacked the place, frantically looking for something. He had continuously shouted “where”. Jordan attempted to stop him, but the man was strong and he was beaten. Then the man decided whatever it was, it wasn’t on the ship, and impaled the ship in anger as he left. As Adam and Yato wonder what they could have that someone would go to such lengths for, Shocker becomes angry, telling them he promises he won’t get away with this.

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, on the girls side, they are walking along a cobbled street. Cruella noticed that they hadn’t seen people in a while, but Angel tells her they’re just probably more towards the town square. Suddenly, a lady with pink hair covering one of her eyes drops down from a building. She wears a pink bodysuit with a purple cloak in the shape of moth wings. The number 0 is plastered on the cloak, and she sports a 6 on each of her thighs. She is revealed to be “Poison Pink” Vinsmoke Reiju, an ex-member of the Germa royal family and the Germa 66. As Cruella remembers the stories she heard about the seafaring kingdom and its evil army, Reiju tells them it no longer exists, and that now the Germa Kingdom is under the rule of the Jose Pirates. Angel gets ready to fight, asking what she wants, but Reiju merely lets out a toxic fog, which obstructs their vision and causes them to choke. She then knocks out Angel with one hit and kidnaps her, flying away using her raid suit. By the time the fog clears, Cruella looks up to see the two speeding off toward the castle. 

In a hurry, Cruella calls the boys and tells them the news of Angel’s kidnapping, shocking the others. As Adam tells her the state of their ship, she deduces that the two incidents cannot be a coincidence. Yato agrees, stating that the person who attacked Jordan and the Stormy must have also been from that crew, and he wasn’t looking for something, but someone: Angel. Zane worriedly asks why someone would want to capture their friend, but Shocker says it doesn’t matter, as they’re getting her back. Cruella tells them to regroup with her at the plaza, and that they can plan their next move from there.

As the boys hang up the phone, they all jump off the ship and begin to run toward the town. Jordan follows them; Zane tells him to continue resting, but Jordan says he has to help, and he can't just allow himself to relax. As they run into the plaza, they see a sight that shocks them: 300 grunts are waiting for them, weapons drawn. As they look into the crowd, Cruella identifies at least half of them to be Germa kingdom soldiers, like the two they met at the docks the day before, and the other half to be regular pirate fodder. 

The guys begin to fight, using their own styles to take out the advancing group. Shocker attacks with Gomu Gomu no Gatling , and Adam slashes through a group using Santoryu: Oni Giri . Zane goes into Claw Boost , and Yato uses Party Table Kick Course. From behind the others, Taco snipes some of the soldiers with rifles, and Jordan punches some others out, asking for the one who damaged their ship to reveal himself. Just then, the man appears, stating he’s right there, before punching Jordan away with a fist of steel. The man has long, spiky, black hair that runs down to his lower back. He has piercing red eyes, and iron studs on his ears. He wears a sleeveless black tunic and dark pants. He has on a black choker, fingerless gloves, and a red sash tied around his waist, along with combat boots. The man is introduced as “Blacksteel” Wolfide Jareel, First-Mate of the Jose Pirates, with a bounty of 120,000,000 beli.

Jose Pirates First Mate

"Blacksteel" Wolfide Jareel

Chapter Text

Shocker turns to him and is about to throw a punch, but Jareel simply jumps and lands on a balcony of the town’s largest building. He shouts to his captain, stating that they’re here, and his captain walks out.

The man has short, straight magenta hair falling on either side of his face. He has a small mustache and beard, and his face is a constant sneer. He wears a wizard’s hat, a simple white button-up shirt, and black pants. On his back, he has a lavish gold cape. He introduces himself as Jose, the captain of his titular crew. Jose tells them that he is Germa’s ruler, and that he welcomes them to the Phantom Cache, his crew’s main base. He informs them he didn’t want to use the castle, as it was too creepy for his taste. As Cruella asks what happened to the real royal family, Jose tells them that he had invaded Germa a while back and had Jareel kill Vinsmoke Judge. Since then, he took over the kingdom, and the Vinsmoke siblings have joined his crew as his Four Colorful Commanders. 

He then says they deserve an explanation before their death. He flashes back to a few weeks ago, when he and a man in silhouette had a meeting in his throne room. The Germa siblings stood behind Jose’s throne, wearing clothes more befitting of pirates. The man told Jose he was looking for his daughter, and asked Jose if he could do something about it. Jose responded that for the right price, his crew could definitely recover the girl, though he will need to see a picture of the target, as well as half of the money upfront. As the man hands him a photograph, in the present, Jose shows them the same photo, revealing it to be a picture of Angel. As Shocker yells at him to give her back, Jose shakes his head, stating that he was already paid and thus can’t renege on a deal. Yato tells him they’ll stop him, but Jose boredly tells them he's had enough of talking with them, and tells his soldiers to bring “it” out.

Captain of the Jose Pirates

Jose

Jose Pirates Four Colorful Commanders

"Sparking Red" Vinsmoke Ichiji

Jose Pirates Four Colorful Commanders

"Dengeki Blue" Vinsmoke Niji

Jose Pirates Four Colorful Commanders

"Winch Green" Vinsmoke Yonji

Jose Pirates Four Colorful Commanders

"Poison Pink" Vinsmoke Reiju

Chapter Text

The massive double doors swing open, and the soldiers bring out a massive cannon. Jose tells them that his Ganymede Cannon can obliterate them, but he wants to play a game with them first. Once it finishes charging in three minutes, he plans on using the cannon to destroy their ship, and then his crew will hunt down theirs, making it a survival game. Jose cackles, stating the town square and Phantom Cache will be their playground, and that the Green Devils will have to hide for the rest of their miserably short lives. 

He tells his soldiers to deal with them, heading back inside, and Jareel smirks, telling Shocker he’ll be waiting for him up on the top of the battlement behind Phantom Cache. Taco panics, stating there are multiple things they need to attend to, but Cruella tells them they’ll split up. She says that she and Zane will rescue Angel and bring her back. Jordan and Adam will get back to the ship and try to move it out of the way of the cannon. And Shocker, Taco, and Yato will fight off the grunts. As they each begin their individual missions, Shocker beats down a horde of grunts trying to advance on Adam and Jordan. As the duo reach the ship, they raise the anchor and begin to steer it away from the port. Some guards begin shooting at them, but Adam parries their bullets with slashes, allowing Jordan to concentrate on his job.

Yato looks back and forth between the ship and the cannon and quickly realizes Adam and Jordan will not be able to move it enough to avoid serious damage. He runs towards the large cannon, with Taco asking him where he is going. Yato responds that he’ll take it upon himself to stop the cannon. As he rushes for the cannon, kicking enemies out of his way, the countdown for the cannon falls to 5 seconds. Just as it reaches one second, Yato jumps up and kicks its underside using Anti-Manner Kick Course. The cannon head swivels upward, as if firing at the sky, and Yato congratulates himself, stating they managed to avoid a crisis. However, at the last moment, the cannon swivels back down and aims right at Yato, firing at him point-blank with a massive surge of energy. As Yato falls limply to the ground, Shocker screams his name.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, Reiju and Angel arrive at the old castle. They fly through a window in one of the topmost rooms, which turns out to be Judge’s old throne room. As they arrive, a mysterious man with blue hair like Angel’s hobbles over to them. He looks at Angel and begins to tear up, saying her name, before thanking Reiju for her contribution. Reiju says his thanks isn’t necessary, but the rest of her boss’s money is, and demands for the rest of the payment. The man nervously begins to answer, before promptly taking out a pistol and attempting to shoot Reiju. However, the Germa soldier merely dodges to the side and kicks him hard, sending him flying into the table of the dark room. She notices a briefcase next to the table and, after confirming it is the money, takes it. As she reaches the window, she tells the man that in the future, he would be wise to remember that no matter who they worked for, they are still the evil army Germa 66, before taking her leave. 

The man begins to swear, saying the Germa will get what’s coming to them for this. He then collects himself and stares at Angel. Angel nervously asks who he is, and the man reveals himself to be Jude, Angel’s long lost father. Angel refuses to believe him, but he holds up a picture of her mother, who she instantly recognized, and Angel begins tearing up. Angel then flashes back to her time on the island with her mother, with her mom telling her her father had abandoned their family because he was a scumbag only interested in money, and that since she was a former pirate, he had wanted to turn her over to the marines. In the present, Jude notices Angel being apprehensive, and apologizes for abandoning them all those years ago. He tells his daughter he regrets how he did things, and that he will make up for it all now that they can live together. He requests she stay with him, and says they can rebuild their family. 

However, Angel refuses, stating she can never forgive him for the pain he caused her mother. Abandoning them was bad enough, but turning them in was simply evil. She tells Jude thank you for the offer, but she needs to get back to her friends. Jude asks her if her friends are the pirates she was taken from, and she says yes. Jude shouts at her, stating he cannot believe his daughter is gallivanting with pirates, and that it is a disgrace to their family for her to follow her mother’s footsteps. Angel angrily asks why Jude only wanted to act like a father now, and demands to know where he was her entire childhood. Jude says enough, and takes his pistol once more, aiming to shoot Angel to incapacitate her. He aims for the side of her stomach, thinking to himself that the doctors he can buy will fix her up, but she moves so that the bullet hits her leg instead. 

Unable to use Geppou or Rankyaku, Angel forcefully shoves her father, before striking him in the shoulder with a painful Shigan. As the man howls in pain, Angel limps over to the window. Seeing something below her, she stands on the window sill and faces her father. As Jude screams at her to stay, she tells the man that she already has a family, before promptly jumping off the ledge and freefalling. As Angel prays that what she thinks she saw was real, Zane flies right at her through one of Cruella’s voids and catches her mid-fall. As they go through another void and end up on the road next to Cruella, Angel hugs the cat and thanks the duo for saving her. Cruella smiles and says she didn’t really look like she needed saving, but Angel says that even so, she is happy she found people she can rely on.

Angel's Father

Jude

Chapter Text

With Yato passed out on the floor, the crew is enraged for their friend. Shocker fights his way through the crowd and reaches Yato’s side. As Taco provides cover fire, Shocker slumps Yato against a building’s wall, stating this should keep him out of the fight for now. As Jordan and Adam arrive, having moved the ship to a safer side of the port, Adam asks Shocker what the plan is. He asks Adam if he even has to ask, and says they’re going to take on the Jose Pirates directly. He then bolts for the Phantom Cache, with the others not far behind him.

As the crew enter the building and run down the hall, they encounter a split in the hallways. The entrance they just came from is south, and the path splits into a cross, with corridors branching to the left, the right, and straight ahead, as well as a staircase that leads upward. As Shocker wonders which way they should go, Adam says the best thing to do is split up, stating that if there are multiple commanders like Jose said, then it’s very unlikely that they would all be together in one place, and in a base like this each person should have their own room or area. Shocker agrees with the plan, rushing straight ahead. Taco wishes them all good luck and runs to the right, while Jordan heads to the left, leaving Adam to run up the stairs.

Jordan runs through the hallway, wondering what kind of fruit abilities the rest of them had that he will have to contend with. As he is running, his face is grabbed and slammed into a wall, causing it to crack. As he gets up, he sees a green-haired man wearing a green raid suit. “Winch Green” Yonji, with a bounty of 204,000,000, introduces himself and asks Jordan if he’s the metal man Jareel had so much fun with, and states that he’s excited to have fun too. Adam bursts out onto the roof, and sees Reiju there. As her bounty of 190,000,000 is revealed, she asks if he is the one she’s meant to fight, while Adam simply glares. For Taco’s part, he enters the room slowly, hoping nobody had heard him, but a voice tells him to quit trying to be discreet when he was already discovered. As Taco simply looks shocked out of fear, the voice is revealed to belong to “Sparking Red” Vinsmoke Ichiji, a man with a bounty of 231,000,000. Shocker swings open the door in front of him and enters a spacious room. He sees another door with a window, leading to the battlement Jareel spoke of. As he runs, he gets halfway across the room before he is slashed by something too quick to see. As he looks around, “Dengeki Blue” Vinsmoke Niji, worth 222,000,000, introduces himself, stating that there’s no need for him to reach Jareel, as he'll end him now. 

Chapter Text

On the roof, Adam stares down Reiju. Reiju smirks and comments that it’s unfortunate she must fight against such a strong, handsome man. Adam warns her he will not be holding back just because she is a woman, and Reiju giggles, telling the swordsman she would feel insulted if he did. Reiju promptly jumps above him and rains down a flurry of kicks, which Adam has to quickly block using his defensive Multicut . As he tries a counter slash, she backflips and dodges easily. Adam runs at her and tries to use Santoryu : Oni Giri , but Reiju, blocking the attack with her cape, tells him the material is both malleable and durable, so it would not break so easily. He switches his strategy and sends a Hyaku Pound Ho her way, but her Shield Cape blocks it once again. As the fight wears on, Adam quickly realizes her kicks are way stronger than normal, and he is being bested, her powerful legs slamming him into an opposing wall. 

Adam tells her to not count him out yet, and rushes at her, poised to strike for an uppercut slash. Reiju sees this and dodges, but Adam grins and says he expected the Colorful Commander to do that, allowing him to bring down a powerful Santoryu: Tora Gari , managing to slash her. As Reiju watches blood drip from her chest, she resolves to use her raid suit’s specialty: poison. As energy surges through her suit, poison gathers at her fingertips. She uses Doku Bullet to shoot concentrated poison right on his side, which explodes painfully. Adam gets up and tries to move, but he suddenly feels nauseous. Reiju tells him the poison is working through his system, so feeling that is only normal. However, Adam grits through the pain and states it won’t end him, surprising Reiju and slashing her across the torso. Reiju states he’s quite strong, but she just needs to go to the next level.

Reiju uses Pink Hornet , a move where she expels a fog cloud from her mouth and makes the whole roof poisonous. The poison is incredibly toxic, and Adam is coughing up blood, trembling. Reiju tells him that all she needs to do was increase the dosage of poison so that it would speed up its effects in his system. Aware that he is going to die, Adam tells himself he has to beat her no matter what, or else he can't look Shocker in the face. As he gets up, Adam manages to awaken the Hinoken , an ability where his drive and passion itself are so powerful that they physically ignite his swords. Remembering that this is the technique used to avenge Techi, Adam swears that he'll use it whenever he has to, if it means beating his opponent now. His fire manages to clear away the fog, leaving Reiju shocked. He rushes toward her in a flash, finishing the fight with Santoryu: Hinoken: Honossuchi no Tsuno, a massive illusion of a charging bull appearing behind him as he slams into her.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Reiju crashes into a wall painfully. As Adam’s swords’ flames peter out, Reiju accepts defeat, but tells him Adam still inhaled enough poison to die. Adam sits on the ground and says he doesn't care as long as he is able to see through his captain’s dream. Reiju is so touched by his conviction that she falls for him. She asks if he’s the man she’s been waiting for, and Adam irritatedly asks what the hell she means. Reiju tells him to calm down, before kissing him to drain the poison from his mouth, leaving Adam dumbfounded. As the process ends, Adam blushes and backs away, asking if she’s crazy. Reiju tells him he may want to listen, as there’s a very important key to stopping the Ganymede Cannon from firing again.

Meanwhile, back in the left-hand corridor, Jordan is getting beaten pretty badly by Yonji. Jordan tries to use his close-range attack, Tekken , but Yonji simply moves out of the way before delivering a strong counter blow. The Germa soldier taunts Jordan, telling him he’s too slow to catch him. The Green Devil pirate uses Danyaku Arm   to shoot a multitude of bullets at the man, but Yonji merely ducks behind his Shield Cape . Jordan even tries crushing Yonji downwards, but Yonji kicks him under his chin, before punching him hard into the wall. Yonji then extends his arm and grabs Jordan, using Crusher to bust his left arm and smash him into the ground. As Jordan catches his breath, he wonders to himself how many enhancements this guy has.

At that moment, Jordan’s Den Den Mushi rings. As he answers it, he yells over that it’s difficult to talk since he’s engaged in combat. Adam is revealed to be the one who called, and with Taco and Shocker also on the line, he tells them he’s beaten his opponent and learnt the secret to their Ganymede Cannon. Adam tells them that the cannon is connected to the four Germa siblings’ raid suits and draws power from them, then fires compressed energy. Therefore, by defeating all four of the Colorful Commanders, they can stop the cannon once and for all. Jordan tells Adam not to worry about it, since beating them is their plan anyway. Shocker agrees, then further states that regardless, he is fighting Jareel, too. 

As the call ends, Yonji asks Jordan what they were babbling about. Jordan pants, then simply gets up and says he was just hearing some words of encouragement. As Yonji asks what he means, Jordan determinedly says this is his first fight as a member of the Green Devil Pirates, and he can’t give up so easily since they are counting on him to win. This pisses Yonji off, as the Jose pirate tells Jordan that he’s just a Pacifista, and gaining sentience won’t be enough to defeat a true enhanced human. He used his arm winch and grabbed Jordan’s face, swinging him around using Winch Danton before slamming him into the ground. Yonji turns away, stating Jordan’s beneath him, but the cyborg laughs, pissing Yonji off even more. Yonji rushes at Jordan, getting close to punch him, but backs up when Jordan points his Danyaku Arm at him. Yonji confidently states nothing will get past his cape, and reaches for it, but is then shocked to see it missing. Jordan holds it up in his hand, revealing he pulled it off when he had baited Yonji.  Without his cape to block the attack, Jordan finishes him off with a point-blank Kuchi Cannonball, shooting a large cannonball from his mouth that explodes on impact.

Move Index

Chapter Text

At the time of the short call, Taco was still fighting his opponent. He bleeds from his mouth, noting that Ichiji was not an easy enemy to face. Ichiji merely shoots a laser at Taco, but the sniper rolls out of the way, then meets another one with his Bakuhatsu Shot, the attacks clashing in midair. Taco tries tricking Ichiji, telling him that he’s really an undercover member of the Jose Pirates Jose had sent to infiltrate the Green Devils years ago, but Ichiji tells him that floundering to find something that will save his life is both demeaning and futile, shocking Taco with his curtness. Ichiji says the pure fact is that as members of the Germa 66, they are much too powerful to be beaten by the likes of them, but Taco tells him he knows his crew can do it.

Meanwhile in Shocker’s room, the Green Devil captain tries once more to get across the room, but Niji suddenly appears, telling Shocker to quit ignoring him before kicking him back hard. Niji taunts Shocker, stating the only way to get through the door is by beating him. Shocker gets mad and tries using Gomu Gomu no Gatling , but Niji dodges the punches thanks to speed. The enhanced human laughs, taunting Shocker by saying he can't catch him. As Shocker’s arms snap back into place, he irritatedly tells Niji that if he isn’t going to fight him directly then he should move out of his way and let him fight someone who will. Niji gets visibly annoyed, stating that he’ll fight alright, and rams his knee into Shocker, using Henry Needle. However, the electric attack doesn’t work on the rubberman, and Shocker states that fighting him is a waste of time and he needs to save “it” for Jareel. Niji continues beating him up at the speed of lightning, and tells him he wouldn’t make it to Jareel because he would kill him now. He then says that if electricity won’t work, he can at least slash him, bringing out an ornate golden dagger, and is about to stab Shocker when he is suddenly kicked back and flies into the wall. 

Niji gets up and asks who dares to strike him, and both he and Shocker see it is none other than a recovered Yato, much to Shocker’s surprise. Shocker asks Yato how he is standing after the damage he took from the cannon, and Yato explains through a short flashback that Zane and the girls had found his hiding place thanks to Zane’s keen nose, and he was treated enough to enter battle again. Yato tells his captain the others are now fighting off the grunts, waiting for the rest of them to finish up inside. Yato tells Shocker to leave this clown to him, because he knows he wants to go and fight the other guy. Shocker thanks Yato and finally runs to the back door. As Shocker leaves, Niji, clearly mad, tells Yato that when he’s through with him, he’ll be wishing he had just stayed down. 

As Shocker closes the back door, he sees a large battlement, certainly the one his opponent would be on. He takes the stairs leading to the battlement’s roof, where Jareel is waiting for him. Busting down the door to the roof with a kick, Shocker spots his opponent a few meters away, who laughs when he sees the Green Devil captain. Jareel taunts him, saying he wasn’t sure that such a weakling would make it all the way to him, but Shocker tells him he made a vow to beat him and so he came to make good on that. Jareel introduces himself to Shocker and reveals he ate the Tetsu Tetsu no Mi (Iron Iron Fruit), a paramecia fruit that allows the user’s body to become iron and turn one's hands into iron weapons. As Shocker holds his ground and gets ready to fight, Jareel tells him he’ll enjoy this.

Move Index

Chapter Text

In the room Shocker left, Niji and Yato are matching their kicks. Yato starts to get the upper hand, kicking Niji in the shin before using a Cheek Kick . Niji tries to hit him back with a punch, but Yato backflips out of the way, telling the man he would need to be faster to catch him. Niji tells him if it’s speed he wants, he can deliver, before activating the Dengeki Blue of his raid suit. Niji suddenly disappears. As Yato looks around for him, Niji appears behind him and uses Henry Needle . As Yato turns to kick him, Niji jumps in the air and pulls out his dagger. After charging it with electricity, he pierces Yato’s shoulder using Kosoku no Ken: Henry Blazer . Yato, gritting his teeth through the pain, uses the fact that they’re close to his advantage, kicking him directly upward with Anti-Manner Kick Course , sending Niji flying into the ceiling, before crashing down on the floor.

As the Germa soldier gets up, he tells Yato he’s done playing games, and says the pirate pissed off the wrong man. Niji kicks Yato upward, launching him off the ground so that he can’t block his follow up attack. Niji uses Kosoku no Ken: Storm Slash , slashing Yato numerous times before dropping him to the ground. Niji stands over Yato, telling him to greet hell’s guards for him, and is about to kill him, bringing down the knife. However, Yato thinks to himself that now’s the time, and spins around, kicking the blade out of Niji’s hand at the last moment, then kicking him in the chest. As Niji thinks to himself that it’s preposterous that he was tricked, Yato jumps up and begins rapidly spinning in a front flip. Niji looks up right as Yato brings Concasser Kick right down on him, his heel crushing his face and breaking his goggles, taking him out. 

Move Index 

Chapter Text

Back inside the right-hand room, Ichiji turns to Taco and asks him if he’s finished saying goodbye to his connections to this world. Taco begins to say he needs more time so that he can at least die in peace, but Ichiji starts firing lasers from his eyes using Sparking Valkyrie . Taco dodges the first few rounds, but Ichiji then shoots the lasers at the ceiling, causing some rubble to fall and seemingly crush Taco. However, as the dust rises, Taco is revealed to have dodged out of the way at the last moment, panickedly stating that that attack really could have killed him, before remembering that this is meant to be a fight to the death. However, Ichiji gets pissed and uses Sparking Figure , charging his punches with explosive power as he repeatedly slams his fists into Taco. As another explosion blasts Taco into the wall, he thinks to himself that this may be how he dies. 

Ichiji walks over and picks Taco up by his neck, holding him in the air. He tells the Green Devil pirate that ultimately, he knows Ichiji is right, and that he can’t be bested by him. Ichiji then drops him and prepares to kill him, but Taco first held up his hand, causing the Germa soldier to pause. Taco offers Ichiji a treat as congrats for beating him, and pulls out a taco from his satchel and hands it to him. Ichiji, thinking it’s poison, drops it on the floor, telling Taco he would never be stupid enough to fall for a cheap tactic like that, and he knows to never accept anything for the enemy. He crushes it under his foot, but as he does, it begins to light up. Taco smirks and says he just did, and dives out of the way as the taco shell explodes right under Ichiji, using a new move: the Taco Shell Bakudan . It is revealed that the meat in the taco was actually dozens of his exploding bullets painted red like meat sauce. With Ichiji defeated, Taco sinks thankfully to the ground, realizing he has actually won. 

Moves

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, on the battlement tower, Shocker's body is covered in blood. He states under his breath that he feels his stamina is intact, but grits his teeth as he realizes  he keeps getting hit by Jareel’s attacks. Jareel uses Tetsu no Yari: Gatling, turning his hand into a spear and jabbing Shocker multiple times, before trying to push the pirate off the roof using his Iron Club. He succeeds, and Shocker is thrown off, but the Green Devil captain, determined to continue the fight, stretches his hand to grab onto a part of the roof and propels himself back up, attacking  Jareel with Gomu Gomu no Rifle in the process, followed by a swift Gomu Gomu no Stamp. However, the attack is blocked by Jareel’s Tetsu no Uroko, which the pirate calls his ultimate defense as he turns his entire body to iron.

As they continue fighting, they match each other's moves each time. Gomu Gomu no Pistol clashes with Iron Club, and Gomu Gomu no Muchi counters Tetsu no Maruta. The adrenaline of the fight fuels Jareel's determination, as he ominously warns Shocker to survive his next attack if he can. Combining both hands, he summons a colossal sword above him, slamming it down with Tetsu no Shinken. The force of the attack tears through the floor, destroying half of the roof and causing rubble to rain down around them. Shocker manages to leap off the debris, landing a few meters away, but he fails to notice Jareel sneaking up on him. With a swift motion, the Iron-Man inflicts a devastating double sword slash, Tetsu no Ryoto, directly at Shocker's chest.

Shocker struggles to stand, his injuries taking their toll. Jareel chuckles and tells him he looks like he’s on his last legs. Claiming that one more attack would kill Shocker, Jareel insists Shocker just give up. He tells the Green Devil captain that he never had any hope, because his devil fruit is just too powerful, and that some rookie with a measly bounty of 33,000,000 could never beat him. However, panting heavily, Shocker simply tells the man to shut up. He tells Jareel that he knows there will undoubtedly be strong enemies in the Grand Line, and that because of that, he has to continuously keep getting stronger in order to protect his friends. Jareel, irritated, asks him what he’s babbling about, but Shocker says he’ll show him the fruits of his training. Shocker bends down and begins pumping blood through his circulatory system, manually doing so thanks to his rubber body. As Jareel looks on, the Green Devil pirate activates his new form: Gear Second.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Shocker's body is enveloped in steam as he rises, his skin taking on a pink tinge. Jareel scoffs at his appearance, mocking him for looking ridiculous. Undeterred, Shocker confidently declares that he has leveled up. Jareel dismisses it, but his arrogance is shattered when Shocker unleashes Gomu Gomu no Jet Pistol , sending him staggering backward. As Jareel tries to recover, he uses another Tetsu no Shinken , intending to flatten Shocker. However, he is taken by surprise as Shocker seemingly teleports beside him, delivering a powerful Gomu Gomu no Jet Stamp that propels Jareel away with great force. Bewildered by Shocker's newfound speed, Jareel struggles to keep up, unable to track his opponent's movements. Shocker reappears in front of Jareel once more, launching a devastating Gomu Gomu no Jet Rifle that smashes him through a pillar. The Iron-Man backflips, trying to regain his posture, but Shocker crushes him into the ground using Gomu Gomu no Jet Spear . Despite Jareel's attempts to rise, Shocker quickly seizes both his arms and executes Gomu Gomu no Jet Missile , driving him forcefully into a wall.

Jareel, relying on his Tetsu no Uroko for defense, transforms his entire body into iron, stating that while Shocker’s new power is strong, it cannot beat his scales. However, Shocker stretches his hands back and delivers a powerful blow with Gomu Gomu no Jet Bazooka to Jareel's gut, causing him to cough up blood. Jareel is left bewildered as Shocker's strength proves capable of bypassing his scales. Desperate, Jareel tries to belittle Shocker, claiming that in the current era, someone like him can never become special. Unfazed, Shocker asserts that he is not aiming to be special but rather to become the Pirate King, willing to do whatever it takes to achieve his goal. With unwavering determination, Shocker declares that this will be the end and unleashes Gomu Gomu no Jet Gatling , unleashing a relentless barrage of rapid punches that hammers Jareel through a wall, decisively defeating him as the iron-man is flung off the tower down towards the ground.

Moves Index

Chapter Text

Inside the Phantom Cache’s main room, Jose is seen screeching on a Den Den Mushi, asking how it’s possible that all four of the Colorful Commanders were defeated. Jose starts to panic as he looks outside and sees the cannon stop charging completely. He tells himself to remain calm, because as long as Jareel is still up, he is more than capable of dealing with the invaders. A soldier then rushes into the room, telling Jose that Jareel was just seen plummeting from the top of the battlement tower, freaking Jose out. As the soldier asks what they're going to do, Jose promptly shoots him, stating that he has to save his own skin, which means abandoning this crew and escaping, before starting again somewhere far from here. However, as he grabs a duffel bag and prepares to go, he is met at the door by Zane and Angel. Jose tries to persuade them to join him, stating he could give them riches beyond their wildest imaginations, but Angel simply tells Zane to knock him out, and the cat obliges, going into Muscle Boost and bonking him on the head.

Meanwhile, in Phantom Cache’s corridors, Yato, Taco, Jordan, and Adam meet up. After confirming that they all beat their respective opponents, Yato states that Shocker had gone ahead of him, presumably to fight Jareel. Taco asks if he won, but Yato says he’s not sure, as he didn’t follow him. Adam says they’ll only know after the fight ends, and that for now they need to be on cleanup duty. Suddenly, the roof begins to shake, and Jordan gets an idea. He tells them they should destroy Phantom Cache so that the enemy will have to stay there for a long time to recuperate. Jordan promptly fires a Kuchi Cannonball into the wall, blasting it down, telling the others to hurry. Adam says he makes a good point, and the group turn their attention to breaking down the walls.

At the top of the battlement, Shocker is quite tired after using his new form. He jumps off the battlement and lands on some rubble below, where Jareel is lying down. Shocker sits down and pants hard. Jareel tells him everything hurts, and that no one had managed to beat him before. Jareel tells Shocker he hates to admit it, but he is kind of impressed by his power. Shocker tells him he’s definitely strong too. Just then, a voice shouts for Shocker, and a few moments later, Zane flies toward the two. He tells Shocker he thought he could find him by sniffing him out, but all the dust masked his scent. As he sees Shocker calmly talking to Jareel, he is shocked that they seem to be friendly, though Jareel says he still hates Shocker. Zane tells Shocker that the whole place is coming down, and that they need to go. As Shocker gets up, Zane tells Jareel his captain is ridiculously weak. Jareel tells the “fur ball” to shut up, and that he already knew but was in it for the money, as Zane gets irritated at Jareel’s new nickname for him. Shocker asks what he's going to do, and Jareel states that before he leaves, he has to kill Jose. Shocker tells him good luck with that, and Zane flies him away.

Chapter Text

The next day, the crew are all eating on the Stormy. Jordan works on repairing the ship, the metal rods left by Jareel mostly removed and the ship itself patched up. Taco helps him, bringing over supplies. Angel asks if their ship is alright, but Jordan tells her not to worry, since he’s an expert and can repair basically anything, though he mentions that the damage Jareel did is horrible and that he can’t forgive that guy. As the rest of the crew waits for them to finish, Cruella tells her friends that any marines in the vicinity would have picked up on the battle by now and would be preparing to arrive, and so they should leave as soon as possible. Adam notices someone arriving, and jumps down to meet the person. However, the person is revealed to be Reiju.

The crew tenses up, with Angel shifting away from her and standing behind Cruella, and Adam placing a hand on his sheath, warning her. Reiju tells them to calm down, because she had no intention of fighting them. She apologizes to Angel, stating that it was in her contract and that she herself didn’t want to do it. She tells them she knows what it’s like to have family taken away. When Cruella asks what she means, she tells them that she has a daughter, shocking them all. Reiju explains that her father, Vinsmoke Judge, had told her that due to her body modification, she can’t have children of her own. However, years ago, she adopted a little girl and raised her. Due to her father’s cold attitude, she had to raise her away from the Germa kingdom, and sometimes her brother Sanji would visit them. However, when Jose and Jareel attacked the Germa, she had told her daughter to flee and that they’ll meet again someday. 

As Reiju finishes her story, she tells them that she’s quitting the piracy business, and now her goal is to find her daughter. Angel, thinking about her own goal to find her mother, smiles and wishes her luck. She thanks her, then hands Adam a bag, telling them it contains a large part of the Jose Pirate’s treasure, which she had stolen from Jose’s vault. Shocker asks her to join his crew, shocking the others. Reiju thanks him but politely refuses, stating that for the first time in her life she feels truly free, and that she’s going to meet up with the only true family she had, Sanji. As she turns to the sea, she tells the crew she hopes to see them again someday, especially Adam, while Adam tells her to quit doing that. She winks at him, then flies off using her raid suit. As the crew smile and watch her leave, Jordan shouts to the others, telling them the ship’s ready to go. As Shocker tells his crew to ship out, the Green Devils leave Germa behind, and head toward their next adventure.

Chapter Text

Quite a few days pass by, and the Green Devils are relaxing on their ship. Shocker complains about being bored, as they haven’t seen land in a while. Angel simply tells him to be quiet and recover from his battle with Jareel, and though Shocker says he’s fine, Zane tells him to stay down. Meanwhile, Jordan and Cruella talk about the damage the ship suffered. Jordan tells her that he added a surprise feature to the Stormy. As Cruella asks why, Jordan tells her why simply fix something to the way it was when you can make it even better. Besides that, the incident with the Jose Pirates made him realize the need for viable escape options in the future. Cruella simply smiles and says she’s excited to see what he did.

Later that day, the crew are doing their daily routines: Yato is cooking, Adam is in the crow’s nest, Angel is charting courses. Suddenly, Jordan’s voice booms on the new PA system, and he announces that it has started to snow. The crew comes outside to marvel at the sight, with Zane saying he hasn’t seen snow since they left his home. As Jordan says that it’s great, Adam says this may be the most normal thing that’s happened to them in the Grand Line so far, and Cruella agrees, stating that for all the Grand Line’s bizarre phenomena, this is pretty mild. Taco and Shocker begin making snow angels on the deck, with Angel shouting at them to get up and act their age. Shocker tells Angel she’s no fun, and Taco and Zane agree, with Angel simply sighing and wondering why she chose to follow an idiot like Shocker. Yato tastes a snowflake and gags, saying they taste bad, almost like they’ve been tainted, before returning to the kitchen. 

The crew return to their business, until they hear a sudden outcry from the kitchen. As the rest of the crew rush in, they see Yato slumped on the ground, rolling in pain. As Zane checks his temperature, he confirms that Yato has fallen violently ill. The cat deduces that there must have been something in the snowflakes that is toxic. Carrying Yato to his doctor’s office in Muscle Boost, Shocker worriedly asks what they should do, and Zane tells him he can administer a sedative to calm him down, but he doesn’t know what poison it is, and thus has no way of counteracting it.

As if their problems aren’t enough, at that very moment, the sea begins to churn violently. Adam and Jordan tell the others to hold on, as they see massive waves slamming into each other and nearly hitting the boat. Suddenly, two giant jets of water shoot out of the ocean and fountain above them, and a third one actually takes their Stormy and blasts them several hundred meters above the sea. As the Stormy is hurtled in the air, Taco screams as he sees what look like giant white boulders crashing down at them. Adam jumps up and takes care of them, clearing the debris out of the ship’s way. Yato comes outside and says he wants to help, but stumbles, with Zane telling him to get back inside quickly. As a particularly massive one falls, Adam jumps on Yato’s shoulders and uses them as launchpads, soaring into the boulder and slicing it in half. However, the sliced pieces fall into the jetstream they’re riding on, and the waves created threaten to push them off. Angel screams at Shocker, telling him that if they fall off, they die. Shocker says to leave it to him, and he stretches his hands toward the boulders and grabs on. Using himself as an anchor, he pulls the ship back onto the current. Jordan sees something above them and tells the crew to brace themselves.

Chapter Text

When the violent shaking finally stops and things become calm, Shocker opens his eyes. All his crewmates are sprawled on the deck, slightly bruised but, besides Yato, otherwise fine. Jordan looks over the railing and sees that the Stormy is lodged into some sort of cloud. After reporting this, Cruella must say that they’re on a Sky Island then. As the others ask what she means, she informs them that what they experienced is called a Knock Up Stream, a phenomenon where a powerful jet of water explodes from the ocean with enough force to send ships hurtling to the White Sea or White-White Sea, and crews who survive the journey find themselves on a Sky Island. Jordan then looks at their surroundings, seeing large bubbles, weather vanes, and machinery. The shipwright exclaims with certainty they are on Weatheria, a Sky Island full of weather prediction and weather control equipment. Angel notes she had also heard of the place, as her mother had once traveled here with her former crew, and had told her the island is completely artificial. 

At that moment, two Weatherians jumped onto the Stormy’s railings, training bows at the crew. One of them tells them to not move, as despite their apparent age, they could still defend their home from pirates. His friend demands the crew to state their names and business, or face the wrath of their bows. Adam prepares to unsheathe his sword, just in case, but Shocker walks past him. As the rest of the crew wonder what he’s doing, the Weatherians tell Shocker that if he takes another step, they’ll shoot. Shocker keeps walking, and they do, shooting an arrow into either of his arms. However, as the crew look on, marveled that Shocker didn’t even stop, the Green Devil captain suddenly bends down on all fours and puts his head on the ground. He begs the Weatherians to send a doctor who can save his friend’s life. Shocker says they’ll leave right after if that’s what it takes, but at the moment his priority is making sure his crewmate doesn’t die. The Weatherians are so moved by his unexpected plea that they quickly agree, and one of them runs off to find their leader, Haredas.

As the Weatherian returns a few minutes later, an older man with blue robes and a long wizard beard follows him. The old man introduces himself as Haredas, Weatheria’s foremost meteorologist and weather scientist. He says that he heard from his comrade what happened, and states that Shocker showing such humility for the good of his friends shows him that there really are different kinds of pirates. As the old man tells the others to stand back a little, he opens a small square box full of yellow squares. He gives one to Yato, telling the chef to eat it, and gradually Yato’s fever leaves and his temperature regulates. As he sits up, Yato tells them it tastes like lemons. Haredas tells the group that these are Ambrosie, a new special medicine made only in sky islands using pyrobloin. As Haredas stands, telling the crew Yato will be fine, he looks at Shocker’s hat and notices it with a start. He asks the Green Devil captain if he happens to know Nami, as his hat is reminiscent of one of her friends. Shocker perks up and says he does know Nami, and tells him how her crew had visited his island a little while back. Haredas smiles happily and says any friend of Nami's is a friend of theirs, and that they should take the time they have to explore their town.

Weatheria Lead Scientist

Haredas

Chapter Text

Shocker, Adam, and Zane follow Haredas to his house. On the way, he explains to them that he had helped construct this artificial island decades ago, and that because they sit atop a massive bubble, they float all along the Grand Line. Adam asks what had happened to Yato anyway, and the old man tells them that he had probably ingested some Death Druff. Due to the increasing pollution emitted by nearby Sky Islands, toxins mix with their regular snow and create dangerous precipitation. While in his house, Shocker starts touching all sorts of buttons, and Haredas irritatedly tells him to stop. At Angel’s request over Den Den Mushi, Adam asks the old man for a couple of wind knots and a weather vane. 

Meanwhile, Zane is given a briefcase full of ambrosie in case of dire emergencies. Haredas explains ambrosie in more detail, stating that to devil fruit users, this would be lethal, as pyrobloin is the same component found within seastone, but even to non-power users it is risky. An overdose could cause a person’s body to overheat and burst into flame, and/or damage their brain and nervous system, so they are only to be used when no other solution can be found. Haredas worries a bit, but Shocker tells him it’s alright because they are powerful, and even if they do get hurt, they have a top-rate doctor with them, causing Zane to blush. 

Angel, Cruella, and Yato go shopping in the marketplace. The girls purchase some more clothes, taking an interest in some parkas and jackets made partially from island clouds. Yato meanwhile, takes the opportunity to stock up on food. As he buys a bottle of sake, Cruella asks him if he truly feels better. Yato tells her for a moment it felt like there was a small fire in his chest, but now he’s perfectly fine. As the trio walk by a police station, they are greeted by a fat Weatherian named Condor who tells them he is the primary police officer. Condor tells them that he heard old man Haredas has taken a liking to them, and he had heard from Haredas himself that they're not the dangerous type. 

Angel asks what they do to pirates they deem dangerous. Condor tells them that in all honesty, if a dangerous pirate came up to meet them, they wouldn’t have a hope of arresting them, since none of the Weatherians are fighters. As such, he keeps a file containing all known pirate bounties so that he can gauge the threat level of the pirate and inform the citizens whether they need to go into hiding. When Yato asks how they get bounties all the way up here, Condor explains the Bounty Coos do not like coming all the way up to Sky Islands because of the altitude, so the marines send Balloon Mail up to them instead. He then hands Yato a packet, telling them they may want to see this, and as Yato looks at the papers, he is surprised.

Meanwhile, Jordan and Taco go into the town square. As they look through different stalls, the duo learn of the existence of dials and their various utilities. They admire different dials, with Taco wondering whether he should add some into his arsenal, like the Axe and Milky Dials. Taco then sees a Flame Dial, and tells Jordan they have to take this one, as either of them shooting fire would look so cool. Jordan agrees, and then takes some more, stating that having these be a heat source for their oven instead of burning coal would save a tremendous amount of energy. Taco enquires about some smaller shells underneath a sign reading “for communication”. The vendor tells Taco that they are called Ear Shells, and they are communication devices that allow one to communicate with others on their line by fitting the shell into their ear, similar to the Den Den Mushis. Taco buys all 20, stating that these can be helpful. 

Jordan then spies some dials on a raised platform, away from the others. The vendor tells Jordan that those are Impact Dials, and that they can be used to store impact and unleash it on enemies, but that they have a powerful backlash that can cause damage to his body. Jordan laughs, telling him he doesn’t have to worry about that, since his cyborg body means his arms are robotic. As such, even if the dials may hurt his artificial nervous system, he can’t take permanent damage. Taco quickly buys some, and Jordan plans to incorporate them into his palms, stating that these are going to prove useful for him.

Weatheria Chief of Police

Condor

Chapter Text

As the crew reconvenes at the Stormy, the Weatherians gather to say goodbye. As Jordan and Taco load their supplies onto the ship, Haredas asks Shocker what he’s going to do. Shocker smiles, saying that he’s going to surpass Luffy and become the next pirate king. Haredas tells them they’re up against some of the toughest competition on the sea, as Nami is the world’s best navigator thanks to him. Shocker says he’s not worried, because he knows Angel will give her a run for her money. As Angel asks Shocker how he has so much confidence in her, Shocker smiles and says he wouldn’t have recruited her if he thought she couldn’t do it, making Angel blush and smile.

Jordan ties himself to the ship, then jumps off and gets behind it. As the others ask what he’s doing, Jordan tells them he’s going to try and dislodge them by pushing the ship from behind. Haredas smiles and waves to them all, wishing them good luck. Angel tells them they’ll be sure to treasure their tools and help. Jordan begins to push, and though he’s strong, he realizes the ship is pretty stuck, and he can’t push it alone. Suddenly, the boat tips up, and Jordan sees that the Weatherians have come together to help him push it. They tell them that helping them out is the least they can do. Haredas tells them to loosen the Wind Knots, and the strong gales push the Stormy off the island, Jordan shouting as he falls alongside it. 

A few short while later, the ship slams down into the sea, creating a massive splash. As the ship stabilizes, Yato asks if everyone is alright, and Cruella reminds them Jordan is still tied to the rope. As they haul him out of the water, Jordan fumes, stating that those Weatherians could have waited for him to get back on the ship. As Zane looks out to sea, he notices with a start that they accidentally capsized a ship. Jordan mentions seeing someone under the sea, with Adam irritatedly asking him why he didn’t say anything sooner. Yato dives into the water and drags the individual onto the Stormy.

As Zane clears out the person’s lungs, the crew see he is a navy-blue-haired young man. He wears a black dress shirt with a blue tweed jacket over it, black pants, and dress shoes. He grips a red-and-white umbrella in his hand. The man’s eyes snap open, and he sits up quickly, wondering what happened. Shocker introduces himself and apologizes for overturning his ship. The man thanks them for saving him, and tells them he can't swim because he ate a devil fruit in the past. When Adam asks for his name, the man tells them to call him Kawaki. Angel asks what he was trying to do, but the man ignores her and asks the group if they want to hear a joke. Angel is about to say no, but Shocker and Zane cut her off, exclaiming yes. Kawaki asks them what a pirate’s favorite letter is, and when they are stumped, he responds C (sea). Shocker, Taco and Zane laugh so hard they fall down, and Adam and Yato sigh. Cruella smiles awkwardly, and Angel says this guy’s just another lunatic. Kawaki promptly stands and brushes himself off, thanking them for their help but telling them he must go. He then opens his umbrella, floating away on the wind, and a green sea mist swallows him up mysteriously. As Angel says they need to get back on course, Shocker hopes to meet Kawaki again.

Mysterious Gentleman

Kawaki

Chapter Text

Sacremento Court Arc

Almost a week passes with no significant events transpiring. As Adam sits on the deck, he says out loud to himself that he’s getting bored of seeing nothing but the blue sea. With Jordan’s help, Yato builds the new flame dials into the kitchen. Turning the stove on, he tells Jordan good job for thinking of its usage like this, as this would make cooking a lot more efficient and easier for him. Meanwhile, Shocker, Taco, and Zane try to figure out the ear shell system. Shocker puts one on and rushes to the prow, while Zane takes his inside the ship. Taco yells for Shocker to talk, and Zane exclaims he can hear him. Zane then responds, and Shocker says the technology is so cool. Taco grins, proud of himself, and says that he set up the system so that they’re connected on the same line, but these particular ones will only work between themselves. Angel asks them how many they bought, and as Taco responds they got 20, Cruella mentions it was smart of them to take some, since it’ll be quite practical for their future adventures. 

Remembering their visit to the police station back on Weatheria, Yato brings out the file Condor had given him and tells the rest of the crew to gather around. He says that with the whole incident of trying to get down and then meeting Kawaki, he had forgotten, but they had all been given bounties! As he hands them out, most of the crew marvel at their first bounties, with the exception of Shocker and Cruella, whose numbers were updated.

Shocker’s bounty has increased from his previous 33,000,000 to 130,000,000, which he is ecstatic about, since he passed the 100,000,000 milestone. Adam receives a bounty of 90,000,000, as well as the epithet “Triple Sword” Adam. As he muses to himself that his epithet has a nice ring to it, Angel looks at her poster, portraying Angel “of the Heavens” having 27,000,000. “Sniper” Taco is shocked to see his bounty is so low with only 16,000,000. He then complains, asking what kind of nickname is a job description. But Zane cries, telling him to be happy with what he has and to have been considered as a member of the crew, as he says he got 25. The rest of them say 25,000,000 is great, but Zane cries harder, with his poster showing that “Pet Cat” Zane was only given 25 beli. “Trouble Maker” Yato has a bounty of 87,000,000, which he states is decent for where he is, but wonders why it’s less than Adam’s. Adam smirks and tells him to cry about it, irking the chef. Cruella’s has increased from her previous 10,000,000 as a child to 69,000,000, with her noticing her epithet changing from “Boss Child” to “Demon Queen”. And “Rogue Pacifista” Jordan’s is 74,000,000, with Jordan stating he has officially made a mark as a pirate. 

A few nights later, everyone is asleep soundly on the Stormy. Under the cover of darkness, a black figure boards the ship. As they walk across the deck, Taco, who is supposed to be on guard duty, is asleep and thus does not see anything. The figure enters inside, looking through the rooms for something, or someone. They quietly open doors to the kitchen, the doctor’s office, and the men’s room, before seeing the women’s room on the other side of the hall. The figure slides open the door, and quickly bounds and gags Cruella. Though the pirate tries to scream for help, her gag muffles her cry. As they quickly walk out onto the deck, they pause at the mast. Looking at the large structure, the figure kicks the iron part of the mast, creating a loud sound. 

As Taco wakes up in a panic, wondering what’s happening, he sees the individual carrying Cruella. Understanding that they are being invaded, he panickedly shouts for his friends and sounds the alarm simultaneously. As the rest of the crew rush outside, they see the scene, and Adam tells the person to let Cruella go. As the man walks out of the shadows and into the moonlight, they see he is a man with a light complexion. The man wears an orange headband and orange tie, but apart from those, he wears a black suit complete with black pants and shoes. He informs them he is a member of Cipher Pol Number 7, a government cell of operatives, and his orders are to capture and bring in Deville Cruella, shocking the crew.

Chapter Text

Yato becomes pissed and tries to attack, jumping at the man, but a young woman with long, wavy, red hair and reddish-brown gloves kicks him back into the mast. Adam takes out two of his swords and rushes at them, but a male agent with spiky white hair, a pair of white gloves, and black goggles stops his swords seemingly with his arm, shocking the swordsman. Taco fires Namari Shot and Shocker uses Gomu Gomu no Pistol , but a fourth member jumps out the shadows and stops the oncoming attacks with a hand made of steel. As Shocker retracts his fist, he says he feels he has seen that person before, but he cannot remember where. The agent with the headband introduces himself as Endou Mark, the leader of CP7, and that he and his cohorts will be heading back to their judicial island to execute Cruella. He thanks the pirates for understanding. With that, they all use Soru and get off the Stormy, landing on a rapid getaway speedboat a few meters away. 

Cipher Pol 7 (CP7) Leader

Endou Mark

Shocker quickly orders Jordan to set a course to follow them, and the shipwright complies, stating they’d be following them in just a moment. As the Stormy changes direction and sails after the CP7 boat, Adam and Yato wonder why they would take Cruella. Yato tells them it makes no sense, since they haven’t had any run-ins with the government that warrants a direct kidnapping, but Adam retorts, stating that there’s much about Cruella they don’t know from her days as Saber’s leader. Shocker tells them it doesn’t matter, and that they are going to get her back because she’s their friend, to which the others undoubtedly agree. 

As they follow their attackers, a large island with massive white towers comes into view. The crew sees that the island is fenced and gated, and that every tower flies the World Government Flag. They see a wharf where government ships are docked, and Angel tells them to head there so that they can secure the ship before disembarking. As they pass through the large entry gates, the huge gate doors swing shut behind them, and it is only then that Jordan realizes they have been duped, and that the whole thing is a trap. Taco asks what he means, and Jordan tells them they've just been lured into a government stronghold. 

Sure enough, as they dock the ship, the group sees an army of government operatives and marine soldiers charging them. Shocker jumps off the ship and starts fighting immediately, mowing down the incoming horde. As the crew fight their way through the enemy army, they run across a large, archway-style bridge to a rather small area resembling a town square. In front of them, large steps led to a truly large tower, with two smaller towers connected to the main building on either side. Out of the tower poured more enemies, with Taco estimating there are over 1,000 of them. As the crew fights them off, they see some enemies trying to get behind them and get to the Stormy, though Jordan takes care of them handedly. Angel figures they are trying to do whatever possible to cutoff any escape routes. A voice from above them states that yes, they are truly trapped, and as the group looks up, Mark is standing on the top of the stairs, holding Cruella by her hair.

Chapter Text

Shocker, pissed, tells him to let her go and rushes up the steps, but Mark says no problem, throwing Cruella into their midst. As the woman falls, Shocker turns and jumps to catch her, and the duo tumble down the steps. As they get up, Yato asks her if she is alright. Cruella tells the group she is fine, but only realized herself that the scenario was a trap for the crew after it was too late. Mark tells them that he knew they would take the bait, and that taking Cruella was just a ruse to get the infamous Green Devil Pirates to follow them to this place. He tells them they are currently on Sacremento Court, the government’s new judicial island since the Straw Hat Pirates blew up the original one seven years ago. His cohorts then appeared all around him. The red-haired woman introduces herself as Naomi. The man wearing goggles cheerfully tells them his name is Simeon. A large, round man with a green afro and green goatee calls himself Kabeyama. A young man with long, golden hair and a flashing smile says his name is Aphrodi, telling the group he has blessed them with his presence. A dark-skinned man who ties his black hair into one long ponytail is introduced as Nishiki. And, to the shock of the crew, the man of steel turns out to be none other than the former pirate-turned-government-operative Wolfide Jareel, who Shocker fought in Germa. 

As Angel wonders why, Mark tells them Jareel was very helpful in finding them, as he was the one who told CP7 of their location. Mark then tells the crew that they can’t even dream of beating CP7, as they are just rookie pirate lowlifes, and his group are trained fighters. He tells them as such, they should just give up easily and let themselves die. He promises that their ends will be quick if they hand themselves over. But Shocker becomes incredibly mad, and tells him they are going to stand their ground and fight because only a coward would run from a fight they got into. Angel and Taco exclaim in shock, stating they need to get out of there and that they aren’t the ones who would be cowards seeing as they were tricked here. Yato tells them they have gotten themselves into the situation, and Jordan says that besides, Shocker has already made up his mind and it is up to them as his crew to follow him. Adam added that regardless, an attack on their crew of that nature would give their name a blemish if they left it be. Finally, Shocker says that he cannot become the pirate king if he can’t beat people trying to inflict harm on his friends. He looks at Mark determinedly, and tells him he’s going to beat him and free them all.

Mark stands for a second, shocked that they are showing such strong resolve. He then laughs, telling the Green Devils that if that’s the case, they should follow them into their tower and try to fight them all, but that they should be prepared for what follows. As he and the rest of CP7 Soru away, Shocker starts to move, but Jareel lashes out a steel sword and tells the crew they aren’t going anywhere. Jareel has a short flashback to when he walked into the government office, with agents shouting that he’s a pirate. It is revealed that he exchanged his loyalty and the location of the Green Devil Pirates, as well as a way to beat them, all for a spot on one of their Cipher Pols. In the present, the man tells Shocker the only reason he’s part of the World Government now is to get revenge on him. He tells him things would be different this time. However, the Green Devil captain, surprisingly calm, activates Gear Second and uses Gomu Gomu no Jet Bazooka, slamming into his gut and sending Jareel doubling over in pain. As Shocker walks past the man on the floor, he tells Jareel without looking back that the difference in their power is too great now, and that is why he can never catch up to him again. As Jareel attempts to stop him from entering the tower, a void opens in front of him and blocks his attack. Shocker tells Cruella thanks, and she says to leave this one to her. As the rest of her friends run into the tower, she tells Jareel he has never faced an opponent like her before. 

Inside the tower, Shocker wants to dash upstairs and follow Mark to beat him up as fast as possible. Taco, holding him back with much difficulty, tells him they don’t even know where they all are, and that Shocker should wait until they review the plan. Yato tells them to remember that one of their primary objectives is to find the control room and open the gates connecting Sacremento Court to the outside waters so that they can take the Stormy and escape. Once someone finds the control room, the plan is to talk into their Ear Shells so that everyone stops what they are doing and goes to help the person who finds it. After that, they will secure the Stormy White and escape together to the sea. Adam reminds them that taking out a few of the CP7 agents would also be useful so that there are less forces following them on their escape. As Yato tells everyone that this is going to be a hard fight, Angel says they’ve got this, and everyone shouts in agreement.

CP7 Agent

Simeon

CP7 Agent

Naomi

CP7 Agent

Kabeyama

CP7 Agent

Aphrodi

CP7 Agent

Nishiki

CP7 Agent

Wolfed Jareel

Chapter Text

With that done, Taco lets Shocker go, and the Green Devil captain dashes up the stairs quickly, leaving the others behind him. The rest of them make for the stairs, but they are suddenly stopped by a large rock wall emerging from the ground. As they wonder where it came from, they see Kabeyama perched on top of it. He tells them he has the powers of the Kabe Kabe no Mi (Wall Wall Fruit), a paramecia fruit that allows him to create walls out of different materials and even some elements, with the technique he just used being the Iwa Kabe . However, Adam unsheathes one of his katanas and slashes through the wall easily, causing it to crumble. As Kabeyama jumps off it, he tries to aim a fist attack variant of Shigan , the Jugan , at Adam, but Jordan gets in its way, taking the punch. He uses Tekken to punch Kabeyama away and tells his friends he will deal with this creep. 

On the second floor, they are approached by Aphrodi, who tells them he is the only member of CP7 to not have a Devil Fruit power. He explains that it matters not, as he was born blessed with divine looks. As Yato tells him being a pretty boy can’t help him win a battle, Aphrodi smirks and says he begs to differ. He smiles, using Shirosenko to blind them and causing an explosion. The explosion itself is not too large, but its force pushes Zane out of the tower window. Angel wants to save him, but Adam tells her he can fly, so he will be fine. Angel then vows she will be the one to take down this pretty boy, and that the others should continue up and leave this to her. Aphrodi tells her he is happy to fight her, because he won’t kill her, but instead intends to keep her as his eternally beautiful bride. 

On the third floor, none of the members of CP7 has appeared yet. Yato says he senses that whoever it is is close, and tells the others he will handle this floor’s enemy. Adam asks if he’s sure, and Yato tells him to not worry about this guy. As Adam and Taco went up, he shouts for whoever is there to show himself and get ready for a fight. Suddenly, a giant rose pushes itself out of the ground and blooms. Out from the flower steps Naomi. She tells him she isn’t the guy he is looking for, but is more than ready to give him a full fight, as Yato becomes serious.

On the fourth floor, Adam and Taco see the man known as Nishiki lounging down on a cot, supposedly sleeping with his hands behind his head. Taco hurriedly says he will fight him, and lets Adam go up. Taco says to himself that he purposefully chose the sleeping enemy so that he could avoid fighting. Taco tries to tip toe as close as possible to Nishiki, setting up a bunch of Taco Shell Bakudans around the man, but he accidentally trips over Nishiki’s leg. The Green Devil pirate rushes to the far corner, praying that Nishiki didn’t feel that. The man doesn’t stir, and Taco believes he is in the clear. But as Taco is tiptoeing away toward the door, Nishiki tells him to wait, scaring Taco. He yawns and asks if killing Taco is one of the things he had to do that day. Taco quickly says no, but Nishiki says it doesn’t matter; if it wasn't on his list before, he will have to put it there now, as Taco stands, beginning to sweat. 

Adam reaches the fifth floor. Simeon is waiting for him, sitting in a chair with his legs crossed. Adam wonders aloud if he’s asleep, and Simeon takes his goggles off, assuring him that he’s wide awake. Simeon asks if there is any way Adam would give up the fight, and Adam says there’s no chance of that happening. Simeon tells him it is too bad, because now his death will have to be painful and hard-fought instead of a peaceful, quick end. Adam says he won’t be having an end at all today, and that he is going to cut those stupid goggles off his face. Simeon grins, stating they should begin.

On the sixth floor, Shocker pants hard after having made a mad dash through all the other floors without even seeing who the opponent is. Somehow, he instinctively knew that since Mark is the leader of the enemy, he would be at the top of the tower, and he had been right. Mark stands across from him in the wide room filled with crates of weapons, and tells him he can’t believe Shocker actually is stupid enough to have fallen for his trap. Shocker says he doesn’t give a damn, and that he will beat Mark up so he and his friends can go back to their ship and continue their grand journey. And with that, the battle of Sacremento Court that pits the Green Devil Pirates against members of Cipher Pol Number 7 begins.

Move Index

Chapter Text

On the fifth floor, Adam gets out all three of his swords, and Simeon stands from the chair, smirking. Adam tells him he'll wipe the smile off his face, before rushing to attack. As he goes to slice him, the man dodges out of the way using Soru . He turns and tries for another slash aimed at Simeon’s head, but the agent uses Soru again and appears behind him, kicking the swordsman away. As Adam gets up, he quickly understands that hitting Simeon will be hard because he’ll keep dodging his attacks with Soru then retaliating when his guard is down. He tries using Hyaku Pound Ho , sending a compressed air slash at the CP7 member, but Simeon simply blocks the attack with his arm before flicking it away, the attack slamming into the wall behind him. 

Adam remembers that Simeon had blocked his swords with his bare arms back the ship, and wonders about how he’s doing that. Simeon, guessing that Adam is pondering his situation, explains to him that as a child, he had trained in the Rankyaku technique specifically so that he could use its blade-like property on his arms too, not just his legs. He tells Adam that this makes him a user of the Four Sword Style, but Adam says it doesn’t matter how many blades he uses; Simeon will still be the one to be cut down. The two rush at each other and  exchange attacks with their blades, but as Simeon beats him back, Adam realizes the extra sword is starting to become hard to deal with. 

On the third floor, Yato is having trouble concentrating. Yato closes his eyes and repeats to himself that she’s the enemy, in the hopes that he can forget how genuine she is. Naomi asks him why they have to fight, and Yato tells her she’s an enemy who attacked his friends. The woman asks him why they didn't just drink some tea with rose petals instead, and Yato is actually tempted. Yato shakes his head, focusing by telling her that she should attack him. Naomi ponders this, wondering if they truly had to be adversaries, and Yato wonders to himself whether he might be able to get through to her and get her to switch sides. However, as he’s about to voice his thoughts, she uses Soru to get right next to him, faster than he could even track, and sends him flying away with Rankyaku: Jump , her attack skipping before slamming him into a wall. As Yato gets up, she states that for the record, they are in fact enemies. 

She rushes Yato and starts fighting using kicks. Yato finds he can keep up and counter hers decently, but he knows he has to find a way of attacking her without hurting her badly. As their clash ends, Naomi asks him if he thinks she is weak because she is a girl, and Yato states he would never think that. However, all the same, he states that he has to acknowledge the difference in fighting a man and a woman, and that when he is up against a woman, he never uses more than 10% of his total strength, because it is his “Gentleman’s Code”. They exchange more kicks, their legs clashing in midair. Just then, Naomi trips, and Yato has a clear chance to kick her away, but he puts down his foot instead, which gives Naomi the chance to regain her balance and subsequently kick him to the ground. She sighs while smiling, asking the man how they are going to have a fight if he keeps holding back, and Yato responds he himself isn’t sure. 

On the fourth floor, Nishiki stretches after his nap and sizes up Taco, looking at him and stating he looks like a small fry. Taco gulps but stands his ground, ready to fight, holding his Obsteel slingshot. Nishiki simply laughs and tells him not to worry, since the agent has other things to do on his list before killing him. He brings out his list from his back pocket, and after comedic shenanigans of making and drinking coffee, firing up a bbq, and having a 2 minute rant about how he should be the leader of CP7, not Mark, to which Taco reacts like he is an idiot, he says he is about ready to fight Taco. Taco says it is just as well, as he is ready to shoot him down. 

However, Nishiki appears in front of him and punches him in the blink of an eye. Taco is sent flying back into the wall. As Taco gets up, he draws back his sling and fits his flame dial into it. He presses it apex and simultaneously releases the sling, and a massive jet of fire streams right at Nishiki, a new move Taco names the Prominence Flame. However, Nishiki simply uses Geppou to maneuver behind him, dodging the attack, before kicking Taco across the room, telling Taco that a ranged fighter is no match for him. As the sniper looks up, blood streaming down his face, Nishiki tells him his personal code is to not hold back when assassinating someone.

Move Index

Chapter Text

On the first floor, Jordan is seen panting. He has a large dent in his head, and his body is quite beaten up. Kabeyama, standing across from him, has a bloodied face, and also has several bruises on his body. Jordan asks him if he is ready for another round, and Kabeyama wipes the blood off his face, telling him to shut up. They exchanged blows of Tekken and Jugan , neither fighter backing down from the onslaught of punches. Suddenly, Jordan switches his tactic and slams Kabeyama in the gut, sending him flying backward. Jordan attempts to follow up the attack, but Kabeyama uses Tekkai: Yama , reinforcing his body and defense, blocking the attack. Jordan jumps back and uses Danyaku Arm . The government agent uses Tetsu Kabe , creating a large iron wall that blocks all of the ammo. Then he uses Hikabe to create a fire wall, using Yubiwa to encircle Jordan. As the fire gets too close, the Green Devil pirate says that he feels nothing, though he thinks to himself how he can feel his circuits overheating.

Outside, in the plaza, Jareel tells Cruella to not get in her way. Cruella retorts that she can say much the same to him. Jareel tells her his business is with Shocker, but Cruella tells him her captain is currently fighting their leader and that as a member of his crew, she can’t allow him to be distracted. Jareel says he’ll just have to get through all of them first, and attacks Cruella with Testu no Ken . The Demon Queen uses Void: Ugoki, teleporting safely out of the way. Jareel asks her if she thinks her ability makes her unbeatable, and she responds of course not. Cruella says she knows her limitations, and that if she said she would take care of him, it’s because she knows she can.

Jareel, pissed, attacks with Tetsu no Yari, the steel spear grazing her shoulder. As she jumps away, she uses Void: Shuriken Ame to try and pierce Jareel, but the former Jose pirate’s Tetsu no Uroko increases his defense and he easily tanks the storm of shurikens. As Cruella looks around them to see if she can use the field to her advantage, she notices large statues of what looks to be Celestial Dragons. As Jareel catches her eyeing the statues, he tells her apparently they are meant to depict the founder of the World Government, the first Celestial Dragon. Cruella states she remembers hearing that the system was demolished by “Straw Hat” Luffy, and Jareel retorts that he doesn’t care about the history, and the only reason he knows is because his compatriots told him when he first joined CP7. Cruella muses to herself out loud, stating that a blatant disrespect for history is disgusting, and that if they don’t learn from the past, they’re doomed to repeat the same mistakes in the future. 

Jareel tells her to cut the crap, and that she needs to focus on trying to survive the present. Promising her that he will win, he clasps his hands together and forms the Tetsu no Shinken. As he brings it down, it slams into the plaza, destroying most of it, cracking the floor and dislodging the statues. Cruella narrowly avoids being crushed, dodging out of the way at the last moment. She silently thanks Jareel, stating he had just given her everything she needed to win. Creating a massive portal under each statue, she stores them in her void space, before opening a large void above Jareel and sending the statues crashing down on him. As thousands of pounds of marble crumble, Cruella wonders if she overdid it.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Cruella is seen kneeling next to Jareel, who has gotten out of the rubble but is clearly beaten. As the man lies down, she asks him what his true purpose of joining the government was. Jareel sighs and tells her he really wanted to kill “Green Hat” Shocker with his own hands, but now he realizes that there’s no way he can hope to catch up to him, and so he gives up. Cruella wonders how he ended up on Jose’s crew, since despite all that happened, she is determined he isn’t a bad person. Jareel sighs once more, saying she’s annoying, but he supposes telling her his story wouldn’t be the worst thing in the world.

As Jareel’s flashback commences, he tells Cruella how he was born on an island in the Grand Line 21 years ago. The island he is from was quite impoverished, and he, as well as a number of other children, used to play in junkheaps to entertain themselves. As a child, his closest friend was a young boy named Vance. While Jareel was tough and acted coldly to all the other children, Vance was the only one who ever really understood him, so they began to hang out. As kids, one day the duo found two fruits that had washed up on the island’s shore. Both quite hungry at that moment, they each took and ate one, though they noted the fruits were quite nasty. They then realized they had eaten Devil Fruits, as he had eaten the Tetsu Tetsu no Mi, and Vance had eaten the Wapu Wapu Dupli (Warp Warp Dupli), though at that time, duplication fruits were not known to the world).

However, when they tried to show their powers to all the other kids, they bullied the duo, stating that they were freaks, and soon enough they stopped interacting with them all together. When the duo would go into town, the older townsfolk would tell them to stay out and not come near their families. One night, as the friends talk about their predicament, Vance begins to tear up, realizing they were outcasts. Jareel, fed up with everything, told him that it didn’t matter, and they should just leave anyway. Vance asked him where they would go, but Jareel retorted that anywhere was better than life there. And so, within a few days, the boys had gathered their belongings and stolen a small boat, setting sail together to try and find another place to call their own. They had traveled together for most of their lives, hopping from island to island, and only ever really counting on each other. 

Then, a year ago, the duo were in a random bar when a crew who recruited rejects appeared. The crew’s captain asked them both to join, as being with people could make their lives less lonely. Jareel refused, stating that they were perfectly fine the way they were, but Vance disagreed. He said that they could finally find a place in society with them. Jareel, raising his voice, said that if he wanted to travel with them so badly, he should just go, but that he won’t be joining up with anyone. Later that day, as the crew prepared to leave, Vance asked Jareel if this is how their adventure would end. Jareel said that it was his fault for running away, but Vance says all he ever wanted was a family and that with this crew, he would have a chance. After shaking hands, they part ways. 

After that, Jareel wandered the Grand Line alone, doing his own thing and mercilessly defeating anyone who stood in his way, until a few months later, when he ended up joining the Jose Pirates. He had originally joined because of the money involved, and stayed with them until their downfall at the hands of the Green Devils. As the flashback ends, he says she knows the rest of the story, and Cruella simply looks at him sympathetically. He claims he has a new dream, which is that if he can’t surpass Shocker in a fight, he wants to surpass him in infamy. 

At that moment, Zane flies down from the tower, shouting for Cruella. As the woman looks up, she smiles and waves, asking how things inside are going. Zane tells her he was forced out of the building and he wants to help, greeting Jareel calmly before being shocked that Cruella and Jareel are conversing. Cruella tells him not to worry, as Jareel is in no condition to keep fighting, neither physically nor mentally. Cruella tells Zane to go check up on the others, and that she will come inside if they need her help. As the cat obliges and flies away, Jareel asks why she is being so nice to him after everything, and she tells the young man she sees a younger version of herself in him, genuinely smiling at him. Jareel, perhaps feeling hope for the first time, begins to smile back, before looking away and saying whatever.

Jareel (kid) 

Vance

Chapter Text

Back on the fifth floor, Adam and Simeon seem to be evenly matched. They both slash at each other, with both starting to feel some injuries. Adam uses Santoryu: Oni Giri , slashing past Simeon faster than the man can track. He then turns and quickly follows up with Santoryu: Tatsu Maki . As he feels the blood on his chest, Simeon says he can do him one better, and retaliates with Yontoryu: Tatsu Maki , a more powerful version of Adam’s own. As the two fighters break and back away from each other, catching their breath, Simeon tells him he may as well explain the goggles. Adam tells him he doesn’t care, but Simeon tells him it’s courtesy. Simeon tells the pirate that the skin around his eyes is quite frail, so he needs to wear protective goggles or else his eyes would be cut up when he moves at high speeds, especially whilst using Soru . Adam says he could just not use Soru, but Simeon laughs that off, stating that he’s primarily a fighter and that would just never do. He then says that his real power can only be seen when he combines his swordsmanship with his devil fruit ability. As he begins to morph and grow, Adam looks up above him. Simeon looms above him as a gorilla revealing he has eaten the Saru Saru no Mi, Model: Gorilla (Monkey Monkey Fruit, Model: Gorilla).

Simeon's Full Gorilla Form

Simeon tells Adam his extra muscle gives him absurd levels of strength, making his Yontoryu much more powerful. The large ape uses Soru to move right above Adam, before trying to bash the swordsman into the ground. Adam tanks the blow with all three swords, but he notes with shock how heavy the attack is. As the ground cracks and splinters, Simeon tells him that this is true strength. Their combined weight ends up shattering the ground, causing both fighters to fall to the fourth floor below. As they fall, they see Taco and, to Adam’s shock, a large, blue dragon. 

As Taco screams at Adam to save him, a short flashback is seen. Around the same time that Simeon revealed his fruit to Adam, Nishiki had told Taco that it’s time for him to get serious, taking off his jacket and tying it around his waist. He then grew larger and transformed into a wyvern, stating that he ate the Uo Uo no Mi, Mythical Model: Wyvern (Fish Fish Fruit, Mythical Model: Wyvern).

Nishiki's Full Wyvern Form

In the present, Adam stands next to Taco and wonders what kind of messes up petting zoo Sacramento Court is turning out to be, while Taco panickedly laments on why he got the more dangerous animal. On the opposite side of the room, Nishiki goes into his Hybrid Form, giving him the wyvern tail, scales, wings and claws while retaining his more humanoid body physique. As Simeon goes into his own Hybrid, Nishiki chuckles and says he hasn’t seen Simeon use his fruit in a long time. Simeon simply smirks and responds he can say the same to him.

Nishiki's Human/Wyvern Hybrid Form

Simeon's Human/Gorilla Hybrid Form

Nishiki then asks what he wants to do. Simeon says he’s had enough messing around, and it’s time to get serious and use Rankyaku: Gyrogori. Simeon begins to spin himself with his arms outstretched, rapidly gaining momentum, until he looks similar to a spinning top. He tells his partner to jump, and as the Dragon-Man obliges, he then releases a Rankyaku in the shape of a destructive ring, the attack emanating from him as the epicenter. As the attack surges at the Green Devil duo, Adam barely has the time to push Taco down to duck under the attack. It slices through the building, removing a whole layer of marble. 

When the dust settles, the CP7 agents see that Adam and Taco aren’t dead, which Nishiki notes to be a pain to have to kill them up close and personal now. However, as they look closer, they see Adam stuck in a large, hollowed-out piece of rubble. Nishiki bursts out laughing, finding this hysterical, and Simeon wonders how this happened. Adam remembers he had seen a sizable chunk of rubble coming down at him, and using his swords he drilled into it just in time to save his life. However, he drilled it in such a way that the block itself trapped him in a sort of body-fitting cage. In the present, he can move his legs, but his arms are held up and restricted from moving. As Taco tells him to do something, Adam irritatedly tells him he clearly can’t fight in that condition. 

Simeon sighs, stating this is almost too easy, before telling Nishiki they can take their time with him since Adam wasn’t going anywhere. His friend agrees, and they both lunge at Taco. Taco, in a panic, uses a Bakuhatsu Shot right as they pounce, blowing them back but not causing any permanent damage. At that moment, Zane flies in through an open window. He asks if everything’s alright, since he saw a large attack from there. Taco is grateful for the help, but Adam says they will be fine, and that he should fly off and check on everyone else. The cat, seeing their two enemies, asks if he’s sure, but Adam responds that they’ve got this handled. As Zane leaves, Taco screams at Adam, asking how they plan to fight back against two zoan monsters in their current condition, but Adam says to trust him because he has a plan.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Zane flies outside and tries to fly into the third floor through its window, but finds that it’s locked. The cat decides to try the second floor instead, and the window is open. However, as he enters the large room, he is shocked by the sight he sees. Aphrodi is standing, using a mirror to check his reflection. He comments on how the battle had not taken as long as he thought, and that it’s a good thing his face wasn’t harmed. His hair moves in a confusing manner, and Angel, who is bloodied and constricted by the hair, is held up as a trophy. As Zane shouts to Angel, the girl sees Zane and says she thought she could fight him, but she couldn’t beat his Rokushiki with her own, stating his is so advanced. Aphrodi, glancing briefly in Zane’s direction, states that he can now also keep a pet cat for him and his bride. As Zane sets his knapsack on the ground, he gets mad and tells Aphrodi there are two things that make him mad: the first is when his friends are hurt, and the second is when he’s called a pet. Zane tells Aphrodi to prepare himself, because he just did both.

Aphrodi stands for a moment, shocked to see Zane’s conviction, but then laughs, finding it hysterical that a flying, talking cat can even think of defeating him. But Zane uses this to his advantage, quickly going into his Muscle Boost and uppercutting Aphrodi using an attack called Ikusei , shocking him so much that he is blown back, and in the process lets go of Angel. As the government agent gets up, he quickly uses a strand of hair to pick up his mirror and check his reflection, worrying about if his perfect chin was messed up by the attack. As Angel jumps back toward Zane, the doctor asks her if she’s sure she can keep fighting, since while he can tell her wounds aren’t fatal, they must be painful. Angel tells him not to worry, as she just needs a moment to compose herself. However, right at that moment, a large piece of rubble crushes down from the floor above them. Lying on top of the rubble is a very wounded Yato, shocking the duo.

The Green Devil chef has painful needles and thorns piercing him all over his body, causing him to bleed in numerous locations. While each wound was relatively small, Zane still worries at the sheer number of them. Yato looks up weakly, panting and stating he’s sorry for failing thus far, and that he can keep trying if he takes a moment to breathe. Sitting up, he wheezes and catches his breath. As the other two look up through the hole in the ceiling, they see Naomi smirking, the woman stating it’s unfortunate that her toy broke so easily. Angel, immediately enraged, tells Yato she’ll take it from there. The Green Devil navigator tells Zane she’s going to make Naomi pay for attacking their idiot chef, and that he should deal with Aphrodi on his own. Before Zane can even respond, she uses Geppou , jumping up to the third floor. Naomi asks her if she truly believes in her words, and Angel responds that she hates the way she spoke about her friend, and that she should get ready to be taken out.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, on the sixth floor, Shocker is seen trying to punch Mark with Gomu Gomu no Pistol , but the agent dodges using Kami-e then stabs the pirate with Shigan . As Shocker tries to recover, he goes for Gomu Gomu no Stamp , trying to kick him. Mark clashes against it with his own leg, before using the other one to fire a Rankyaku at Shocker, cutting into him. As Shocker goes for Gomu Gomu no Gatling , Mark uses Kami-e again, dodging everyone of the punches and asking Shocker why he won’t just give up. Suddenly, one of Shocker’s punches lands, and Mark is thrown back forcefully. The agent gets mad and uses Soru: Chokusen to instantly appear right above Shocker, before kicking the Green Devil captain hard into a crate. 

As he gets up and wipes blood from his brow, Shocker talks to himself, stating he has to try something different, as another simple exchange of Gomu Gomu no attacks and Rokushiki techniques would see him bested again. The boy bends down and pumps blood, activating Gear Second. Mark, seeing Shocker letting off steam and turning red, asks what he thinks that will do. Shocker says his power-up is going to help him win. Mark smirks and says to hold on then, since he’ll power himself up as well. As Shocker looks on, Mark’s body grows and he becomes a huge, ogre-ish creature with red hair, orange skin, and horns. His feet merge and become wisps of orange smoke. Mark informs Shocker that this is the Beast Form of his devil fruit, revealing he has eaten the Hito Hito no Mi, Mythical Model: Majin (Human Human Fruit, Mythical Model: Genie), which allows him to turn into a genie or Human/Genie Hybrid at will. He then says he doesn’t like the Beast Form that much, and that he much prefers fighting in his Hybrid Form, using that transformation as he gains legs. He tells Shocker that this will be hell from now on.

Mark's Human/Genie Hybrid Form

As the government agent moves, Shocker tries to dodge his attacks, but Mark hits him with Kami Shigan , the force of his attack being multiplied by his form’s added strength. He then twirls on his side, using Kami no Rankyaku: Amenedachi with the intention of slicing Shocker at the waist. The pirate barely manages to teleport away thanks to the Soru -speed of Gear 2nd. Shocker runs toward him, using Gomu Gomu no Jet Bullet , but the attack is simply tanked by his reinforced body. Mark says his attacks won’t work against his body as it is currently. As Shocker jumps away and backs up, Mark tells him how the legend of the genie’s three wishes incarnated themselves as his devil fruit’s three great powers, which gave him control of three more forms with different powers: Fujin , Raijin , and Enjin, which granted him control of wind, lightning, and fire respectively when he uses each form. 

Mark transforms into his Enjin Form, the genie’s orange skin becoming red, and uses Shigan: Kakyu, piercing Shocker before blasting him back with a fireball. Switching to his green Fujin form, the leader of CP7 uses Shigan: Toppu, a jet blast of wind emanating from the point of contact, damaging Shocker and sending him crashing into the crates lying around. Mark laughs, stating that this power makes him almighty, then says that this would be the end of Shocker and his crew. Shocker, struggling to rise, tells him he’ll never give up as long as his crew needs him and his journey isn’t complete. Mark grins, stating that in that case, they should dance some more.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Zane, still in Muscle Boost, moves Yato to a far side wall to rest, telling the chef to leave the battle to him and just focus on recovery. Yato attempts to speak, but the cat tells him that he’ll tend to him after he deals with this creep. As Zane turns toward Aphrodi, the government agent puts his mirror away, stating that the cat is lucky that his beautiful face wasn’t permanently altered. Zane switches to his Arm Boost , a form emphasizing his arm muscles, and tries to attack Aphrodi head-on. As he rushes the agent, Aphrodi manipulates his hair to form a protective shield, blocking Zane’s attack. As Zane wonders how Aphrodi controls his hair, the agent tells him that the Seimei Kikan techniques he was trained in allow him control over his bodily functions, including his luscious hair. The man then says it’s his turn to ask a question, and asks Zane how he can shift into so many forms, asking if his fruit is a Zoan type. Zane tells him he is not obligated to respond, but the agent merely laughs, telling Zane to not mess up the friendship they are forming. 

Aphrodi sends his hair as needles using Seimei Kikan: Senbon Hari , attempting to pierce Zane. The cat puts his arms in front of him to try and block the attack, but it pushes him back into a wall. As Zane gets up, he goes into Claw Boost and uses his long claws to cut two incoming tendrils off, angering Aphrodi. Zane jumps and tries to scratch him with a flurry of swipes, but Aphrodi uses Seimei Kikan: Kami-e: Kaiso Ugoki , which allows him to both dodge Zane’s attacks and confuse him to the point that Zane couldn’t predict where the next attack is coming from. Zane switches to Leg Boost and uses Jump Crash , intending to crush Aphrodi under his powerful legs, but Aphrodi manages to catch each of his limbs with his hair. As the CP7 member smiles evilly, he tells him he’ll regret cutting his hair off. He forms his hair into 100 hands and uses Seimei Kikan: Mugen no Shigan , piercing Zane from all sides and causing the cat’s fur to be soaked with blood. 

As Zane, seemingly defeated, transforms back to his regular form, Aphrodi throws the cat against a wall, pinning him there with a hand made of hair. Aphrodi says he would gladly take Zane’s life, but he unfortunately needs to keep Zane alive as a peace offering to his new bride, stating Zane will fill the role of their pet. Zane angrily tells him that he isn’t a pet, but Aphrodi tells him to be quiet, as a mere animal could never hope to best a human. However, as he talks, Zane reaches for and grabs his knapsack. Bringing out a small, orange ball from the bag, Zane flashes back to his time with Helzen. He remembers Helzen showing the drugs to him, the doctor stating he had gotten the recipe from a certain fellow famous doctor who says it would force an unnatural temporary evolution in an animal, though it comes at a dangerous price. Helzen told Zane to not take one, as the resulting power would be great, too great for the cat to control, and the monster would ravage their island. Zane had said he understands, but later that night, Zane took some of the drugs and studied their composition. 

In the present, Zane thinks to himself that in the current moment, the best way to help his friends is by using such forbidden power: his Bakeneko Boost . Zane eats the rumble ball, praying that he won’t focus on or attack Yato. The cat then begins to grow rapidly, becoming a massive beast. His blue fur grows rapidly out of control, becoming a shaggy coat. Going on all fours, his limbs become muscled and powerful, his claws sharpening. His teeth grow into sharp fangs, and his tail becomes long and bushy. As Zane completes his transformation, he lets out a tremendous roar. Aphrodi, his eyes wide with terror, states that he resembles the mythical bakeneko from folklore. 

The giant cat monster terrifies Aphrodi, but he still attempts to attack it. Steeling his resolve, the agent uses Geppou to get near Zane’s face, before striking with Rankyaku . However, to his shock, the attack did not seem to faze the monster. As a massive paw is about to swipe him, Aphrodi uses Soru and dodges. Using his strongest attack, Aphrodi unloads the Seimei Kikan: Mugen no Shigan , the fingers all barraging the monster’s coat. However, once again, the attack is not felt. Zane swats Aphrodi into the opposing wall so hard the agent notes his ribs are broken. The monster then rampages, continuously crushing Aphrodi under his paws, disfiguring his face and knocking him unconscious easily. However, the monster does not stop there. Having no control, the monster roars loudly again, with all participants of the battle wondering what the sound is. Yato, who saw everything, is completely shocked, but cannot move to help his friend…

Move Index

Chapter Text

On the first floor, Jordan punches Kabeyama outside. As he follows the large man, they end up back on the bridge. Kabeyama spins himself rapidly, using Rankyaku: Amenedachi , which Jordan ducks under quickly. As he looks back, he sees the attack slice clean through the tower. Kabeyama then glances around, and spots Jareel and Cruella talking deeper in the plaza, noting with surprise his betrayal. Kabeyama shouts over to Jareel, telling the man he swears that he’ll report him, get him fired, and then personally kill him. However, Jordan tells the “chubby bush” to pay attention to the fight, punching Kabeyama away. As Kabeyama spits blood out, he uses Tekkai to protect himself, but Jordan uses Tekken in his gut, breaking through the defense somewhat. Kabeyama asks him how he is able to punch through his body, as it should be hard as steel when he uses Tekkai. Jordan smirks and responds that he is out of luck because he is made of steel, too. He then jumps on Kabeyama and pins him to the ground, overlooking the bridge.

As Kabeyama looks below, they see the water churn as it is infested with World Government-sanctioned Fighting Fish. As Jordan is about to ask what those fish are, Kabeyama kicks him off of him and gets up quickly. Kabeyama uses Tetsu Kabe: Dome to trap Jordan in a large steel dome, telling the cyborg to get out of that if he can. Jordan punches the dome a few times, but the steel remains steadfast. Jordan tells himself that he didn’t have time to test his new tech out, but now is as good a time as any to try it out. He reveals that he managed to implant his Impact Dials from Weatheria into his hands. As he touches the dome with his palm, he uses Dai Impact , the force of his attack blasting a hole right through the steel. The pressure also knocks Kabeyama off balance, and to seal the deal, Jordan recklessly tackles him, and they both fall toward the water. They see the Fighting Fish opening their mouths to eat them, and Kabeyama screams that he’s not dying here. In order to keep afloat, Kabeyama begins to use Geppou to fly up, but Jordan quickly grabs onto his legs, telling the man he better find a way out or they’ll both die, with Kabeyama asking if he’s insane. 

As Kabeyama grabs onto the wall of the bridge, he says he would love nothing more than to kick him off, but he needs to save himself first. The man climbs up the bridge with his bare hands, with the duo reaching the top and both panting. Jordan asks if Kabeyama is alright and the agent responds he is, before Jordan thanks him and says bye, walking away before Kabeyama realizes with a start they’re meant to be fighting. Kabeyama uses Iwa Kabe: Ishien, a raised rocky platform pushing up underneath Jordan before a group of jagged rocks pierce the cyborg. However, he hears Jordan’s voice through the dust, the Green Devil pirate asking him if he really thought rocks would work well on someone whose body is made of steel. Kabeyama, flustered, uses Soru to get up to Jordan’s level, only for him to be punched into the tower wall by a well-placed Tekken. 

Kabeyama angrily says that he’s tired of this back and forth, and that now he’ll use his ultimate attack. Kabeyama uses Iwa Kabe: Tekkai: Tamarmor, encasing himself in a ball of reinforced rock, telling Jordan that it would crush him. As he rolls through the air toward him, Jordan moves to punch him, but Kabeyama tells him it’s useless, since his ultimate attack is also his ultimate defense. Jordan responds that just because it’s an ultimate defense for him, it doesn’t mean someone else can’t bypass it, before finishing the fight using Dai Impact, the force being so great it blasts through Kabeyama’s armor and sends him crashing into the tower wall, before falling down to the ground 20 feet below.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Hopping off the pedestal, Jordan thinks his problems are over, and wonders how the others are faring. However, he hears the wild roar again, wondering what’s happening, before seeing a hole blasted through the second-floor wall, and Aphrodi’s limp body is forcefully thrown out of it. As the man crashlands further in the plaza, the gathered World Government soldiers exclaim at seeing one of the powerful CP7 members so badly beaten. As they all turn toward the tower, the government agents exclaim that there are reports of a giant monster, and that one of that size hasn’t been seen since the destruction of Enies Lobby 7 years ago.

Jordan, wondering what they are talking about, decides to head inside and see for himself. Meanwhile, Cruella wonders whether they should go help out the others, and Jareel tells her there’s no point since the others are all there, and that their best course of action is actually to go secure their ship, as pretty soon they’ll need to escape. Cruella asks him why he’s helping, smiling, and Jareel tells her to shut up, getting irritatedly embarrassed.  

Jordan runs up the stairs to the second floor and sees the giant monster rampaging. As he wonders what the hell is going on, Yato informs him that it’s Zane, and that he underwent some sort of transformation that made him lose control. Yato expresses his wish to save Zane, and Jordan agrees, though he says he’s not sure how to do that yet. Suddenly, the cat monster jumps and crashes through the ceiling, hauling himself up to the third floor. As Jordan tells Yato he’s going to help and runs up the stairs, Zane’s knapsack falls close to where Yato is lying down, with the man raising his head and looking at the bag.

On the third floor, Angel and Naomi are both equally shocked to see a giant monster appear from under them. As they both jump up using Geppou , Naomi wonders what could have happened below to Aphrodi. She attacks Zane with her Rankyaku , but like her comrade, she finds her attacks are not having any effect. Zane roars and swats at her and Angel, but they both use Soru just in time to dodge. Zane, looking at Angel, is about to attack with a bite, but Jordan saves her at the last moment and brings her out of harm’s way. As Angel asks what’s going on, the cyborg tells her that the monster is Zane, and he thinks he found a plan to neutralize him, but it would require him concentrating on Jordan. As such, he tells Angel she needs to take care of Naomi, so that her interference doesn’t make the situation worse. Angel understands, and as Jordan pushes Zane toward the far side of the room, Angel stands, ready to fight Naomi.

Chapter Text

Angel starts attacking Naomi, attempting to hit her with Shigan , but she uses Soru and moves away. Angel follows up with Rankyaku: Arashi , a multitude of blades surging at Naomi, but the agent uses Soru again, dodging the attack before getting close to the pirate and striking her with Shigan . With her finger still piercing her shoulder, Naomi uses Rankyaku: Jump , kicking Angel away. As the pirate tries to get up, Naomi explains that each of the six of them specialize in one of the six powers of Rokushiki, with her expertise being Soru. She uses Soru: Clone Butai , moving so fast that she creates afterimage clones. With her illusion active, she uses Multi-Hand Shigan , her attack coming from all sides and piercing Angel. 

As Angel jumps back and pants, blood pouring from her arms, Naomi looks over to Zane and talks about how it’s so unsightly. Angel pants and says he’s a he, and has a personality of his own. Naomi tells her that she can’t sympathize with some ugly monster. Angel shouts at her to stop talking about her friend like that, and that she’s getting tired of hearing her mock her crewmates. Naomi tells her that she talks a big game, but at the end of the day, she’ll end up like her friends, since roses can’t bloom in a battlefield. Angel tells her to shut up, stating she promised to take her down, and that’s what she’ll do, before striking her with a surprising Rankyaku .

Naomi, getting up, decides it's time to begin using her devil fruit. She reveals she has eaten the Rozu Rozu no Mi (Rose Rose Fruit), a paramecia that allows the user to bloom roses, rose petals, and thorns where she wishes. As Angel uses Shigan , Naomi blocks the attack with Bara no Tate , creating a shield of roses. She then uses Toge Ude to grow thorns on her arms and increase the deadlines of Shigan . She strikes at Angel, who gets hit once, crying in pain, but keeps moving back. The Green Devil pirate tries to use Rankyaku , but Naomi breaks through the energy attack with Toge Lancer , shooting her thorns at Angel. Angel manages to jump clear using Geppou , but Naomi jumps above her and attacks her with Hanablizzard , a storm of sharp petals pushing Angel to the ground. 

As Naomi stands above her, she tells the girl she does not stand a  chance because her devil fruit is too versatile. However, Angel states she’s had enough, and she is going to use her ultimate attack. As Naomi wonders what she’s talking about, she uses Shigan: Toge Ude , trying to stab her, but Angel uses Tekkai and blocks the attack. Naomi jumps back and shoots Thorn Lancer at her, but she uses Kami-e to dodge the attack. As Naomi launches Rankyaku , Angel uses Geppou to jump over, before shooting her own tempest kick at the agent. Angel then uses Soru to get close to Naomi, before piercing her with Shigan . As Naomi winces, she asks what the point of that was. Angel tells her that she practiced all six of the techniques, and that only when someone masters all six powers does the secret seventh power become usable. Naomi, sweating now, tries to finish the battle with Rosen Karone , growing huge roses with sharp thorns and spinning them all rapidly at Angel. Angel evades them all before finishing Naomi off with a point-blank Rokuougan , knocking her out.

Move Index

Chapter Text

With Naomi down, Angel turns her attention to Jordan and Zane. Jordan manages to push Zane away from the stairs, towards the wall, but Zane turns and punches a huge hole in the wall, using it to get outside. The monster then climbs up the tower and busts into the fourth floor, with Angel and Jordan following up the stairs. 

On the fourth floor, Taco and Adam are running away from the CP7 members, because that was Adam’s “genius” plan. As Taco irritatedly tells him to think of something else, all four of them are suddenly shocked to see a giant monster burst through the outer wall. Taco wonders if that’s another CP7 member, but Adam guesses that the blue fur meant the monster is actually Zane, shocking Taco. However, Nishiki is the first to react, laughing as he transforms back into his Beast Form. He says that he doesn’t know who that creature is, but that it’s enough for him to know he’s not with the government. As he lumbers toward Zane, Angel and Jordan reach the top of the stairs and stand in shock, Jordan lamenting how he’s too far to help. Nishiki moves to bite the monster, and the Green Devil Pirates watch in horror, unable to do anything. Suddenly, Nishiki is slammed in the face hard by none other than Yato, who kicks the large dragon away from his friend. As he lands, the others call out his name, and he smiles and says he’s back.

Everyone is glad to see him, and when Angel asks how he recovered from his loss to Naomi, he informs them that he took some ambrosie from inside Zane’s napsack, and he took more than the suggested amount, which rejuvenated him quickly, though he complains that he feels like he’s burning up. He tells his friends that he will handle Nishiki. Jordan then thinks of an idea and grabs Adam. As the swordsman protests, he tells him to calm down and he’s sure this should work, calling to Zane to get his attention before throwing Adam at the monster. Zane, seeing something come at him, smashes Adam into the wall, shocking Angel. As rubble falls from the wall to the floor and dust rises, Simeon says that things are getting too out of hand, and that he’s got to start killing them quickly, using Soru to get in front of Taco. As he’s about to crush him with his fist, out of the dust, Adam blocks the attack with two of his swords. As he pushes Simeon back, he unsheathes his third sword and says he missed being free. Zane roars and tries to pounce, but Jordan shoves his body into his massive face, pushing the monster back. Yato tells Angel and Taco to let the three of them handle the three monsters, as the three of them are seen facing off against their three monstrous zoan opponents. 

As Adam and Yato stand back to back, Adam asks the chef if he's sure he feels alright. Yato tells the swordsman to not worry about him and that he’s fine. While Simeon simply grunts, Nishiki gets up and says that these damn pirates can’t beat trained agents. He states that they were trained to the greatest extremes, and that he’ll make sure they all die here, before he uses Hono Hoko , breathing fire at the duo. Adam tells Yato to move and pushes him back, before vertically cutting the fire in two, shocking the dragon. As the fire hits the walls and begins to set the floor ablaze, Simeon curses, stating that Nishiki’s fire is getting everywhere and things are getting too complicated. Charging Rankyaku in both his arms, he uses Yontoryu: Guerre-Rilla, two quick slashes aimed right at Adam’s turned back. Yato backflips and twist-kicks the slashes away, stating that they’re even now. As the duo agree to switch back opponents, their right arms lock briefly, their way of saying good luck. Yato says that after they win this, the whole world will know their name, and Adam agrees.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Taco and Angel run out of the large room, wondering what they should do. Taco remembers their conversation from earlier when the crew was all together on the first floor, stating they needed to look for the control room so that they could open up the gates for their escape. As he thinks about where it could be, Angel reminds him that there are two smaller towers adjacent to the main one they are in, and that they should each go and check one, as the control room is surely in one of those. They run down the stairs and out the main door, seeing the two towers to either side. As the duo agree, Taco runs to the one on the right, and Angel checks the one on the left.

As Jordan watches them go, he states that with things under control, he can now focus on helping Zane. Adam asks him what he plans on doing, and Jordan says he thinks he found a way to neutralize the monster. The cyborg pushes Zane far enough for his plan to work. Knocking the monster against the far wall, he jumps on Zane’s belly and uses Dai Impact, blasting Zane through the wall and letting him fall into the sea below. Adam asks him if he’s insane, but Jordan says that he’s sure water will deactivate Zane’s transformation, since it seems to have some tie to his devil fruit. Adam says that Devil Fruit users can’t swim, and Jordan, remembering the fact, quickly dives into the water to save his friend from the Fighting Fish.

As Nishiki gets back up, he tells the Green Devil chef that he’s one of the strongest animals known to exist. As he brings a massive claw down on Yato, the pirate jumps over the attack, somersaulting rapidly up along his huge arm before bringing his heel down on the dragon’s head with a Concasse Kick . As he tries to rebound, Nishiki swats him away with his tail, sending Yato skidding across the ground. The chef gets back up quickly, jumping up and striking the dragon’s neck, before jumping off Nishik’s arm and uppercut kicking him in the chin, kicking the government agent away. Meanwhile, Adam rushes at Simeon like a spinning top, friction being created between his blades and Simeon’s arms. Adam recovers and in the same breath uses Santoryu: Tora Gari, bringing his swords down violently. Simeon tanks it, though with difficulty, before offsetting him and punching Adam square in the face. Adam rebounds off the ground and the two clash, before Adam jumps back and sends two flying slashes at the gorilla. Simeon blocks them on his arm and sends the slashes behind him. As Simeon begins panting, Adam smirks.

On the top floor, Shocker finds that going into his Gear 2 does not help balance the fight. He tries to use Gomu Gomu no Jet Bazooka , but Mark simply tanks the attack with his large body before crushing him into the ground in his hybrid form. The agent then changes to his Fujin form and uses Galveston to summon a large twister that shreds Shocker, leaving him bleeding. Not giving Shocker time to breathe, he switches to his Raijin form, and strikes down at Shocker with a massive thunderbolt attack named Derecho . However, as the smoke clears, Mark notes with a start the attack did not seem to work. Using Soru to get in front of Shocker, he charges his finger with electricity before piercing Shocker with Shigan: Rakurai . However, the Green Devil captain remains unfazed, smiling before hitting the agent in the face hard with a well-placed Gomu Gomu no Jet Pistol. 

As the government agent gets up, Mark realizes with a start that electricity will not work on Shocker on account of his rubber body. Mark sighs, reprimanding himself for making such an obvious mistake, before stating that he simply won’t use that form then, before transforming to his Enjin form. Forming a large ball of fire in his palms he throws it at Shocker using the move Manitoba . The resulting explosion rocks the room, and destroys the roof and most of the sixth floor, as well as badly burning Shocker. As the crates are set on fire around him, Shocker struggles to rise. Mark stands over him, surprised that he can still move but telling the pirate it’s over. Grabbing Shocker and flinging him upward, Mark places his palm to Shocker’s abdomen and uses Rokamigan , a much more powerful version of Rokuougan using diving power from his devil fruit. The massive shockwave reverberates through Shocker, causing the Green Devil’s captain to cough up blood. As Mark drops him to the floor, he states that the power of a god cannot be matched by a lowlife like him.

Move Index

Chapter Text

On the fourth floor, Nishiki has gone back to his human form after the kick he received from Yato. As he rises, he chuckles, stating that it has been a long time since someone had been able to hurt him the way he did. The agent muses that it is almost a shame to have to kill Yato, but Yato simply smirks and tells the man he’s not going to die here. As Nishiki goes into his Hybrid Form, he jumps up using Geppou before diving at Yato, his wings allowing him to soar around the chef. He passes Yato and tries to scratch him, but the chef flips out of the way at the last moment. Nishiki tries again, but Yato dodges it everytime, on the last pass retaliating with a kick aimed at Nishiki’s neck. The dragon-man dodges out of the way, but as Yato tries to recover himself, Nishiki grabs Yato’s leg using his tail and slams Yato into the ground. Yato tries using Party Table Kick Course, but the government agent simply flies out of the way. Nishiki then flaps his wings rapidly, using Toppūryū to create a large gust of wind that knocks Yato off balance. As the chef teeters, Nishiki swoops in for the kill, piercing Yato with Ryūgan, his special variation of the Shigan.

As Yato grunts in pain, he kicks Nishiki back hard in the stomach and tries to catch his breath. The dragon-man states that there’ll be no rest for him, and rushes Yato, trying to swat him with his tail. Yato jumps over the attack and attacks with a downward barrage of kicks named Saltshaker Kick , followed up quickly by a Sheep Kick . However, Nihsiki laughs, stating that no matter the pain he felt, Yato has no way of dealing significant damage to him. Yato states that he’ll have to evolve on the spot then, and that there must be a way to expel the burning he felt inside his chest before it kills him. Getting an idea, the chef spins around on his leg rapidly, activating the Diable Jambe . 

As fire licks Yato’s right leg, Nishiki laughs, asking what kind of theatrical show he thinks this is. Yato murmurs to himself that the extra fire he is using to expel the heating from him would cause him to probably never be able to use Diable Jambe again after this time, but that once is all he needs. Nishiki reminds him once again that he is one of the strongest creatures to ever exist, and that his little kicks would never get through his tough dragon scales. Yato simply tells him that as a chef, he’ll make him eat his words, before using Diable Jambe: Lunge Kick to hit Nishiki in the stomach. The dragon-man shrieks and is sent flying back into the stairwell, hitting his head on the railing. As the agent gets up, he screams about how the attack burned him. Yato then follows up with Diable Jambe: Venison Kick , spinning and barrage-kicking Nishiki into an opposing wall before using Diable Jambe: Concassé Kick , using a burning heel and slamming Nishiki into the ground. 

As Nishiki gets up, pissed, he wonders what kind of power Yato had just gained. However, the dragon-man rises, stating that no matter how many power ups Yato receives, it still will not be enough to defeat him. Nishiki jumps forward and pierces Yato with Ryūgan . As the pirate jumps back into the air above the stairwell, Nishiki follows him, stating that his aerial maneuverability is unmatched. Nishiki uses Geppou: Sora no Dokuhebi , jumping high into the air and darting around before jumping straight at him and pierce him with another Ryūgan attack. Yato, trying to get away, is suddenly caught by Nishiki’s tail, and the CP7 agent tells him he won’t show him any mercy, using all ten fingers for his Jūryūgan . As blood spurts from Yato’s abdomen, he tells the agent he gave him an open opportunity. With Nishiki’s tail still wrapped around his leg, he spins rapidly, shaking Nishiki off him and off balance, before finishing the dragon-man off with Diable Jambe: Neppū , a kick so powerful it sends Nishiki flying down the stairwell to the first floor, where he lays defeated. As Yato lands on the ground, he looks over the railing and says that the devil’s leg burns through all, before stumbling, realizing his legs are quite burned.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Inside the fourth floor’s main room, Adam watches Simeon carefully. Suddenly, the gorilla-man charges Rankyaku on his arms and spins spinning rapidly while charging at Adam, using Koma Gori against the swordsman. As Adam brunts it, Simeon chuckles and states he’s borrowing his technique. Adam tries using Santoryu: Oni Giri , but Simeon dodges to the side and slams Adam down. As the swordsman struggles to get up, Simeon strikes him with his own Shigan variant, Gorigan , with Adam coughing up blood. Simeon continues his attack, slashing Adam with Ittoryu Iai: Shishi Sonson, before viciously attacking the pirate with all four of his swords, gradually wearing Adam down. As Adam struggles against Simeon, the gorilla-man tells him to give up since his one sword advantage will make him the victor eventually.

Hearing this, Adam, with renewed effort, parries every one of the attacks, telling Simeon he doesn’t care that he has one more sword, as a master of swords has to learn to fight at any number of disadvantages. As he pushes Simeon back, he tells him he’s not the only one who can become a gorilla, beefing himself up with Nigori before using Nigori-Zake , slashing Simeon’s torso. Simeon jumps above him and clasps his hands together, before bringing them down using Nitoryu: Nigori-Smash. The attack crashes into Adam, the extra weight from his gorilla body crushing Adam from above. As the pirate tries to push back against the attack, the force causes the ground underneath him to crack. 

Adam manages to push Simeon off him, and the agent lands nearby. Simeon huffs, stating that all pirates are the same. As Adam wonders what he’s talking about, Simeon asks him why pirates in general always believe they can oppose the World Government. Simeon reminds him that the World Government is a massive organization of a plethora of countries, and that a singular pirate group has no hope of fighting the entire world. Adam simply says that the reason they’re fighting is to achieve their own dreams, and that no matter who gets in his way, he’ll fight anyone he needs to in order to become the world’s strongest swordsman. He then says that on top of having personal objectives, they (the crew) all swore an unspoken oath to make Shocker the pirate king, and states that the World Government will be the least of their worries by the time they achieve that. As Adam’s speech confuses Simeon, his passion activates the Hinoken, his blades being set ablaze. 

Simeon wonders what the hell is happening, and why his swords are all of a sudden on fire. Adam says that it means that it represents his burning drive. Simeon states that that is nonsensical, and uses Soru to teleport right in front of Adam before attacking with Gorigan. However, Adam counters with a single sword. As Simeon jumps back, he claims that his hand is burning. Adam uses Nitoryu: Moeru no Gobyaku Pound Ho, a burning flying slash straight at Simeon’s face, burning the straps of Simeon’s goggles and making them fall off. Simeon screams at him, stating that those goggles are important to him and he’ll kill him for that. The agent tells him he’ll end him with an attack that will split him at the waist, using his strongest attack, the Rankyaku: Gyrogori, once more. However, as the massive blade ring surges toward Adam, the swordsman slashes it with his fiery blade, destroying the attack as it shatters into sparks. As Simeon begins to think that this man has bested him, Adam gets close to Simeon before using Santoryu: Hinoken: Hiirohasu, three slashes that form the shape of a lotus. As Simeon falls backward and reverts back to his human form, he hears Adam say that he told him he would take off his damn goggles.

Move Index

Chapter Text

In his building, Taco is snooping around, looking for some sort of control room. As he continues walking, some government agents converge on his location. Panicking, he quickly takes them out with Namari Shot . As he continues searching, wondering where the room is, he stops and rests against a door. As he leans against it, the door opens up, and he stumbles into the control room, with the two guards shocked that he found them. As he quickly takes care of them, Taco talks through his Ear Shell, telling the others that he found the control room. As he looks at the panels, he sees a lever, and guesses that it might be the one to open the floodgates. He pulls it, and is relieved to see it worked.

On the Stormy, Cruella and Jareel are fighting off World Government soldiers who are trying to overrun the ship. The duo see the floodgates opening. Cruella tells Taco it worked and that he did a good job, and that they are just about done securing the ship. Just then, Jordan surfaces onto the ship, carrying an unconscious Zane in one arm. As he spits water out of his mouth, he tells Cruella those fighting fish wasn’t easy. As he sees Jareel on his ship, he gets mad, asking what he is doing there, but Cruella simply states they would explain later, as there is no time left. Meanwhile, Angel has run back into the main building after hearing Taco found the control room. She meets up with Yato and Adam on the fourth floor, congratulating them both on beating their respective opponents. She then talks with the rest of the crew, telling someone to go get Shocker so that they can leave. Taco realizes that the tower he’s in is at the same height as the fifth floor of the main tower, so he blows a hole in the wall, before using one of Angel’s Wind Knots to fly himself over to the main building. Taco tells them that he’ll do it.

At that point, Shocker is just about defeated. He is seen lying on the floor, bleeding and badly burned, and the sixth floor is almost completely destroyed and up in flames. Back in his human form, Mark asks how he is planning on beating him in such a state. Shocker grunts and says he doesn’t know how yet, but will beat him. Mark laughs and tells him to just give up and accept death, as he can’t even move. Shocker says he doesn’t give a damn, and states that once he is able to move again, he will end Mark. Just then, Taco arrives at the summit. The sniper is shocked to see the sixth floor in ruins. He panics and tells Shocker to get up so they can go. Shocker tries, but is even more scared for Taco’s life. As the Green Devil captain struggles, Taco says that the rest of them already beat their opponents, and that only Mark was left. Mark is shocked at this, stating there is no way that he’s the last one left. Becoming enraged, Mark says he’ll finish this alone. 

The agent uses Soru to teleport straight to where Taco is and changes into his hybrid form to use Kami Shigan in Taco’s gut. The attack sends Taco flying. As the sniper rises, he realizes his abdomen is bleeding quite badly. He tries escaping by using a Kemuri Shot , smoke filling the room, but Mark finds him and kicks him away. As Mark advances, Taco tries defending himself by using Prominence Flame , but none of his attacks seem to be having any effect on his zoan body. Taco, remembering obsteel’s reactivity to fire, even throws his slingshot itself into the fire, bracing himself as a massive explosion shakes the room. 

However, Mark emerges from the smoke, covered in dust but otherwise fine. The assassin, no longer his usual confident self, states that the killing game will begin with Taco, then he will kill all of Shocker’s friends and make the captain watch in despair, before killing Shocker himself. Mark grabs Taco by the neck and lifts him up, asking Taco for any last words. Taco, panicking and tears streaming down his face, says he believes that no matter what, his captain would not let him down. Right when Mark is about to use Shigan at Taco’s heart, a new rage fuels the Green Devil captain. Suddenly, inexplicably, Shocker uses Gomu Gomu no Jet Muchi to slam Mark back into a wall, dropping Taco. He shouts at Mark to leave his first mate alone, to which Taco, still crying, is shocked at the sudden news.

Move Index

Chapter Text

As Shocker pants, Taco gets up and asks what Shocker means about him being his first mate. Shocker says he cares about all his friends, but he feels like Taco understands him to a deeper extent, and that he trusts him with his life. As Taco tears up, Shocker states that he knows he may not be the strongest, but what’s important to him is his heart.

Meanwhile, Mark struggles to get up, shocked that he was hit. The government agent does not understand what changed, but he notes he can suddenly feel Shocker’s attacks. He glances at Shocker's limbs and sees that on his knuckles and the soles of his feet there is a bit of black residue. Shocked, Mark wonders whether that really is what he thinks it is. Enraged, Mark gets up and says the situation has not changed, and that pirates can never beat the government. Shocker tells him to think again, and they rush at each other once more.

Mark tries punching Shocker twice, but the captain dodges both of the strikes and punches Mark in the gut. The agent transforms to his Fujin form and creates a shredding twister that blows Shocker away into some crates. As Shocker starts getting up, Mark appears above him and tries crushing Shocker into the ground, but the Green Devil captain backflips to dodge, before hitting Mark back with Gomu Gomu no Jet Bazooka , sending Mark flying into the opposing wall. As Mark gets back up, Shocker jumps up and uses Gomu Gomu no Jet Ame to pummel Mark into the ground. However, Mark grabs him and slams him into the ground, before switching to his Enjin form and burning him with Shigan: Kakyu. Shocker tries attacking, but Mark attacks with Manitoba , the massive fireball causing a great explosion that sends Shocker flying into the opposing wall. However, as the smoke clears, Mark sees Shocker tank it, even as his clothes burn off. Mark gets above Shocker, trying to aim for his heart, but the Green Devil captain uses Gomu Gomu no Jet Stamp to offset the man’s punch, before slamming him down with Gomu Gomu no Jet Ono . However, Mark grabs him again, before using Rokamigan once more, the force of the shockwave surging through Shocker’s body and causing the pirate to cough up loads of blood.

As Gear 2nd deactivates, Mark drops Shocker to the ground, telling the pirate it is useless. Reverting to his full Majin form, the leader of CP7 towers over Shocker, asking him how he is going to defeat this giant power. Shocker suddenly thinks of an idea, and tells him he will have to defeat him using another giant. He bites into his thumb and blows into it, inflating his arm and thus activating Gear Third for the first time. As he makes his fist massive, Shocker shouts that he made a promise to take him down and he would do just that, and that he wouldn't let a foe like the government get in the way of his dream. As Shocker rushes toward Mark, the giant hand in tow, Mark wonders what kind of devil this man is. Shocker finishes off the fight by using Gomu Gomu no Gigant Pistol, slamming into Mark so hard he spurts blood from his mouth, smashing Mark through the wall and into the sea below.

Move Index

Chapter Text

As Shocker pants, he suddenly deflates and turns into a small, chibi version of himself. As Taco wonders if he’s ok, he tiredly tells Taco it is probably the price of using Gear 3rd. Taco asks if he will be alright, but Shocker says he is decently sure the effect is temporary. Taco slings Shocker on his back, telling him it’s not over yet, since they still have to escape, but that Cruella has already secured the ship. Angel calls Taco, asking him if Shocker won. The sniper smirks and says of course he did, with the others smiling. Adam, peering down below towards the water, wonders what they should do, but Yato tells them to look again. Sure enough, Jordan is driving the ship to where his friends are. Adam says there’s no way their shipwright wanted them to jump, but Jordan announces on the PA system, telling them all to jump down quickly, shocking Adam. Yato says it’s time to go, and the trio jump down to the deck of the ship. Taco sees the same thing, and thinks there’s no way he’ll survive a jump that large. Just then, the room starts to properly crumble, forcing Taco to jump. As he screams that he doesn’t want to die, he and Shocker are saved by Cruella’s void, bringing them onto the ship.

Jareel greets them with yo, shocking everyone as they wonder why he’s on their ship. Shocker orders Jordan to get them out of there, to which Jordan agrees and states he had added a special feature to the Stormy for emergency escapes. As he goes below the hull, he makes sure they have barrels of fish totaling three pounds in place as a fuel source, telling them that’s what powered the special features of the ship. He then deploys "Stormy White Take Flight: Airship Mode" and with that, the ship juts out two metal wings like a plane and a turbine engine behind the ship that propels them up into the air. However, Jordan tells them they need to get moving, as they aren’t getting far enough. Angel says she has an idea, and uses her wind knots, untying them and creating squalls that blast the ship even farther out to sea. They fly out of Sacremento Court for three miles, as a pound of fish grants them around a mile of flight, finally escaping the government stronghold. 

As the ship heavily lands on the sea, the crew finally breathe, not believing the battle they just had. Cruella apologizes, stating that she should have been more aware, but Shocker tells her that it’s not her fault, and that no matter what he’ll always retrieve any of them. On the deck, Jareel states he should be the one apologizing. He tells them he was so obsessed with his revenge that he didn’t think things through clearly. Adam and Jordan still do not trust him, with the shipwright telling him to get off, though Cruella says they do need to thank him for helping them secure their ship. Zane, patching up Shocker and Yato, asks Jareel what he’s going to do. Jareel laughs and calls Zane a furball, stating that he’ll probably strike out on his own again, as Zane irritatedly tells him to stop calling him that. 

Shocker looks over to the ex-Jose pirate and offers him a spot on the crew, thoroughly shocking the rest of them. Jareel thinks to himself for a bit, but then laughs and declines, stating he has to figure himself out. He does ask if they can drop him off though, and Jordan sighs and says he has a solution. The cyborg gives him one of the spare rowboats he keeps in the workshop. As Jareel says his goodbyes and thanks the crew, he states maybe he’ll see them again, but hopefully not. As the rest of the crew watch him depart, Shocker merely laughs and says they’ll meet again someday, he’s sure. Shocker turns toward the front of the ship, saying they’re off to their next adventure as the Stormy White continues to sail across the sea.

Chapter Text

Yaseinishi Island Arc

On the Stormy, everyone is admiring and telling the stories of how they beat their respective opponents back during the battle with CP7. Yato asks Zane if he feels better, and the cat tells them that he is, and that forcing Bakeneko Boost would always be his last resort. He feels bad for hurting Jordan, but Jordan laughs and tells him not to worry about it. As Zane patches up Angel, she thanks him for his help. She then complains that she used up all her wind knots, and that she has no idea when or where she can get anymore, but Cruella thanks her for doing so, as it was for the good of the crew, and Angel replies she supposes so. Taco then takes out his regular slingshot, telling the crew he has to go back to using it since he blew up his obsteel one, and that he’s in need of an upgrade soon. Adam tells him to consider learning sword fighting, but Taco says no way as he is the crew’s sniper. 

As Adam tells Taco to suit himself, he calls over to Shocker, who is lounging on the figurehead. He tells his captain to not fall in the sea, and Shocker shouts back to not worry about him. However, as the Green Devil captain looks up, he notices gray clouds. As he gets up and alerts his friends, Angel worriedly states that it’s a massive storm. Suddenly, the storm appears over the ship, churning the sea below and rocking the ship violently. As Taco screams they need to get inside, Zane is carried off by the wind, with Shocker quickly stretching and saving his friend. Angel tries to navigate them through it, but she can’t see where they are going, the rain being too heavy. As Jordan tries to steer them clear, Shocker suggests flying, but Jordan responds that the airship mode won’t work because of how dangerous the storm is, and plus they just used all the fish they had to fly out of Sacremento Court two days ago. They all brace for impact and try to wait out the storm, hoping it would pass. After about two hours, the storm finally subsides. 

As the sky clears, the crew begin to recover. Shocker and Taco tiredly look over the railing, with Cruella saying that was quite the big one. Adam asks if the Stormy’s alright, but Jordan says their ship is tough and can take a storm like that. Angel shivers, mentioning how she feels cold, so Yato says he’ll go inside and make coffee to warm them up. Looking through his spyglass, Taco then notices two people in a rowboat, clearly passed out, alerting the others to their presence. Zane, being a good doctor, asks the crew to bring them in so he can check up on them. Shocker stretches his hand and pulls them in. As Zane lies them down, they see that they are a middle-aged man and woman, both with yellow hair. The man has round glasses, and his hair is in bangs. The woman’s hair is tied up in a bun. Most notably, both of them appear to be wearing some semblance of high-class robes, almost as if they appear to be nobles of some sort. As Shocker looks at the duo, he determines them to both be dead, and suggests dumping them back into the sea, as Zane irritatedly scolds him stating they are merely unconscious.

Chapter Text

As Zane nurses the two mysterious individuals back to a healthy state, they eventually wake up. As the crew gathers around, Adam asks them who they are. However, at that moment, Yato comes out of the ship carrying a tray with coffee and hot cocoa. When he sees the duo, he is utterly shocked, dropping the tray. As the woman tears up, Yato, confused, refers to her as mom, revealing the two to be his parents, Clement and Bonnie, the king and queen of his home, the Parfait Kingdom. 

As the rest of the crew stand shocked, Yato shouts at them, demanding to know why they are in the Grand Line. However, his parents simply cannot believe their eyes. Clement shakily states they haven’t seen Yato in over 8 years, and Bonnie exclaims they thought he was dead. His mother states their meeting to be an act of fate. As Yato simply stands, conflicted, Zane asks them what happened to them for them to end up in a rowboat. Clement explains that their kingdom was attacked by a certain pirate. He was very powerful, easily overwhelming the guards, and although there weren’t many members of his crew, he had managed to take over most of the kingdom. Fearing for their lives, the two of them were forced to flee on the tiny rowboat, and they had slipped into the Grand Line to escape him. 

Yato cannot believe the story his parents are telling, stating it to be some kind of trick. Clement simply tells Yato to return to their family, and that the three of them can start again somewhere new. Angered, Yato kicks his dad into the mast, telling him he would never go back with them. As the rest of the crew move back, Bonnie implores Yato to believe them, stating that they want nothing more than to have their son back, but Yato, mad, tells them it’s too late to start caring about him now, and that he ran away because of them in the first place. Yato says that he has no regrets leaving home, and that he found friends he can trust now. Clement raises his voice, stating that he cannot associate himself with filthy pirates, making Shocker mad as the others have to hold him back, but Yato grabs his father’s clothes and pulls him close, telling him to leave him alone. 

At that moment, Clement’s father whispers something in Yato’s ear. The chef leans back, momentarily visibly shocked, but then composes himself and lets his father go. As he turns his back to them, he tells his parents he has no intention of going with them, though he wishes them good luck for the rest of their lives. Bonnie despairs, but Clement tells him to sleep on it, and places a vivre card on the deck, telling him to use it if he wants to find them. The duo hop back in their rowboat and head for an island the crew now see in the distance. As Yato heads toward the kitchen, Angel asks if he’s ok and he responds to not worry about him. Cruella asks what his father had told him if he’s open to sharing, but Yato tells them that he’d rather just forget the experience. However, as he goes inside, he begins to think to himself…

Meanwhile, two men in silhouette talk with each other. The first individual calls the other boss, asking the latter if he thinks that the plan will work. The other one laughs with a familiar “kuhahaha”, stating that it doesn’t matter where their target tries to go, but he’ll always find him. The first man then asks about the new recruits, and the second man says that after the way they ravaged and took over that particular kingdom, they have no choice but to follow him.

King of the Parfait Kingdom

Yato's Father

Clemont

Queen of the Parfait Kingdom

Yato's Mother

Bonnie

Chapter Text

Later that evening, the crew eat dinner together inside the dining hall. As Shocker scarfes down his food, Angel notices that Yato isn’t around. Adam sighs and tells her to give him time, as what had happened earlier with his parents isn’t easy to get over. In the boys’ room, Yato sits on his bed, twirling the vivre card in his hands. As he thinks to himself, he wonders whether his parents are his business. He then wonders who the mysterious pirate who destroyed their homeland is…

The next morning, Shocker and Zane burst into the kitchen, asking Yato for breakfast. However, to their confusion, the kitchen is empty, with no food even being made. As Taco groggily asks what’s going on, Zane says Yato hasn’t started making breakfast yet, which was weird for him because the chef always wakes up at 6 am to start preparations. As Jordan and Adam join the party, they search the whole ship, but Yato is nowhere to be found. Suddenly, Angel runs out to the deck, with a note in hand, Cruella following her. She worriedly shows it to the boys, stating that Yato left them a message stating that he is sorry, but he must leave the crew for some time. The note continues to say he isn’t sure when he can come back, but tells them to not wait for him. 

As the crew stands shocked, Cruella states there must be a good reason for him leaving, but Shocker states he doesn’t care and that he can’t just leave like that. Adam sighs and says that this isn’t what they need right now, and Zane tears up, asking why their friend has to leave. Jordan deduces that if he left, it was probably to the island they see on the horizon. Shocker tells the shipwright to take them there, as they are going to get their chef back.

As the Stormy White pulls into the harbor, the dockmaster greets them, telling them they’re on Yaseinishi Island, a small-ish, dusty island with a wild-west aesthetic. As the crew gets off and walk around, they see old, one-story houses with shutters and wooden doors. The main road is quite sandy and dust-filled, with tumbleweeds rolling through it. Towards the back, they see giant water towers that Angel guesses provide the town with its water. Jordan notes that they may see cowboys or something here, with Shocker and Zane excited at the idea of meeting a real-life cowboy. As they look around the area, a thuggish man calls over to them and asks them if they’re here for the job posting. As Shocker is about to say no, Cruella cuts him off and says indeed they are. The man tells them to head over to the plaza, as their new boss would speak soon. 

The crew oblige and walk over to the plaza, seeing a gathering of about 60 pirates and bandits socializing. They eavesdrop on some conversations, with some talking about how they can’t believe that the organization is being started up again, and that no one has seen their boss since the Cross Guild was disbanded.

Suddenly, a voice is heard throughout the crowd. The voice says that he knows they’ve been waiting for him, and that he himself had to lay low and rest for a long time, but that he has a plan for coming back into the spotlight, and that this will be his rebirth. Large amounts of sand flies through the crowd, all coalescing on the stage and forming a humanoid shape. As the crowd shouts and cheers, it is revealed to be none other than “Desert King” Sir Crocodile, the former president of Baroque Works and former financial executive of the Cross Guild, a man worth 1,965,000,000 beli. Daz Bonez “the Killer”, who has a bounty of 275,000,000, sits in a chair next to him, folding his arms and crossing his legs, murmuring about how large the crowd is to see him. Cruella recognizes him with shock, noting him to be a former Warlord of the Sea.

Former Warlord of the Sea

Former President of Baroque Works

Former Financial Executive of the Cross Guild

"Desert King" Sir Crocodile

Chapter Text

Crocodile addresses the crowd, telling them that this time, he has a new endeavor and is looking at things in a new way, with it now being more about quality rather than quantity, and as such he has gathered some of the top-tier bounty hunters in Paradise. His new venture, La Renaissance, is an organization aiming to attack smaller kingdoms and take them over, using the backing and money from the kingdom to gain power. He states that using this, he’ll grow to such a point where he’ll have no choice but to be reinstated into the graces of the government, and from there his plans for world domination can truly unfold. As the crowd cheers, Daz simply sighs, thinking to himself that these idiots have no idea they’re just pawns in Crocodile’s plans. 

Crocodile then tells them that in the near future he is going to rank the rest of them to be his officer agents, but that he has chosen two more aides a few days ago and that he will now introduce them. As he calls them to the stage, he introduces them as Mr. 2 and Ms. Easter, but to the Green Devils’ shock, they are revealed to be Yato’s parents.

Adam wonders if what they had told them yesterday was a sob story, and Cruella says there must be more that they do not know. Taco asks what the plan is, as they can hopefully at least point them to Yato, but as they turn to formulate a plan, they see Shocker missing. The Green Devil captain pushes through the crowd, before getting irritated and jumping up, landing on the raised stage. Ignoring the Warlord, Shocker shouts at Yato’s parents to tell him where his friend is. At first, everyone is shocked, including the rest of the crew, with Angel irritatedly scolding Shocker for being so brash, though Shocker calmly responds that his parents are right there and that there isn’t time to mess around when it comes to his friends. 

However, Crocodile merely laughs. As he recognizes him as “Green Hat”, he says he can’t believe one of the famed super rookies has appeared right in front of him. He tells the crowd that Shocker will be used as an example, stating that his crushing of any pirates trying to fight him will only cause his ally count to grow. Shocker says he has no idea who Crocodile is, but if he’s the one who took Yato away, then he’s going to beat the crap out of him. Crocodile taunts him, urging the Green Devil to try. Shocker, mad, aims a punch at Crocodile’s head, but the attack goes right through Crocodile’s sand body. Crocodile retaliates with Desert Spada, sending a sword of sand straight at Shocker, who barely manages to avoid the attack. As Shocker wonders what happened, the leader of La Renaissance states that he really hates rubber. The rest of La Renaissance turn toward the Green Devils, and the fighting begins. 

Daz Bonez leaps out of his chair and is about to pierce Shocker with his Spiral Hollow, but Adam rushes toward the stage and parries his blade just in time. Daz tells him he remembers fighting someone else who uses the three sword style, but Adam smirks and tells him he doesn't care. On the side of the stage, Ms. Easter begins to panic, shrieking as she tells her husband they aren’t ready for combat yet. Mr. 2 tells her that they need to use their new gifts from the boss, bringing out special steam-powered pistols that shoot sea stone bullets. However, as they aim to shoot at Shocker, Taco and Jordan thankfully fire at them first, causing the duo to squeal and take cover offstage. Meanwhile, Cruella, Zane, and Angel fight pretty simply against the grunts. But Shocker continues to struggle to touch Crocodile, wondering with irritation how to beat his ability. Smirking, La Renaissance’s boss says he can kill Shocker himself, but he thinks it would be a much better idea for his new spy to get the honor of doing so. Just as Shocker jumps up for another attack, Yato appears, wearing a black suit, and kicks Shocker, sending the boy flying into a stall. As Shocker looks over worried, Yato coldly states that he’ll be his opponent.

Move Index

Chapter Text

The rest of the crew look on, completely dumbfounded. While Zane tears up, Angel says it can’t be true, and Jordan begins to shout over to Yato, telling him to quit being stupid. Adam, parrying a Spar Claw, pushes Daz back and yells over as well, asking Yato if was really turning traitor now. With Yato in front of him, Shocker asks what is happening, and Yato tells him he can’t be their friend anymore, and that he joined up with La Renaissance’s organization. Shocker demands Yato tell him why, but Yato says he has nothing to say to his former captain. Shocker doesn’t want to fight back, but he and Yato start exchanging blows. 

During the fight, Yato keeps kicking Shocker around, the Green Devil captain only blocking or jumping out of the way. On one exchange, Shocker blocks a chest kick with a defensive stance, and has a clear chance to punch Yato, but chooses to try grappling him instead. Yato slips out before putting distance between the two. Yato asks him why he isn’t fighting at full power, and Shocker responds that he would never fight seriously against a friend. Yato tuts, stating it’s too bad he doesn’t share the same feelings, and hits Shocker back hard with Sheep Kick. 

Shocker, though pretty badly beaten up, gets up but puts his hands down. As Yato looks on, Shocker says he can keep kicking him if he wants, but he knows how he really feels, and so he refuses to continue the fight. Yato, showing hesitation, falters. Crocodile pushes Yato aside, stating he understands it may have been too early to assign him a mission like this, and that he’ll kill Shocker himself. He prepared to use Desert Girasole, about to sink Shocker in quicksand, but suddenly a strange, blue-green mist enveloppes the plaza. The grunts stop fighting as they can’t see, and even the Green Devils are confused. Crocodile, wondering if it’s somehow Shocker’s doing, slashes his hook down at Shocker, the hook seemingly becoming black, but his hook is met by the umbrella of none other than Kawaki, the man the crew had rescued before the events of Sacremento Court. As it begins to rip, the umbrella unfolds and reveals a concealed sword. As Shocker is about to speak, Kawaki tells the captain it is time to go, and shouts for the members of the crew to retreat. With that, the Green Devils slip away into the mist. As Daz says they cannot have gotten far, Crocodile orders a search for them.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Kawaki takes the crew to an abandoned house he has been using as his hideout. Inside, Shocker thanks the man for the save, but asks who he is again. Taco keeps using indicators to try and make Shocker remember Kawaki, but the Green Devil captain comically keeps drawing blanks. Zane then repeats the joke Kawaki had told the day he met, and Shocker laughs and remembers. Shocker then gets irritated, wondering why he couldn’t hit Crocodile. Cruella explains to the group that he ate the Suna Suna no Mi (Sand Sand Fruit), a Logia-type. As the others have never heard of logias before, she tells them these powers turn their users into a specific element, and as such can make them intangible. She continues by stating the only way as far as she knows to combat logias is to use their elemental weakness, which in this case would be water. Shocker simply says all they need to do then is dump him in the ocean, but Angel says it won’t be that easy.

Jordan then turns to Kawaki and asks the man how he got to Yaseinishi and if he can shed light on what’s goin on, as he was simply traversing the sea when they first met him. Kawaki sits comfortably on a chair, telling the group that in order to understand that, they must first understand his personal story, and his backstory is revealed. 

Kawaki was born 50 years before the current time, shocking the group, as Angel notes he seems so young. He tells the crew that he used to be a pirate in a different crew, called the Honey Bone Pirates. At the time, he was just a deckhand, but he usually made most of the crew laugh with his funny jokes and great sense of humor. One day during a raid on an island, he found a devil fruit and, hearing about the great powers he could get from it, he decided to eat it. The fruit he ate was the Yūrei Yūrei no Mi (Ghost Ghost Fruit), a special paramecia fruit which allows him to have the properties of a ghost, such as phasing through walls and temporarily becoming invisible, as well as having a certain degree of intangibility like a logia. Kawaki thought it could be potentially useful for sneak attacks, but as a user of the One Sword Style, he thought it to be quite useless, as he would simply end up having to fight head on either way. Even though he was still young, he was pretty strong, and Kawaki climbed through the ranks quickly, even earning himself a high bounty for the time and becoming one of their stronger fighters. 

Then one day, he and his crew mates were partying on their ship, when they saw in the distance a massive ship approaching fast. As their captain looked through his spyglass, he informed the crew with terror that they had the misfortune of running into the Big Mom Pirates. As the Queen Mama Chanter pulled up next to their small ship, they saw that the ship’s leader was none other than Charlotte Katakuri. While on call with his mother, Linlin told Katakuri to raid their ship and steal all their treasure, to which Katakuri simply obliged. As the Big Mom pirate jumped on their ship, he told them he bears no ill will; it’s simply the world of piracy. The Honey Bone crew all tried to fight him together, but not one member could deal damage to the Sweet Commander, and Katakuri single-handedly slaughtered every member, one by one, until only Kawaki was left. As Kawaki held up his sword, telling him to stop his rampage, Katakuri told him it’s the way of the world, and that those who are strongest will always be on top, before stabbing him with Mogura, his trident spear. As Katakuri stole all of the ship’s treasure, he looked back one last time before departing.

Kawaki, bleeding out profusely, knew he was going to die, and became frustrated that he would die so young, being only 27 years old. He hoped that he and his crew could meet in the afterlife, before drawing his last breath. However, just then, the secret effect of his fruit power activated. This allowed Kawaki to reincarnate back to himself, except as a ghost. As the man wakes up, he realizes his body was ethereal, and cannot interact with the mortal world. He seemed to be visible, but he was unable to touch anything. He vowed to regain his lost senses, wishing to pick up his sword once more. As the days turned into weeks and the weeks turned to months, Kawaki remained on the boat of his former crew, training his connection to the mortal realm. Only after training everyday for years on end was he finally able to gradually pick things up and feel solid objects again. 

However, he could not interact with others. When other pirates or adventurers tried to explore the ship, he would attempt to make his presence known, but that would simply cause them to fear ghosts and flee in terror. Soon enough, people stayed away from his ship, as rumors had begun about it being haunted by a ghost. Kawaki drifted around the seas on their old ship for 23 years, waiting to find a new group of people to help him accomplish his goal of defeating Big Mom and her pirate crew for revenge, especially Katakuri himself. 

He was then by chance found by Crocodile and Daz. Kawaki, not knowing who they were, tried hiding his presence, but the two used some sort of power and noticed him immediately. At first, he was ecstatic, as they could finally see him. Crocodile told him he would help him if he became a top officer for his organization, and at first Kawaki agreed. However, as La Renaissance began to be established on Yaseinishi, the man soon realized Crocodile didn’t care about the dreams of others, only his own ambitions. Kawaki attempted to escape from the ex-Warlord’s grasp, but no matter which direction he sailed away in, Crocodile always seemed to be able to find him. When the Green Devils first met him, he had been in the middle of his 213th escape attempt.

Chapter Text

After finishing his story, Angel understands why he looks 27. Kawaki says yes, as his body no longer aging is a side effect. Zane sympathizes with him, stating that that’s a long time for someone to be alone, but Kawaki tells them to not weep for him, since his goal is what’s keeping him going. Adam says that all that is well and good, but that they have to address the elephant in the room: Yato being a traitor. The swordsman continues by stating that for the time being, they can’t treat him like a friend, while Jordan agrees. Shocker quickly says no way, as they need to get their friend back, but Angel says there's too much they don't know. Cruella reminds them that while that is true, Yato did attack Shocker, the crew falling silent. Shocker speaks up, stating it must be blackmail from Crocodile, blaming the ex-Warlord. Shocker says he has to overpower him somehow, and that he’ll beat him and reclaim his friend. Kawaki offers his assistance, stating he’ll provide support in any way he can. The crew officially ally with Kawaki, and the latter tells them it’s time to move, informing them Crocodile’s probably in a large warehouse at the backend of town he’s been using as his base.

However, the crew hear an explosion, followed by the sound of fighting outside. Jordan looks through the window and alerts his friends that things just got a lot more complicated. Outside, it is revealed that the marines had arrived after having been tipped off to the fact that powerful pirates with bounties were on the island. The marine soldiers had started fighting with the members of La Renaissance. Shocker decides that he’ll follow Kawaki and try to sneak into Crocodile’s main warehouse to simultaneously defeat Crocodile and bring Yato back, while the others stay back and fight both groups. 

On the marine ship at the dock, the dockmaster is shocked that the marines would send someone this high up for a skirmish like this. Inside the ship, a marine soldier reports the situation back to a silhouetted figure, stating that they have identified the members of the Green Devil Pirates, as well as Sir Crocodile and Daz Bonez. As the figure drinks tea, the soldier tells them that their battalions are already in combat. The figure tells them that is good, and that they’ll be heading out soon.

Chapter Text

As the crew run outside, they enter the skirmish. The marines shoot at them from one side, and the bounty hunters rush them from the other. As Adam slashes down some marines, he tells Shocker to go and leave this to them. Taco and Jordan provide cover fire, allowing their captain and ally to push through the horde of La Renaissance members and dash to the base. As they head toward the back of the city, Shocker sees a large warehouse made of seemingly rusted metal. Kawaki tries to push open the door quietly, stating that stealth will be important, but Shocker says screw that before knocking the door down in Gear Second.

Shocker jumps into the warehouse, shouting for Crocodile to show himself. However, a familiar voice tells him that he never listens, and out of the shadows, Yato walks out. His former chef tells him to go back to the Stormy and sail on to his next adventure, but Shocker shakes his head, stating he’s not going anywhere without him. However, Crocodile then manifests himself next to Yato, putting his arm around Yato and telling Shocker that Yato made a deal with him, and thus can never go back. Shocker demands to know what the deal was, but Crocodile tells him that none of that is important. As Shocker begins to move, Daz jumps down from the warehouse's second floor overlooking the first and attempts to slash him, but Kawaki blocks him with his sword. Kawaki tells him to fight, and Shocker rushes Crocodile. However, Yato kicks Shocker’s side, kicking him through the wall and outside. Crocodile tells Daz to clean up the mess, before heading outside himself. 

Daz uses Spar Claw a few times, with Kawaki barely blocking them, before hitting him with a pressurized wind blade from his leg, similar to a Rankyaku. As Kawaki jumps back, Daz tells him to stop trying to fight him, because every time he does, he ends up losing. Kawaki tells him he’ll never join them and that they should give up on trying to recruit him, but Daz smirks and tells him he can’t escape. Kawaki rushes Daz, about to slash him. However, just then, he is shot, and suddenly feels weak, stumbling. Daz notes that he’s been shot with sea-stone bullets, looking up toward the second floor, where Mr. 2 and Ms. Easter hold their guns shakily. However, just as Daz is about to cut him down, a human-sized hawk bursts into the warehouse, using its large beak to pierce Daz and send him flying into the warehouse wall.

The hawk flies up toward the second floor, carrying a sword in its talons. The hawk then shouts an attack name, Kōtō no Ken: Kiryu, before soaring rapidly past Ms. Easter and slicing her faster than she can react, knocking her out easily. As Mr. 2 shouts in alarm, the hawk lands on the second floor and begins to morph. The figure turns into a woman with green hair pulled back into a ponytail. She wears a green dress, with a marine justice coat draped over her shoulders. Her sword, which Kawaki recognizes as a katana, is sheathed in a scabbard on her belt. The woman introduces herself as Lana, and tells all the pirates that they are under arrest and should not resist. Mr. 2, in a panic, shoots his bullets at her, but she sighs and easily deflects the bullets with her sword, before cutting up his gun like sashimi and knocking Mr. 2 out.

As she regains her posture, Daz struggles to rise again. He shouts, stating that there’s no way the marines should even know that they’re operating. As he runs, Lana jumps down off the second floor. She asks Kawaki if she’s with La Renaissance, to which the man quickly says no. She tells him that in that case, either help her or get out of her way. Kawaki obliges and rushes at Daz. As the agent is about to attack, Kawaki uses Invisislash , briefly becoming invisible before slashing Daz in the chest, knocking the man off balance. Lana quickly follows up, using Ittoryu: Ibutsuta, an upward slash so powerful it knocks Daz out immediately. As Lana moves to arrest Daz, she thanks Kawaki, but then notes with slight surprise that the man is gone.

Move Index

Marine Swordswoman

Lana

Devil Fruit: Tori Tori no Mi, Model: Hawk

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, outside, Yato and Shocker continue to face off. As Shocker throws a punch which his former chef blocks, Shocker yells at him to tell them what’s really happening, and that they can help him. Yato sighs and says Shocker just doesn’t understand. Shocker tells him to help him understand. However, Shocker notices that Yato is clearly holding back now, not kicking him nearly as hard as before. Crocodile notices this as well, and asks the man if his loyalty to him is wavering. Looking at Shocker, Yato sighs and says that he’s stupid for ever believing him. As Shocker asks if he really meant that, Yato smirks and says he wasn’t talking to him. With both Shocker and Crocodile confused, Yato asks Shocker why he thinks he brought them outside. When Shocker continues to look confused, Yato says it’s because of the water towers. He kicks one of the towers’ foundations, causing it to break and spill water all over him, Shocker, and most importantly, Crocodile. Crocodile realizes too late it was a trap, as water would compact his sand and cause him to be tangible again. Yato shouts at Crocodile that that is for destroying his home kingdom, before telling his captain to finish it off, which Shocker gladly agreed to.

As Crocodile struggles to move, Shocker hits him solidly with Gomu Gomu no Gatling . As La Renaissance’s leader shakes it off and uses Desert La Spada , Shocker attempts to jump out of the way, but is grazed by the attack as he notices he feels a bit weaker. Yato apologizes since the water must have temporarily weakened him, too. Shocker says he can manage, before jumping at Crocodile. However, the ex-Warlord, enraged, tells him that he is a veteran pirate and some brat imitation of Straw Hat cannot beat him, blasting Shocker away with his tornado attack Sables . 

As Crocodile touches the ground, he states that he’ll spare not one of their lives, and uses Ground Secco , quickly dehydrating the space all around him. Just as Shocker is about to be affected, Yato carries his captain and jumps in the air, dodging the attack. Yato tells Shocker he knows he’ll do what needs to be done, and Shocker says to leave it to him, before Yato throws the rubber man at Crocodile. With the Warlord’s body still tangible, Shocker says he’s going to overwhelm him, activating Gear Third and using Gomu Gomu no Gigant Muchi to smash Crocodile back into the warehouse. As Shocker follows him inside, he transfers the air into his head, finishing the fight with Gomu Gomu no Gigant Kane . As Crocodile is knocked out, blood spurting from his mouth, Lana looks up at the sight, before the two pirates smash through the other wall.

As Shocker pants, he quickly deflates into his chibi form. He comically weakly kicks Crocodile’s head, telling the man he’s taking his chef back. Suddenly, Kawaki appeared, seemingly from thin air. As Shocker asks him if he won, Kawkai tells him there’s no time for discussion right now, since the marines are still on the island, and that they will surely be captured if the lady he fought with came after them. Shocker wonders where Yato went, but Kawkai carries him away, telling him to have faith Yato went back to the ship. 

Back at the plaza, the fighting is beginning to die down. Most of the regular grunts of La Renaissance were taken out, with various marines cuffing them. Some of the Green Devils are still fighting, but Kawaki tells them that their mission is done. When Angel asks what to do, Kawaki tells them they need to hurry to their ship or risk capture. As the crew run back to the Stormy, Jordan asks where Yato is, and Shocker, who reverts back to his regular size, is confused, thinking that he had circled back and had met up with his friends. As the crew and Kawaki get on board, the marines begin bombarding them from their vessel. Jordan tells them they have to leave soon, but Shocker says not without Yato. \

Just then, a cannonball aimed right at the stern is fired, and is about to hit the Stormy, when Yato, wearing his own clothes once more, easily deflects the cannonball back at the marines, punching a hole in their ship. As the marines panic and state that the lady will not be happy, Yato lands on the port and salutes the crew. When Shocker asks what the heck he’s doing, Yato says that he isn’t coming back, shocking the others.

Move Index

Chapter Text

As Jordan and Taco prepare the ship for departure, Shocker, standing on the figurehead, tells Yato he can stop joking, since they’ve already beaten Crocodile. However, Yato tells him he did some inexcusable things as far as being a pirate crewmate goes. He first briefly flashes back to what his dad had told him when he whispered in his ear. Clement had told Yato that in reality, the pirate who attacked them was Sir Crocodile, and that they were working for him but wanted a way out. Clement continued, pleading for Yato to help them as he was the only one who could now.

In the present, Yato informs his crew that even though they were oppressive to him growing up, even though he wanted nothing to do with them anymore, he felt he couldn’t just let them be under the ex-Warlord’s thumb for the rest of their lives. He then tells them that when he left last night, he went to speak with Crocodile, as another flashback is seen. 

As Yato’s parents are seen outside the room, inside, Yato was granted an audience with Crocodile, who was smoking while sitting on a chair, Daz standing behind him with his arms folded. Yato asked the man if he knew who he was, and Crocodile responded that he knew he’s Green Hat’s underling and the son of the two idiots waiting outside. The boss asked Yato why he came all the way to talk with him, and Yato said simply he wished to join his organization. Crocodile, suspicious, wondered why he should let him join, and Yato said that he would be a powerful addition, but only on two conditions. The first is that Crocodile let the Parfait Kingdom and his parents go, and the second being he ensured he allowed his friends to sail away. Crocodile laughs and states that that is quite a lot for him to give up, and asks why he thinks he cares about his friends. Yato speculated that the “blabbermouths” (his parents) surely told him their ship’s location, and states he doesn't want anything to happen to any of them. Crocodile thinks for a moment, then says he’ll agree to the second condition but not the first, to which Yato responded that that worked for him.

As the flashback ends, Yato tells them that when he learned Crocodile was the pirate in question from his dad, he thought it would be best to take him down without getting the others involved. Shocker tells Yato to hurry up and jump on, but Yato says that there are three reasons he cannot return: he lied to his crewmates, he left his crew without being granted permission, and he openly attacked his captain. Shocker says it doesn’t matter, but Taco disagrees, stating that as a captain, he needs to know what he can and cannot accept from his crewmates.

Shocker, worried, shouts at Yato, asking him what he really thinks. Yato begins to wave, stating that he truly hopes Shocker makes it to his goal. However, Shocker refuses to take this, shouting for Yato to tell Shocker the full truth of what he wants. Yato, bowing down, begins to weep, telling Shocker that he’s truly sorry, and that more than anything he wanted to continue traveling with the crew. As Shocker begins to cry as well, he states he forgives him, before stretching his arm back to the shore and grabbing Yato, pulling him onto the ship. As the others welcome him back, Yato says that he’s truly home.  

As the ship drifts away from Yaseinishi, Angel states that while that is all good, there is still one more matter to attend to, with the whole crew looking at Kawaki. Kawaki kneels and thanks the crew from the bottom of his heart. He states that with Crocodile officially arrested, he can finally be free to pursue his dream of getting justice for his former crew. As Adam asks him what he’ll do, Kawaki responds that he’s not really sure, and that it’s regrettable having to part with them again, since he always has so much fun around them. Shocker then tells him to not leave then. As Kawaki wonders what he means, Shocker formally invites Kawkai to join his crew, stating that anyone who helps them like that is a friend of his, and they’d love to have him. As Kawaki begins to tear up, he wonders how he got so lucky, and accepts the invitation. As the crew celebrate the return of Yato and the recruitment of Kawaki, the Stormy sails on to the next island. 

Chapter Text

Sabaody Archipelago Arc

Back on Yaseinishi, Lana sits in one of the town’s abandoned houses and drinks tea. As she muses to herself how much she loves green tea, she suddenly receives a call. She sighs, knowing who this is, and picks it up, talking to another marine. As the man on the other end of the line asks for a report, she tells him that Sir Crocodile and Daz Bonez are among those who she captured, as well as about 60 lower pirates and thugs. She tells him that their ship is currently in the process of being repaired as they speak, and that once they’re done, they’ll be transported back to Impel Down. The other man sounds somewhat impressed that she could take all those enemies, but she mentions she did have help. When the man asks her who helped her, she states “Green Hat” Shocker and his crew aided in his defeat. 

The man is frustrated that she didn’t catch one of the “Unholy Meteorites”, but she tells him not to worry because there isn’t anywhere else to go from there besides Sabaody. She then asks what about his bounty, and the man responds that they are planning on giving Crocodile’s defeat to her, as a rookie pirate defeating a former Cross Guild leader would send Paradise into chaos. Lana tells the man he worries too much and that he’ll die from high blood-pressure if he keeps it up. The man also scolds her for telling everyone her real name instead of her title name, and she states no one really cares, as at the end of the day, she did her job. The man exasperatedly tells her to just hurry up and get to Saobody, as it is THAT time of the year, and she says she will before hanging up. She calls in Assistant Admirals Fullbody and Jango, telling the duo to prepare to move. As the duo fawn over her, Lana is revealed to be an admiral in the marines, known to them as Admiral Mitori. 

Inside a marine base, as the man who just spoke to Lana hangs up the call, a marine soldier comes into the room carrying a tray of cookies and a lighter. As the soldier addresses him as Admiral Shirokami, the man is revealed to be none other than former Vice-Admiral Smoker. As he gets off the phone and takes the lighter, Assistant Admiral Hina asks him why he must be so grumpy all the time. Shirokami responds that he’s not grumpy, just tired of Mitori treating her position so lightly. Hina tells him that he won’t get anywhere if he keeps antagonizing his colleagues, but Shirokami smokes and states that as long as piracy is still alive in full force, he’ll do whatever he needs to. Hina simply eats a cookie, stating that one day this will all come back to bite him, before Shirokami tells her to standby as he calls the third admiral.

Somewhere on a specific island in the New World, another man picks up the phone. Shirokami calls him Momozumi, and asks him where he is. Momozumi casually tells Shirokami not to worry, as he will soon be at Sabaody, and that he is just surveying an island recently visited by what the villagers called a “good-natured” pirate crew. Shirokami tells him to hurry up and proceeds to hang up. 

Behind him, Assistant Admiral Helmeppo tells him it is time to go, with the man stating that Hibari informed him the ship is ready. As the man turns and begins to walk toward the beach, the villagers all gather around him and thank him, tugging at his clothes and calling him the greatest marine since Garp, asking him if he won’t stay a bit longer. The man says sorry, but that he has to go, before calling over to Assistant Admiral Hibari and asking what data she collected. Hibari calls over that they’ll go over it on the ship, but that essentially the pirate crew led a revolt against the despot rulers and are seen as heroes. Momozumi wonders who they could be, before telling the marines to get on the ship, revealing that Momozumi is none other than the new “Marine Hero”, former Captain Koby.

Marine Admiral

Mitori (Real Name: Lana)

Marine Admiral

Shirokami (Real Name: Smoker)

Marine Admiral

Momozumi (Real Name: "Marine Hero" Koby)

Assistant Admiral (Lana Division)

Jango

Assistant Admiral (Lana Division)

Fullbody

Assistant Admiral (Smoker Division)

"Black Cage" Hina

Assistant Admiral (Koby Division)

Helmeppo

Assistant Admiral (Koby Division)

Hibari

Chapter Text

As the Stormy White sails on the ocean, on the main deck, Angel wonders what Kawaki’s role on the crew would be. Adam suggests he could be a lookout, but Kawaki tells them that he can be the crew’s jester. When Shocker asks what that is, he explains that he can keep their spirits up by telling them jokes and lightening the mood. Yato wonders how useful that would be, but Shocker allows it, stating that he loves entertainment. Kawaki demonstrates his skills, telling them a multitude of jokes, with Shocker, Taco, and Zane laughing loudly each time. As Cruella smiles awkwardly, Adam sighs and says he hopes he can fight. Kawaki says of course he can, informing the crew he had a bounty of 100,000,000 beli during his first life, though it is potentially quite outdated since it is so many years ago.

Angel says one mystery still remains unsolved, being how Crocodile could follow and find Kawaki in the first place. Jordan asks him if there was a tracker placed on him or something, and Kawaki says he has no idea what that would look like. The jester remembers that the rowboat he had stolen kept blinking red, and that when he had checked it seemed to be some small device. Jordan irritatedly states that that was the tracker, with Kawaki apologizing while laughing, stating he has no basis of reference for knowing that. Just then, a Bounty Coo flies toward the ship and lands on the railing overlooking the deck. As Zane talks to it, he tells them that their new bounties are in, updated from the events at Sacremento Court. 

Everyone is completely shocked to see that Shocker’s bounty has bolted from 130,000,000 to 300,000,000, with Shocker himself stating that he’s well on his way to being a great pirate. Adam’s has increased from 90,000,000 to 135,000,000, the swordsman satisfied he got over 100,000,000. Yato notes his has as well, increasing to 124,000,000, though Adam laughs and says it’s still below him, making Yato mad. Angel’s increased to 50,000,000. Zane hears his bounty has increased as well, but sees it only increased from 25 beli to 50 beli, causing the cat to cry in the corner. Cruella’s has increased from 69,000,000 to 110,000,000. Jordan's number has increased from 74,000,000 to 90,000,000, and he is disappointed to see he hasn’t reached the 100,000,000 mark yet. 

But the biggest change that leaves everyone completely speechless is seeing the massive shift from Taco’s bounty. Taco, trembling, holds up his poster, showing that his value has increased from 16,000,000 all the way to 200,000,000. Everyone is flabbergasted, but at the bottom of his bounty poster one of his crimes is listed as being recognized as the First Mate of the Green Devil Pirates. Adam and Yato are both mad it isn’t them, and Jordan is sulking at the fact he had the 7th highest out of 9, with only Angel and Zane still behind him.

However, at that moment, Shocker alerts them to a sight that causes them to stop arguing. They look up and see the giant expanse of land known as the Red Line. As Shocker comments on how huge it is, Angel says she heard stories of how there used to be these Celestial Dragon guys who used to rule the world before the new era was ushered in by Luffy. Jordan, remembering that they’re the reason he died the first time, states that he’s glad those scum got what they deserved. The shipwright then switches attitudes, stating that if they are by the Red Line, then Sabaody is near, and Cruella tells them that reaching the Sabaody Archipelago means that they were at the halfway point in the Grand Line. As Angel wonders what kind of place Sabaody is, Shocker says no point in waiting, and that they should go there, with Jordan agreeing and turning the ship toward the islands.

Chapter Text

As the crew arrives on the archipelago, Jordan docks the ship on Grove 9. Shocker looks up at the large mangroves, marveling at how big they are before wondering what those bubbles are. Disembarking from the ship, Cruella explains that the bubbles are made from a special resin that is solid enough for people to jump on, and are also commonly used as bags to keep purchases in. While Shocker has fun jumping on different bubbles, Angel notes they need to do some shopping and stock up on supplies before their journey. Cruella informs them that in order to enter the New World, they would need to go down to Fish-Man Island and then re-emerge on the other side of the Red Line. Jordan agrees, stating that he heard there is a coating master somewhere on the island who can coat the Stormy in preparation for underwater travel, and that he’s going to look for him. Angel splits up their money, telling them to have fun but also stay safe, and meet back at the Stormy in four hours. With that, the crew splits up.

Shocker, Zane, Taco, and Kawaki head to the amusement park that is located throughout groves 32-34. Seeing the sprawling park, Shocker gets excited and states he’ll go on every ride. The quartet has lots of fun, buying ice creams, going on a multitude of rides (Taco throws up on most of them), and playing with the weird bubbles. At one point as they are walking with ice cream in their hand, they see a trio of marine soldiers interrogating a woman. They shout at her, demanding she tell them where her husband, who is apparently a pirate, has gone. The woman cries and tells them that she doesn’t know, and begs for them to leave her alone. Shocker gets angry and begins to walk toward them, but as he takes another step he is suddenly paralyzed and unable to move. Kawaki wonders what’s happening, and Zane says he smells a familiar scent. A voice tells Shocker to just chill out, and as the others turn around, they see none other than Mulin, the captain of the Phantom Crook Pirates who had caused them trouble at Cressaluna Island, using his shadow powers to stop Shocker from attacking. As Taco wonders what he’s doing here, Shocker tells him to let him go, but Mulin responds it is a bad idea to alert the marines to the presence of more pirates, as if they mobilize they’ll all have to leave prematurely. After a moment, Shocker says fine and turns away. As he passes by Mulin, the Phantom Crook captain smirks and says it’s good to see him again.

A few minutes later, at a shooting game stall, Zane eyes a giant stuffed octopus and says he wants it, prompting Taco to declare he’ll win it for him. However, as he lines up his shot, a young man with spiky orange-yellow hair pushes him out of the way. The young man wears an orange sweater and matching pants, an orange sash around his waist, and a midnight-blue pirate captain coat draped over his shoulders. The man easily shoots all the targets, claiming he won it. Shocker asks what his problem is, and the other boy turns around and tells the Green Devil captain to back off, unless he wants problems with a super rookie. He introduces himself as Zypho, captain of the No Face Pirates. Shocker asks him what kind of stupid name for a crew that was, and Zypho gets irritated, telling him he’ll shut him up. The two captains get increasingly mad, until they both punch each other at the same time. Simultaneously, the game stall explodes.

Yato heads off to Grove 41, as he had heard there are amazing food stalls where he can get lots of high-quality provisions. As he looks through some rather expensive selections of wine, he shakes his head and notes that he’s definitely being ripped off given its quality, and then hopes to himself that the others haven’t gotten in any trouble yet. As he sneezes, he supposes they have.

Captain of the Phantom Crook Pirates 

Mulin "of the Shadows"

Captain of the No Face Pirates

Zypho

Chapter Text

Jordan and Adam venture off into Grove 13, where they had heard from locals Shakky’s Rip Off Bar would be. Adam says that he needs a good drink, and Jordan tells him that the guy they need to coat their ship has some connection to the place. As the duo enter the bar, they see it is empty save for a single woman behind the counter, smoking. As they look around, the woman introduces herself as Shakky, the owner of the bar. Adam asks if she has any strong ale, and she responds she’ll bring out the best for the crew of Green Hat Shocker. As they sit down, Jordan asks if they really are that infamous. She confirms, stating that after their recent exploits, everyone knows the name of the Green Devil Pirates, and that their captain is one of the super rookies of this generation. 

Former Empress of Amazon Lily (2 Generations Ago)

Former Kuja Pirates Captain 

Shakuyaku (Shakky for short)

When Adam questions her use of “one of”, she tells them she’s surprised, since there are three crews of Unholy Meteorites on Sabaody at the same time. Adam asks her what she means, and she informs the duo that the Unholy Meteorites is the name given to a group of four super rookie captains who made themselves known in the past few months, being “Green Hat” Shocker with a bounty of 300,000,000, “Destiny Child” Nitro with a bounty of 297,800,000, Mulin “of the Shadows” with a bounty of 290,000,000, and “Orange Flash” Zypho with a bounty of 324,000,000. 

As Jordan marvels that there’s a rookie with an even higher bounty than their captain, Shakky says that even though Nitro has already gone to the New World about a month or so ago, with three powerful crews there, she is sure trouble would start soon enough. Jordan wonders what kind of trouble could happen, and Shakky tells them to keep a low profile, as the way Sabaody is currently set up, half of it, groves 1-39, is lawless land, with gangs and pirates doing as they please, but the other half, groves 40-79, is orderly civilization controlled and protected by the marines. Shakky then takes a puff before guessing the reason they came was to get their ship coated. As Jordan says yes, she informs them that her husband, Silvers Rayleigh, is currently on Amazon Lily, but will be coming to the archipelago a bit later, and she’ll tell him to go coat their ship if they tell her which grove it was on. 

Just then, a loud commotion is heard outside. As the duo look through the window, they see a large group of marines pushing civilians out of the way, chasing someone. Jordan is shocked, remembering Shakky having said that this grove should be a zone free of marines. Shakky remembers with a shock that it is Marine Week, and that perhaps they started the “Reclamation Project” earlier than expected. As they look closer, they see that the person they’re chasing is in fact Yato. As Adam states this is bad, Jordan tells him they have to help their friend. As they rush outside, Yato tells them that all he was doing was buying supplies, but that the marines had started chasing him. The trio stand off against the marines, seemingly surrounded, and Adam begins to unsheathe his sword. However, a voice calls out to them telling the marines they can get a fight if they want one. As they all turn, a figure is seen on the roof of a nearby house. 

As the figure jumps down, they see he is a young man with spiky brown hair, black leather clothes, and a fang tattoo on his face, a small puppy following him. He and the dog use tag team attacks to push off the marines, the man punching some marines back before the puppy bites their toes, allowing for a follow-up attack. As the man looks back, he asks them if they’re members of the Green Devil crew, and states that he knows they’re rookies compared to them, so they should just let them handle it. As Jordan wonders who “them” are, four more figures appear behind him, telling the Green Devils they could handle it.

Chapter Text

The young man with the dog is introduced as Fang, the shipwright of the No Face Pirates and one of the three members of its sensory team. As the marines try to shoot at the group, a swarm of insects plagues them, causing many of them to panic. The insects collect into the second member of the team, a man wearing a dark green hood, introduced as Nacht, the No Face Pirates’ informant. As Nacht whispers something inaudibly, Fang irritatedly tells him to speak up. He continues to berate his friend, but a young black-haired girl wearing a lavender kimono and black shorts tells them to pay attention to the threat at hand, before palm-striking a marine hard. She is introduced as “White-Eye Princess” Solayla, the crew’s lookout. 

No Face Pirates Shipwright and Engineer

Fang (and his dog, Spot)

No Face Pirates Informant

Nacht

No Face Pirates Lookout

"White-Eye Princess"  Solayla

As more marines converge on them, a young man with long, brown hair wearing a white kimono protects Solayla from an incoming attack, countering a marine’s sword strikes with his palms before telling the princess to be careful. As Solayla tells the man, named Jin, that he’s too worried about her, he is revealed to be Solayla’s cousin and bodyguard. Another young woman, wearing pink adventurer gear, dual wields two pistols, firing rounds into the marines as her brown hair tied in a bun sways in the wind. She is introduced as the crew’s sniper, Charms. 

Solayla's Bodyguard (and Cousin)

Jin

No Face Pirates Sniper

Charms

As Adam asks who the heck they are, Charms tells him that they’ll handle this commotion. Jordan irritatedly tells them to stop underestimating the three of them, as they are powerful in their own right, but Solayla ignores him and tells the others to meet up with the captain. As Jordan shouts at her for disregarding him, Jin calls him a buffoon and tells him to mind his manners when around royalty. Yato says that in any case, they need to get through this blockade and head to the amusement park, where Shocker said he would be. Fang says their captain is there as well, and that they need to go now. Suddenly, the marines enclosing them are rapidly taken out one by one, with soldiers being sent flying. As the group wonders who helped them, they see a young man with green hair in a bowl cut wearing a karate gi. The man tells them the way is now clear, and his crewmates introduce him as “Green Beast” Roku, the No Face Pirates’ martial artist, with a bounty of 56,000,000.

No Face Pirates Martial Artist

"Green Beast" Roku 

Bounty: 56,000,000

Angel and Cruella had gone to Grove 47, the shopping district. The pair get some new clothes, with Angel taking particular liking to the Criminal brand. The duo walk together amicably, chatting and watching a street performance of a man doing acrobatics inside of one of the bubbles. As Cruella buys a book detailing a captain’s terrifying brief journey in the New World, she suddenly hears a gun load. As she turns slightly, a marine officer tells them that Angel of the Heavens and Demon Queen Cruella are to be arrested immediately. As the girls begin to panic, suddenly, a young girl with pink hair tied in a ponytail punches the ground and sends the marines flying, breaking some of the nearby stalls as well. The girl is wearing a red combat shirt, a matching skirt, and combat gloves. The marines fear her, stating it’s “Monster Strength” Blossom, the doctor of the No Face Pirates worth 90,000,000. As Angel thanks her for the assist, Blossom tells her it's no problem, as pirate rivals still need to look out for each other.

No Face Pirates Doctor

"Monster Strength" Blossom

Bounty: 90,000,000

As Cruella wonders whether she’s one of the super rookies she had heard about, more marines begin advancing, but they are stopped by dogs seemingly made of ink. A young man with droopy black hair wearing a simple black sweater holds a paintbrush and tells them they need to move soon. He is introduced as Hanafura Reo, the crew’s painter. Blossom agrees, but says they need to clear the way. A voice from one of the food stalls tells them to leave it to him. As they turn, they see a chubby young man with long brown hair, wearing all red with a white  scarf, eating a large bowl of Sticker Pot-Stickies. As Blossom irritatedly tells him to stop stuffing his face, the man is introduced as Jojo, the crew’s chef. Grumbling, he sets his bowl down, before leaping at the marines, his hand becoming giant before punching them away. As Cruella wonders what ability that is, Jojo smiles and explains he ate the Kaku Kaku no Mi (Expand Expand Fruit), a paramecia that allows the user to expand their limbs to giant proportions and thus increase attack strength. Blossom then tells the girls to follow her, as she knows the way to Grove 9, while the two boys cover their retreat.

No Face Pirates Cook

Jojo

Devil Fruit: Kaku Kaku no Mi

No Face Pirates Painter and Chronicler

Hanafura Reo

Meanwhile, back at Grove 9, the game stall had exploded because a group of marines had spotted Shocker and Zypho and had tried to shoot them. As the two pirates jump out of the smoke, revealing that they’re fine, Shocker gets upset that an innocent stall had been destroyed, while Zypho gets mad that they blew up his prize. The duo quickly take care of them, but see that more and more marines are arriving. 

Zane, Taco, and Kawaki are similarly surrounded a few meters away, trying to fend off the marines. However, a man with spiked midnight-blue hair slashes some marines down, while a woman with platinum-blonde hair tied in a ponytail kicks some more away. The man wears a light gray button up shirt, jeans, and an indigo formal jacket over it. A katana is in his hands, its white scabbard slotted in a loop on his belt. The woman wears a purple blouse/skirt combo with a black apron over it. Combat boots are worn on her feet. As they are introduced as Ken and Oni, the first-mate and navigator respectively, Oni berates her captain, asking why he always causes so much trouble, while Ken sighs and asks her what she expects. Ken then levels his sword and demonstrates his amazing sword skill, easily slicing down marines blocking their path, so fast the marines warn their comrades to look out for the “Thunderflash”, as he is worth 126,000,000.

No Face Pirates First Mate and Swordsman

"Thunderflash" Ken

Bounty:126,000,000

No Face Pirates Navigator

Oni

As Mulin appears, telling the other two captains he had told both of them to stay out of trouble, his crewmates Tolu, Cherry, Yuzuki, and the giant rat Angelina are swarmed by marines behind him. Shocker tells him to go help them, but Mulin smirks and says he doesn’t have to. Suddenly, a tall, muscular, bald man wearing mayan-like clothing appears behind the marines and tells them to let his comrades go, before creating giant boulders from his body and slamming the attackers away. As he is introduced as “Iron Rock” Dewayne, the marines identify him as strong enough to warrant a bounty of a whopping 500,000,000, and that he’s so powerful he was previously offered a position as a Warlord of the Sea years ago. Pushing more marines back with giant hands made of rock, Dewayne informs them his Iwa Iwa no Mi (Rock Rock Fruit), a logia fruit that allows the user to create, manipulate, and become rocks and by association parts of the earth, is quite useful to him, as it allows most on this side of the Grand Line to not be able to hit him. 

Phantom Crook Pirates First Mate

"Iron Rock" Dewayne

Bounty: 500,000,000

Devil Fruit: Iwa Iwa no Mi

As Mulin takes out his large sword, Zypho tells him to back off and let him deal with the riff raff. Shocker says no way, as he’s definitely the strongest of the three of them, with both of the other two angrily refuting this. As the three stand side by side, the marine soldiers exclaim that they are fighting three powerful paramecia users, and to be careful, as the Unholy Meteorites are now in one place.

Chapter Text

The marines begin to open fire, shooting a barrage of bullets, but each of the captains deal with the attack in their own way. Mulin creates a Doppelman that tanks the hits, Shocker uses Gomu Gomu no Fusen , bouncing the bullets back, and Zypho claps his hands together, creating clones of himself that take the attack in his place, the clones disappearing with smoke. When Shocker asks him about his fruit, Zypho shows off his Kopi Kopi no Mi (Copy Copy Fruit), a paramecia that allows the user to create as many clones of themself as is possible for their level of strength. He creates 99 clones, then uses Hyaku Ken Rendan , taking a group of marines out. Mulin uses Kageshibari to paralyze a huge horde of enemies in a circle all around him, then Kage no Reaper to take their shadows and let them burn up under the sun. As the marines look in horror at Mulin's literal burning of people, he asks what they expected, as he is a pirate. 

Meanwhile, Shocker uses Gomu Gomu no Muchi to swat away a large number of them, following it up with Gomu Gomu no Gatling to push back some more. As he jumps back down, the members of the three crews gather from their various locations. Adam yells over to Shocker, asking what happened, but Shocker said they just started attacking him. Yato asks if they’re fighting, and Shocker smirks, stating of course they are. As the marines are forced back, some soldiers state to call for backup.  

At Marine HQ, an old man is tending to massive amounts of paperwork behind a huge desk. At that moment, a young marine bursts into his office and panickedly explains the situation on Sabaody, telling him three of the four Unholy Meteorites have converged and are working together to resist. The man sighs and says he has little patience for such silly names. He asks for a report on the pirates deemed a threat. The marine informs him that of the 30+ pirates now fighting together, the main threats are: “Green Hat” Shocker, “Sniper” Taco, “Triple Sword” Adam, and “Troublemaker” Yato from the Green Devils; Mulin “of the Shadows” and “Iron Rock” Dewayne from the Phantom Crooks; and “Orange Flash” Zypho, “Thunderflash” Ken, “Monster Strength” Blossom, and “Green Beast” Roku from the No Faces, their total bounty of which is over 2 billion. As the man is introduced as Fleet Admiral Issho, he tells the officer not to worry, as an admiral has already been sent to take care of the scene. 

Marine Fleet Admiral (Former Admiral Fujitora)

Issho

Back on Sabaody, the pirates look like they might win. The crews mow down the attacking marines, with less reinforcements coming. Shocker and Zypho begin to compete, wondering which of them can defeat more marines, with Mulin telling them games like this are beneath him. Suddenly, a voice shouts White World from the path nearby, and a thick, white smokescreen envelops the entire grove. Out of the smoke steps Shirokami, with both Zypho and Mulin shocked, instantly recognizing him as an admiral of the marines.

Move Index

Chapter Text

As Shocker looks at the man, he wonders who he is, with Mulin nervously stating that he’s one of the strongest marines in the organization. Shirokami looks at the group of pirates in disgust, scolding them and asking how dare they interrupt Marine Week with their pirate shenanigans. Blossom tells the group Marine Week is a week of festivities dedicated to marines all over the world, and that it was put in place by Fleet Admiral Issho as a joyous way of reminding the common people the marines are there for them. Adam mentions that this must be part of the Reclamation Project Shakky was talking about. Shirokami puffs on his cigar before stating that even though the other two admirals have not yet arrived, he’s more than enough to deal with them, and that he won’t let any of them leave Sabaody. 

Zypho calls over to his crew, telling them it’s time for them to go, and they take the eastern path towards their ship. Similarly, Mulin states he’s not fighting an admiral today, and he and his crew dash off toward the west, with Dewayne covering their retreat as marines in the admiral’s unit pursue both factions. 

However, Jordan tells Shocker their ship is past Shirokami, and that they have to find a way to get past him. Shocker tells him to leave it to him, as he’ll get him out of the way. Angel strongly advises against it, stating that they may be out of their depth here, but Shocker says he won’t back down from someone trying to attack his friends. Understanding the threat, Shocker activates Gear Second and tries to use Gomu Gomu no Jet Bazooka , but his attack simply passes through Shirokami’s smoky body. He follows up with Jet Gatling , but once again, Shirokami is not affected, with Shocker noting his ability to be just like Crocodile’s. Shirokami asks if that’s all he’s got, and somehow turns his fist black before punching Shocker back hard using White Blow . Shocker smashes through a nearby building, utterly shocking the rest of the crew. Shirokami tells them that they had their fun, but this is the end of the road.

Move Index

Chapter Text

As marines bombard the group, the No Face Pirates run back to their ship. Ken, Jin, and Roku manage to counter some of the attacks, but Blossom shouts that they need to set sail as soon as possible. Oni asks Fang how long it will take their ship, the Leif Krissah, to prepare, and the man responds that he can get it going in a few minutes, but that they’ll need to hold off the marines. However, as the crew see their ship ahead, Assistant Admiral Hina awaits them with a legion of marine soldiers behind her. Zypho tells the woman to get out of their way, and Hina responds sarcastically, stating that she will since he asked so nicely. Zypho tells his crew to get to the ship and let him deal with her. 

As he rushes the marine, he creates a multitude of clones to attack her. They all aim kicks at her, using Gobyaku-Kai no Renzoku Kick . However, Hina easily jumps out of the way, before using the powers of her Ori Ori no Mi to ensnare many of the clones, instantly destroying them. Realizing how strong she is, Zypho resolves to use his strongest attack. Creating enough clones for the number to total 2,000, two clones kick Hina into the air, before all the others converge and continuously punch her before the real Zypho delivers the final punch, a technique he names Zypho Nisendan . As Hina rises, she coughs up some blood, stating that it was a pretty solid hit, but that it wasn’t good enough. She uses Black Bind, creating a curving cage from her arms before attacking with a lariat-like movement, destroying Zypho’s clones and capturing him, holding the pirate steadfast. She tells Zypho she will make sure he’s taken to Impel Down, as the No Face Pirates watch in horror.

On the other side of the island, Mulin is also finding escape to be difficult. His ship, the Grand Scaler, is already being besieged by marines, and standing in the crew’s way is Assistant Admiral Tashigi. As the rest of his crew fights around him, trying to liberate their ship, Tashigi and Mulin cross blades, clashing multiple times before holding each other at a standstill. Tashigi looks at Mulin’s blade and exclaims that it is one of the 21 O Wazamono swords, before stating she’ll return it to where he no doubt stole it from. Mulin irritatedly tells her it’s his, before attempting to use Brick Bats to distract her. However, Tashigi is too fast, and speeds past, cutting him in the torso. Mulin quickly realizes he cannot defeat Tashigi now, and shouts over to Dewayne, telling him to hurry and secure the ship, as they need to make a quick getaway. Tashigi tells him she’s insulted that he thinks they can escape her.

Assistant Admiral (Smoker Division)

Tashigi

In another part of Sabaody, three figures talk amongst themselves. The first asks if the other two had heard what is going on. The second figure says that it’s chaos out there, and that the marines are scrapping with a bunch of rookies. The third figure tells his friends they should go help out, in that case.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Back at Grove 9, the rest of the Green Devil Pirates look on in shock at the building Shocker was thrown through. As Zane states his disbelief, Adam rallies the crew, telling them they have to fight until Shocker gets back up. Adam rushes Shirokami, slashing wildly, but like Shocker’s attacks, the slices just go through him. Turning back, Adam attempts the Santoryū: Onigiri . At the same time, Yato tries to kick his head, hoping that is his weak spot. Shirokami easily counters all three of Adam’s blades with his jitte, before grabbing Yato’s legs as his attack passes through his head. The admiral disarms Adam and smacks him hard with his staff, before slamming Yato into the ground and pinning him with his boot.

Seeing their top fighters crumble easily, the rest of the crew decide to all-out attack. Taco shoots a Kaen Shot and Jordan uses Danyaku Arm , trying to counter Shirokami’s smoke, but the admiral dodges out of the way with his flight before strangling the duo with White Vine . He tells them that ranged fighters really annoy him, before seeing out of the corner of his eye Angel, Zane, and Cruella running towards him. Angel launches a Rankyaku , which Cruella redirects via a void and opens the attack right in his face. However, once again, he is not affected. Landing in their midst, Shirokami uses White Out , expelling thick smoke from his arms which suffocates the Green Devils. Kawaki tries to fight him with his own sword, but the admiral easily parries the attacks with his jitte, before pressing the tip of his staff to Kawaki, with the jester feeling weakened. 

Shirokami muses to himself, stating their crew has quite a few power users, but to him it doesn’t matter. He then addresses all of them, asking if they’re done wasting energy. As a guttural scream is heard from the building, Shocker bursts out of the house and jumps at Smoker, using Gomu Gomu no Jet Ame , though the attacks keep passing through him. Shirokami asks if he’s serious, but Shocker follows up with Gomu Gomu no Jet Muchi , though the admiral parries it with his staff. As he rebounds, Shirokami uses a bizarre power to make his jitte black, before raking it painfully diagonally across Shocker’s abdomen. As Shocker backflips away, wincing as blood flows freely from his wound, he states he has to use everything he knows, and activates Gear Third . Jumping into the air and inflating his arm, Shocker uses Gomu Gomu no Gigant Pistol , the large attack slamming into Shirokami, crushing him. However, smoke simply escapes from where he once stood. As Shocker deflates into his chibi form, Shirokami appears next to him and pins him to the wall. 

As Shocker struggles, Shirokami tells him it is useless to resist, as he’s sending all of them to Impel Down. Shocker lets out a yell, and a wave of force knocks out the fodder marines around them. As Shirokami thinks to himself that this boy is another with the disposition of a king, he states he needs to take him out now. He tells Shocker that this is what it means to oppose the government. As Mulin and Zypho continue to struggle, Shirokami continues, stating that kids playing at being pirates is a dangerous thing in these times, and that it’s the equivalent of a death wish, since actions have consequences. Shirokami states that in any case, this is the end of his little journey. As Shocker begins to tear up from frustration and helplessness, suddenly, Shirokami is smacked hard in the face, and sent flying away. As everyone wonders what’s happening, a certain man is seen holding a long rifle, and as he smokes, he asks Shirokami if he’s having fun terrorizing kids.

Move Index

Chapter Text

In the east, Hina prepares to take Zypho away, waving him in her arm cage and signaling to the No Face Pirates that their captain is done for. However, the legion of marines around are suddenly blown out of the way into the sky like bowling pins. She hears a gun lock on to her, and everyone is surprised to see Lucky Roux, ex-officer of the yonko crew, the Red Hair Pirates, who is worth 1,692,000,000 beli. As he eats a large chunk of meat, He tells Hina he does not want to have to come out of retirement just to kill her, but that he really thinks she should let the kids go so that no one gets hurt. As Hina releases Zypho and the captain runs to his ship, Hina tells her men to stand down, stating that they aren’t taking chances against a legend like him, and that they’ll catch the No Face Pirates in the New World. However, as the Leif Krissah pushes off from the archipelago, Zypho notes how many of his crewmates were hurt in the assault. As Solayla cries that Jin is bleeding out, Blossom works on him, stating that she swears to heal him. Zypho swears he’ll take on the marines in the New World and pay them back. 

Former Senior Officer and Cook of the Red Hair Pirates

"Human Juggernaut" Lucky Roux 

Bounty: 1,692,000,000

Similarly, in the west, Mulin’s sword is flung out of his grasp. As Tashigi prepares to strike him down, a single bullet painfully pierces her sword arm and pushes her back. Everyone turns and sees Yassop, with a bounty of 1,631,000,000, training his gun on her. The Red Hair Pirates’ former sniper tells her that he really hates the marines, as they keep preventing kids from finding their own paths in the world. As Mulin asks why, Yassop says he’s helping them out because he wants them to be free to explore, like his son did before. Thanking him, Mulin moves towards his ship. He quickly paralyzes the marines on the deck long enough for his crew to push them overboard. They then set sail, leaving the archipelago behind for now. As they begin to relax, Dewayne says they were quite lucky, and Mulin agrees. He then tells his first mate he hopes the Green Devils manage to escape, as the New World will be boring without them.

Former Senior Officer and Sniper of the Red Hair Pirates (Usopp's Father)

"Chaser" Yasopp 

Bounty: 1,631,000,000

Back at Grove 9, Shirokami rises, wondering if Sabaody is where they’ve been hiding since supposedly retiring. Cruella recognizes the man with a shock. The man is revealed to be none other than Benn Beckman, the former first mate of the Red Hair Pirates, and a pirate worth 1,870,000,000 beli. He smirks as he addresses Shirokami, telling him that ever since Shanks died, he and his friends have been trying to retire, but that as long as piracy lives on, he has to do his part in keeping the flame burning. As Shirokami moves to seemingly attack, Beckman becomes serious and says he can risk fighting him, though it may not end well. As Shirokami asks what his game is, Beckman simply says that saplings need to be allowed to grow into trees before one decides to cut them down.

Former First Mate of the Red Hair Pirates (Usopp's Father)

"Deadshot" Benn Beckman 

Bounty: 1,870,000,000

He then calls over to Shocker, telling him that he and his friends are free to go. As Shocker gets up and begins to thank him, Beckman tells him to not do that and instead think about how they were decimated, shocking the Green Devil captain. He tells Shocker to always remember how they were annihilated here, and that this is just a small taste of what awaits them in the New World. As Shocker stands, stunned, Taco pulls him away and states they need to go now. As the crew runs off, Beckman thinks to himself that he hopes they grow from this.

Chapter Text

The Green Devils take the Stormy White a few kilometers away from Sabaody, hiding in an old cave hideout of the Rosy Life Riders. Jordan says that they should be able to lie low here until things calm down at Sabaody. Adam says that they were quite lucky that Beckman helped them out, while Yato wonders why he bothered. Suddenly, Zane rushes onto the desk, telling the others to come to the doctor’s cabin quickly, where he was working on Shocker. 

As they head inside, they see Shocker patched up, with bandages on his head and, most notably, around his upper body, with stitches being used where Shirokami had attacked him on his abdomen. As Angel asks what’s wrong, Zane says he’ll be fine physically, as with time he’ll recover, but that he suddenly broke down. Almost on cue, Shocker apologizes to his friends, shocking them. Shocker falls to the ground and begs them to forgive him, as he is a failure as a pirate captain and doesn’t deserve to lead them after what happened. Shocker begins to cry, lamenting his inability to save his friends, and that he’s scared that he won’t be able to do so in the New World either.

However, Kawaki calmly tells Shocker to raise his head. Angel says that she’s happy he isn’t so dense as to think everything went perfectly, but that of course they forgive him, since they all chose to follow him and know what they’re getting into. Jordan agrees, stating that the ship of dreams they’re on will take them to Luffy. Shocker begins to doubt, wondering if he can really become the pirate king if he’s so weak, but before he can finish the sentence, Taco slams his head into the ground, shocking everyone. Taco agitatedly tells him to not finish that, as they all have faith that he’ll become the pirate king, so he of all people can’t waver now. Shocker asks them why they want to keep following him, and Taco smiles as he says it’s because he’s helped all of them before, and so they’ll continue to help him now. As Shocker looks at his friends, all smiling around him, he begins to weep while smiling, thanking them for sticking with him.

Adam states that they for sure will follow him, though the fact of the matter is that they do need to get stronger if they’re planning on entering the New World. Yato agrees, stating that they’ll stand a better chance if they can understand the New World. Shocker remembers what Beckman had told him, that this is only a taste of what awaits them there. Shocker says he’s been thinking about that, before asking Jordan how long the coating will take. The shipwright says that he’ll give Shakky a call so that Rayleigh can coat the ship, since coating lasts for a long time. Shocker then explains his idea: the crew should take a break from being pirates to train and get stronger individually. As the rest of the crew think about this, Kawaki states that it makes sense, but Yato points out that unless they each stay at separate groves on Sabaody, they can’t really train properly. However, Cruella informs them that she has an idea that she thinks might work.

On the cliff masking the cove the Stormy is hiding in, the nine members of the Green Devil Pirates stand separately. She explains that using her devil fruit, she can transport herself to places that she’s been to before, though she’s never tried to do it to whole other islands before, and certainly not multiple ones simultaneously. The strategist continues, saying that she’ll use her Random Void technique, which will send each of them to a location in the world that she has been to before, though where they end up, she has no control over. As Adam asks their captain for how long they’ll be separated for, Shocker decides that they should train for three years before meeting back up at Sabaody, where they will depart from Grove 9. As everyone agrees, the crew have a tearful goodbye, with Shocker thanking them all for agreeing with his decision. With the promise of three years on the horizon, the Green Devils jump into their own portals to see where they would train for their adventure.

Move Index

Chapter Text

3Y Arc

Taco falls out of his portal awkwardly. As he looks around, he notes that he’s on the beach of an island, and that the majority of the island is inside a massive cave, the cave’s ceiling itself stretching high into the sky. Looking around, he notes that it seems he’s on an archipelago of cave-islands. As he heads inside the cave, he sees a lush jungle with large trees blooming, and a town with a castle in the distance. As he looks closer, he notes that there are cute, little creatures all over. A voice behind him tells him that they’re called slugs by the natives. As he turns around, startled, he sees a young woman with a green adventure shirt and red hair tied in puffs. She introduces herself as Tridia, one of the kingdom’s inhabitants. She notes she’s never seen him before, and he states he just arrived, wondering where he is. Tridia explains that he is on the Caterra Archipelago, a large island chain of 99 islands, each with its own biome, but all of them inside of massive connecting caverns. She then tells him to follow her, as she’ll take him to the castle. 

Caterra Inhabitant

Tridia

After arriving, Tridia introduces Taco to the king of Caterra, Iley. As Iley jollily states that Taco can stay for as long he’d like, he asks Tridia if he’s her boyfriend. Tridia, embarrassed, tells her dad to stop, shocking Taco as she is revealed to be Caterra’s princess. Tridia tells her father that they’ll be spending a lot of time exploring the archipelago, and to not wait up for her. Iley simply tells them to be careful and asks Taco to protect his reckless daughter, with Tridia angrily telling her father to stop.

Later, as they relax in a clearing by a waterfall, Taco observes the slugs some more. Watching them jump off the waterfall, he is shocked as they suddenly transform into giant versions of themselves and begin soaring around. As Taco asks what’s happening, Tridia explains that slugs have an intriguing phenomenon where if they hit a velocity of 100 miles per hour, they’ll morph into more powerful versions of themselves the inhabitants call the “morph form’, which when used the slugs are capable of using different abilities depending on the species. Taco, vastly interested by this, decides that he’ll become friends with as many slugs as he can, and that hopefully in exchange he can use them as ammo. Tridia says that as long as he’s kind to them, they probably won’t mind. Taco says he has to get work on a slingshot that can shoot them at the required speed, and Tridia states that she’ll help him. As Taco looks toward the sky, he tells Shocker in his mind to wait for him.

Chapter Text

Yato falls out of his portal and lands on grassy terrain. As he looks around him, a voice from above asks him who he is. As Yato looks up, he notes with shock that he knows the man from the bounty posters Caleb used to show him of the most prominent pirates in the world. Flying above him is none other than Marco “the Phoenix”, the former first division commander of the Whitebeard Pirates, a pirate worth 1,374,000,000 beli. As Yato asks what he’s doing here, Marco laughs and says that’s for him to ask, as he is currently on Sphinx Island, the hometown of the great Whitebeard and resting place of him and Portgaz D. Ace. Yato notes with shock that this is the New World, and Marco laughs and agrees. Yato quickly tells him he can’t be here, as he is supposed to enter the New World with his friends three years from now. 

Former Whitebeard Pirates First Division Commander

Marco "the Phoenix"

Bounty: 1,374,000,000

Devil Fruit: Tori Tori no Mi, Mythical Model: Phoenix

After Yato explains the situation to Marco, the Phoenix-man understands his plight. Yato asks him if he knows of any way he can go back to Paradise in order to train, but Marco says there isn’t a need, confusing Yato. Marco tells him he and his friends can help train him here on Sphinx, and that since there are multiple roads in the New World the likelihood that Yato’s crew will end up in the surrounding area is small. He then states that they can stay on Sphinx the whole time, so Yato won’t have to explore the New World islands, and that when the time is up, Marco himself will personally fly him to Sabaody. 

Yato thinks to himself for a bit, before finally deciding that if he won’t explore, then that should be fine. He then remembers with a start that Marco had said that he “and his friends” can help train Yato. As Yato asks who his friends are, Marco tells him to follow him to the village. As Yato walks through the town, everyone greets Marco before asking who Yato is. All around them, he notes that the other division commanders of the Whitebeard Pirates have all settled on Sphinx, noting more big names like “Diamond” Jozu and “Flower Sword” Vista. As Marco calls the commanders around, he introduces Yato to them and states that he’ll temporarily be joining them for the next three years. As Yato begins to meet them all, Marco then says he has an idea for how to train. Marco poses a challenge to Yato, telling him that he has three years to defeat all of the division commanders in combat. Yato, grinning, says that it sounds like a good way to get stronger. He looks toward the sky and thinks to Shocker, stating that he’s found a way to get stronger and that he’ll see him in three years.

Former Whitebeard Pirates Third Division Commander

"Diamond" Jozu

Bounty: 546,000,000

Devil Fruit: Kira Kira no Mi

Former Whitebeard Pirates Fourth Division Commander

"Flower Sword" Vista

Bounty: 525,000,000

Chapter Text

Jordan falls out of his portal and lands painfully outside a large marine base. As he dusts himself off, he notes himself to be in enemy territory, thus quickly removing everything that can identify him as the “Rogue Pacifista”. He finishes just in time, as a group of marines come outside and wonder what one of the pacifista is doing outside. Wondering if he’s malfunctioning, the marines call for their scientists to come and fetch him. Jordan, realizing that he can’t escape right now, decides to play along and be a pacifista for the time being. The marines state that Naval Basis has never had a malfunctioning pacifista before, and that they need to take him for a check up.

Inside the large base, as he is being dragged round, Jordan pieces together that he is on Naval Basis, the marine base where pacifistas are manufactured. He is brought to the Beta Lab, where Mark II models such as himself are made. The scientists state that this pacifista seems to have battle damage, and that they should update its software and add in the bubble shields that make Mark III models so strong. Hearing talk of bubble shields, Jordan gets excited, wondering how much technology has advanced in the time he was dead. However, as the scientists begin prying near his head, Jordan quickly realizes that they’ll find his brain and that any changes made can alter his personality. Opening a small container in his shoulder, he shoots out Super Sleep Pill , a small pill that bursts into a sleep-inducing powder. As Jordan hops off the workbench, he states that he’ll have to be careful not to get caught.

Jordan participates in drills and formations, beginning to understand the pacifista a bit more. At night, when the scientists sleep, he makes his own upgrades using material he finds in the lab. As Jordan continues to be examined by the marines, he is then put in line to be sent on a mission. As he wonders to himself if he’s really going to do this for three years, he then states that he’ll do what he has to, as long as it’s for Shocker’s sake. He then hopes that the others are having a better time than he is.

Chapter Text

Kawaki falls through some trees before landing on the ground. As he stands, he immediately notes it is raining heavily. Opening his umbrella, he says jokily that it looks like he was prepared for the situation, laughing at his own joke, before remembering that his friends aren’t around to laugh with him. As he looks around, he notes a village in the distance, and decides to walk to it. 

As he walks through the village, he notes that it seems to be a somber, quiet, dull place. The buildings have quite high rises, but they are all gray and plain. As Kawaki attempts to talk to the people, he sees that they all have zipper mouths, and many refuse to talk to an outsider. Heading to the tavern, he sighs, wondering what kind of place he ended up in. The bartender unzips his mouth and states that that’s just the way things are on Gloom Island; the inhabitants haven’t had anything to smile about in over 100 years, as it has been inexplicably raining nonstop since then. As Kawaki wonders how an island can experience a century of rain, the bartender tells him he’s only telling him this because he always blabs secrets, revealing himself to be Fukurou, a former member of the World Government's Cipher Pol. As Kawaki states that he’s sure he can make them laugh, Fukurou tells him it’s impossible. Kawaki makes a joke, but the people in the tavern simply look at him and then look away. Kawaki then makes it his temporary goal to make them laugh.

Former CP9 (then CP0) Agent

Fukuro "the Silent"

He tries a plethora of different jokes all day, trying to make anyone he comes across laugh, but the inhabitants simply trudge along their way. He uses his best material, but try as he might, he can’t get the people to laugh. Later, he sighs as he sits in the tavern. Fukurou says he told him so, and that the people here won’t laugh at anything. Kawaki asks for a fizzy drink, but as he opens the can, the drink splashes in his face. This causes the people around him to snicker. Hearing a hopeful laugh, Kawaki “accidentally” trips as he walks to the bathroom, slamming his head into the wall. This causes the people to open their zippers and laugh audibly. As Fukurou wonders how he did it, more and more people from around town came to see Kawaki hurt himself. Their raucous laughter was so loud, the rain let up, and the villagers saw the sun for the first time in 100 years. 

As they thank Kawaki, Fukurou states that if his jokes make it to the public, he can become famous. Kawaki decides that that’s what he’ll do to train, as his primary role is as the Green Devil Pirates’ jester, and as such, he must be able to make his captain laugh on command, and raise his friends’ spirits. As Kawaki and the Zipper-Mouth Tribe begin building a boat to journey around Paradise, Kawaki thinks about Shocker, stating that this is how he’ll support him.

Chapter Text

Cruella falls out of her portal and lands gracefully in a field of cherry blossoms. As she wanders around, she meets some Okama, who inform her that she is currently on Momoiro Island, more specifically, in the Kamabakka Kingdom. Cruella remembers the last time she was here, where she and her crew had momentarily stopped to recover from a sea king attack. Back then, she had been told that Emporio Ivankov, their ruler, was not around, and so she left shortly after. Now, as she is brought towards the center field, she notes with surprise that the Revolutionary Army is converging.

As she looks around her, a cloaked man with a tattoo on his face walks toward her. He is introduced as none other than Monkey D. Dragon, father of the current Pirate King and leader of the entire Revolutionary Army. Dragon asks her for her name, and she introduces herself to him. She explains her situation, stating that she was hoping to be able to train here. As Dragon wonders what to do, “Flame Emperor” Sabo, the chief of staff of the army, introduces himself to her and informs Dragon he thinks she should temporarily join them. When Dragon asks why, Sabo states that if she’s Shocker’s crewmate, then they’ll indirectly be helping out Luffy, who is Shocker’s patron. Dragon thinks to himself for a bit, before asking Cruella if she has any skills she believes will be of help to the army. Cruella states that she is a strategist, and that perhaps she can help plan and coordinate missions. As Dragon agrees, he states that with Ivankov’s permission, Cruella can stay on Momoiro. Emporio Ivankov introduces himself as the Queen of the Kingdom, and states that he has no issues with her staying so long as she is helping the army. 

Revolutionary Army Commander

“World’s Worst Criminal” Monkey D. Dragon

Bounty: 5,000,000,000

Revolutionary Army Chief of Staff

“Rev. Army’s Number 2” “Flame Emperor” Sabo

Bounty: 1,100,000,000

Revolutionary Army Paradise Commander

“Miracle Person” Emporio Ivankov

Bounty: 888,000,000

As Cruella thanks them, she is introduced to more members around her age. She becomes fast friends with Sabo and Koala, who help her settle and help train her physically and mentally. Over the course of the next few days, Cruella proves herself to be invaluable to the army, as she expertly details out her plans and uses her new companions’ abilities and specialities to their advantage. Soon enough, Dragon calls her, and states that he believes she is ready to lead a liberation mission herself. As Cruella thanks him for the opportunity, she thinks about Shocker, stating that when she returns, she’ll be the best strategist any crew can ask for.

Revolutionary Army Officer

Assistant Fish-Man Karate Instructor

Koala

Bounty: 501,000,000

Chapter Text

Angel falls out of her portal into snow. As she rises, she instantly feels an intense cold. Looking around her, she sees that she is on a small winter island with a large, snowy mountain. Seeing no other way off the island, she tries climbing up the mountain in the hopes that she can look around her. However, as she climbs, the cold takes a toll on her body. She begins to freeze up, and eventually falls into the snow. Stating that this can’t be her end, her vision blurs, and she eventually black out…

Angel wakes up with a start. As she looks around her, she notes she is in what looks like a log cabin. Next to her, a voice asks if she’s finally awake. Angel looks over and sees a middle-aged woman with short, purple hair, reading by the fireplace. She wears a light purple winter jacket over a sports crop top and jeans, with the left jeans leg being short while the right side is long. She introduces herself as Altar, the only person living on the island. As Angel asks where she is, Altar explains that this is Yuki Peaks, a winter island that is constantly snowing. Angel thanks her for saving her, but states that she has to go, as she needs to find a place where she can train for the New World. Hearing the second sea’s name, Altar becomes interested, asking Angel why she’s going there. As Angel explains the situation, Altar says that she’d be willing to help her out, since she’s a retired pirate herself, a navigator as well.

Yuki Peaks Sole Inhabitant

Altar

Angel thanks her excitedly, stating that she wants to start right away, Altar says that in due time, she’ll explain to her the crazy weather phenomena she experienced in the New World, but for now, she should follow her outside. As they head into the cold, Angel, shivering, asks what they’re doing. Altar takes off her jacket and puts on shorts, exposing most of herself to the elements. Altar simply tells Angel to meditate with her, and Angel asks if she’s crazy, trying to meditate in the freezing snow. Altar tells her it’s all for a secret technique she wants to teach her. She asks Angel if she wants to become strong, and Angel responds she does. As she sits down next to her new teacher, Angel states it is all for Shocker’s sake.

Chapter Text

Zane falls through his portal, but quickly uses Wing Boost to slow his fall and recover. As he lands on the ground, he sees that he is in a large forest, with treehouses populated around them. As he wonders where he is, suddenly, the forest ground rumbles. A massive elephant emerges from the thicket, followed by all sorts of animals of all shapes and sizes. As Zane wonders what is happening, he uses his ability to talk to animals to ask a passing gazelle what’s happening. The animal tells him that there’s no time, as the humans are attacking, shocking Zane and making him wonder if they mean pirates.

As Zane follows the crowd out the forest onto the surrounding beach, they see a fleet of five ships, the people on it shouting. The elephant, named Barbaru, who is the leader of the animal kingdom, explains to Zane that the peace of Kemonigen Island is threatened by these humans once a week. The humans continuously attack them to try and steal their sacred archives, a series of books on a wide variety of topics written by the animals’ ancestors. Zane, fearing what a war can do, tells the animals he’ll go talk to the humans and figure out why.

As the cat flies over to the ships, the humans, wearing somewhat tribal clothing, grab Zane and state that if the animals are trying to send a preemptive strike, they’ll just have to kill the cat. Zane speaks, surprising all of them, and tells them that he simply wants to understand why they keep trying to steal the sacred archives. However, the humans claimed that that was blasphemy, as those books had been written by their ancestors, explorers who had died while on Kemonigen and their works have never been recovered.  Zane states that the reason they haven’t been able to come to an agreement before is because they can’t understand each other, but that he’ll go as a translator for both parties.

Zane, flying ahead of the landing party, explains the situation to Barbaru. Barbaru reluctantly agrees to the meeting, and so the humans and animals meet on the beach to discuss. Both sides continuously scream at each other, until Zane finally has enough and shouts for them all to stop. He tells both sides that they can share the books, and they can come to an agreement regarding who has the books when. With both sides agreeing to this, they all thank Zane, as they could not have succeeded without his help. In exchange, the humans decide to help Zane, showing him their interpretations of their books in their library, with the cat taking special interest in the books about medicine. The animals also decide to help him out, stating that they can help him control his animal side. With Zane set for his next three years, thinking about his captain, he promises he’ll be able to heal anything they come across by the time he’s done.

Chapter Text

As Adam falls out of his void, he looks around him and sees he is on a beach next to a small town. He sees many individuals walking toward the town, some of them with swords. As he looks around, he sees that festivities are being thrown, with a flier stating that their annual Swordsman Master Tournament is happening in the Grand Arena. He guesses that this must be the reason there are so many swordsmen here, and then says that this must be fate. Heading over to the registration stand, he asks the lady behind the counter for more information. She tells him that this tournament is for determining the new upcoming sword masters, those who will be able to rival the likes of Dracule Mihawk and Roronoa Zoro. He decides to enter the competition, confident that his adventures in the first half of the Grand Line has made him strong enough to win. 

As Adam fights through the rounds, he quickly racks up wins, with the crowd beginning to notice him, and some even recognizing him from his bounty posters. After defeating a man with two rapiers, Adam advances to the Round of 16, though he notes he is getting increasingly tired and must pace himself. As he enters the ring for his next matchup, he meets his opponent, a young man with flowing black hair wearing pink robes. The announcer introduces the man as none other than “Wano Country’s Pink Dragon” Kozuki Momonosuke, Wano’s current shogun. As Adam asks what his deal is, Momonosuke states that he’s been training for years to be able to rival the other samurai, and regularly attends the tournament to test his strength. His trusted vassal, “Foxfire” Kin’emon, stands outside the ring, warning Adam to not play dirty, as he knows how some pirates can be.

Wano Country's Shogun

Wano Country’s Pink Dragon” Kozuki Momonosuke

Nine Red Scabbards

Shogun's Confidant and Advisor

"Foxfire" Kin'emon

As the battle begins, Adam paces around trying to gauge Momonosuke’s strength. He uses some preemptive slashes, but Momonosuke is not fazed, easily dodging out of the way. Adam suddenly rushes him, using his go-to move, Santoryū: Onigiri . However, Momonosuke blocks it cleanly with his blade, stating excitedly he knows that move. In the stands, a silhouetted figure with a bandana covering his eyes stops drinking and takes an interest in the fight. As Momonosuke states Adam’s use of three swords is quite intriguing, he then begins to grow and morph, until he is in his human/dragon hybrid form. The extra strength, combined with the blackening technique Adam still doesn’t understand, makes his blade feel heavy. Swinging Adam away, he quickly follows up with a slash in the torso. As Adam drops, he tells him to yield. As the announcer exclaims that Adam has lost, the Green Devil swordsman feels embarrassed.

Annoyed that he lost, Adam prepares to find a way off the island so that he can train elsewhere. However, a voice from a tree above him asks if he thinks that’s the best idea. As Adam looks up, he is in disbelief, as the man is revealed to be none other than Roronoa Zoro, the first mate of the current pirate king and currently in contention for the title of world’s strongest swordsman. As Adam asks incredulously what he’s doing here, Zoro informs him that he likes to watch over the battles and see if there’s anyone interesting that could rival him. He then states that he sees the determination and potential in Adam’s eyes, and would personally like to train him. As Adam is stunned, asking why, Zoro states that the same thing had happened to him years ago, and he wants to keep the way of bushido alive for as long as he can. Adam bows to him, thanking him for the opportunity.  

Straw Hat Pirates First Mate and Combatant 

Contender for World's Strongest Swordsman

"Pirate Hunter" Roronoa S. Zoro

Bounty: 3,600,000,000

Zoro takes Adam to his temporary base on Sparuta, in a small hut on the beach. As Adam asks if he is really going to stay there, Zoro tells him it’s the best they have, so make do. Zoro then makes a Den Den Mushi call. The other line picks up, with an energetic voice shouting for Zoro to come back already. Zoro tells his captain he’s sorry, but he’s not going to rejoin them for another three years. When the man asks why, Zoro states that he’s placing a bet on the future. On the other end of the line, Luffy laughs and says he understands. As Zoro hangs up, he warns Adam that this training is going to be rigorous, and there may be days when he’s ready to die. Adam, clutching his Kuro Kusanagi, swears that no matter what, he’ll complete this training and become stronger in order to help his captain surpass Zoro’s.

Chapter Text

Shocker falls out of his portal, arms flailing, and smacks into the ground. As he looks around, he sees he is on a massive archipelago of islands, all connected by some bridges. As he begins walking around, he notes how hungry he is. Suddenly, a massive Terror Guma bursts out of the trees and roars at him. Shocker smirks, stating that his food is here. As it slashes down, he quickly dodges and uses Gear Second to take care of the beast, though he finds defeating it quite hard. As it goes down, a giant gorilla suddenly appears out of the forest and slams Shocker into the ground. Shocker attempts to fight, but his punch has no effect, and it crushes Shocker underfoot. As the Green Devil’s captain struggles to rise, a giant, golden figure appears behind the ape and rains divine light on it, blasting it away and knocking it down temporarily. 

As the figure becomes much smaller, he reveals himself to be none other than the former navy Fleet Admiral, Sengoku the Buddha. As the old man introduces himself to Shocker, the pirate is afraid he will have to make a quick escape, but Sengoku tells him not to worry, as he is no longer an active member of the marines. Shocker asks him if he knows where they are, and Sengoku responds they are currently on Merveille, an island chain formerly part of the territory owned by “Golden Lion” Shiki. He says that following the failure of Shiki’s plan due to Marine intervention, the archipelago, formerly floating in the sky, came crashing down and settled in the sea. Sengoku explains he is there because he and his late buddy Garp would come to the islands’ few villages in their spare time and help out the citizens recovering from Shiki’s oppression, and that even though Garp is gone, he still wants to do his part.

Former Marine Fleet Admiral

Sengoku "the Buddha"

Shocker then says that if Sengoku used to be a marine, he must be strong, and asks him for any tips on how to improve himself. After thinking for a bit, Sengoku asks him how much he knows about Haki. Shocker, obviously confused, simply tilts his head, and Sengoku marvels at how he managed to survive until now. He explains to the young pirate the differences between Kenbunshoku (Observation), Busoshoku (Armament), and Haoshoku (Conqueror’s) Haki, with Shocker not understanding much, but realizing that he’s seen some instances of Haki in use in the past, such as when Sentomaru blocked his attack in Shellport. Sengoku tells him it would be better to have more practical practice, but luckily for them, he ended up on an island with animals bio-engineered to be dangerous. As the ape, which he identified as a Del Kong, begins to rise again, the old man instructs Shocker to try and fight it off. Shocker jumps up and tries using Gear Third , but the giant gorilla merely tanks the blow and then punches him straight into the ground. 

As Shocker quickly deflates, the Del Kong moves to finish him, but Sengoku gets in its way. With the beast targeting him, he uses Kenbunshoku to dodge the animal’s feral swings, then uses Busoshoku on his arm and punches the beast, causing it to howl in pain. As the Del Kong moves to crush him, Sengoku flashes his Haoshoku, with such force that the beast becomes scared and retreats. As Shocker looks on in amazement, Sengoku thinks to himself that this is the baby he had seen all those years ago, and him that being that man’s son makes sense…

Later that night, near the village Sengoku was staying in, the former Fleet Admiral tells Shocker he can sense that the boy is capable of using the extremely rare Haoshoku type just like he can, and tells Shocker it is a good thing he picked three years as his time frame, as he could teach him one form of Haki and practice it in depth for a year each. Shocker asks when they start, and Sengoku says they can begin at dawn tomorrow. As the old man sleeps under the stars, Shocker looks up and pictures his friends' faces. He swears that he’ll use the power he gains here to lead them when they meet up again.  

The next day, as Sengoku tells Shocker to hurry up, as their training is starting, Shocker tells him to give him just one moment as he runs to the nearby village. Once there, he finds an abandoned warehouse and hides the straw hat in it, claiming he would be back for it in three years. And with that, each member of the Green Devils begins their own training arcs over the course of the next three years that will make them stronger, until the fateful day arrives when they meet up again.

Chapter Text

Back on Sabaody, at Shakky’s Rip-Off Bar, the remnants of the Red Hair Pirates gather and talk about the new generation. Roux states that the Orange Flash guy didn’t even thank him for his help, while Yassop states that’s the problem with kids these days. As Beckman looks out the window and smokes, he wonders if Shocker understood his underlying message to grow stronger first. Yassop chastises him, stating that with how harsh he put it, he wouldn’t be surprised if Shocker gave up on being a pirate altogether. Roux laughs and says there’s no way that would happen, and that Shocker would be a fool not to train.

As Shakky smokes behind the bar counter, she says that she doubts it as well, as Shocker seems to have an ambition that very few of each generation are born with, and that besides, he seems to have surrounded himself with good crewmates. As the door opens, Shakky asks her husband how his trip was. In the door, “Dark King” Silvers Rayleigh is introduced, with an astonishing bounty of 3,510,000,000 beli. As Beckman greets him, Rayleigh states that the repairs on Amazon Lily are almost done, but that he’s sad he didn’t get to meet this new rookie. Looking at Shocker’s bounty poster, Rayleigh states that he’ll coat their ship for free, as if he’s set up as Luffy’s protege, then there must be a reason. He states that from the bounty picture, he reminds him a lot of Roger, with Beckman stating that funnily enough, he reminds him of Shanks. 

Former Roger Pirates First Mate and Swordsman

Former Right Hand of the First Pirate King

"Dark King" Silvers Rayleigh

Bounty: 3,510,000,000

In Sabaody’s marine base on the southern groves, Shirokami requests a call straight to Fleet Admiral Issho. As the leader of the marines picks up his call, Shirokami regrettably informs him that he was unable to capture the pirates, since they were apparently allied with the Red Hair Pirates. Issho states that it is quite unfortunate, but that there will be more opportunities in the future, and that the best they can do for right now is perform a routine sweep of the surrounding waters and calm the citizens down. He tells Shirokami not to forget that it is Marine Week, and that the people will be looking towards the admirals for guidance. As the Fleet Admiral rifles through the bounty posters of the former Red Hair Pirates, Shirokami tells him Mitori and Momozumi are on their way.

Shirokami sighs and states that it’s frustrating, and that the Red Hair remnants have become just like the Dark King. As he wonders what they can do, Issho tells him that they are retired, and that for the most part they are not bothering anyone, but that if Smoker wants to be the one to capture them he should be his guest. As Shirokami huffs angrily, Issho says that besides, their focus should be on more current affairs, and that there is in fact a certain pirate group that they should be watching…

Meanwhile, on a certain island in the New World, the Straw Hat Pirates are seen conversing. Nami wonders about what Zoro had said, and Franky states that it seems like he’s training a member of Shocker’s crew. Brook excitedly states that they’re probably all training then, and Chopper says it reminds him of their own training. Carrot wonders what happened at Sabaody, and Robin states that according to the news, there was a large convergence of rookie pirates on the archipelago, but that the Red Hair Pirates helped fight off the marines. As Luffy wonders why Shanks’ crew was there, Usopp states that that must mean his dad is on Sabaody right now.

Sanji smokes before stating that he couldn’t care less about what moss-head is doing, but that if all those rookies are going into the second half, then the New World is going to be chaotic for a few years. Jinbe agrees, hoping that Fish-Man Island will be alright. Luffy merely laughs loudly, with Yamato asking what he finds so funny. Luffy states he’s excited, as he thinks the influx of new challengers will be fun. As he looks toward the sky, he tells Shocker to take as much time as he needs in order to get stronger, and that he’ll wait for him.

Chapter Text

Three important world events occurred during the years that the Green Devils were separated. They each took place during one of the timeskip years. However, the crew did not hear of any of their events due to their being, for the most part, cut off from the world. 

During the first year, a man by the name of Zero amassed his forces, which had previously been hiding in the shadows all around the New World, and ordered a great purge. His goal was to take out as many of Blackbeard’s crew and allies as possible. He sent his crew all around the New World to all of Blackbeard’s former territories, claiming them for himself and fighting off any members of Blackbeard’s larger forces. Massive raids on his islands were becoming common, until Blackbeard himself began to worry. Then, near the end of the year, the purge ended with Zero gathering his forces together himself, tracking down Blackbeard and waging war against the Blackbeard Pirates’ forces on Hachinosu. During the battle, two of Zero’s top members encountered Kuzan, ex-marine admiral who joined up with Blackbeard as his Tenth Titanic Captain. After a hard fought battle, it is revealed to the world that Kuzan had been killed by them. Another top officer had begun fighting Shiryu “of the Rain''. No sooner had the battle started than it stopped. Shiryu was left bleeding out, on the verge of death on the ground, his attacker smirking wildly. Zero managed to destroy Blackbeard’s flagship, the Saber of Xebec, and killed most of Blackbeard’s subordinate crews. At the war’s end, Blackbeard was defeated and left tied up for the marines to capture. This feat allowed Zero to consolidate his power and claim the final spot as the last of the Four Emperors. 

During the second year, the revolutionaries converged for their grand meeting at the Kamabakka Kingdom. While there, the Chief of Staff, Sabo, told everyone that he would be going to see his brother Luffy, the pirate king, as he could help him with an upcoming project. That is the only noteworthy event of the meeting. Sabo then went off toward Luffy’s current location, using his vivre card to locate him. However, three weeks later, a report came to the revolutionaries that Sabo had gone missing. An emissary of the revolutionaries had met up with Bartolomeo, who confirmed no one had met with Luffy since. Dragon sent squads of revolutionaries to try and find Sabo. Meanwhile, at a random island the Straw Hats were staying at, Bartolomeo appears before them to tell Luffy of his brother’s disappearance. Robin is worried, but Luffy tells them not to worry because he knows Sabo is fine because of his vivre card, and that Sabo wouldn’t want Luffy to save him even if he was in trouble. At around the same time, in the territory known as Otherworld, the yonko Mother held a ceremony for the induction of a powerful new subordinate, who in just two days proved himself to be commander level. As a silhouetted Mother tells the person to prepare themselves for “the whitening”, the man simply smiled, with no other parts of his face shown. 

Barto Club Captain

Captain of the Second Ship of the Straw Hat Grand Fleet

Straw Hat Luffy's (Self-Proclaimed) Biggest Supporter

Bartolomeo "the Cannibal"

Bounty: 230,000,000

During the third year, the Yonko Trafalgar Law received a report that some members of his crew were being held prisoner at New Mary Geoise. Law didn’t know why, but he felt that it was bait to try and kill him. He convened a meeting of his first mate, Eustass Kidd, and the commanders of the Supernova Pirates. After careful planning and discussion Law sent a rescue team to try and save the others. The team was led by Kidd, and included Page 1, the Risky Brothers, Killer and Bepo. Law had Hawkins estimate their count of success, and though something shocked him, he said that there is a 78% chance of success. 

Supernova Pirates Captain 

One of the Four Emperors

"Surgeon of Death" Trafalgar D. Water Law

Supernova Pirates Commander

"Magician" Basil Hawkins

Bounty: 1,320,000,000

When the team arrived at New Mary Geoise, they managed to sneak in using Kidd’s Punk Rise . After looking through a number of doors, they found their way to the prisoner wing. To their horror, they saw Shachi, Penguin, and a few other lesser members trapped in a steel cage, beaten senseless. Kidd told them to hurry up and move out, but Killer warned him to wait. As Killer suspected too late, however, the World Government had set a trap, and they had to fight their way through. The Risky brothers managed to unlock the doors while the others fought off the incoming world government agents, led by Sakazuki, the new leader of CP1. Sakazuki told them that no matter how he looked at it, pirates had to suffer, and attacked with Dai Funka. 

Supernova Pirates First Mate

Eustass "Captain" Kidd

Bounty: 3,470,000,000

Back on the main ship, Law asked Hawkins what was wrong before. He is reluctant to tell him, but Hawkins told him there is a 100% chance that one of their allies would die in the battle, shocking Law. Back inside the castle, Killer is concentrated on a marine swordsman, and didn’t even see Sakazuki coming his way. As Sakazuki is about to pierce him with his magma fist, Kidd gets in the way, sacrificing himself to save Killer. Kidd told them all to tell their stupid captain he is never the captain of him, and this should prove it, before dying. Page 1 tail-slapped him away, but the damage is done. As they fought back against the government, Killer began crying underneath his mask for his captain, though due to his SMILE fruit, he outwardly laughed uncontrollably. The crew took his body back to the fleet, and Law gave him a proper funeral, sending him to the ocean and stating that the cold waters of the New World will be his new home. As Hawkins asked what they were going to do then, Law looked up with determination in his eyes and ordered a complete siege on New Mary Geoise for vengeance. That is the story of how half of New Mary Geoise was destroyed, the wrath of a Yonko threatening the balance.

Chapter Text

Sabaody Archipelago Redux Arc

On Merveille, a young man of about 20 years old is making his way through a deep jungle that he knows leads to a certain village, his pink hair emanating like spikes from his head. He wears a black jacket with the collar popped out, left open to reveal stitches running down the side of his torso from a scar he received three years ago. He has bandages all around his forearms, and he wears a yellow sash tied around his waist alongside baggy beige ghi pants. He had always hated trudging through the forest to get to the village, though he knows it is way easier for him now than it had been three years ago. On his way to the village, a giant mountain lion jumps in his way out from a cave, intent on eating him. The young man simply uses his Haoshoku Haki to overpower the beast easily, and it becomes gentle with him and even allows him to ride on its back. 

The mountain lion accelerates his progress, jumping through the brush and stopping at the village outskirts. As the man thanks it and walks toward the village, he spots an old warehouse. It was an old storage facility for Shiki and Dr. Indigo’s dangerous supplies, but it was abandoned when Shiki was brought down. The man knows for sure; his teacher had repeatedly told him this story many times over the past three years. The man moves to open the doors of the warehouse. Inside, a straw hat lays on a table, its coloration fading. He dusts the hat off then puts it back on his head. Being reintroduced, Shocker tells the hat the day has arrived, and it is finally time to meet up with his friends again. 

Green Devil Pirates Captain

Malvolio D. Shocker

A month later, on Sabaody, Shakky is smoking in her bar and reading the newspaper. Suddenly, Roronoa Zoro enters the bar, greeting her, followed by a young man with red hair in bangs who also has three swords, sheathed and strapped to his back. The young man has a burn on the left side of his face, and wears a blue jumpsuit with a brown utility belt, black fingerless gloves, and combat boots. Shakky jokes, stating she is surprised to see him there so soon, and the young man says he is shocked too, considering Zoro is the one who led him here, with Zoro angrily scolding him for not calling him Mr. Zoro. Shakky tells them she is impressed that they hadn’t alerted any of the marines, as in the past few years, the marines have managed to take back control of the majority of Sabaody. The young man said blending in was easy since Zoro disguised himself. He then asks if any of his friends were on the archipelago, but Shakky informs him he is the first she saw. As the man moves toward the door, Zoro, sitting and drinking booze, asks him where he is going. The man, reintroduced to be none other than Todoroki Adam, decides to go into town to try and see if he can find any of the others. 

Green Devil Pirates Swordsman

Todoroki Adam

In a restaurant in another part of the archipelago, a young woman with long, blue hair sits in a booth alone, casually eating some imported Mizu Mizu Meat. Her light-blue crop top and white jeans fit quite well on her. At that moment, some marine soldiers enter the restaurant on patrol duty. As they look around the bar, bothering the inhabitants, they then see her and advance. They ask her if she saw any suspicious activity, but she shakes her head and tells them she hasn’t seen anything. The two soldiers begin pestering her, telling her how beautiful she is and asking if she wants to drink with them. The woman thanks them but refuses, stating that she is waiting for some friends. The duo keep insisting, and the woman wonders to herself whether she’ll have to make a scene.

Just then, two men enter the tavern. Upon seeing the woman being harassed, one of them leaps across the tavern and kicks one of the guards into the ground hard, knocking him unconscious easily. As his friend confusedly begins to draw his rifle, the other man quickly fires a piece of lead at his head, knocking him out as well. As the woman looks at her saviors she sees that the shooter has long, cyan-blue hair, and is wearing an orange, long-sleeved jacket with fur linings, left open to reveal his abs, paired with blue pants and a large, brown travel pack on his back. A large slingshot is strapped to his back, while he holds a mini one in his hand. The other man has medium-length, spiky, orange hair, and wears a black tuxedo and matching pants with a white dress shirt and red tie, complete with iron-tipped shoes and stud earrings. He smiles, his glasses shining.

As the others in the bar wonder what is going on, the man with the slingshot is reintroduced as none other than Taco. He tells his compatriot it has been a while. The other man is reintroduced as Yato, who immediately weeps at the sight of seeing his friend. The woman herself is reintroduced as Angel, who hugs her friends after so long, noting how much they’ve changed. Yato tells her it is truly lovely to see her again, and that if he could only see Cruella in this moment his life would be complete. As Taco asks why he’s become so infatuated, Yato angrily says to not blame him, as he hasn’t seen a single woman in three years. As the three friends have lunch together, the bar owner wonders if it’s really okay that they just knocked out some marine guards.

Green Devil Pirates Sniper

Taco

Green Devil Pirates Chef

Yato

Green Devil Pirates Navigator

Angel

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, at the Sabao Dome, the large arena is packed full of people trying to watch a live comedy show. The man in question is a world-famous comedian, who in the past three years has become the eye of many’s entertainment, particularly in Paradise, from where he operates. However, recently, he had declared that this day’s show would be his final one before he retired. In his dressing room, a silhouetted figure wonders how the crowd will take his final performance, before stating that it can’t be helped, and that it’s necessary. As the man walks onstage, the crowd erupts in cheers.

The man is wearing a navy blue, high-collared Gakuran-style tunic and dark pants. An white belt is tied around his waist, where a sword is kept, and a black cape rimmed with orange feathers is draped over his shoulders. His navy blue hair is tied in a long ponytail. As people chant “King of Comedy”, Kawaki is reintroduced as he takes the stage, asking his fans if they’re ready for the funniest time of their lives. As they scream for him, he begins to tell his jokes and stories, which by many accounts are some of the funniest things they have ever heard. As Kawaki bows, the crowd shakes with laughter and applauds him.

Green Devil Pirates Jester

Kawaki

Kawaki then looks around in the crowd, and spots a certain woman. She has long, wavy, auburn hair and is wearing red and white ninja gear. She wears red fingerless gloves, and a white headband is tied around her forehead. She has a small satchel with her. Kawaki states that for his final act, he’ll need an audience member, and after deliberating for a few seconds, he selects the woman and asks her to come onto stage with him. He asks her to state her name, and the woman responds she goes by Cru. Kawaki asks Cru how many times she has been revived, and she states that she hasn’t been. Kawaki tells her that he led a past life, but was revived thanks to a sea devil’s curse. He informs her that this would be her first time, and his second, as he announces to the world that on this day, the Green Devil Pirates are making their grand return. 

As the crowd murmurs, wondering what he means, the marines guarding the arena first think this is a joke, noting that the Green Devil Pirates have not been heard from in around three years, and thus have been assumed disbanded. However, as they look at Kawaki’s flier poster, they compare it to his bounty from his previous life, finally understanding that he was a former member of the Honey Bone Pirates and that he’s quite dangerous. What’s more, they recognize the woman on the stage with him to be none other than “Demon Queen” Deville Cruella. As she is reintroduced, the Green Devil strategist asks Kawaki what his plan is, and Kawaki murmurs it appears it is time for them to go. As a marine captain tells his soldiers to line up their shot, Kawaki thanks his fans for following his journey over the past three years, but that he must make his comeback. As the crowd cheers and the marines start shooting at them, Cruella opens a void and teleports them away. The marines order a search for not only them, but any individual with matching or similar appearances to the Green Devil Pirates.

Green Devil Pirates Strategist

Deville Cruella

As the duo reappear outside, Kawaki states it is wonderful to see Cruella again, and she looks like she is beaming. Cruella greets Kawaki properly, stating that it looks like he’s been having fun over the past three years. Kawaki tells her not to worry, as his combat ability has been honed as well. Cruella says they must cut their reunion short for the moment, as they need to head over to Grove 9 in order to meet up with the others. As they run past some street vendors, an anthropomorphic blue cat eats a bowl of ramen. The cat is wearing an orange-and-white-striped shirt over a white tee and teal shorts. An orange baseball cap lies on his head backwards, and he also has on a green backpack. The cat suddenly sniffs the air, recognizing a scent. As the cat is reintroduced as Zane, he smells his friends and excitedly states that Cruella must be close, as he hasn’t smelled her perfume in so long. The cat quickly finishes his bowl and flies after his friends. 

Green Devil Pirates Doctor

Zane

On the other side of the archipelago, Shocker has just arrived. As his small dingy reaches the land, he shoulders his pack and wonders why there are so many marines around. He then remembers talking to Sengoku, who had told him that the marines would be swarming the place, looking for him. At Sengoku’s request, he had promised to not cause a commotion that could identify him as a pirate. Shocker puts on a long cloak with a hood, hoping that the marines would not be able to identify him this way. However, as he lands right at the marine base, the marines inform him that they do systematic random checks here to ensure they keep the archipelago safe. As Shocker says no problem, the pacifista quickly identifies him as “Green Hat” Shocker. Knowing that his cover is blown, Shocker quickly takes off the cloak before unleashing a burst of his Haoshoku Haki, knocking out the surrounding guards. However, as the pacifista begins firing lasers at him, he decides to run rather than fight. He states that he needs to find Grove 9, and fast.

Chapter Text

Attempting to remember where Grove 9 is located, Shocker runs through the mangroves, avoiding fights where he can and swiftly knocking marines out of his way. Using Gomu Gomu no Rocket to slingshot himself, he soars through the forest, noting that he can tell he’s getting closer because the grove number on the trees is reducing. Eventually, the Green Devil captain makes his way to Grove 9. As he lands on the ground, however, he is suddenly surrounded by a large group of marine soldiers, accompanied by a pacifista. As the marines rush him, he swats them away with Gomu Gomu no Muchi, but the pacifista takes aim at Shocker. As Shocker just notices the human weapon, glancing back, he realizes he may not have time to fight back, but before the pacifista can fire its laser, it is cut in half with a vertical slash, before promptly blowing up. 

As Shocker looks on, Adam appears through the smoke, telling his captain he’s quite late as Shocker rejoices at seeing his friend. Zane flies down and hugs Shocker, stating he’s so happy he’s okay. Cruella and Kawaki arrive from the right. From his left, Taco, Yato, and Angel arrive from the direction of the restaurant venues, exclaiming that they’re happy to see him. As they gather, the marines begin to panic, requesting more reinforcements since the members of the Green Devil Pirates have reemerged. Yato says they had heard a commotion happening outside while they were eating and knew immediately it had to be their captain. As Shocker laughs and says they’re all looking good, Cruella tells them to wait until they’re back on the ship before they relax. Taco looks around and with a shock notes that the Stormy isn’t at Grove 9, where they said they would meet up. However, Angel receives a call on her Den Den Mushi, and a familiar voice tells that there was a bit of a mix up, but that they should hurry to Grove 1.

As the crew runs toward the grove, the marines follow them in hot pursuit. As they arrive at Grove 1, they see the sight of their large ship, the Stormy White, docked in front of them, though it seems so different, with many enhancements, that it may as well be a new ship. Its colors are now mostly blue and brown, and the figurehead was changed from the entire bust of the sea god to just a large closeup of his face, a golden crown on his head. The crow’s nest has been made into a large, closed observation deck. As the man on the ship’s deck tells them to move it, he fires the Kaiou Cannon from the figurehead’s eyes, creating an explosion that cuts off the marines. As the crew look up, they see a huge, broad-chested, modified pacifista. Wearing a black sweater with a green frog and anchor on it, the pacifista sports shoulder pads, a goatee, and a pair of sunglasses. His flowing, black hair is somewhat pulled into a man bun, though most of his hair continues to fall. As he is reintroduced as none other than Jordan, the Green Devil shipwright tells them he had to move the location because the marines were firing at the ship, and that he apologizes for the wait, but that the Super Stormy is ready for departure. 

Green Devil Pirates Shipwright

Jordan

As the others smile and board the ship, the marines surge, attempting to stop them from leaving. Shocker merely turns to them and jumps up, inflating his leg before using Gomu Gomu no Gigant Ono. His attacks crashes into the group, knocking them down easily, and to the pleasant surprise of his crewmates, Shocker does not turn into his chibi self afterwards. As Taco notes this, Shocker says he overcame that side effect with his training. As more marines arrive from other parts of Sabaody, suddenly a barrage of powerful Haki-coated bullets stop them. Shocker sees the former Red Hair Pirates fighting back against the marines, with Yasopp and Lucky Roux urging them to go on. As Shocker is about to get on the Stormy, he turns and shouts his thanks to Benn Beckman for his advice on training, and that he’s ready to become the third pirate king now. 

With that done, the Stormy White begins to leave Sabaody. Shocker tells his friends he believes that the new version of them will be able to take on anything that comes their way, and that it’s time to resume their adventure. As Jordan deploys the ship’s coating, the crew head below the sea to Fish-Man Island.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Fish-Man Island Arc

The Super Stormy White had been coated by Silvers Rayleigh, so Jordan activates the coating mechanism via a lever and the ship sinks below the sea. Cruella tells them that Fish-Man Island is 10,000 meters below sea level, but that as long as they stay near the walls of the Red Line they should be able to find it. Shocker, Zane, and Taco marvel at the sea around them, which is sparkling blue and full of weird and interesting fish, while Angel tells them not to fall over the side as it would be tragic to drown now after training for so long. Seeing some large roots, Taco wonders if those are the roots from the trees at Sabaody, and Cruella confirms, stating that the roots of the Yarukiman Mangrove stretch down to the ocean floor. Yato heads into the kitchen, claiming he had missed it and it is so different from the ship of the Whitebeard Pirates. Adam tells Kawaki he had met and trained with Zoro, and both Kawaki and Shocker jump, with Kawaki sad that they weren’t able to see him. Shocker simply laughs and states he is sure Adam is much stronger now because of it. Jordan says it is GRRRREAAAT to be back on the ship again, while Cruella smiles and agrees. 

Shocker, curious as ever, wonders what the others did for their training, so they spent two hours just giving summaries of their personal adventures over the last three years. Particularly, the group is interested in how Yato, Jordan, and Kawaki had received their new epithets. While their bounties had not increased, certain events warranted a change in their titles. Yato explained that when the marines recognized him to be a part of the Whitebeard Pirates, they changed his epithet to “Calamity God”, as his wanted poster had stated they were sure he would create disastrous events if he was a member of that particular crew. As Adam asks him if he has an unfair advantage having been in the New World already, Yato tells him he only trained on Sphinx and occasionally sailed around, though never landing on other islands, and that he closed his eyes the whole time Marco was flying him back. 

Jordan informs them that he had to pretend to be a brainless pacifista for three years, but that it felt so satisfying busting out of the marine base about a month ago. He stole one of their ships and used it to head out, declaring himself as Jordan of the Green Devil Pirates. That event changed his name from “Rogue Pacifista” to “Bionic Pirate”. Meanwhile, on Kawaki’s end, he tells them that he became a comedian and worked a lot on that aspect over the past three years. He informs them that he simply abandoned his former epithet of “Jester” in favor of what people now call him, the “King of Comedy”. 

Shocker is about to tell his friends how much he learned from Sengoku when the ship lurches. A giant, multi-colored rock had crashed into them, though they are not sure why. Getting behind the wheel, Jordan tells them that this area is a new part of the sea called the Coral Belt. He had learned from Rayleigh how colorful rocks are suspended at a certain level of the sea and constantly rapidly crash into each other. As the ship is hit again, he tells his friends to hold on. The Stormy continues to take hit after hit, with the crew unable to leave the coating due to their devil fruits and/or the pressure of the sea. As Jordan tries to steer them away from a particularly large rock, the boulder hits the prow and bends it out of shape. After what seems like hours, the crew penetrate a large bubble and crash onto a sandy beach, all members passing out.

Chapter Text

When Shocker comes to, the captain pants and groggily asks his crewmates if they are okay. Everyone is shaken and jarred, but not physically hurt. Jordan, looking at the ship, exclaims, stating that the prow is broken. Angel asks if he would be able to fix it, and while he confirms that he can, he states he knows repairs will take a while, especially considering he doesn’t know the area and it will be hard to find the materials necessary. Shocker and Zane jump up happily, excitedly interpreting their prolonged stay as a vacation. Yato calls over to Shocker and tells him to pay attention, as someone is coming their way. As Shocker looks behind him, he sees a large figure walking toward the group.

Soon enough, a tall, muscular Fish-Man is standing over him. The man has blue skin and slicked-back, spiky, midnight-blue hair. He is shirtless, exposing his abs and muscular arms, and wears black pants and sandals. He has fighting tape around both his forearms, and wears a black coat with fur linings draped over his shoulders. As he tells the crew his name, he is introduced as Hernan Blue, a cow shark Fish-Man. He calmly demands to know who they are, as they seemed to have arrived illegally. Shocker tells him they were just trying to get to Fish-Man Island on their way to the New World. Hernan surmises that they must be pirates then, glancing at their ship. The Fish-Man asks if they received clearance form the tollgate, to which Yato responds they didn’t, since they crash-landed there. Hernan informs them that as a royal guard of the Ryugu Kingdom, one of the Ammo Knights, he is supposed to take them to the king for a hearing. 

Ammo Knights (Fish-Man Island Royal Guard Squad)

Hernan Blue

Just then, another pirate crew, numbering about 20, rises from the sand where they were hidden and begin crowding the Stormy. The crew’s captain tells them they’ve been waiting to prey on the next crew who arrived at the island for days, and with that they rush toward the group. Hernan, only seeming to notice them a bit late, glances back just as the captain aims a bullet at the Fish-Man’s back. Before he can shoot, Shocker steps in front of Hernan and knocks the entire crew out with a burst of his Haoshoku Haki. As the rest of Shocker’s crew marvel at his newfound power, Hernan says to himself that this young man is quite powerful if he can freely use Haoshoku like that. At that moment, Hernan senses a large presence churning the water outside with his Kenbunshoku. He informs the crew to remain on guard, as something large is coming, with Zane and Angel terrified that it must be a leviathan monster. Suddenly, a large sea king bursts through the protective bubble, aiming to attack them. The crew begins to panic, but Hernan tells them not to worry, demonstrating his proficiency in Fish-Man Karate by using Hyakumaigawara Seiken to forcefully blast it back into the sea.

Move Index

Chapter Text

As the large sea king swims away, the Green Devils are pleasantly surprised. Shocker smiles and says he’s super strong, but Adam, cautious as ever, states that he seems a bit too strong. When Angel asks what he means, Yato says he’s right, since a “simple guard” wouldn’t have so much strength, and while he’s not sure of their training regiment, he doubts they would be as well-versed in a particular style of fighting as Hernan seems to be. Hernan blushes and smiles, thanking them for the praise, while Yato, comically angry, tells him to tell them the truth about himself. Hernan admits that he is actually the commander of the Ammo Knights. Adam notes that it is a bit suspicious, but Hernan explains that he had trained for years to hone his Busoshoku and Kenbunshoku Haki. He continues, stating that regular protocol demands he take them with him to the king’s palace. That being said, he wishes to talk to the crew first. Telling them to follow him, Hernan takes them to his house.

As they reach Hernan’s small house, they see it is at the very edge of Fish-Man Island, away from the main parts of the kingdom. Hernan tells Jordan he will be sure to see about their broken prow later, stating he is Fish-Man Island’s most talented and skillful shipwright, having been trained by an old family friend, Den. Jordan thanks him, saying he wouldn’t have known where to get the materials from alone. Shocker asks him why his house is so far away from everyone else, but Hernan simply waves his hand and laughs it off, stating he is simply shy. Entering the house, Hernan offers to make them special Bubble Tea, which Shocker, Taco, and Zane are excited to try. As he prepares their beverages, Angel says she doubts Hernan would bring a whole crew of pirates to his house if there wasn’t a proper reason. Becoming serious, the Fish-Man tells them that in fact, he seriously does need help, as the entirety of the Ryugu Kingdom could descend into chaos very soon.

The Green Devils are confused to hear this, wondering what’s going on. However, Hernan tells them that if they are to understand, he would have to start from the beginning: the story of his life. As his flashback begins, he shocks them with the news that he is the son of the famous Fish-Man pirate Jinbe, the helmsman of the current pirate king. Hearing his name, Shocker’s eyes widen. He tells them he was born 34 years ago, when Jinbe was only 20 years old, much before he ever met Luffy. Hernan’s mother was a sand shark Fish-Woman. At the time, Jinbe was preparing to voyage with Fisher Tiger. However, he feared that his family would be hunted or affected by his being a pirate, so Jinbe constructed the house on the outskirts of the Ryugu Kingdom, hiding his lover and Hernan from the public eye for their protection. In secret, Hernan had begun practicing his father’s Fish-Man Karate techniques 20 years ago, and he had never stopped since, training every day to hone his power. 

The Future "Knight of the Sea"

Jinbe (Age 20)

However, ever since Fish-Man Island was claimed by Luffy and the Straw Hats as one of their territories 8 years ago, and since King Neptune was a compassionate man, Jinbe conversed with the king about granting his family free passage into the city, which the king happily agreed to. Hernan applied to and joined the Ammo Knights, rising rapidly through the ranks faster than anyone before him had done, and reaching the level of army general in just a year. Then in the past few years, King Neptune retired from the crown and relinquished power to his eldest son, now King Fukaboshi, with whom Hernan has a close personal friendship. 

Tragically, however, around 7 years ago, Hernan’s mother passed away due to an illness she contracted while Jinbe was away. Hernan and Jinbe were the only two to attend her funeral, crying over her grave as Hernan promised to become a man she could be proud of. A little while after that, Jinbe told his son he would be rejoining the Straw Hat Pirates for another voyage, and as such was not sure when they would next meet. Hernan simply told his father that they’ll meet again when he becomes worthy of taking his title of Fish-Man Karate Master from him, with Jinbe simply laughing, stating his son is amazing.

Chapter Text

Continuing his story, Hernan explains that while many were happy with Fukaboshi’s rule, some were not happy about the change in power, deeming Fukaboshi to be too weak-willed. About a year ago, a cult calling themselves the Fish Raiders began circulating the backwaters of the Fish-Man District. Their intended goal is to select their own leader and put him in charge of Fish-Man Island, planning on mounting a coup d’etat. Hernan reveals himself to be part of the cult, shocking the pirates, but he quickly explains that he had gained their confidence to reach the position of High Order, effectively making them one of their executives. He tells them he plans on taking them down from the inside, but the situation has become more complicated. Just yesterday, the cult stormed the castle at a time when defenses were low and kidnapped the royal family, save for Fukaboshi himself, ransoming them for Fukaboshi’s seat. Hernan tells them that he plans on telling Fukaboshi everything later that day, and that he will attempt to destroy the cult once and for all.

As his story concludes, Kawaki says that what’s happening is awful, and Yato surmises that’s what he wants their help with. Hernan, nodding, formally bows his head and asks the Green Devils if they can help him take down the Fish Raiders. He admits he does not truly know why he is asking for their help, but feels like he would direly need it, as he can tell they are not bad people. The rest of the crew ponder this, wondering what they should do. However, Shocker simply smiles and says they will help him because he had met Jinbe three years ago when the Straw Hats pushed him towards his journey. He states that if it weren’t for Hernan’s dad and his friends, he wouldn’t have become a pirate, and so he feels it would only be fair to help Hernan now. Hernan, shocked at Shocker’s fortitude, thinks to himself that this is the kind of man people will want to follow. He tells the crew to eat lunch while they can, as the rest of the day will be quite eventful.

After they have eaten, Hernan leads the crew outside, where he summons a giant cow shark. As Taco wonders if they’ll get eaten if the shark is hungry, Hernan tells him that he can commune with sea creatures, but he has a close connection to cow sharks due to his fish side coming from them. Sitting on the creature’s back, the 10 of them ride it all the way to Ryugu’s royal palace. Once inside, many guards look at them bizarrely, but thanks to Hernan being with them, they are admitted into the throne room. As King Fukaboshi is introduced, he looks tired and weary. However, seeing Hernan, his eyes light up, and he exclaims that he is happy to see the general of his guard before inquiring who his friends are. Hernan explains the truth to the king, telling him that he knows where the royal family is being held, as he himself is a member of the Fish Raiders.

King of the Ryugu Kingdom

First Son of the Royal Neptune Family

Fukaboshi

However, before he can continue, Hernan is cut off by Fukaboshi’s rage. The king furiously demands to know how the person he put so much trust in is really his enemy. He screams that his enemies are calling for his own head for the safety of his family, and demands to know if Hernan knew the whole time. Grabbing his massive trident, he swings at Hernan. The cow shark Fish-Man prepares to take the blow, but Shocker quickly jumps into the air and blocks the attack, kicking the trident away. The king’s aides scold Shocker, telling him that a human has no say in Fish-Men affairs and that they’ll throw him in prison, but Shocker simply tells them to shut up, shocking everyone else, including his crew. He tells them that Hernan has a good reason, so they should just shut up and let him finish. Hernan explains to Fukaboshi that he had infiltrated the organization in order to take them down from the inside. The king of Fish-Men calms down, apologizing for his earlier attack. He demands that the royal guard be summoned so that the Ammo Knights can storm their hideout, but Hernan tells him that will not be necessary, as he has a plan.

Chapter Text

That evening, Hernan enters a huge, black, fortress-like building on the outskirts of the city. The recently-made hideout is on the fringe between the outskirts of the Ryugu Kingdom and the Fish-Man District, so none at the palace knows of its existence. Large battlement towers surround the hideout, where fish-man sentries keep watch. As he walks inside, the Fish-Men guards exclaim that Boss Hernan is back, and that it looks like he has prey with him this time. He heads into the main hall, pushing Angel in front of him while she is handcuffed. Inside the main hall is a long table filled with food. Sitting at the table are the members of the Fish Raiders’ executives, the High Order.

A small Fish-Man wearing red, blue, and white doll clothes is introduced as Abel, a clownfish Fish-Man. He has a pale face, blue hair, a red nose, and a large red cap. He smiles widely when he sees Angel tied up. Next to him is a woman with dark skin and long white hair wearing a blue combat dress and silver shoulder pads, as well as a cape. She is introduced as Brina, a swordfish Fish-Woman, and she scowls, looking irritated. The man next to her is introduced as Durel, an angelfish Fish-Man. He has slicked, blond hair and wears knight’s armor. On the other side of the table, a behemoth of a man wearing black armor from head to toe sits and says nothing. He is introduced as Gyro, a pufferfish Fish-Man whose spikes protrude from holes in his armor. The woman next to him is introduced as Cofy, a sand shark Fish-Woman with short, beige hair and a constant starry gleam in her eyes. To her other side is an old man with the kanji for MASTER written on his bald forehead. Feebos is introduced as a piranha Fish-man, and wears a kimono. In a raised chair at the head of the table, the cult’s leader, Zoldeo, is introduced, a regular-sized figure with both an iron staff and iron mask covering his face. 

Fish Raiders High Order

Clownfish Fish-Man

Abel

Fish Raiders High Order

Swordfish Fish-Woman

Brina

Fish Raiders High Order

Angelfish Fish-Man

Durel

Fish Raiders High Order

Pufferfish Fish-Man

Gyro

Fish Raiders High Order

Sandshark Fish-Woman

Cofy

Fish Raiders High Order

Piranha Fish-Man

Feebos

Fish Raiders Leader

Zoldeo

Brina scolds Hernan, asking him what took so long to get there, as they were all expecting him for their weekly meeting. Hernan apologizes, stating he had a run in with an unpleasant group of pirates. Zoldeo inquires as to why he brought the girl he captured, and Hernan informs them he obliterated the others, but he could not bring himself to kill her, and thinks she can be made a slave instead. Cofy smiles and says Hernan is such a softie, while Durel, with hearts in his eyes, proclaims Angel will become his. Hernan asks Feebos for the key to the dungeons, and the old fish-man obliges, but only after berating Hernan for not calling him Master Feebos, though Hernan tells him he isn’t his master. Hernan opens the door to the dungeons, and forces Angel downstairs.  

The duo stop in a hallway filled with cells. After making sure the coast is clear, he quickly breaks Angel’s handcuffs, telling her they need to hurry. As Angel calls the crew, she tells them they’re in the dungeons and to come find them quickly. In a few moments Kawaki phases through the wall, stating he found them, and a portal opens up near them from which Cruella and Taco walk out. Angel comments that Hernan made the right call in having her be a prisoner, as now Hernan has an excuse to be down there. The Fish-Man agrees, though states that he doesn’t want to stay too long, lest he raise suspicion, and suggests they find the royal family as quickly as possible. As the group looks through the cells, the largest one houses the former king, Lord Neptune, and his daughter, princess Shirahoshi. In another cell, Taco finds the other princes, Ryuboshi and Manboshi, who look quite beaten. Seeing Hernan, Neptune wonders what he’s doing here, but Hernan tells them not to worry, as they’re going to help them escape.

Former King of the Ryugu Kingdom (Retired)

Neptune

Princess of the Ryugu Kingdom

Only Daughter of the Neptune Royal Family 

The Ancient Weapon Poseidon

Shirahoshi

Prince of the Ryugu Kingdom

Second Son of the Neptune Royal Family 

Ryuboshi

Prince of the Ryugu Kingdom

Third Son of the Neptune Royal Family 

Manboshi

Shirahoshi asks what Hernan means, and Hernan flashes back to earlier that day, when he explained his plan to those in Fukaboshi’s throne room. Hernan told them for this to work, he needs the four sneakiest of the Green Devil crew to come with him. Shocker shouted that he’ll go, as he can be quiet, but Adam stated that there’s no way he won’t cause problems. Yato said Adam’s one to talk, and Jordan yelled at the chef, stating the pot is calling the kettle black. As the four bickered loudly, Hernan quickly decided to take Angel, Kawaki, Cruella, and Taco. He told them they’ll split into two teams. The latter four would accompany Hernan to the Fish Raiders’ hideout and help liberate the royal family. Meanwhile, the former four and Zane would need to cause a distraction long enough for the royal family to get out. Hernan told them to attack the base with a few preemptive strikes, then lure them to Gyoncorde Plaza, where they can all rendezvous to defeat them. Shocker had told him no problem, and that they wouldn’t miss their chance. Back in the present, Hernan wonders what is taking so long, as he does not want the others to become suspicious of him. Luckily, just then, the entire base rumbles above. Angel smirks and says that means Shocker and the others are here.

Chapter Text

In the main hall above, Brina demands to know what is going on. A fish-man guard comes into the room nervously, informing the High Order that pirates have busted through the front door and are currently destroying the foundational walls. Sure enough, outside, Adam slashes down one of the huge battlement towers easily, while Yato knocks down another with a single kick. Zane enters his Muscle Boost and begins punching away some of the advancing fish-men, while Jordan covers his friends with Danyaku Arm . Shocker jumps into the air and inflates both fists, before busting down the giant doors using Gomu Gomu no Grizzly Magnum . As he lands, he tells his friends he knew they weren’t late for their distraction by that much. Yato shouts at him, stating the only reason they are late at all is because Shocker wouldn’t stop stuffing his face with sea king meat from the palace. Shocker tells them it doesn't matter now, since they are here, and that they have to lead them to Gyoncorde Plaza.

Down in the dungeons, Hernan gives Angel the key to their cells, and informs the crew they will have to complete the rescue without him, as he needs to go upstairs to mobilize the Fish Raiders. As he leaves, Angel quickly unlocks the cells, freeing the royal family. Taco asks how they plan on getting them out. Kawaki says that when someone holds onto him when he is phasing, they can phase as well, and that he can take Princess Shirahoshi, though the princess recoils, scared. Cruella smiles and reassures her that though Kawaki is quite creepy, he is definitely a friend who means well, with Kawaki exasperatedly stating Cruella could have omitted the first part. As they pass through the wall, the rest of them head out using Cruella’s void. As they appear near the back of the hideout, Angel tells them they will probably have to continue to the castle on foot and secure the royal family before returning. However, Neptune tells them he has an idea.

Meanwhile, in the main hall, Hernan returns and frantically tells the rest of the High Order that these pirates are quite powerful if they  managed to survive him. Feebos asks how it is possible that they survived, if Hernan personally dealt with them, but Hernan explains that he sank their ship while they were trying to enter Fish-Man Island, though he could have never predicted they would still live. Zoldeo begins to become suspicious, asking why they should mobilize all their forces, but Hernan tells him that the man outside is Malvolio D. Shocker, a pirate worth 300,000,000, and that any threat they may pose could put their plan at risk. Zoldeo agrees, and orders the High Order to follow their troops out of the base, in pursuit of the Green Devils.

Eventually, both groups arrive at Gyoncorde Plaza. As the High Order steps forward, Zoldeo calls out to Shocker, ordering him to stand down. Shocker grins and says there is no way that’s happening. He informs the Fish Raiders that they’re here to defeat them in order to help a friend. Zoldeo is confused, but then Abel notes with shock that Hernan has disappeared. Next to the pirates, a void opens up. Hernan walks through it, along with Cruella’s group. Adam asks if the royal family is safe, and Cruella informs them that Shirahoshi’s pet shark Megalo and the king’s whale Hotei had arrived and taken them back to the palace. Brina is beside herself with fury at Hernan’s betrayal, stating that he is a disgrace to fish-men. However, Hernan simply tells them that this is not a betrayal, as he was never truly one of them in the first place. Zoldeo states that it matters not, as they have around 2,000 fish-men troops, as well as the High Order, and that there is no way an entire human army could hope to match the strength they possess, much less only 9 of them and Hernan. Zoldeo orders the Fish Raiders to destroy them, telling them he is heading back to the hideout to commence their plans. As Zane fumes, stating he is a cat, Shocker smirks and says it’s time to fight.

Move Index

Chapter Text

The Fish Raiders begin their attack, their members rushing the small group. Hernan tells Shocker someone has to catch up to Zoldeo before he unleashes his plan, and Shocker volunteers himself, stating that it won’t be a problem for him. Hernan says he’ll help get rid of the Raiders in Shocker’s way. Combining Fish-Man Karate and Fish-Man Jujutsu, Hernan uses Gyojin Karate-Jujutsu Combo: Samehada Attoteki Jutsu , a gargantuan hand made of water thrusting itself into the crowd, clearing the path. As fish-men grunts fly back and out of the way, Hernan senses that around 500 Raiders were taken down in that single attack, shocking the others with his strength. Shocker notices him panting and asks if he’s alright. Hernan responds that he’s a bit tired, as that was his strongest attack, but that he can still fight, though he may be slower. Shocker tells Hernan to trust his crew, since his friends are strong, and Adam agrees, stating they’ll take it from there. With a clear road ahead, Shocker shouts alright before chasing after Zoldeo, leaving the rest of the crew to fight.

As some of the Raiders converge on Kawaki, the jester simply tells them a joke regarding falling anvils. As the Raiders are confused, anvils suddenly rain down on them, smashing them into the ground. Kawaki explains his Jinsei no Jodan technique, an attack where he can create the circumstances of certain jokes and apply them to real life. He then uses Stand-Up Illusion to make the Raiders laugh and put them under an illusion that they are at one of his comedy shows, only for them to be sliced down using Ittoryu: Shiratori Dive . Jordan, turning his wrist and revealing a turret that pops out of his arm, shoots bullets into the crowd using Danyaku Arm , before showing off his Magma Ball , a sphere of magma he shoots from his mouth blasting into the Raiders. He quickly flashes back to his time on an active volcano, before stating that that trip helped him in multiple ways. As some Raiders move to attack Cruella, the Demon Queen simply opens a void below them and sends them bowling into their comrades. More enemies slash at her, but she easily dodges thanks to her Void: Ugoki , a technique used to disappear into a portal and reemerge somewhere else. Zane states that he acquired a new transformation thanks to his training, showing off his Acrobat Boost , a taller, slender form emphasizing acrobatics and agility. Zane skillfully takes down Raiders advancing on him, jumping off their backs and heads to attack the others.

Some of the Raiders attempt to attack Yato from both sides. The chef simply kicks into the air, showing his newfound mastery of Geppou . While in the air, he attacks the Raiders with Aire Shot , an attack where he kicks the air so hard it compresses into projectiles, raining down on his opponents. Taco brings out his new, huge slingshot, which he dubs Aokyofu. He then calls into his backpack, telling Nado to come out. As a bomb-like slug comes out the back, Taco fits it into the sling, before using Slug Shot: Grenuker , with Nado transforming into his huge morph form before exploding. As more Raiders advance, Taco decides he needs to set up a minefield, and calls Rookie from his pack. A slug with blue orbs on its back pops out. Taco uses Slug Shot: Cyclomander , with Rookie throwing his orbs all around the battlefield before transforming back into his small form to land on Taco’s shoulder. When the enemies advance on the mines, Rookie detonates the orbs, causing large explosions that blast them back. Meanwhile, Angel is much too fast for them to keep up with, using her Soru to easily outpace them while stabbing them with painful Shigans . Angel then reveals that she can use the Rokuogan with relative ease now without getting tired, blasting through the enemy forces. Adam calmly takes out two of his swords, the Nidai Kitestu and the Kuro Kusanagi, and sets them on fire, revealing his mastery over the Hinoken . He uses Nitoryu: Moeru no Taka Nami , quickly followed up by Nitoryu Iai: Moeru no Rashoman , slicing and burning the Fish Raiders as Adam states that things are too easy. 

As Zoldeo continues to run, he sees in the distance the Fish Raider hideout. However, as he hears running behind him, he turns back and is shocked to see Shocker chasing him. Leading him onto a different path, Zoldeo suddenly begins hopping across the land. Shocker, unsure of what is happening, continues following him, but is then trapped by Sea Anemonabbers, grabbing his legs and holding him in place. Zoldeo laughs and explains that Sea Anemonabbers usually don’t grow here, but he planted them on purpose in case the royal army ever caught wind of his actions. As Shocker irritatedly tells him to wait, Zoldeo asks him if he’s an idiot. Zoldeo continues to dash toward the hideout, with Shocker hot in pursuit after getting himself free.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Back at the plaza, a baffled Brina exclaims that of all their forces, a measly 500 remain apart from the HIgh Order. Calling to the others, she informs them that they must take action and change the tide of the battle, with the others agreeing. As Kawaki continues to slash down opponents, Cofy rushes through the sand and emerges next to him, biting him painfully on the arm with Oowanizame Rush . As Master Feebos walks toward Jordan, the cyborg asks if he’s meant to be intimidated by some old guy. However, Feebos demonstrates his Fish-Man Karate mastery, using Gyojin Karate: Yonsenmaigawara Mawashigeri , kicking Jordan away painfully. As Yato lands back on the ground, Durel jumps in his way, brandishing his sword. He informs the Green Devil chef that he’ll be taking the Green Devil girls as his prisoners because they are beautiful like him. Yato irritatedly states that he would never allow that to happen.

As Gyro towers over the small Zane, the cat wonders why he isn’t saying anything. Gyro shoots his spines at Zane, a move dubbed Fugu Spikes , though he merely grunts, with Abel shouting out the attack name, much to the irritation of Zane and Taco. However, Abel uses a technique called Anemone Kakushi , sprouting sea anemones for him to hide in. Taco attempts to pinpoint his location to attack, but notes how hard it is to follow his movements. Facing Adam, Brina shows off her own version of Nitoryu, wielding her sword in her hands as she elongates her swordfish nose to be the second one. She clashes with Adam, who states she has a weird ability, but nothing he should not be able to handle. Calling back to Cruella and Angel, he asks them if they would mind cleaning up the mess, referring to the rest of the riff raff. Cruella responds that it would be their pleasure, while Angel challenges her to a duel of who can defeat more. 

Arriving at the hideout, Zoldeo bursts into a secret chamber only he has access to, heading down a long, spiraling staircase. Shocker quickly follows him, jumping over the railing and straight down. As Shocker enters a dank, dimly lit room, he sees a massive, satellite-like device, with complicated machinery and wires all around it. Shocker wonders what it is, and Zoldeo says that since he will be dealt with, he can tell him his plan. Zoldeo reveals that the device is one that emits a high-pitched frequency agonizing to Fish-Men and Merfolk, leaving them writhing in pain upon activation. He states that with this device, none of them will be able to oppose him, and he will become the king of Fish-Man Island. Shocker asks him if he’s stupid, since his device would hurt him as he’s a Fish-Man as well. Zoldeo merely laughs and removes his mask, revealing that he is in fact a human, shocking the Green Devil captain.

Zoldeo explains that none of the Fish-Men know his true identity, as he kept it a secret in order to work with them to become king. Shocker gets mad, asking him how he could dare betray people he had worked alongside as friends. Zoldeo laughs and responds that he does not see these creatures as friends, but merely tools he had been using to help him accomplish his own goals. As Zoldeo laments the pointlessness of friendship, Shocker states that he has heard enough, coating his arms with Busoshoku Haki. Activating Gear Second by using his arm as a pump, he zips right in front of Zoldeo and stretches his arm back. As he retracts for the punch, his arm catches on fire, and Shocker uses Gomu Gomu no Red Hawk , slamming into Zoldeo and burning his armor, as the betrayer yells in pain.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Back at the plaza, the Green Devil PIrates continue fighting, easily keeping up with their respective opponents. As Angel and Cruella fight away the grunts, Feebos glances over before telling Jordan that those two women will fall, as they are clearly powerless. Jordan irritatedly asks him if he is saying that on account of them being women, and Feebos states that it is only natural, as female humans are the weakest race in the seas. Jordan quickly punches him in the face, telling him that if he truly thinks that way, then he’s blind. Kawaki, overhearing the conversation while keeping Cofy at bay, states solemnly that there is no such thing as gender in piracy, flashing back to the Big Mom Pirates’ attack on his former crew. 

As Angel uses a Rankyaku to slash away some of the Fish-Men, more arrive in front of her. She flashes back to her training with Altar in the snow-capped mountains of Yuki Peaks. Altar had told her that she can use the cold to her advantage, and that her new fighting style will be sure to stop enemies in their tracks. In the present. Angel shows off her Cold Fu, a fighting style she developed by manually dropping her body temperature to below 0 in order to create a freezing effect on her strikes. She uses Cold Fu: Ice Strike , a punch that plows through the Fish-Men, with the cult stating that it feels as though they are being beaten with ice itself. She then combines Cold Fu and Rokushiki, using Rankyaku before quickly freezing it and forming an icicle blade, an attack called Cold Fu: Kotta Rankyaku Yaiba . 

Meanwhile, Cruella looks around her at the Raiders advancing on her. She thinks to herself, wondering if now is the best time to use “it”, before flashing back to her time with the Revolutionary Army. The day before she left to return to Sabaody and meet up with her friends, Dragon had taken her to the army’s weapons vault. Dragon told her that in the past three years, she proved to him that she can be trusted with the secrets and power of the army. As a parting gift, Dragon allowed her to take a number of powerful bombs, capable of generating large explosions, all designed by Lindbergh, the army’s head inventor, and Dr. Vegapunk himself. As Cruella thanked him, he smiled and told her how much Cruella reminded him of Nico Robin. In the present. Cruella opens up a void, stating that she has access to her expanded storage space now, and uses Void: Kakumei Bakuhatsu , dropping one of the bombs onto the remaining Fish Raiders. 

As the explosion rocks the battlefield, Cruella smiles, stating that all the fodder pirates have successfully been taken care of. As Angel asks her how many she beat and Cruella admits she did not keep track, Jordan smirks and tells Feebos that that was the power of the Green Devils.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Gyro continues to attack Zane, with the cat running around, dodging all the dangerous quills. As a large quill lands next to Zane, he notes that they are tipped in poison, and that anyone punctured by one will feel its effects. Resolving himself, Zane crunches a rumble ball, growing into his giant, terrifying Bakeneko Boost form. Jordan, remembering the chaos the form had caused back at Sacramento Court, alarmedly tells Zane there’s no reason to freak out, since the guys they are fighting are not that much of a threat. However, Zane shocks him by talking, telling the cyborg that it’s okay because he had trained to control this form during his time on Kemonigen Island. Flashing back to his training, Zane had learned from the animals that primal urges may try to force themself upon him, but that he needs to remember who he is fighting for in order to gain mastery over the form. In the present, Zane mentions that he has a hard time limit, transforming back after 5 minutes. 

At Yato’s fight a bit further away, the chef glances over and sees Zane transformed. He flashes back to the rampaging monster he had witnessed during their battle with the government. Whilst easily blocking a sword strike from Durel, Yato calls over to Adam, telling the swordsman they need to be ready to step in, in case Zane loses control again. Adam, easily fending off Brina, tells Yato they shouldn’t bother, and that they should have faith in their crewmate’s abilities. Yato smirks and agrees. Gyro shoots his Fugu Spikes at Zane, but his massive body and thick fur cause the quills to bounce away harmlessly. As Gyro begins to sweat, Zane uses Gigant Pounce , swiping at Gyro with a paw so powerful the Fish-Man is sent flying into the sky, leaving a twinkle as he is ejected. Yato, proud of his friend, states that Zane is the crew’s own monster.

Meanwhile, Taco continues to have trouble with Abel due to his ability of hiding in the sea anemones he creates. Taco decides to blow them away, calling for his flying slug Soar and his plant slug Tangler. He uses Slug Shot: Levitrox to send Soar flying upward, the large slug flapping its wings and creating powerful gales that blow the anemones away. Taco then shoots Slug Shot: Floravine into the ground. As Tangler morphs, he uses his huge vines and snatches Abel, lifting him up for a clear shot. Looking towards the sniper, Adam asks Yato if they should worry about Taco, as he was never the physically strongest out of all of them. However, Yato says that likewise, they need to believe Taco can do it because he is a monster in his own way.

Flashing back to his time on the Caterra Archipelago, he and Tridia had been exploring a cavern, trying to find any rare slugs that had been rumored to be lurking. As Taco moved a plant out of his way, the duo chanced upon a Pyroforge slug in a clearing, with Tridia noting it to be a powerful fire-based slug, and the rarest of all slugs they know of. Taco made it his goal to befriend the slug, which took a few days. After giving it loads of food, he noted it burped a lot, and Taco decided to name him Burpy. In the present, Taco calls on Burpy and uses Slug Shot: Pyroforge , sending the slug straight at Abel. Burpy morphs and torches Abel, burning him badly and knocking the Fish-Man out. As Taco and Zane stand triumphantly above their defeated opponents, Adam and Yato say well done to their monsters.

Move Index

Chapter Text

At Jordan’s fight, Master Feebos keeps darting around the cyborg, biting him all around his body. Jordan, getting irritated, tells Feebos to hold still, and Feebos simply laughs, stating that he’s quite hungry and that Jordan will make a decent meal. Jordan times a punch properly, saying he’s no one’s food, before pressing a button on his right arm. As the button flashes, he smirks and says that the package is coming. Feebos, not knowing what he means, moves to attack, but then a giant, metallic robot with the head of a frog lands right behind Jordan. As the head opens up to reveal a cockpit, Jordan jumps inside, stating that it is his very own battle armor, the Great Buster: Kermit Shireikan .

Jordan states it had taken a short while to make, flashing back to about a month ago. After he had escaped from Naval Basis and stolen a marine ship, he had stopped on an island with an active volcano to refuel. As the lava gushed down the side of the mountain, Jordan had the ingenious idea of using the lava to melt down the metal parts of the ship, allowing him to rework them and forge new parts. Eventually, after a few days, Jordan created the Great Buster, and said with confidence that he’s sure this will be a welcome addition to the crew. Back in the present, Feebos tries to bite one of the arms, but the giant robot takes no damage, instead breaking the old Fish-Man’s teeth due to the reinforced steel. Jordan tells Feebos it’s time to fly, and uses Great Buster: Saidai Impact , a large-scale version of his Dai Impact , defeating Feebos decisively. 

Meanwhile, Kawaki attempts to use Jinsei no Jodan on Cofy, but the sand shark Fish-Woman buries herself under the sand, preventing her from hearing the jokes. Kawaki states that it is rude to not ignore someone’s jokes, but Cofy simply giggles and states that she’s going to have fun, before using Oowanizame Rush , popping out of the sand to attack him quickly. As Kawaki starts to bleed slightly, Cody continues ducking under the sand, avoiding his sword strikes. As she pops out of the sand and kicks him back, Kawaki realizes that the joke part of his skillset will clearly not be of any help here. Flashing back to his time on his comedy tour, Kawaki remembers a point near the beginning where, after his first few successes, he entered a sort of a slump, only reusing jokes rather than finding new ones. He decided to try what he could to give his jokes more meaning. At that point, he learned that he could infuse his voice with the spectral power of his Yurei Yurei no Mi, giving his jokes an almost hypnotic-like ability. 

However, Kawaki stated he also wanted to be able to fight as well. Thus, with the help of the Zipper-Mouth tribesmen, he trained to be capable of infusing his sword with the same energy, allowing him to cut things normally not tangible. In the present, Kawaki imbues his sword with a green, ghostly aura, dubbing it the Spectral Sword, the sword that allows him to “cut the uncuttable”. As he swings the sword once, the sand in front of him is launched away, revealing Cofy. As the woman is confused on how she was found, Kawaki states that this is the punchline, before using Spectral Sword: Sorakiri to cut the air in front of her, creating a shockwave-like effect. The force is enough to knock back Cofy, defeating her easily.

Move Index

Chapter Text

At Yato’s fight, the chef is progressively irritated by Durel’s gimmicks. As he moves to fight him, Durel distracts Yato with a flashing smile, blinding him, before punching him square in the jaw, an attack he calls Flash Knight. Yato simply stands up, telling the Fish-Man that a punch that weak can’t do any damage to him. Durel takes out his sword and charges Yato, trying to hack the chef to pieces, but Yato easily side steps out of the way, dodging each strike. He then kicks Durel in the chest, forcing the fish-man back. Durel then asks Yato if he’d like to be the ring-bearer at his wedding, as he plans to force the Green Devils’ women to marry him. This pisses Yato off, with the chef telling him no one talks about his comrades in that way.

Flashing back to his training with the Whitebeard Pirates on Sphinx, he remembers that, though it took him nearly the full three years, Yato had finally passed Marco’s test. As the rest of the crew congratulated him, Marco told him that he has a prize for completing the challenge. Marco had handed him a book, and Yato at first was confused on what to do with it. The Whitebeard pirate explained that there was a particular fighting style old Whitebeard had known about for decades, having seen it be used by a pirate while he was still on the Rocks crew. Because it was powerful, he had learnt of the technique’s secrets and noted it in this training book, and had been waiting to find a proper inheritor on his crew to give it to. He had tried giving it to Marco himself years ago, but by then, Marco had already eaten his devil fruit, and was much more comfortable fighting that way. Eventually, Whitebeard forgot about the technique and kept the book along with his vast amounts of treasure and belongings that were sent back to Sphinx periodically. Recently, Marco had just found it, and seeing that it would work with Yato’s pre-existing moveset wonderfully, he decided that he would give it to him should he pass the test. When Yato asked why him in particular, Marco stated Yato reminded him of himself back when Whitebeard was still alive: someone with something to fight for, a goal they wish to accomplish more than anything. The man concluded by stating he believed Yato to be a worthy investment, with Yato simply staring down at the pages… 

In the present, Yato begins to rapidly rub his leg against the ground, the friction causing static and sparks fly. His leg is then surrounded with blue lightning as he activates a mode he calls Thunder Leg , where his kicks have enhanced strength, as well as having shocking properties due to the electricity. As he stands with his leg shimmering, he tells Durel that it’s just as well; he was looking for someone to really test this out on. Rushing at Durel, Yato uses Thunder Leg: Cheek Kick , slamming into the angelfish Fish-man and sending him spiraling away, simultaneously defeating him and breaking his nose.

Meanwhile, Brina is enraged that Adam is not having much trouble against her. She continues to lunge, but Adam easily fends off her blades with his own. Brina swings her actual sword down, forcing Adam to block it above him, but it leaves him open to attack from her nose sword, and she uses Hana Kennon, stabbing him in the chest. However, Adam simply pushes her away and states that it doesn’t hurt that much, and that she really should have chosen a different opponent. Placing the Nidai and the Kusanagi in their respective sheathes, Adam reaches for this third blade, one with a purple scabbard. Flashing back to his training with Zoro, he remembers the day he received the sword.

As they completed a round of training one day, Zoro had asked Adam about his swords’ origins. Adam told him that the Nidai is a cursed blade he got a Loguetown, and that the Kusanagi is the sword of his best friend that he intended to keep forever, but that his third is just another katana. Zoro states he knows about the Nidai, as he himself was the one who returned it to Ipponmatsu at Loguetown. However, Zoro then said that anyone aiming to be the world’s greatest swordsman had to have high-caliber swords. That being the case, Zoro then takes Adam’s regular blade and easily crushes it in his hand, shocking his mentee. As Adam begins to speak, Zoro hands him Enma, one of the two legendary blades of Kozuki Oden, the Haki-stealing blade. As Adam worries about what Zoro will use, the Straw Hat pirate tells him not to worry, as he has another top-tier blade of a certain Red-Haired pirate waiting for him in the New World. Back in the present, Adam tells Brina that he trained with Enma every day to master it, unsheathing the sword. As he does, it coats itself in his Busoshoku Haki. Adam uses Ittoryu: Suihei Slash, cutting Brina badly and slicing the hills behind her.

Move Index

Chapter Text

With the High Order defeated, Adam states that everything considered, that was pretty simple. Cruella suggests that they should round up the villains, and Yato says that they’re just waiting on Shocker now, but it shouldn’t take too long. 

At the hideout, Zoldeo picks himself up from Shocker’s attack, clearly dazed. He quickly finds and puts back on his mask for fear of his subordinates finding out he’s a human. Zoldeo states that he is the master of traps, having set quite a few in case anyone found this chamber, before pulling a lever that sends a volley of arrows at Shocker from the wall. Shocker quickly uses Kenbunshoku and weaves in between the arrows, dodging each of them. Suddenly, a giant ball made of steel falls from the ceiling right above him. Using Busoshoku, Shocker brunts the giant ball, before throwing it to the side harmlessly. Shocker told Zoldeo he isn’t going to lose to some random Fish-Man because he trained his Haki, flashing back to his training with Sengoku.

On Merveille, towards the beginning of Shocker’s training, Sengoku reiterated the three types of Haki and what they can do. The old marine wondered if Shocker hadn't seen Haki before, and Shocker began to think back, remembering instances where he experienced what he now knew was Haki. When he had sensed Mark at the top of the tower at Sacremento Court, that had been Kenbunshoku. Crocodile’s hook and Shirokami’s fist turning black was a result of Busoshoku, as well as when Sentomaru’s palm strike hurt him. And his desperate attempt to save his crew when Shirokami attacked and he knocked out the surrounding marines was surely Haoshoku. Shocker wondered how strong this Haki ability really is, and Sengoku told him that when one has an insatiable will, their Haki blooms, allowing them to blast past anyone standing in their way and achieve their goals. He informed him that that is how Monkey D. Luffy became the pirate king. Shocker, hearing that, decided that he’d have to make his Haki just as strong so that he can fight Luffy one day. 

In the present, Zoldeo begins pressing buttons, trying to turn on his device. However, Shocker states that enough is enough. Zoldeo turns and shouts at Shocker, stating that regardless of whether they know of him or not, his pawns will destroy his filthy pirate crew. Shocker, enraged, shouts that he and his friends have faced difficult trials to get to this point, and that their training in preparation for the New World will pay off. As the members of the High Order are seen completely defeated, Shocker enters Gear Second before moving above Zoldeo, slamming tha man down with Gomu Gomu no Jet Jack Hammer . Finally, as Zoldeo states he’ll be king of Fish-Man Island, Shocker states that he’s going much further, as his dream is to be king of the pirates. Drawing his hand back and inflating it with Gear Third and coating it with Busoshoku, Shocker slams Zoldeo with Gomu Gomu no Elephant Gun, crushing the large machine and causing it to explode, blowing up most of the hideout. Zoldeo’s mask breaks, and he lays on the ground, defeated and missing a few teeth.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Later that night, it is revealed that all the members of the Fish Raiders have been apprehended by the royal guards of the Ryugu Kingdom, set to face lifetime in prison. The Green Devils have a large party with the Ryugu royal family in the palace as thanks for saving them. Shocker excitedly scarfes down as much sea king meat as he can, while Adam and Taco drink to their heart’s content, blushing with how good the booze is. Meanwhile, Kawaki tells his jokes to a group of mermaids, making them laugh, and Yato teaches some merman cooks how to prepare some dishes from the surface. The door to the dining hall opens, and Jordan returns with Hernan, stating that the fish-man has done a GRRRRREAT job repairing the Stormy, and that they are ready to go whenever Shocker wants to. 

As Zane contently eats a bowl of Wateramen, Cruella and Angel talk to Hernan, with the fish-man catching them up about current affairs. The other members gather around one by one to listen in. Hernan first tells them of the death of Eustass Kidd, the First Mate of Emperor of the Sea Trafalgar Law, and the subsequent destruction of half of New Mary Geosie. The others think that it is somewhat interesting to hear, but Shocker simply blanks, not knowing who Kidd is, and only after hearing that he was previously Luffy’s rival does he begin to acknowledge him. But Shocker says that if he’s below Luffy then it doesn’t matter to him. Secondly, when Hernan tells them the news of Sabo’s disappearance, Cruella chimes in, stating that she hasn’t seen him since the end of her first year with them, and that the Revolutionary Army is still looking for him, even up to now. Shocker reasons that if he’s the Pirate King’s brother, he’ll be fine.

Hernan then tells them the last piece of news, surrounding the Blackbeard Pirates being thoroughly defeated by the Albar Pirates, and tells Shocker that it should concern him, as their captain, Zero, has been proclaimed as one of the Four Emperors. As Shocker blanks again, Angel tells Hernan their captain doesn’t pay attention too attentively. Hernan reminds the group that the Four Emperors are the four pirates with the highest chance of beating Luffy, being “Dragon Hunter” Dravvo Vergare, “Mother” Otsu Radiance, “Surgeon of Death” Trafalgar Law, and now “Black Wizard” Zero. Shocker says that he doesn’t care who they are, but that as long as they’re standing in the way of his goal, then he’ll simply have to crush them. He then states that he has been thinking about it, and that he figured he would need to defeat all four of them anyway, with his friends being shocked that he thought that far ahead. Hernan tells him that the emperors have whole armies at their disposal, and nothing will be as straightforward as Shocker thinks. However, Shocker laughs it off, stating that they’ll figure it out when they get to it.

Yato, remembering with a start Cruella’s goal, asks her if she was able to find the poneglyph she was looking for. The strategist replies that she has, as the one that had been in the Sea Forest was relocated to the palace dungeons, and King Fukaboshi has granted her access to see it and get its rubbing. She shows the crew her notebook, containing a large collection of various poneglyph rubbings she had seen in the past few years. She states that Fish-Man Island’s poneglyph is actually the first one she’s seen since joining the crew, though she can’t interpret the ancient language herself. She silently promises to learn more about the origins of devil fruits. After that, the festivities continue into the night, the pirates celebrating before ultimately sleeping in quarters provided for them.

Chapter Text

As the morning arrives the next day, the Green Devils prepare to leave. The royal family had provided them with extra provisions just in case, with Adam, Yato, and Jordan loading them onto the newly fixed Stormy. As the crew boards their ship, Taco sighs and wonders whether they can’t stay for another day, as there are still so many things the kingdom may have to offer. Angel scolds him, asking the sniper if he wants to go to the New World or not, while Taco reassures her he does. Hernan then walks toward the group. He states that he has arrived to say his goodbyes, and thanks them from the bottom of his heart for helping him even though he didn’t know them. 

Shocker, after contemplating for a bit, wonders why it has to be a goodbye. Confused, Hernan asks what he means. Shocker tells Hernan to join him on his crew, as he’s strong, reliable, and most importantly, a trusted friend. Hernan is slightly shocked for a moment, but then laughs heartily. Thanking Shocker for the invite, he informs them that he has no wish to be a pirate, and instead would rather continue serving and protecting his people. As Zane begs him, says that it would be fun, Hernan states that besides, he has business elsewhere that he needs to take care of. However, he promises that this will not be the last time they meet, and that he’ll see them again in the New World at some point, indicating that he had made a Vivre Card of Shocker the previous night. As most of the crew marvel at the paper and ask what it is, Hernan tells them it’s the paper that connects them together, as it will point to the direction of the one it's for.

Shocker simply smiles, telling Hernan that he understands how important his duty is to him, and excitedly states he can’t wait to see the Fish-Man again. As Shocker turns to head to his ship, Fukaboshi stops him and asks Shocker to forgive him, as he rushed to conclusions and did not trust him, but his crew still saved his family. Shocker tells him it’s no problem, since it all worked out in the end. As the members of the royal family wave their goodbyes behind Hernan, Shocker jumps on his ship and tells Jordan it’s time to leave. With a final look at the island below them, the Green Devils Pirates ascend the other side of the Red Line, venturing to the New World ahead.

Chapter Text

Waford Arc

As the Stormy White floats upward and becomes smaller and smaller, Hernan and Neptune watch them ascend. Neptune, noticing a gleam in Hernan’s eye, asks him why he chose to stay and not journey with the crew. Hernan states that while it is regrettable that he cannot, he still has things he needs to do, before turning to leave. As Neptune asks where he is going, Hernan responds that he must pack as well, as he is preparing to head to the East. As the Fish-Man leaves, Neptune sighs and thinks to himself that Hernan is a noble man, just like his father.

While the Green Devils’ ship leaves Fish-Man Island, another ship is seen descending. The ship is large and made of pure white wood, and it flies the flag of the Yonko crew, the Mother Pirates. On board, a man with slicked back, gray hair stares into the water. He wears no shirt, but rather a dark-gray fur coat that he leaves open, revealing his abs. A pendant with a peculiar symbol lies around his neck. The man leans on a giant three-bladed scythe. Yawning, he asks his compatriot how long it will take before they reach Fish-Man Island. Another man walks behind him, wearing a ski mask that covers most of his face, save for his eyes. His gray tank top reveals that he has stitches running all along his arms. He is revealed to be “Undead” Zuku, commander of the Mother Pirates’ 4th Division, with a bounty of 864,000,000. His partner, the 5th Division’s commander, is revealed as Venge “the Manslayer”, with a bounty of 853,000,000. Zuku tells Venge to concentrate, as Mother had sent them to the island as an attempted seizure of power, and that is why they lead the Strike Force. Venge notes that it would have been better if Killer Shark had come, since he is from Fish-Man Island, but Zuku informs him he is busy on a mission with their newest commander. 

Mother Pirates 4th Division Commander

"Undead" Zuku

Bounty: 864,000,000

Mother Pirates 5th Division Commander

Venge "the Manslayer"

Bounty: 853,000,000

As their ship reaches the sea floor, the duo disembark, a small legion following them. The men head through the back entrance to the main city so as to avoid detection. As Venge asks why they don’t just burn it all down, Zuku tells him to shut up, as that would only serve to trigger a war with the Straw Hat Pirates, which they could not handle at the moment, and they are only there to find and steal “it”. As Venge muses that Zuku doubts Mother’s strength, Zuku states that Mother herself is aware of this fact. Judging the time right, the duo attack, Zuku easily restraining the citizens with his arms detaching, held together by a cable of stitches. Meanwhile, Venge laughs and uses his powerful scythe to slice down their houses. As mermaids and fish-men start running away, they attempt to alert the palace, though they note the royal guard cannot make it in time. However, as Zuku advances to grab a civilian who had shot him, he is suddenly kicked so hard he flies into a nearby building. As his forces are shocked, the savior is revealed to be “Black Leg” Vinsmoke Sanji of the Straw Hat Pirates, who asks if the scum has had enough after only one kick.

Straw Hat Pirates Cook

“Black Leg” Vinsmoke Sanji

Bounty: 3,600,000,000

Sanji reminds the Strike Force that Fish-Man Island is under the protection of his crew. Venge, irritated, coats his scythe with Busoshoku Haki and attempts to slice the Straw Hat cook, but just as suddenly, a blade easily catches his own, its wielder being revealed as Sanji’s crewmate, Roronoa Zoro. Sanji, seeing his rival, becomes infuriated and demands to know what took him so long, as Luffy had sent him to bring Zoro back to the New World. Zoro states that he got lost on his way down, but it doesn’t matter since he’s here now. Getting in his face, Sanji states he doesn’t give a damn if he gets lost forever, while Zoro retorts that maybe he should stay on Fish-Man Island to bleed all over his mermaids. Venge attempts to get their attention, but Zoro, barely glancing his way, asks why he’s still here, before easily flicking his sword and sending Venge spiraling into a wall. As Venge moves to attack, Zuku tells the Strike Force to retreat. Venge irritatedly asks why, and Zuku responds that it isn’t the time, as they had no hope in defeating these two monsters.

Straw Hat Pirates Swordsman and First Mate

“Pirate Hunter” Roronoa S. Zoro

Bounty: 3,600,000,000

As the Stormy White ascends through the water, the Green Devils see beautiful, sparkly fish and giant sea kings that thankfully stay away from them. Shocker wishes to attack one so that they can have meat, but Taco shouts at him, saying they already have many provisions from Fish-Man Island. As Jordan alerts them all to the fact that they are near the surface, the crew look up and are all excited. They count down from 10 to 0, before bursting into the New World, the coating on the Stormy popping.

Chapter Text

As the coating disappears, the crew takes their very first look at the New World. However, they do not see any islands, with the waves simply lapping against the ship, and the large Red Line becoming smaller and smaller in the distance behind them. Shocker breathes in deeply, stating that he’s been waiting for this for a long time, and that he’s in the same stretch of sea as Luffy now. Jordan wonders where they’re going, and Angel explains to them that she received a New World Log Pose from her teacher and that they are going in the general direction of one of the three paths. However, as she begins to explain how it works, all the boys ignore her explanation, and Cruella states happily that she already knows how it works, irritating the navigator as she recalls they ignored her whilst entering the Grand Line as well. 

At that moment, a Bounty Coo wearing goggles dives straight into the wood of one of the ship’s masts. As Zane quickly checks to make sure it’s alright, it hands the cat their new bounties, updated with pictures taken of them on Sabaody.

As the crew surround Zane, the cat gets frustrated, stating that his bounty is once again the only one with a change different from everyone else. Cruella notes they all received an increase of 20 million from what they had three years ago, with their crime listed being their return to active piracy. As Shocker looks at his bounty of 320,000,000, Adam notes that his 155,000,000 is higher than Yato’s 144,000,000, making the chef angry, as he swears that he’ll have a higher bounty than him soon. Zane fumes, his only having increased to 100, though Angel tells him to be happy, as she does not want her 70,000,000 and that they can switch if he wants. 

Taco views his 220,000,000 as one fit for the Green Devil crew’s First Mate, though internally, he hopes it won’t get much bigger than this. He also wonders why they changed his epithet to the “Guardian”, though notes that it is at least better than simply “Sniper”. Kawaki notes his surprise at receiving 120,000,000, as he’s shocked the government decided to use his bounty from his former life to go off of. As Cruella shows Jordan her bounty of 130,000,000, Jordan looks shocked, demanding to know why his epithet has changed to “Cyberfrog” and why his picture is hand-drawn. Cruella simply giggles and states he should be happy to be over the 100 million mark, as he now has 110,000,000.

After being checked on by Zane, the Bounty Coo ruffles its feathers and flies off. Watching it go, Taco notes that so far, things aren’t much different in the New World than in Paradise. However, as he finishes his sentence, the sea below them churns, and a giant sea king erupts from the ocean, threatening to swallow them. As Angel, Zane, Kawaki, and Taco scream at the top of their lungs, and even Jordan and Cruella begin to sweat, Shocker tells Yato and Adam to follow him, with the two obliging. Shocker jumps up and uses Gomu Gomu no Grizzly Magnum , slamming into the leviathan’s face. Adam and Yato follow suit, utilizing Phoenix Talon: Cheek Kick and Santoryū: Moeru no Oni Giri, respectively. The force of the three attacks manage to push the sea king back into the sea, unconscious. 

As the trio land back on the ship, the others begin to congratulate them, but then Angel tenses up. As Zane asks what’s wrong, she tells Jordan to get to the helm quickly. No sooner has she said this than a massive storm appears over them, seemingly out of nowhere. The violent winds send the crew sprawling, with Zane almost being flung away, but being caught by Kawaki at the last moment. As Shocker anchors himself with his stretchy body, he asks Angel when it will end. Angel attempts to navigate them through the storm, but it is so different from Paradise that she’s not sure what to do. Adam inquires whether they should fly, but Jordan tells him they can’t, as bringing out the wings in these conditions will surely break them. Yato states that the New World is nothing like they have ever seen before, and Taco states there’s no way they trained for so long to die in a storm. Zane hopes with a start that the Bounty Coo is okay, but Jordan tells him they should worry about their own safety at the moment. 

After what seems like forever, the storm finally subsides. As the rain lets up, Jordan checks around and states that the ship did not take any major damage, which is good. Adam asks where they are now, and Angel irritatedly tells him she doesn’t just have a map on her. Looking at her Log Pose, two of the three compasses are spinning wildly. The one that is working points slightly to the west, so she orders Jordan to head that way to land. As the crew recover from the harsh storm and get closer to the island, they see a large expanse of land. The island is in a ring shape, with an opening beach leading deeper into its jungle. Notably, they see a massive tower jutting from what looked to be the island’s center. Smaller tower-like structures surround the circumference of the island. However, as the others marvel at the particularly large tower, wondering where they are, Cruella begins to hyperventilate. Falling to the deck, she cowers away from it. She then promptly passes out, with the rest of the crew agitated around her.

Chapter Text

As she wakes up, Cruella sees that she is in Zane’s doctor’s office. Her friends surround her, wondering if she’s alright. Asking what happened, Zane tells her that she merely fainted, and wasn’t physically injured as far as he can tell, but he is confused why the island generated such a strong reaction for her. Angel asks her if she’s been here before, and Cruella admits that she has, but that it was in the past and that they can forget about it and move on. Shocker simply states that he wants to know, so that he can help her if need be. Cruella tells them that the story takes place during her first year working with the Revolutionary Army, as she flashes back to that time.

After first signing on with the army, Cruella had become friends with Sabo and Koala, often training with them. A few weeks after her arrival, the Revolutionary Army received a distress call from an unknown island. The caller told them that they are one of many prisoners in a large tower, slaves forced to work in the island’s mines by a cult who had captured them. The caller pleaded with the Revolutionary Army to save them, as they were living in subhuman conditions and wanted to be free. As the call was hung up, Ivankov wonders how they’ll find the island since they’ve never heard of it, but Lindbergh told them he can easily trace the signal to find them. Turning to Cruella, Dragon told her that he trusted her enough to manage her own first operation, and ordered her to lead an assault on the island. 

Taking a squad composed of Sabo, Kuma, and Lindbergh, as well as other members, Cruella led them into the New World, the group eventually landing on the island and seeing the large tower. While docking their ship, Kuma said he remembered seeing this island somewhere, but cannot remember where. As they forged deeper into the island and into the slave barracks, they began freeing them. A voice behind them thanked them for coming, and the group met Jamal, the leader of the slaves and the man who had called them. He was a young man with spiky, blue hair, and a long scar running down the left side of his face. He explained to them that they were on Waford, an ancient island that fell from the sky, and that the tower was the Heaven Tower, a structure run by a cult aiming to export the minerals they mined on the black market for a large profit. The mines in Waford’s ruins contained an abundance of natural minerals, including gold, silver, and even the rare sea stone. Jamal, who himself was intelligent and a brilliant strategist, offered the slaves’ help in order to defeat the cult, and Cruella agreed, the two forming an unstoppable command duo. By combining forces, the Revolutionaries and the slaves went above ground in the tower and fought against the cult, eventually defeating them and forcing them to flee. 

Bartholomew Kuma                                                      Lindbergh

Jamal

With the slaves being free to do as they pleased, some of them wished to join the revolution, while others went back to their homes. As the time for the revolutionaires to leave drew near, Jamal thanked Cruella from the bottom of his heart, hugging her and stating that she was his savior and he’ll never forget him, causing Cruella to blush. He smiled and told her he’ll head back to his home, but that the two of them will always be close and he’ll be there to help her in any way he can, should she ever need it.

As the army left on their ship, Cruella stared into the distance by the ship’s railing, Waford only being a speck by that time. Sabo came and stood next to her, telling her she did an amazing job. As Cruella sighed and said she is only half the reason they won, Sabo simply smirked and chuckled to himself. After standing together in amicable silence, Sabo told her people love in mysterious ways, causing Cruella to blush heavily and refute his claim that she loved Jamal. He then laughed and told her that if it mattered to her, she should pursue it, because he didn’t know what he would have done if Koala wasn't by his side. Cruella then turned toward the sea once more, responding that just maybe she would. Kuma overheard the duo from behind the cabin door, smiling to himself.

Chapter Text

Dragon and Sabo decided to keep one of their spies, a man named Calhoun, undercover as one of the former slaves just to ensure that any stragglers made it off the island and periodically send reports. However, it was a good thing they did, as Calhoun’s report revealed the truth. On a call with the duo, Calhoun reported that there were two things they had overlooked. The first is that Jamal is a pirate by the name of Bremen Jamal, captain of his titular pirate crew. He had carefully planned out everything from the beginning, purposefully allowing himself to be captured by the cult and calling the revolutionaries to the tower in order for them to liberate it, with his end goal being his crew taking control of the tower. 

Revolutionary Army Spy

Calhoun

The second thing they overlooked is that there were dungeons underneath the island, quite deep below the surface. And five special slaves were still there after they left. They had all been captains of their own rookie pirate crews long ago, but were each captured around the time of the Summit War of Marineford 10 years ago. They all wore sea stone handcuffs, as at least two of them had eaten Devil Fruit abilities, and have been kept there since. However, a few days after the main force left, a mysterious older-looking man had come and had a meeting with Jamal. The two had reached an agreement that the five would go with the man. Happy to be freed from their prison, the captains decided to follow him. However, this was the last report they heard from Calhoun, leading them to assume that he was caught and killed. However, as there were no more slaves, Dragon, Ivankov, and Kuma agreed that it was no longer their concern. 

After hearing the news, Cruella told Dragon she was going, with her temporary boss telling her to stay put. Cruella told him she needed to go find the truth out for herself, but Dragon asked her to remind him what the goal of the Revolutionary Army is. She responded that they sought to help the oppressed. Dragon agreed, stating that therefore, what pirates did on their own basis is none of their concern unless it specifically involved others, and as this situation is just a matter of a singular territory, it isn’t worth their time. Besides, they were pouring all their time and resources into finding Sabo, who by this time had gone missing. The news broke Cruella’s heart, as she had truly begun to think that someone cared about her in that way. 

Cruella finishes her story, stating that that’s the last she heard of the situation. As her friends sympathize around her, Shocker simply turns around and tells Jordan to land their ship on the island. As the others are shocked, Cruella hurriedly tells Shocker it isn’t necessary and that she can move on, but Shocker becomes mad, stating he finds it horrible that he preyed on her kindness, and that he won’t let someone like that disrespect his friend. This moves Cruella, who states that if she truly can, then she does want to confront him. Shocker smiles, telling her that they will.

Chapter Text

As the crew lands on the island and looks at the tower properly, they see it is a huge structure made from an unidentifiable blue-gray mineral. Shocker states that he’s going to bolt straight to the top of the tower and defeat Jamal up, but Angel stops him, saying they need a plan. Taco notes Angel has changed clothes, wearing a white crop top with light gray jeans now, to which Angel says she must remain stylish and can’t wear the same outfit everywhere. Adam states that it only makes sense for Cruella to formulate the plan, as not only is she their strategist, but this mission is also personal to her. Cruella wipes her tears, thanking her friends for trusting her. Concentrating, she believes the best course of action is to divide the crew, as it could be a risk if they all disembark. She tells Yato, Taco, and Jordan to stay around the ship, both to watch over it and investigate the surrounding beach. The rest of them - Shocker, Adam, Angel, Zane, Kawaki, and herself - will traverse through the forest, go into the tower, and fight against Jamal’s forces. Yato tells her not to worry, and Taco wishes them good luck. 

As Shocker’s group walk through the forest on their way to the tower, Zane mentions how weird it is that such a huge jungle has no wildlife at all. Cruella informs them that when she was last here, there were indeed many wild creatures, but who knows what has happened to them since. With the mention of monstrous beasts, Shocker laughs and compares the place to Merveille, stating he wants to fight the animals sometime. Adam asks what kind of place Waford is, and Cruella explains what Kuma had told her. According to a book he had read long ago, Waford used to be a sky island resting on a Sabao Bubble. However, around 208 years ago now, the bubble popped, causing the island to fall to the blue sea. She continues by stating she suspects Weatheria may have been built partially through utilizing the remains of Waford, since the people who used to live here created various mechanisms for weather control. Angel, remembering that they had gone to Weatheria three years ago, states that it would make sense. As Kawaki asks when they had gone to Weatheria, Zane states that it was right before they met him for the first time.

The party of six head inland, following a narrow straight of land that takes them to the tower’s entrance. Angel asks Cruella if she’s ready, and the strategist confirms. Shocker says it’s time to go, and the Tower Siege Team runs into the structure through its massive double doors.

Once inside, Cruella muses that she never expected to come back here. Angel asks her if she’s alright to continue, and the strategist smiles and responds she’s fine. Kawaki ponders where they should go, and Cruella explains the layout of the tower. From what she can remember, there are four floors, each floor being massive, with multiple large hallways and platforms that are created as one runs along them. She states it will be imperative they don’t get lost, and that preferably, if they were to split up, they do so in pairs. The first floor was quite bare, with its only noticeable feature being a set of stairs leading to the second floor. The second floor had a balcony that looked out onto the first, and Cruella tells them to head upstairs. However, as they begin to move, an alarm is sounded. As the crew wonders what is happening, fodder members of the Jamal Pirates begin to jump down from the second floor to attack. Shocker states he’s been waiting to have fun, using Gomu Gomu no Elephant Gun and clearing away a large horde. As more pour down from the stairs, the Siege Team fights back, easily beating them and clearing the path to tha stairs. 

Shocker runs up the stairs, his friends not too far behind him. Punching away the last of the fodder, he wonders if that’s all Jamal’s crew had to offer. However, as he runs forward, he is suddenly punched back hard, slamming into a wall. The rest of the crew are shocked, but Adam alerts them to three enemies arriving. The individual who attacked Shocker is introduced as Hooter, a man with a bounty of 77,000,000. He is a large, muscular man with the head and neck of an owl. He wears no shirt, showing off his muscles and abs, and a simple pair of jeans. A rocket is strapped to his back. Behind him, a woman with flowing, pink hair tied in a topknot steps up. She wears a white kimono with a gold belly sash, and a deep pink haori with flower patterns resting on her shoulders. Wielding a katana, she is introduced as “Silent Blade” Tsubaki, who has a bounty of 32,000,000. From Hooter’s other side, Dante Kolt, with a bounty of 49,000,000 is introduced. He has long, black hair and a clear punk-rock aesthetic. He wears chokers and spiked bands, and black leather clothes, along with mascara. A large guitar is strapped to his back. Tsubaki addresses the crew, informing them they are the Karasu Trio, Jamal’s top three officers.

Jamal Pirates Karasu Trio

Hooter

Bounty: 77,000,000

Jamal Pirates Karasu Trio

"Silent Blade" Tsubaki

Bounty: 32,000,000

Jamal Pirates Karasu Trio

Dante Kolt

Bounty: 49,000,000

Chapter Text

As Shocker gets back up and expresses his anger, Tsubaki tells him to calm down, as they are here to give them a message. Cruella states they have no reason to listen to them, but Tsubaki responds that she begs to differ. As Tsubaki is about to continue speaking, she receives an abrupt call on her Den Den Mushi. As she notes the caller to be their captain himself, she answers the call, holding the snail up. Jamal’s voice comes through the snail, welcoming the Green Devils to his Heaven Tower, and stating that he is glad they made it. He admits his surprise that Cruella ended up being a pirate, but says cooly that it did not change much in terms of his plans, psyching Cruella out.

Shocker speaks up, demanding to know where Jamal is so that he can beat him up. Jamal simply laughs and tells Shocker they will fight in due time. He tells the six friends that, because he is bored, he wishes to make things more interesting by playing a game: the Tower Death Match. He states the rules: the members of the Jamal Pirates, including the Karasu Trio, against the six of them. If they manage to defeat them all, only then would Jamal reveal himself, though he states that he doubts it will be possible. However, he states that the Green Devils lose if they die, and needles to say the game would be over, meaning his victory. Shocker swears that there’s no way he’s going to allow him to play games with them when he has hurt his friend. Jamal simply states that they had better hurry, ending the transmission.  

With the game in motion, the Karasu Trio quickly take their leave, splitting up and heading down different hallways. Tsubaki’s voice echoes, daring them to come and find them. Looking at his crew, Shocker states he doesn’t care about a stupid game, and that he plans to head to the top of the tower, as that is probably where Jamal is. Angel asks how he knows, and Shocker admits he’s guessing, irritating the navigator, though Shocker mentions that the boss bad guy is usually at the top, mentioning Mark from CP7. Not seeing any stairs around them, Shocker runs into the right-hand corridor. With a hallway leading straight ahead and another one to their left, the crew decide to split up, with Zane and Cruella forging straight ahead, Angel and Kawaki going left, and Adam following Shocker on the right hand side.

Chapter Text

Shocker bursts into a large room, kicking the door off its hinges. Looking around the room, he wonders if there’s anyone there, but then notices the stairs leading to the third floor. Briefly wondering what kind of bizarre setup for a tower this is, the Green Devil captain bolts for the stairs, but he is suddenly alerted to a presence thanks to his Kenbunshoku Haki. He leaps out of the way, narrowly dodging a Busoshoku-infused punch from Hooter. The Jamal pirate flies past with his jetpack, before landing a few meters away. Shocker irritatedly tells the owl-man he has no energy to waste fighting him, but Hooter, enraged, tells him to not call him “owlman”. Shocker, confused, tells him he quite literally has the head of an owl. Hooter responds that years ago, he was part of a great pirate fleet and ate an owl SMILE fruit. Shocker simply shrugs and states that Hooter shouldn’t go around with a weird devil fruit like that if he doesn’t want people to be confused. Hooter welcomes him to the Room of Comfort, the site of his resting place. Shocker simply yawns, stating he’s going to leave him to one of his friends so he can go beat Jamal up.

Enraged, Hooter tells Shocker he is not going anywhere, and begins to fly around, zipping through the air quickly. Shocker tells him no owl is going to beat him, and attempts to use Gomu Gomu no Hawk Rifle , but the owl-man simply flies out of the way. He asks Shocker if he’s ready to give up, laughing his signature laugh style of “HIIII bou bou bou!” Hooter then uses Fukurokken , coating his arm in Busoshoku before punching Shocker hard. After being hit, Shocker attempts to latch onto his arms and uses Gomu Gomu no Jet Missile. However, as he is about to strike Hooter, the owl-man unhinges his beak and swallows most of Shocker’s body, leaving only his legs exposed. As Shocker struggles to get out, Hooter states that this is the Room of Comfort, so he needs to try and relax. However, before he can finish, Shocker kicks him in the face while flailing, interrupting the Owl-Man and aggravating him.

Back on the beach, the Stormy Protection team seems to be relaxing and enjoying guard duty. Jordan patches some wood that was blown off the hull by the storm, and meanwhile, Taco is inside the Stormy’s workshop, where he and Jordan create and maintain new inventions and weapons. As Yato walks in with a tray, the chef sets Taco’s drink down and asks him what he is doing, as he sees him working with complex machinery. Taco responds excitedly that he is working on a new project, but smugly states he can’t tell him until it is ready, though Yato says he was asking only out of politeness. As the duo walk out to the deck, Jordan hops up and states that the Stormy didn’t take any real damage from the storm, so they must be fine. Suddenly, the ship rocks, and as they look over the railing at the beach, they see a group of pirates shooting at the ship and charging. Yato guesses they are part of Jamal’s crew, and quickly jumps off the ship, crashing into them with Phoenix Talon: Flank Kick . As more arrive, Taco worriedly states that it will be a problem if they start hitting the ship's vital spots, but Jordan simply states they can’t allow them to do that, firing his Danyaku Arm , Taco following suit with Namari Shots.

Move Index

Chapter Text

On the straight path, Zane and Cruella walk together, deeming running to be an unnecessary waste of energy. As Zane notes how creepy the tower looks, he glances at Cruella and sees her deep in thought. The cat asks if she’s alright, worried for his friend. Cruella responds that she doesn’t know if she should be back here, and hearing Jamal’s voice made all the pain of his betrayal come flooding back to her. Zane promises her they’ll beat him, and Cruella states that she’s sure of it. 

However, a voice echoes throughout the space, laughing and asking her if she truly believes that. As the duo head deeper into the large corridor, the walls are replaced by Japanese-style closing doors. Out of one of them, Tsubaki steps out, holding her blade at the ready. She smirks, telling Cruella she wishes to destroy the woman harboring feelings for her captain. Cruella, embarrassed, asks Zane to find out if the Stormy Protection Team is alright, and to check all the cells in the dungeons to ensure there are no remaining slaves. Zane asks her what she will do, and the strategist responds that she will remain here and defeat Tsubaki. Zane worriedly asks if she’s sure, but Cruella smiles down at him, telling him to trust her.   

As Zane flies off using his Wing Boost , Tsubaki muses out loud, stating that Cruella can’t be serious when she says she will defeat her. Cruella states that she wants to clarify she does not have feelings for Jamal, and Tsubaki’s demeanor changes to one of rage, telling her not to say her captain’s name so casually as she sends a flying slash at her. Cruella teleports the slash away in a void, then uses Void: Shuriken Ame , a storm of shurikens pouring down at Tsubaki. However, the swordswoman easily flicks them all away with her blade. Tsubaki reveals that her sword is the Tamashī no Hōchō, a Meito blade, and one of the 21 O Wazamono grade swords. Using Fukushu Dash , Tsubaki passes by Cruella, slashing her arm so quickly she does not notice at first. As Cruella winces and grabs her arm, Tsubaki looks back at her, proclaiming this is one battle she will not win, as this fight has to do with someone Tsubaki cares about.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Down the left-hand path, Angel and Kawaki barge into a large room. Inside, they see huge amps seemingly plugged into nothing. As Kawaki wonders what kind of stage this is, lights suddenly flicker and dazzle before a spotlight shines on Kolt, who stands in the room's center. Kolt dramatically begins to cheer for himself before stating it is all rock and roll. He welcomes the duo to the Room of Celebration, his own personal show. As Angel, bewildered, wonders if this guy is another creep, Kolt tells them to be a good audience, as it’s time to get rock crazy. 

Kawaki states that it would be better to take care of him sooner rather than later, and moves to attack, but Kolt uses Punk Wave , strumming his guitar and emitting a powerful sound wave that pushes the duo back. Recovering, Angel exclaims they have to use long-range attacks and uses Rankyaku . Kolt uses his attack at the ground, using the sound wave to push himself off the ground and onto one of the large amps. He then states that the song he’ll play now will get their hearts stirring, then uses a technique called Rock Dorei . He cackles, stating that anyone who hears his song will be controlled by him, turning them into his slave.  

Kawaki states that that is nonsense, but to his shock, as he looks at Angel, she has suddenly changed clothes, ditching her own for a black, sleeveless jean jacket, black leather pants, a choker around her neck, and spiked bands on either arm. Kawaki angrily orders Kolt to change her back, but Kolt states that he cannot do that, as she has now become his groupie. Kolt tells Kawaki it’s only fair for him to know about his entry into music. He explains that he always idolized “Soul King” Brook of the Straw Hat Pirates, wanting to become a powerful musician like him. However, in order to truly be like Brook, he had to emulate his formula before changing it. So he sought out and ate a Yomi Yomi Dupli, before jumping to his demise himself in order to be revived with the power of the underworld at his disposal. He explains that his music is imbued with his power, just like Brook, but that his genre is more aggressive. Kolt then wonders why Kawaki isn’t affected. Kawaki suspects to himself that his devil fruit ability seems to give him a sort of immunity to matters of the ethereal. 

Deciding that the reasoning is not important, Kolt attacks Kawaki with another Punk Wave . This time, Kawaki is ready, and dodges by phasing into the ground. As he phases out and readies himself to attack the Jamal pirate, however, Angel blocks him, forcing Kawaki to move out of the way. Kawaki attempts to get past her and slash Kolt, but Angel uses Rankyaku on her friend, the air blade narrowly missing his head. Kawaki worriedly tells Angel to move out of the way, but Angel simply laughs and says it’s time to rock, and to not touch the master. As Kolt cackles and screams there’s no hope, Kawaki stresses about how he will fight without attacking his friend.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Battle Map:

Back on the beach, Zane flies toward the ship. Seeing the Jamal Pirates easily dispatched on the floor, Zane wonders how badly his friends destroyed them, with Jordan stating it was easy and Yato even stating that it is getting boring just waiting for the rest of them. Zane tells the trio what Cruella had said about checking the dungeons. Taco volunteers to go with Zane, stating that the two of them are a great team. The duo head back to the tower, planning on looking for the door leading to the dungeons.  

Meanwhile, Adam enters the Room of Comfort a few minutes after Shocker. Upon arriving, he wonders where Shocker is, before looking towards the stairs and seeing, to his absolute shock, Hooter swallowing Shocker nearly whole. Adam becomes embarrassed, begrudgingly asking what Hooter is trying to accomplish. Hooter attempts to speak, but with Shocker in his mouth, he merely makes sounds of regurgitation. Adam says that he’s going to give Hooter two choices: either he spits his captain out voluntarily, or Adam will make him. In response, Hooter activates his rocket and soars at Adam with surprising speed, utilizing his rocket to propel himself and increase his velocity, and uses Rocket Straight , slamming into Adam painfully. As Adam gets back up, Hooter is already on his way for another pass, which Adam barely dodges. Hooter continues to zip past Adam, forcing the swordsman to dance around to try and dodge his attacks. However, Adam quickly realizes he needs to meet it head on.

On the next pass, Adam unsheathes all three of his swords, coating them with Busoshoku. Hooter’s punch clashes against his katanas with a clang, Adam taking the full force of both Hooter’s and Shocker’s combined weights. Flipping one of his swords, he uses a well-timed Ittoryu: Yakkodori , slashing Hooter’s muscular chest. The owl-man grunts in pain, before flying up to the ceiling of the room, directly above Adam. Using his rocket and the ceiling as a platform, he pushes off at top speed, aiming to crush Adam into the ground using Fukurater . However, Adam brunts this attack, telling Hooter if that’s his strongest attack, then he’s done playing around. Flinging the owl-man into the air, he deactivates Busoshoku before activating his Hinoken . Spinning himself around while moving towards Hooter, Adam creates a rapid, shredding, flaming drill attack, landing a direct blow on Hooter with Santoryu: Hinoken: Wild Rush Spade . 

As Hooter is knocked clean out of the air, he releases Shocker. Landing on the floor, Shocker thanks Adam for his help, as he’s glad to be out of such a disgusting place, and notes how he has saliva all over him. Irritated, Shocker uses Gomu Gomu no Elephant Gun, bashing Hooter even deeper into the ground, so much so that he sends him crashing down to the first floor. Adam, sheathing his swords, says he thinks what Shocker did is overkill, and Shocker merely huffs, satisfied.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Battle Map:

In the left-hand room, Kawaki continues to struggle to attack Kolt with Angel constantly getting in the way. Angel uses Soru and appears above Kawaki, before attempting to kick the jester. Kawaki quite easily blocks her attacks, and begs his friend to snap out of it. Kolt asks Kawaki what the point in resisting was, and that it would be much more fun if he just rocked out with them. However, Kawaki grins and thanks Kolt for the offer but declines, stating that they have an adventure waiting for them. Kolt states that he doesn’t care if Kawaki leaves, since he is no fun, but Angel is staying with him. As Kawaki ignores him and continues to try getting through to her, Kolt tells him that there’s no point in trying, as his Soul Music will continue to make her a slave as long as it is being played. 

Kawaki quickly thinks of an idea. Thanking the rocker for the tip, he leaps at Kolt. When Angel gets in his way, he simply apologizes, before using Spectral Sword: Sorakiri on the air in front of them, the pressure blasting both Angel and Kolt back. As Kolt rises, asking if he’s okay with attacking his friend, Kawaki smirks and says that he won’t have to do so again. Looking down, Kolt notices with a shock that his guitar is shattered, broken beyond repair. Kawaki calls over to Angel, telling her she’s alright now, but Angel simply smiles and says rock and roll. Shocked, Kawaki wonders why it didn’t work, but Kolt cackles and tells him that his music is playing in her mind, and that there’s no hope of freeing her. Using Punk Wave: Strutter , Kolt connects his voice to the amps, using them to amplify his sound wave attack. The massive bursts blast Kawaki into the opposing wall.

As Kawaki struggles to rise, he thinks to himself that he knows he can defeat Kolt, but needs to think of a way of freeing Angel. Kawaki then realizes that if Kolt’s Yomi Yomi Dupli powers were causing the mind control, then perhaps his own Yurei Yurei powers could cancel them out. Infusing as much energy into his voice as he can muster, Kawaki begins to tell a multitude of jokes and gags using his Party Jokes , creating his own sound waves that begin to reach Angel’s ears. As Kolt realizes what is happening, he angrily states that Kawaki will not take away his groupie, and begins to counter with his singing. The power of their souls clash as their music and jokes respectively combat each other, both trying to outweigh the other. However, with a final push, Kawaki shouts that his soul is more powerful because of his connections with his friends, and manages to push back Kolt’s, breaking the hold he has over Angel.

With the trance broken, Angel wonders what is happening, before looking down and furiously demanding to know who dressed her in such a manner. Kawaki laughs and states that it is good to have her back. As Kolt begins to panic, Kawaki suggests the duo finish the rocker off, with Angel angrily agreeing, stating that she plans on getting revenge on the creep who made her look like an idiot. Rearing up for their attacks, Kawaki and Angel use Spectral Sword: Tosshin and Cold Fu: Ice Strike , respectively, their attacks piercing Kolt’s stomach as he is sent flying through a wall, knocking him out. Angel demands for her own clothes, with Kawaki noting them to be lying on the floor, though the jester admits that the new look suits her. Angel angrily tells him to keep quiet.

Move Index:

Chapter Text

Battle Map: 

Meanwhile, back at Cruella’s fight, the strategist is not faring well. She is bleeding from various cuts all along her body, with her noting Tsubaki to be much faster than she is. Cruella attempts to trap her enemy in one of her voids, but Tsubaki easily jumps and rebounds off of one the of the closing doors, using it as a ledge to attack Cruella. The Green Devil pirate quickly moves herself away using Void: Ugoki , reappearing a few meters away behind Tsubaki. However, the swordswoman turns and sends a flying slash her way, Cruella barely dodging the attack.

As the strategist catches her breath, Tsubaki giggles and tells Cruella that if she gives up, she promises to make her end painless. Cruella states that if taunts like that worked on her, she would have quit being a pirate years ago. Tsubaki tells her that it’s useless, as she can’t attack her, and asks the strategist how she plans on winning. Cruella states that she does indeed have a plan, though she is not sure that it will work. Cruella simply states that she’s going to defeat Tsubaki here, so that she can have a conversation with Jamal.

Hearing this, Tsubaki is filled with hate. She angrily tells Cruella to stop believing in him, as they are not comrades. Using Ittoryu: Senko Arashi , Tsubaki moves so fast she disappears, attacking with a barrage of fine cuts, seemingly dealing massive damage to Cruella. All the while, she continues to berate Cruella, telling her to give up on talking to her captain and winning him over. She tells the strategist that Jamal never cared for her, and that he was merely using her to get what he wanted, as a true pirate would. However, thinking about her crew and the lengths Shocker and the rest of them went for her, Cruella merely states that no matter what their goals are, true pirates care for their crew. 

Tsubaki appears in front of her upside down in the air, telling her she’s had enough of Cruella talking and that the battle is over, diagonally slashing her with Ittoryu: Mikadzuki . However, Cruella stands her ground, shocking Tsubaki as she believes it was a direct hit. Cruella reveals that she can alter the sizes of her voids, and managed to create Mini Voids , a multitude of tiny portals all over her body where the attacks landed. Cruella states that she stored all the “damage” of the strikes into her void, and that she’ll use her own power against her. 

Opening up a large portal, Cruella uses Void: Impact , sending a burst of the accumulated damage at Tsubaki all at once. The attack overwhelms the swordswoman, and she screams before being knocked away deeper into the corridor, defeated. As Cruella turns, she states that now, the fight is over.

Move Index

Chapter Text

Battle Map:

As Cruella heads back into the main room where they had split up, she finds Angel and Kawaki there. After exchanging stories on the defeat of their enemies, Angel states that the stairs were not in their corridor, and Cruella states hers similarly led to a dead end. Kawaki surmises that Adam and Shocker must have found the stairs on their path and gone to the third floor already. The trio rush to the right corridor and enter the large room, seeing Shocker angrily looking down at a hole, and Adam telling him they need to find the others. As they walk in, Adam informs them of Shocker’s embarrassing moment, much to Shocker’s annoyance, but Angel reminds them they have to fight Jamal. Remembering his original mission, Shocker states he’s ready, and the five run up the stairs.

On the fourth and topmost floor, Jamal himself sits in a large, dimly lit throne chamber. He wears a blue and black tunic with black pants and boots. A blue pendant hangs from his neck, and a yellow sash is tied around his waist. As he attempts to call the Karasu Trio, he curses and states that it is impossible for them to have been defeated. Suddenly, the door to his chamber is forcefully pushed open, and the Green Devil Pirates enter the room. Shocker asks if he’s Jamal, and the man simply gets off his throne and slowly claps, congratulating them for making it this far. Jamal admits that the defeat of the Karasu Trio comes as a shock to him, but that at the end of the day, it does not matter, as his plans will continue with or without them. Looking at Cruella, Jamal smiles cooly and thanks her for her help in liberating the tower. Shocker immediately activates Gear Second and warns him to not dare speak to her, attacking Jamal with a rapid Gomu Gomu no Jet Stamp .

However, Jamal simply laughs as the attack passes through him, his body becoming a mass of sparkling, white particles that reform into him. As Shocker lands and is confused, Jamal formally introduces himself as the captain of the Jamal Pirates, revealed to have a bounty of 320,000,000, and the user of the Nova Nova no Mi (Nova Nova Fruit), a logia that allows him to conjure, manipulate, and become pure energy. Boasting, he states that his fruit ability is even more powerful than a former Navy Admiral’s. Shocker thanks him for the tip, as now he knows he has to use Haki, but as Shocker begins to move, Jamal blasts him with a Nova Ray , sending the captain skidding across the floor. 

'

Jamal Pirates Captain

Bremen Jamal

Bounty: 320,000,000

Devil Fruit: Nova Nova no Mi

Cruella steps up and begins to tear up, demanding to know how he could be so cruel and manipulative. However, Jamal simply laughs, stating that he never had any intentions of being friends, and only used the Revolutionaries so that he could acquire the tower for himself. Adam asks why the tower is so important, as it seems to him to be quite barren. However, Jamal states that it is anything but. The pirate explains that the entire tower is made from a special stone supposedly from space called eneroid, which contains a tremendous amount of nuclear energy. Jamal tells them his master plan: using his devil fruit, he will drain all the energy from the tower on the summer solstice, today, when the energy is at its highest point, and make himself unstoppably powerful. Angel demands to know what he’s going to do, and Jamal states that using that power, he will realize his dream: defeating Monkey D. Luffy and becoming the pirate king. However, Shocker simply laughs, as he states that no matter how strong he gets, Shocker will be the one to inherit the title, and gets ready to fight.

Move Index:

Chapter Text

As Shocker coats his limbs in Busoshoku, he tells his friends to get back to the ship and start to get off shore. Angel asks why, and Shocker says that there’s a chance the tower is severely damaged, if not outright destroyed, and he wants to get out of here right after. Cruella wishes to stay, attempting to talk to Jamal, but Adam stops her, telling her that now that Shocker has made up his mind, they would only be getting in his way by staying. As the others run out of the room and head down the stairs, Cruella says farewell to Jamal, and prays for Shocker to defeat him. As his friends leave, Jamal smirks and tells Shocker that after he defeats him, he’ll make sure to get Cruella too. Shocker becomes serious, stating that not only had he insulted Cruella, but he has now also threatened his crew and attacked his dream, meaning that he has no choice but to fight him.

Shocker rushes and attempts to hit him with Gomu Gomu no Hawk Rifle , but Jamal fires a simple Nova Ray at him. Jamal uses Leixing Yajirushi , creating arrows of energy that shoot at Shocker, who quickly blocks them with his arms. Shocker jumps up and stretches his foot through the ceiling. Blowing into his thumb, he enlarges his leg, destroying the roof in the process. Using Gomu Gomu no Elephant Axe , Shocker’s giant heel crushes Jamal into the ground. As Jamal gets up, Shocker follows the attack by raining down Gomu Gomu no Hawk Ame . However, the Nova-Man dodges, darting to the side, before asking Shocker if he is prepared for holy judgment. He uses Kyushu no Nanatsu Hoshi , a move conjuring seven lasers raining down from the sky, blasting Shocker into the ground with a huge explosion. As the dust settles, Jamal looks around for Shocker, who seemingly disappeared. The Green Devil captain appears behind Jamal, readying his Gomu Gomu no Red Hawk . However, Jamal notices it, and begins to fly using Ryusei . Rising into the air, Jamal tells Shocker that at first he was angry about the destruction of his chamber, but thanks to him, his flight is less restricted, before using Galick Blaster , a volley of energy blasts shooting at Shocker.  

On the second floor, Adam and the others jump over the railing to the first floor. As they are about to head outside, a group of Jamal Pirates are forcefully pushed into the tower, the men sprawled and knocked out on the ground. As Angel wonders what’s happening, Yato and Jordan appear at the doorway, the chef telling them that they forced them to show them the way to the tower, since they thought they may need help. Adam tells them to hurry back to the ship, as they need to set sail. Yato asks about Shocker, and Cruella informs them he is fighting at the summit, and that he will meet up with them on the ship afterwards. Jordan then asks if they had seen Taco and Zane, as the duo had gone quite a while ago to the dungeons. As they talk, the building begins to crumble, with debris beginning to fall from the higher levels. Angel states that it’s too dangerous for them to be underground while the tower is coming down, but Kawaki volunteers to use his powers to look for them while the others head back to the ship. Becoming intangible, the King of Comedy phases through the ground.

Floating in the air above, Jamal laughs and asks Shocker how he planned on fighting him from his position in the ground. Shocker irritatedly states to come down and fight him. Jamal smirks and says that if he is this weak now, once Jamal absorbs the eneroids, he will be demolished. However, Shocker merely smirks, confusing Jamal and psyching him out. The Green Devil captain informs him that three years ago, he had been utterly destroyed by a logia user because he had not known Haki at that time. He had been powerless to protect the ones he cared the most about. One of the reasons Shocker learned Haki from Sengoku is to be able to have a way of fighting back when the time comes. He states he is certain he can fight that man again, before mentioning that Jamal isn't even half as powerful as the admiral had been. 

Hearing this, Jamal becomes angered, stating that he’ll show him a reason to feel powerless, before using Energy Absorb , drawing in all the nuclear energy from the space rocks. As Jamal completes his power up, his form bursts with energy and glows. Shocker says that if that’s the case, then it’s his turn to power up too. Coating his arm in Busoshoku, he blows into his muscles, enlarging them. His haki courses along his body until only his face is left uncovered. Striking a pose, he deems this his brand-new transformation: Gear Fourth: Boundman .

Shocker's Gear Fourth: Boundman

Move Index

Chapter Text

Meanwhile, in the dungeons, Taco and Zane are about ready to leave. The duo mention how they looked around most of the cells and that they were all empty. Taco says there’s only one left, but with the rumbling coming from above, maybe they should assume no one is there and retreat. However, at that moment, a voice whispers for help. Taco and Zane quickly rush to the final cell, peering inside. They see a light-skinned young man with spiky, blond hair held by a black bandana. The man wears tattered black clothes and a black cloak, a saber lying a few feet away from him. The man is slumped against the wall, tied by chains. As the duo enter the cell and ask if he’s okay, the mysterious man simply asks them to help free him. As Zane touches the chains, he becomes weakened, with the man telling them the chains are made of sea stone, but the lock binding them are not. At that moment, Kawaki phases through the ground, startling the three of them. Kawaki tells his friends that Shocker is fighting and that they need to hurry back to the ship, but Zane tells him he wishes to help the captive first.

Back on the ship, as the others prepare to ship out, Adam looks toward the top of the tower and sees the two in a standoff. He sees Jamal’s form, but wonders how Shocker became so big…

Shocker’s new form bounces up and down, his head seeming small compared to the rest of his huge, muscled body. His overcoat is off, tied around his waist, and a ribbon of steam hovers around his neck and back. Jamal is stunned for a moment, then proceeds to laugh, mocking Shocker as he asks what his bowling ball appearance will do to him. In response, Shocker flies straight at Jamal, who shoots a Nova Ray at him. Shocker dodges it whilst propelling himself next to Jamal. He uses Gomu Gomu no Kong Gun , the attack so powerful Jamal cannot block it, and is sent crashing into the ground.

As Jamal struggles to rise, blood coming out of his mouth, he wonders how Shocker managed to drastically increase his strength by so much so quickly. However, he has no time to ponder, as he barely dodges Shocker slamming into the ground with Gomu Gomu no Rhino Schneider . Using Ryusei to fly, Jamal begins to dart through the air, but Shocker follows him, the two clashing repeatedly, though Shocker is clearly overpowering him. Jamal, panicking, uses Galick Blaster , but this time, Shocker seemingly creates duplicates of his arms, and uses Gomu Gomu no Kong Organ , punching through each hit and slamming into Jamal consecutively. 

As Jamal flies backwards, he states that in this form, he is the strongest there is, and that Shocker will be eviscerated. Gathering as much energy as he can, Jamal condenses it all into a single massive sphere, the Sema . Throwing the giant attack at Shocker, he tells him to begone. However, Shocker crosses his arms, tanking the attack. As the explosion rocks the top of the tower, Shocker reveals that he managed to somewhat protect himself. As Jamal is in disbelief, the Green Devil captain flies above him and enlarges his fist to truly massive proportions. Shocker states that Jamal is the one who is going down, before using his most powerful attack at the moment: Gomu Gomu no King Kong Gun . The massive fist hammers into Jamal, slamming him downward with such destructive force that he plummets through all the floors of the tower, the tower itself collapsing due to the strength of the blow. As the Heaven Tower crumbles, Shocker, flying away, hopes that his friends were able to escape unharmed. He then deflates like a balloon, and falls, unconscious, towards the sea.

Move Index

Chapter Text

When Shocker groggily comes to, he notes that he is in the doctor’s office on board the Stormy, Zane peering over him. Zane joyfully notes his awakening, hugging his captain before calling the other members of the crew. They all rush in, happy to see their friend well. Shocker wonders what happened, as he is positive he defeated Jamal, but does not have much recollection of the events after that. Taco tells him they saw him win, but after that he began falling, and he would have fallen into the ocean if not for the mystery man they had saved. Shocker, confused about who they were talking about, asks who saved him. 

Zane flashes back to a several hours ago, when he, Taco, and Kawaki had worked to free the man. Breaking the lock with Kawaki’s Spectral Sword, Taco quickly unraveled the chains on the man. The man thanked the trio, picking up his sword. He then noted that the place really was crumbling, and Taco stated they needed to get back to their ship. The young man told them he could help, as he revealed he had eaten an Ope Ope Dupli (Op Op Dupli). Using Room , he had created a large room encompassing most of the tower, and used Shambles to teleport them above ground. From there, he had easily done another transportation to teleport them onto the ship, and when they saw Shocker falling, he had saved him, as well. Back in the present, Shocker says he wants to talk to this mystery man and thank him.

Meanwhile, at the ruins of the Heaven Tower on Waford, a buff, old, dark-skinned man with a black cloak walks around the rubble. The old man has slicked-back, gray hair and a gray beard to match. He wears a black toga covering only half of his torso, part of his chest and abs being exposed, with dark marking lining his torso and face. He grips a staff with a skull on top of it. The old man asks if “he” is around here, and remarkably, the staff replies to its master, stating it didn’t sense his soul. Looking around some more, the man uncovers a large piece of rubble, finding Jamal underneath, unconscious, bloodied, and battered.  The old man states that their “friend” is in a state of comatose, and that they must see what they can do…

As the others step out onto the deck, the mystery man is being watched by Adam. The Green Devil swordsman states that for all they know, the man could be an enemy, but Shocker states he doesn't think so, since he saved him. Shocker thanks the man, then asks for his name. The man is revealed to be and introduced as Tazawa D. Nitro, captain of the Flying Dragon Pirates, and a man worth 434,000,000 beli. Jordan with a start recognizes that name, stating that he is one of the four Unholy Meteorites, of which Shocker is a part of. Shocker wonders about this, believing there to only be three in the group, but Nitro informs him he is indeed the fourth member, and that he had entered the New World a month before the others had all converged on Sabaody three years ago. As Angel asks why he isn’t with his pirate crew, Nitro becomes somber, stating that it is a sad story. Yato tells them they’ve got time to listen to him, so Nitro flashes back, beginning to tell the crew his background and the circumstances leading to his capture... 

Flying Dragon Pirates Captain

One of the Four Unholy Meteorites (like Shocker)

Tazawa D. Nitro

Bounty: 434,000,000

Dupli Fruit: Ope Ope Dupli

Move Index

Chapter Text

Remembering back, Nitro begins his story with his childhood. The flashback opens on Bulder Island in the South Blue, 23 years ago. The island was small and rugged, with craggy cliffs rising from the sea and dense forests covering much of the land. Nitro was born there to a single mother, Tazawa D. Rona, a woman who married into the infamous D. clan. Despite the hardships she faced, Rona was a beacon of strength and determination, her spirit being an unyielding guide for Nitro as he watched her do her best with the little she had. Following his birth, his mother fell terribly ill, her once-vibrant energy sapped away by a mysterious ailment. Yet, simply through sheer force of will, Rona survived, raising Nitro until he was 5 years old.

One rainy day, the sky dark and thunderclouds ominous, Rona felt herself on death's door. The rain pattered against the roof of their small home, a rhythm that matched the slowing beats of her heart. She held Nitro close, her frail arms trembling but her voice steady. She whispered to him, her breathing shallow as it pained her to even speak. She begged for her dear Nitro to continue living on, no matter what, promising him that he will find the strength to survive. With those final words, she passed away, leaving Nitro all alone in a world that seemed suddenly vast and unkind. The loss of his mother hit him like a tidal wave, drowning him in sorrow and uncertainty.

Since then, the young boy tried living with the other villagers. However, due to Bulder being an impoverished island, most of the time the villagers neglected him in favor of looking out for themselves. They were hardened by their own struggles, their empathy eroded by years of scarcity and hardship. Nitro learned to fend for himself, scavenging for food and finding shelter wherever he could. The loneliness was a constant companion, but he refused to let it break him. He survived like that for years, each day a testament to his resilience and the quiet strength his mother had instilled in him.

At the age of 19, Nitro was still living on the fringes of the village, his presence barely acknowledged by the other inhabitants. However, one day an event occurred that would change his life as he knew it. As he was out on a small raft, fishing to try and get a meal, he saw a pirate ship heading towards the beach. The ship was an ominous sight, its black sails billowing in the wind. Having heard that pirates were ruthless killers, he docked back at the harbor and ran to the village as fast as possible to warn everyone. He burst into the main square, his voice cracking with urgency as he shouted out his warning. But the villagers, jaded and mistrustful, believed this to be a joke, and ignored him as they continued working.

Nitro felt a pang of despair and frustration, but then reasoned that he had done all he could for them. His sense of duty clashed with the harsh reality of their indifference. Packing his belongings into a small chest, he ran into a nearby cave to wait out the attack. The cave was a place of refuge, its dark, cool interior offering a brief respite from the chaos outside. He huddled there, the hours stretching into an eternity as he listened to the distant sounds of screams and destruction.

Four hours later, as the screams and destruction subsided, Nitro nervously went back to the village. The sight that greeted him was one of utter devastation. The area was almost completely destroyed, with houses burned down and ransacked. The air was thick with the acrid smell of smoke and the eerie silence of desolation. As he looked around the eerie town, he quickly realized everyone was either dead or taken as slaves. Completely shaken, Nitro threw up, his stomach heaving with the horror of what he had witnessed. His mind raced with conflicting emotions; anger at the villagers for not listening, guilt for not being able to save them, and a profound sadness for the lives lost.

As he trudged to the beach, his heart heavy with grief, he saw a dinghy left on the shore, bobbing gently in the water. With nowhere else to go, Nitro put his belongings on the small boat and set off, searching for a new place to live. The sea stretched out before him, vast and unknown, much like his future. He had no destination in mind, only a determination to survive and perhaps find a place where he could belong. As he sailed away from Bulder Island, Nitro carried with him the memories of his mother, the lessons she had taught him, and a steely resolve to forge his own path in the world.

Tazawa D. Nitro (4 years ago, age 19)

Chapter Text

The following day, Nitro arrived at Baterilla. As he walked through the tropical island, noting its palm trees and cabanas, he attempted to talk to the townspeople to get some help and direct him to the town’s leader. However, the villagers, thinking him to be a pirate, quickly called the town guard to arrest him. With the militia on their way, Nitro began to panic, when suddenly a blue-haired teenage girl pulled him away and pushed him into an alley. As the militia men ran past, Nitro saw she wore an orange dress and a yellow headband. He tried asking her a question, but she quickly shushed him and, after waiting a moment, led him through the town until they reached a small cave on the outskirts of the village. 

The young woman told Nitro to follow her inside, but Nitro shook her hand off. He told her thanks for the save, but that he doesn’t easily trust people, and demanded to know her name. The girl giggles and introduces herself as McStash Levi, and that the cave was their base. Nitro asked who she was referring to when she said “our”, and she stated that she and her grandfather lived in the cave together, calling her grandpa outside. An old man with a long white beard and a mohawk hobbles outside, introducing himself as McStash Rab. As Nitro entered their base, Levi began to prepare food, telling Nitro to stay with them as long as he liked. For the first time in what seemed like forever, Nitro actually smiled. 

McStash Rab

Later that night, as Levi slept on her grandfather’s lap and Nitro ate his dinner, the young man asks Rab why the two lived in a cave rather than the village. Rab replied that for as long as he could remember, the people of Baterilla always kept a close watch for pirates ever since Portgas D. Ace, the son of the 1st Pirate King, was revealed to be born there. As Nitro ate the remains of his bread, he asked what that had to do with Levi. Rab explained he inherited legal guardianship of Levi 12 years ago (16 years from the current story), after both of her parents died in a freak accident. However, Rab himself was on an island a day’s voyage away, so he had to pack his belongings and prepare for the move. By the time he had arrived, his granddaughter had raised too much suspicion, the townspeople believing her to be Gold Roger’s child, as the marines had guessed that the Pirate King’s child was hiding out somewhere in the South Blue due to Roger’s prolonged stay there. Even with Rab vouching for her safety, the town still wished to hand her to the marines. As a compromise, Rab agreed to their immediate exile. The people had assumed they went off the island, but in reality they lived in the cave hideout for years.

Suddenly, at that moment, Rab looked towards the ground, seeing slight rumbling. He told Nitro that it probably meant the villagers had tracked them and found their secret hideout, and a mob was on their way. Nitro panicked, wondering what they should do, but Rab calmly handed Nitro Levi’s hand-drawn charts, telling the boy to take his granddaughter out to sea. When Nitro questioned Rab coming with them, the old man smiled and stated he had already lived his life, but if Levi stayed on Baterilla, she wouldn’t be able to live hers. Grabbing his walking stick, he said he would lead the mob away while they escaped on Nitro’s boat. Nitro told him that it wasn’t necessary and that he didn’t have to, but Rab simply grabbed his hand and begged him to keep Levi safe. Nitro, understanding the old man’s predicament, fought back tears and agreed. 

Running down the beach with Levi slung on his back, Nitro ran down the beach towards his small dinghy. As he put Levi down, she stirred and woke up, groggily asking what was happening. As she heard shouting from the beach, she looked over Nitro’s shoulder and saw Rab standing his ground against the mob. As Nitro pushed them off, Levi worriedly asked why Rab wasn’t on the boat with them. Rab turned toward them, and after seeing their boat safely leave the shore, he simply shouted to Levi and told her he loved her. Raising his hand in a peace sign, he was then shot by the mob and killed, falling face forward in the sand.

Levi screamed and cried until her voice went hoarse. Nitro attempted to talk to her, but she would only push him away and weep for her grandfather. After nearly a day had passed, the duo sat in silence. Levi apologized to Nitro, stating she knew it was not his fault, with Nitro stating he understood her. Levi weakly responded that he couldn’t possibly know the pain of loving someone as hard as that and then losing them before your eyes, but Nitro sympathetically said that in fact, the very same thing happened to him many years ago. Levi apologized, before wiping her tears and stating that she wanted to honor Rab's wish for her to live. Nitro said he planned on starting a pirate crew where all the members would be treated equally and loved, like a family. He told Levi he would have to drop her off at the next island so that she can try and live there. However, Levi refused, stating that she wished to stay with him, becoming the first member of the crew and its navigator. Together, the duo officially formed the Flying Dragon Pirates, setting off in search of more friends.

Chapter Text

The next day, the duo arrived on Centaurea, another island in the South Blue. As they wandered through the town, Levi asked the people about their home, curious about the island. An elderly lady told her that 10 years ago, Centaurea was the location of a large-scale battle between the Revolutionary Army and an invading army from a neighboring nation. Following the revolutionaries’ victory, Centaurea was liberated, and the people were free to do as they wanted to, electing to use a mayoral system. As Nitro looked around some surrounding stalls for supplies, a large explosion was heard from a solitary house on a nearby hill. Levi worriedly asked what happened, but the old woman simply rolled her eyes and told the two that the quack doctor was at it again. 

Interested, Nitro and Levi walked up the hill towards the house. As Nitro knocked the door, the door swung open, clearly not locked. Smoke immediately billowed from the opening, causing the two to cough. Levi called inside, asking if everything’s alright. Soon, a small, elderly man hobbled over to the door. He had light skin, with a bald crown of receding white hair. He sported a bristly white mustache and beard, and wore spectacles on his face. He was dressed in a black dress shirt, over which he wore a white lab coat. He held two vials in his hands. The small man laughs, welcoming them to his lab, and introducing himself as Vokamir. Nitro asked if he was hurt from the explosion, but the man simply responded heartily that science was never risk free.

"Quack" Scientist

Vokamir

Inviting them inside, Vokamir jumped back up to his small work table. As the duo looked around, marveling at his various test tubes, Vokamir explained that he was a scientist who loved experimenting with different compounds to create new ones. Levi asked him why he lived so far away from everyone else, and the small man sombered, stating that he was a doctor, but due to his eccentric nature, the people of his town deemed him a quack, a fraud, and refused his help when he would offer. The old man stated that he never held a grudge against any of them, as they simply couldn’t understand the brilliance of the science he was working on, and so he was content being alone. However, as Nitro looked at him, he noted his sad demeanor. Nitro surprisingly asked Vokamir if he would join his pirate crew as the doctor, shocking Levi and interesting Vokamir. The old man laughed and stated he would love to, as he could finally have people to care for. Levi whispered to Nitro, asking if it was a good idea to ask such an old man to be a pirate, but Vokamir, overhearing them, reassured them that he could take care of himself. With Nitro affirming his decision, Vokamir officially joined the crew.

A few days later, the trio arrived on Beer Beli Island, an island in the south known for being the world’s leading manufacturer of gold beer. As the trio ventured through the town, Vokamir began talking to a brewer, learning that gold beer is made from the sap of special Gold-Leaf Trees only found on the island. Suddenly, a loud commotion was heard from the bar. As people peered through the windows and the shouting increased in volume, a young woman was forcibly thrown out of the tavern, landing roughly on the ground. The woman had light skin and long, wavy brown hair. She wore a magenta bikini top, accompanied by a jean jacket worn over it and a pair of jeans, an alcohol bottle in her hands. 

Levi wondered if the woman was okay, but then the townspeople laughed, stating that it was typical for “Drunken” Karta. As the woman, Karta, rubbed her head, a large, muscled man came out the door, clearly the bar owner. He shouted at her, asking if she thought it was okay to deplete their reserves of gold beer and drink the bar dry, and that she could put him out of business. However, she merely giggled uncontrollably, clearly drunk. Becoming infuriated, the man asked her if everything was a game to her, and moved to punch her. However, quick as a flash, his punch was intercepted in the palm of Nitro’s hand, the young man not even struggling against the muscular bartender. Nitro expressed his disgust that not only would the man raise his hand against a woman, but one clearly not in her right state of mind at that. The bartender told him to mind his own business, attempting to shove Nitro, but Nitro simply punched the man square in the jaw, sending him flying back into his bar as the crowd stood, stunned.   

"Drunken" Karta

Nitro shook his hand, wondering if he could always do that, as Vokamir and Levi stood shocked behind him, clearly wondering the same thing. As Nitro held out his hand to help Karta up, she began tearing up, wondering to herself why he was being so kind despite never having met before. However, she simply smirked and moved his hand away, getting up alone. Getting in his face, she told Nitro that being drunk IS her “right state of mind”, before letting up and thanking him for his help. As Vokamir and Levi introduced themselves, the old man jollily exclaimed they were pirates, causing Nitro and Levi to shush him quickly, though thankfully the villagers did not believe him. Karta pulled out a deck of tarot cards, and began reading them. She explained that her cards had predicted that she would find some friends that day, but she had given up all hope, as the cards had told her the same message every day at the same time for as long as she could remember. As she read the cards that day, however, she is shocked to see that the message had changed now reading "Only you can determine who you are friends with, and how your life goes". Seeing this, she resolved that this was a once in a lifetime opportunity to leave the island she hated. Hiccuping, she asked the trio if she could tag along with them, as she didn’t want to lose the first people she viewed as friends. Nitro agreed, accepting her into the crew as a strategist.

Chapter Text

As the four friends drifted on their small boat, Karta shifted uncomfortably. She guessed that they hadn’t been pirates for very long, as Nitro sighed and stated that they did need to get a proper ship from somewhere. Vokamir hoped that they would find one on the next island they arrived at, to which Levi responded that they weren’t too far away from an island according to her map. Nitro asked her if she knew where they were going, to which she responded she knew that the town they would be arriving at, Magnoli, had a port and vessel dock, as the town was host to a large shipping company. Nitro decided they would ask around to see the possibilities of converting a cargo ship to a pirate vessel.

As they arrived on the island and began walking through the open-air market to stock up on food, Levi learned that the mayor of the town was also the owner of the shipping company, living in a large mansion on a hill overlooking the rest of the village. Suddenly, as Nitro picked up an elephant tuna to evaluate it, a young light-skinned man with orange hair swiped the fish out of his hand. The man wore a black, raggedy blazer with a rugged brown trench coat over it, a black tophat sat on his head. The young man apologized, before darting between stalls, stealing food so fast the vendors could not react until after he had run away. As Nitro began to give chase, Karta followed him, stating they’ll have better luck if they both chased him. Nitro shouted back to Levi and Vokamir, ordering them to head to the mayor’s house to see about their request for a ship. 

As the duo chased the man through the crowded stalls, they realized he was much much faster than a regular human should have been. He jumped across stalls athletically, weaving in and out of the traffic. As Nitro ran hard to keep up with him, suddenly, the man turned around and punched Nitro three times so rapidly he couldn’t register the attack. As Nitro rose, the man followed up with a rapid leg kick, but Nitro managed to block his kick and punch him in return. As the man laughed and stated Nitro had good reflexes, he picked up his sack of stolen food and continued fleeing. As the two began chasing him again, the young man shouted back that he was sorry, but that this was important, leading Nitro to wonder why. Karta, becoming irritated, stated that she’d end it, before throwing one of her razor-sharp cards with pinpoint accuracy. The card barely misses the man, as he ducks into an alley. 

As the duo reached the alley, they looked around but saw the man had disappeared. However, they heard a groan coming from one of the walls. Checking it out, Nitro uncovered a hidden passageway leading into a dank, disheveled, cramped living space. They saw the thief rapidly preparing the food he had stolen, and on the floor, a sickly woman laid, barely awake and coughing up blood. The woman smiled weakly and told her son they had visitors. As the young man is introduced as Sonic, he ran to stand protectively in front of his mother, stating he had to steal to save her life. Sonic’s mother coughed weakly, telling her son he knew stealing was wrong, and to not bother with her, but her son simply refused, stating he would do what he could to save her. Nitro, being reminded of his own mother Rona, empathized with the man. 

Sonic

Sonic shakily attempted to hand his mother her food, but she dropped the plate, the food spilling on the ground. As Sonic held his mother in her arms, she stated that she could feel that it was her time. Sonic, beginning to cry, pleaded with his mother to survive, but his mother simply asked the duo whether they would possibly watch over Sonic. As Karta cried inaudibly and nodded, Nitro merely stood in somber silence, watching the scene unfold. The woman thanked them, then gave her son a final message, stating that she had always loved him and knew he would survive in this accursed world. Drawing her last breath, Sonic’s mother then passed away. 

Sonic cried profusely, rocking his mother in his arms. Karta attempted to comfort him, but he angrily told her to back off. Nitro spoke up, telling him he knew the exact pain he was feeling, and that it was something that could never be forgotten, but that if he surrounds himself with people who care for him, they can lessen that pain. Sonic asked if the two of them would be able to lessen his pain, and Nitro told him they would be willing to, if he chose to come with them. Sonic somberly stood and laid his mother to rest, crossing her arms and praying over her body. Soon after, he stood, wiping his tears away. He jokingly stated that it was quite the way to meet new friends, but that they should get going.

The duo informed Sonic of their status as they walked back. Sonic agreed to becoming a pirate, not knowing what else he could do otherwise. Nitro told him that he shouldn’t worry, since their other two friends should be getting them a ship soon enough, and that they’ll be able to leave together once they do. However, at that moment, Karta spots Vokamir, Levi, and a lanky man running down the hill, away from the mayor’s mansion, a group of watch guards chasing them. The lanky man had dark-blue short hair with a part of it sticking out like a leaf stem, and wore a white shirt, blue pants, and brown utility belt. As the trio fell in with their friends, Sonic exclaimed his surprise at seeing the man, introduced as Roy, revealing the two to be friends. Nitro asked what happened. Levi told them that when they had gone to see the mayor, he didn’t care about their troubles and loudly and rudely refused for them to take one of his precious ships, dismissing them in less than a minute. However, as the duo wondered what to do, they met Roy. Roy told them that since his father owned the docks, he grew up with shipwright skills. He had designed and built one of the ships in the harbor, and after hearing their plight, he had decided to give it to them. 

Roy

However, as he told his father his plans, the mayor became enraged, stating that he would never allow a vessel that made him so much money to be given away. The mayor had told Roy that all he did was abuse and deplete their food reserves. Roy angrily stated he did not eat up all their food, as he was sharing it with Jet, a friend in need. This news infuriated the mayor even further, who called his guards to place all of them under arrest. Roy had grabbed Vokamir and Levi by the hand and led them away, telling them they’ll run to his ship. As the short flashback ended, Nitro asked Roy why he was helping them. Roy stated that he was tired of his father’s annoying attitude, and that he had been preparing to leave for weeks anyway, hoping to take Somic with him. Roy simply laughed and stated that instead of asking for payment and them buying the ship, he’ll simply come with them. Nitro exclaimed that they were pirates, but Roy said he didn’t mind becoming a pirate if it meant leaving his home. 

As they ran through the market, Roy pulled out a pink, heart-shaped fruit, handing it to Nitro. Before Nitro could ask what it was, Roy instructed Nitro to eat it, stating that it was a power that could help them. Not understanding why, Nitro ate the fruit, noting its incredibly sweet taste. Roy told him he had just eaten an Ope Ope Dupli (Op Op Dupli), a paramecia dupli allowing him to control everything within a set room. Nitro asked him what he was talking about, and Roy quickly explained the concept of devil fruits to Nitro, stating he had read the Devil Fruit Encyclopedia as a kid. He said that it had washed up on the shore near the harbor a few years ago, but he had never eaten it because he did not want to lose the ability to swim. Nitro, in comic irritation, yelled that HE did not wish to lose his swimming capability, either, but by then it was too late. Roy told him to figure out the ability and use it to help them escape. Concentrating, Nitro opened up a room around them, the guards, and a large section of the market. He then telepathically made the stalls fall and crash into the guards behind them, halting their progress and allowing his group to escape. He smiled, stating that maybe this power wouldn’t be so bad after all.

Arriving at the harbor, Roy directed them towards a large brigantine-style ship with gold stars lining its body. Roy told them they’ll use his pride and joy to escape. The group quickly loaded their gear onto the ship, noting the alarm bells of the town ringing. As they all got on the ship and began to leave the harbor, Roy’s father stood at the dock, screeching at him to return. Roy simply laughed, stating that he’s going to adventure with his newfound friends, and that he was quitting the family business.

Chapter Text

As the crew relaxed from their escape, Roy formally introduced himself, stating that he wanted to be the crew’s shipwright. Sonic stated that he could be the cook, as he had experience in cooking since he did so for himself and his mother from a young age. Meanwhile, Nitro tried out his powers, with Vokamir and Karta marveling. Nitro simply wondered if it would be enough to protect his friends, and vowed that no matter what, he would make sure they have the greatest family in the world. Together, the crew decided to name their ship the Fairy Wind. Levi told them they would soon be reaching Reverse Mountain, telling Nitro the Grand Line is where serious pirates are. Nitro determinedly stated that he’s serious about his goal to, and states that they’ll brave the Grand Line together. With that, the small group of six sailed up Reverse Mountain and into the stretch of sea. 

Their first recruit in the Grand Line was a young man named Vance. He had been close friends and traveling companions with Wolfide Jareel. The duo had been shunned by their village for eating Devil Fruits and being deemed as freaks. After meeting the duo in a bar and drinking with them, Nitro extended his hand to both of them, inviting them to join his crew, as they were clearly alone. However, while Vance believed it to be a good idea, Jareel refused, stating that Vance was the only person on his team. As Vance truly did wish to join the crew, they decided to part ways.

Vance (Jared's Friend)

Continuing through the Grand Line, their ranks began to expand. On one island, they met Cobalt Mayco, a swordsman and former militia leader who was thrown out and swindled out of his money by his wife, leaving him with their 10-year-old son, Ron. Meanwhile, Mayco’s best friend, Mokumo, was a ladies man and after he had an affair, his wife had kicked him out, cursing him and hoping to never see him again. As Mayco joined the crew as a swordsman and Ron joined as an apprentice, Mayco spoke up for his friend, ensuring the crew Mokumo was a changed man and would never do something horrible like that again. After initially refusing, Nitro begrudgingly accepted him into the fold, learning that he is the eater of the Kumo Kumo no Mi (Cloud Cloud Fruit), a logia devil fruit that allowed him to create, manipulate, and become clouds. 

                             Mayco                                                              Ron                                                     Mokumo

They met Connatire Zack, a sniper wielding dual pistols, on an otherwise uninhabited island, sitting in solitude as he had no friends. In Bosco Country, they met Mulan, a sniper rifle user, who in the country was a known criminal-turned-bounty hunter known as the “Rogue Sniper”, and who had a bounty of her own of 29,000,000. Following a brief altercation stemming from a misunderstanding with Levi, Mulan asked to join the crew, blushing as her eyes met Zack’s. Continuing on their journey, they met Sammy, a young man who loved public speaking and constantly annoyed his village mates with financial advice. Jora, a young man with the dream of creating a world-wide communication system, decided to join as well. On another island that frowned upon art, they met Jonas, a man who loved painting, and Akira, a cute but shy wood sculptor. In another land, a dancing man named Jeeter wished to share his dancing with others and learn dances from all over the world. On yet another isle, Nabih, an ex-mayor of his village who was impeached for being useless at his job, found refuge with the crew. 

Connatire Zack

"Rogue Sniper" Mulan

Bounty: 29,000,000

Sammy

Jora

Jonas

Akira

Nabih

During that time, Nitro began his journey to becoming a skilled swordsman under the guidance of Mayco. Each day, they dedicated hours to intense training sessions on the ship's deck, the sound of clashing steel ringing out over the waves. Nitro found himself engrossed in mastering the intricate techniques Mayco demonstrated, his determination growing with every passing lesson. He started to integrate his unique dupli ability with his burgeoning swordsmanship, creating innovative combat strategies that bewildered his opponents.

During one of their breaks, as they rested under the midday sun, Nitro and Mayco discussed his progress. Mayco praised Nitro's quick learning and his creativity in blending his abilities. Their conversation drew the attention of Levi and Vance, who had been watching from the sidelines. The two crewmates joined in, sharing their thoughts and offering encouragement. Levi excitedly suggested a few daring moves he thought Nitro should try, while Vance, ever the strategist, pointed out potential tactical advantages of Nitro’s fruit power. The camaraderie and shared excitement in that moment highlighted to Nitro the strong bonds already forming within his crew, fueling his resolve to become a man worthy of leading them.

Chapter Text

After a year of traveling, adventuring, and meeting friends, the crew finally arrived at the Sabaody Archipelago, a month before Shocker and the others would arrive there. By that time, Nitro had accrued a bounty of 297,000,000 beli, which the crew prided him on, despite him repeatedly telling them his goal is not to become the pirate king. Vance told him that regardless, he was still an inspiration, to have gained such a high bounty after just a year, though Nitro shrugs, stating “Green Hat” and “Orange Flash” gained higher bounties than him in just a few months. They docked on the archipelago’s Grove 37, the crew fanning out to find out how to get their ship coated to head to the New World. 

However, while walking through a shady grove with Levi, Karta, and Vance, Nitro suddenly stopped after hearing a gun lock on him. Looking at the building above, he saw a tall man wearing a dark-blue jester’s uniform, with a visor over his eyes and a blue hood over his head. He smiled wildly, sticking his long tongue out as he showed them an array of multiple guns on his person. He introduced himself as Bicker, leader of the most dangerous gang on the island. However, at that moment, a voice refuted that statement, saying he was an idiot. To their left, a young woman with light-brown hair in a ponytail appeared, wearing white pageant gloves, a low-cut green dress with green feathers attached to the back, glasses, and a yellow ribbon tied to her side. She is wielding a long whip menacingly. She is introduced as Vergia, who claims her gang is the most notorious on Sabaody. 

Gang Leader

Bicker

Gang Leader

Vergia

Nitro wanted to fight, turning to address them both. However, suddenly, a multitude of purple, rune-like symbols appeared in the air in front of them all, and more appeared at the feet of Nitro and his friends, trapping the Flying Dragons in place. A young man with long, flowing green hair covering one of his eyes walked forward. He wore a dark-red/black ornate knee-length overcoat, a rapier at his waist. His visible eye glowed purple, the same color as the runes. He introduced himself as Justine, the user of the Runu Runu no Mi (Rune Rune Fruit), a paramecia that allowed him to create complex traps that had special effects depending on how he wrote it using runes. He claimed that the Flying Dragons were his prey, as his gang controlled the area. 

Gang Leader

Justine

Devil Fruit: Runu Runu no Mi

As the trio of gang leaders met up and began arguing loudly amongst themselves, Nitro spoke up, interrupting them. He told them that they didn’t really want to fight him, as pirates and gangs were two very different things. Bicker laughed, stating that they each had a bounty of 50,000,000 beli, and that he should stay out of their business. However, Karta revealed Nitro’s huge bounty, utterly shocking all three of them. Nitro then told them that they could fight against each other in a three-way war that wouldn’t help anybody, or they could team up and maybe even beat back some of the marine presence on the island. After explaining to them how their abilities could complement each other, the gang and the Flying Dragon crew teamed up and attacked a horde of marines in Grove 51. During the battle, Justine, Vergia, and Bicker realized they were indeed in sync, and had spent so much time fighting they never tried to work together.

As the gangs retreated at night, Nitro talked with the three of them. He told them that as a pirate, he was planning on heading into the New World, but that he was glad he was of some help to them. Bicker then surprised him by telling him he had disbanded his gang because he wanted to join up with his crew, shocking Vergia as she had done the same thing with the same intention. The both of them looked at Justine, who at first did not wish to admit it, but eventually stated he had done the same. Smiling, Nitro accepted them into his crew. The next day, as he introduced the three newest members of the crew to the rest of the Flying Dragons, Roy told his captain that Silvers Rayleigh had successfully coated their ship, and that they were ready to head into the New World. Briefly journeying down through the depths of the sea, the crew chose not to stop at Fish-Man Island, as Nitro was excited to brave the New World.

Chapter Text

As the crew sailed through the New World, many members noted how similar and yet different it was to Paradise. They journeyed to a few islands, exploring, learning more about the world, and just generally being a family together. One day as they were on the open sea, Levi spotted a singular man in a dingy, alerting the others to his presence. The man had dark-orange hair spiked upward, with a strand running from the back of his head. He had light stubble, and wore dark adventure gear along with a long, black cloak. Curiously, his right arm was a prosthetic made of metal. As Sonic waved and the man waved back, the man and his small boat were suddenly swallowed whole by a massive sea king, shocking the crew.

Levi screamed for Nitro to help him, to which Nitro said he was on it. Creating a large room, Nitro sliced the sea king into clean pieces, opening it up and allowing for the man to escape. As he safely landed on the Fairy Wind and the sea king fell below the waves, the man thanked Nitro for his help, though mentioned that he would’ve taken care of it if he hadn’t intervened. Smiling, the man introduced himself as “Sea’s Ace” Clyde, a pirate with an astronomically large bounty of 1,770,000,000 beli. The Flying Dragons began to freak out, as Vance stated Nitro’s bounty had just been updated to 434,000,000 following  being blamed as an instigator of a revolution in a World Government nation. Mayco remembered with a shock that he had heard his name before, stating that Clyde had apparently fought on equal footing with one of the current Four Emperors in the past. Clyde confirmed this, stating that that was how he lost his arm. 

"Sea's Ace" Clyde

Bounty: 1,770,000,000

Karta grinned and said that that must mean Clyde’s incredibly strong, to which the man simply laughed and stated that he was fine on his own thanks to his mastery of Haki. Seeing that not one member of their crew knew what Haki was, Clyde decided to give them the overall basics of Haki and demonstrate all three types to them. Using Kenbunshoku, he accurately sensed that two sea kings were about to surface, shocking the crew when his prediction came to pass. Using Busoshoku on his left arm, Clyde violently slammed one of the massive beats back into the water, shocking the crew with his power. He then unleashed a burst of Haoshoku, immediately scaring the other away as it dived beneath the waves.

A few hours later, as the Flying Dragons partied and marveled at Clyde’s power, Clyde informed Nitro that knowing Haki was pretty much a requirement for all those attempting to survive in the New World, and that they should train and practice to learn at least Busoshoku and Kenbunshoku when they could. Nitro, understanding, thanked Clyde for his help, and said that he would use his new skills to protect his family. Seeing how close the crew were, Clyde smiled, stating that what they had going was beautiful, and that he wouldn’t mind becoming a part of it. Nitro officially makes him an honorary member of the crew, and Clyde thanks him, stating that he’ll continue voyaging alone but will come to their aid whenever they need it, and hands Nitro a piece of the vivre card he had made. He explained that he’ll always have Nitro’s location with this, and that he’ll be sure to check in when he can. As the crew bid him farewell, Clyde turned mysteriously to Karta, stating that she reminded him of somebody as Karta wondered what he was talking about, though he shrugged and said simply he didn't remember. The man then jumped in his dinghy and sailed away, though he promised to see them around. Nitro, waving back, simply laughed, wondering what a curious man Clyde was.

Chapter Text

However, disaster would strike two weeks later. The crew had been staying on a particular island for a few days, the inhabitants recognizing them more as adventurers than pirates. As various crew members relaxed in the town, having split up, Nitro walked towards the town’s market to stock up on supplies, leading a group of Karta, Vance, Mayco, Levi, Sammy, and Roy. As they chattered, they talked about their interest in exploring Zou, the Phantom Island that they had heard so much about. As he forged on, however, Nitro soon realized something was wrong, as his friends' voices grew dimmer and dimmer, and then were silent completely. Looking back, he saw that his friends were gone, having inexplicably disappeared despite being right behind him. As he called out for them, he then realized with a start that the town’s inhabitants were missing, as well. Wondering how this could be happening, Nitro deduced somebody must have been doing something to him.

From a rooftop, a voice said it seemed he finally figured it out. As the spell Nitro was caught in broke apart, the Flying Dragon captain saw that he was really in a dark alleyway. As he shouted for the perpetrators to reveal themselves, the Karasu Trio of the Jamal Pirates jumped down from the buildings, surrounding him. Kolt cackled that he had used Gensō Musica  to put Nitro under an illusion and separate him from his friends. As Nitro readied his sword, Tsubaki swiftly ran her blade through his abdomen, making him stumble, before Hooter knocked him to the ground with a Haki-infused punch. The trio bound him with sea stone chains, stating that he should say goodbye to the pirate life, as his new occupation as a slave was about to begin. The last thing Nitro saw before blacking out was Hooter’s big owl head peering at him before knocking him out cold. From that day, he was taken to the Waford and made to work in the mines, mining eneroids for Jamal. He and his crew had been separated ever since.

As Nitro finishes his story and the flashback ends, Angel covers her mouth with her hands, sadly sympathizing with him. Zane begins to tear up, with Taco stating that that was horrible. Cruella is intrigued that Nitro’s crew is the one Jareel had told her about back on Sacremento Court. Adam asks Nitro what he plans to do, and the Flying Dragon captain states that he’s going to find and reunite with his crew. Sitting cross-legged and arms folded on the deck, Shocker immediately agrees. As everyone else wonders what he is agreeing to, Shocker jumps up and states that the Green Devils are going to help Nitro find his crew. As Adam tells Shocker to hold on, Kawaki states that there is unfortunately no guarantee his crew was still in one piece after three years, but Nitro states that he has to at least try and see for himself. Yato says that even so, with the New World being so vast, searching every island would be inefficient. Shocker simply laughs, telling them to think of it as a part of their journey, and that besides, Nitro had saved him and so he wanted to do something for him in return. Jordan laughs heartily, and Cruella grins, stating she expected nothing less of her captain. Shocker tells Yato to prepare a feast, as they are going to welcome him as their official ally. As the crew cheers and drinks to his arrival, for the first time in years, Nitro smiles. 

Move Index

Chapter Text

Woodsworth Island Arc

A few days later, the crew relaxes on the ship, going about their daily routines. As Taco fishes next to him, Shocker complains he is bored out of his mind, stating it’s been days since his fight with Jamal and that he’s ready for the next island already. Taco tells him they can’t rush adventure, and they’ll simply have to wait until they reach the next island. Suddenly, on the PA system, Nitro tells the crew to convene in the dining hall, as he has an announcement to tell them. As the crew gather, Zane wonders if everything is alright. Seeing Nitro hold up a Den Den Mushi, Yato wonders if he has his crew’s number, but Nitro responds he doesn't, as they had never thought they would separate and thus the thought never crossed their minds. Nitro informs them that he had used their Den Den Mushi to get into contact with some pirate captains in the area. Immediately, Adam unsheathes one of his swords and holds it threateningly to his throat, telling Nitro that if he sensed even a hint of lies, he’d cut his head off.

Nitro sighs and tells him to calm down and allow him to explain his plan. As he was trying to think about how he could get any leads on finding his crew, he remembered with a start that ever since they saw a member of the mink tribe in Paradise, many members of his crew had wanted to go to their homeland, Zou, and explore their culture. Nitro states that if by any chance they had been to Zou at all, the minks there could potentially give him some clues as to their whereabouts. He continues, stating the issue is that finding Zou is next to impossible without a vivre card or a mink on your crew, as the giant elephant the country rests on, Zunesha, roams the sea constantly. Nitro says that he tried sending out call requests to see if he could get any information, but as he was doing that, two individuals had called him and told them they could help him in exchange for his help in another task: defeating another pirate crew.

As the crew mull over this information, the Den Den Mushi suddenly rings again. As Nitro picks up the call, he notes that it is in fact that very two pirate captains they are talking about. One voice asks him if he’s come to a decision regarding their proposal, with Nitro stating he needs more time, as he is currently talking to his companions about it. However, Shocker suddenly grabs the snail and states his name, telling them his crew is willing to help. After a short moment of silence, both voices begin to laugh. One of them wonders when Shocker arrived in the New World, with the other stating it’s good to hear his voice after three long years. As Shocker demands to know who it is, his face suddenly lights up as they reveal themselves to be none other than Mulin “of the Shadows”, captain of the Phantom Crook Pirates, and “Orange Flash” Zypho, captain of the No Face Pirates, his Unholy Meteorite compatriots. 

As Shocker asks what’s going on and attempts to catch up with them, Mulin tells him that their crews have formed a pirate alliance to take down a common enemy of theirs, and that if he wanted to, the Green Devils could join them as well. Shocker laughs and says sure, stating that they’ll come to where they are. Mulin tells Angel the coordinates of the island they’re on, before telling the crew to track the signal of the call to find them, and that after meeting up on Woodsworth Island, they’ll start the mission. Zypho warns Shocker not to be late before the duo hang up. Doing some quick calculations, Jordan judges that based on their speed and where they received the call, they’re around a day’s ride away from their destination. Shocker smirks excitedly and slams his fists together, telling them it’s time for a fun adventure.

Chapter Text

The crew arrives at the island the following morning. As Shocker looks from the figurehead, he sees the island is huge, and that besides a surrounding beach, it is mostly a collection of densely-packed trees making a giant forest as far as he could see. As they dock the Super Stormy on the beach, Mulin’s ship, the Grand Scaler, is seen docked a few hundred feet away. As Shocker lands on the beach, his friends following him, he shouts for Zypho and Mulin to reveal themselves. As the duo emerge from Mulin’s ship, Shocker notes how their appearances have changed in three years. Mulin’s skin has tanned, and his hair has been cut a bit shorter, though he still fashions it in a spiky man bun. He now also has a goatee, and wears earrings on both ears. He now wears a long, black coat tied around the waist with a red rope, and a beige jacket over that. His massive broadsword is strapped to his back. Zypho, meanwhile, has spiked his orange hair more upward, and wears a dark-red headband in his hair. His outfit is colorful, consisting of an orange vest, yellow pants, a purple scarf, and a high-collared, red pirate captain’s coat draped over his shoulders. Mulin smirks and tells Shocker it’s been quite a while. 

Grand Scaler

Captain of the Phantom Crook Pirates

Mulin "of the Shadows"

Dupli Fruit: Kage Kage Dupli

Captain of the No Face Pirates

"Orange Flash" Zypho

Devil Fruit: Kopi Kopi no Mi

As Shocker smiles and asks them how they’ve been, Zypho grabs him by the collar and irritatedly tells Shocker that he never got over the fact that Shocker ruined his trip to Sabaody three years ago, and that he blames him for calling a navy admiral down on them. Shocker exasperatedly states that it wasn’t his fault, and that besides, Zypho was a jerk to Taco back then. Mulin sighs and tells the duo to shut up, as their childish argument was making him irritated. The duo both turn on him, with Zypho asking who Mulin thinks he is to be acting like the leader, while Shocker states that he should butt out. Zypho then turns to Shocker and brags, stating that he should follow their lead as they’re quite experienced in the New World, as evidenced by his updated bounty of 408,000,000 while Mulin’s bounty was updated to 398,000,000. Shocker is shocked at this, stating they are both so much higher up than him. Embarrassed, Nitro asks if this happens all the time between the three of them, and Angel sighs and says unfortunately, yes. 

Nitro walks over to the group and introduces himself to the two. Mulin states that he has heard of him, being the fourth member of their group, but Zypho states he must not have been making large enough waves if he never heard of him. Irritated, Nitro states his bounty is the highest of them all, being 434,000,000, while Adam irritatedly states that he’s been baited into their argument. Kawaki states with interest that this is the first time all four of the Unholy Meteorites are together in one place, and that he should find some sort of joke to make about them. Recomposing himself, Nitro asks Zypho and Mulin if they have what he needs. They both pull out vivre cards from their pockets, Mulin stating that these are the vivre cards for Zou itself, and that following it will take anyone to the island. As Nitro is about to take them, Zypho snatches his back, stating that that was proof they had them, but they still needed help in defeating their enemy first.

Nitro tells Shocker he doesn’t want to use the whole crew for this, as it could waste time that could be used in the search. He decides that the best idea is to split the crew up, since with Nitro there are 10 of them. Nitro suggests that Shocker, Adam, Angel, Taco, and Yato stay on Woodsworth and join the alliance, while he leads Cruella, Jordan, Zane, and Kawaki to Zou. As he asks the crew what they think, Cruella states that logically, this makes sense, as they could accomplish multiple missions at once. Taco asks if splitting up is the best idea, but Shocker agrees to it, stating that to him it made sense, and that his team will follow them to Zou when they’re done and that they should wait for them there. Nitro hands Shocker one of the vivre cards, telling him not to lose it, whilst pocketing the other one.

Adam states that he doesn’t mind splitting up, but asks how the Woodsworth Team are expected to follow them to Zou if they take the ship. Nitro says they can steal the vessel of the crew they are about to fight after taking them down, or hitch a ride from one of their allies, with Zypho irritatedly exclaiming to not volunteer him for things. However, Jordan states that that won’t be necessary, as he jumps back on the Stormy and pulls a lever. The ship’s side opens to reveal a moderately-sized green-and-white speedboat. He tells the crew that this is the Speed Xtreme, a speedboat he had created and stored in the Stormy in advance in case they would ever need to split up. As Zane praises him on his foresight, Yato states that their group will take the Xtreme in that case. As the Zou Team says goodbye to their crewmates, Shocker shakes Nitro’s hand, telling him to take care of his crew. Nitro tells him not to worry, and that they’ll see them in a few days. They then board the Stormy and depart.

Chapter Text

As the Green Devils turn back to their allies, Mulin states that it’s about time to introduce them to the other members of the other pirate crews they’ll be working with. From the forest, a group emerges. From the Phantom Crook crew, Mulin leads a team of Dewayne and Cherry. Meanwhile, from Zypho’s No Face Pirates, his crew’s Strike Force, consisting of Ken, Jojo, and Reo, are present. Dewayne’s head remains bald, but he has grown a bushy beard and grayed during the timeskip. The tall, imposing man now wears a black kimono, tied with a rustic belly sash. Cherry has grown her pink hair much longer and lets it flow down her back rather than tying it in pigtails. She wears an ornate black dress, her whip fastened to a loop on her belt. Ken’s midnight-blue hair now falls downward and covers his left eye. He wears a long, cobalt tunic with a high-collared, black cloak draped over his shoulders. While his sword remains sheathed on his belt, his left arm is curiously missing. Jojo has cut his long hair short and spiky, having grown a beard and mustache on his plump face. He wears a red vest with black sleeves, black pants, and a white pirate sash tied around his waist. Reo now wears a black kimono-style ninja outfit, along with what seems like a large canvas strapped to his back like a backpack. 

Phantom Crook Pirates First Mate

"Iron Rock" Dewayne

Bounty: 500,000,000

Phantom Crook Pirates

Brenda Cherry

No Face Pirates First Mate and Swordsman

"One-Armed" Ken

Bounty: 273,000,000

No Face Pirates Chef

Jojo

No Face Pirates Painter

Hanafura Reo

The crew interacts with their allies in a comedic moment. Taco exclaims at Ken’s missing arm, wondering what happened, with the man looking away and quickly stating he lost it in an altercation with the Mother Pirates. As Taco wonders how useful he is now, Ken glares at him, stating he managed to acquire a fruit power from the event, so it balances out. Angel, seeing her old rival from Cressaluna, asks Cherry how her huge rat is doing, and wonders if Cherry can really fight without it. Cherry, becoming flustered, tells her that her precious Angelina is safe on her crew’s ship, and that she can still whip her if need be, as the two glare daggers at each other. Jojo bumbles over to Yato and asks if he is the Green Devils’ cook, to which Yato confirms he is. Jojo cheers and asks if he has any food, as he is quite hungry and wants to have another chef’s food for a change. Yato states he doesn’t have any on hand, and that even if he did, he is only obligated to feed the members of his crew, causing Jojo to complain that that isn’t fair. The plump man states the two should have a cook off where the winner would make food for the loser, with Yato irritatedly stating they didn’t have time for such games.

As things settle down, Mulin says that he may as well explain the situation. He states that he has created this alliance with the aim of taking down the Prayer Pirates, a powerful group operating in the New World. When Shocker asks why, Mulin says that when he was planning on how they as rookies could show the world that they are serious, he thought the best way is to team up and defeat a renowned group, strategically forcing the marines, government, and greater pirates to begin to have an eye on them. Adam says it seems like Mulin just wants fame, but Mulin retorts that in the New World, the only ways to survive are to become part of the crews of greater pirates, or directly oppose them. 

Mulin says he and Reo had already talked about it, and choosing the Prayer Pirates seemed logical. Ken tells Reo to draw them out, and the man does, bringing out his canvas and drawing with ink. As he finishes his drawings, he animates them, showing the alliance the heads of six individuals as he explains that these are part of the powers granted to him by the Fude Fude no Mi (Brush Brush Fruit). Reo states that the entire crew of the Prayer Pirates consists of six members, with Shocker stating that if there are only six, then they should be able to defeat them pretty easily. However, Reo refutes this, telling the group that each member had a bounty of 500,000,000, making for a total of 3,000,000,0000, and that each member alone can wipe out whole villages. 

Reo then explains each member, stating that their epithets and bounties are the only information they were able to find out about them. Hamilton “the Racer” is supposedly known for his speed and agility. “Angelic” Soriano is widely known for being as beautiful as one of God’s angels. “Axel “the Cobra” is dubbed thus due to having a giant pet snake with him everywhere he goes. “Radiant Gaze” Magnus supposedly “sees everything”. “Midnight’s Herald” Mack is quite dangerous when he is awake, but spends most of his time sleeping. And their leader is a man simply named Brain, who is known by that name for his intellect. Zypho asks them if they have ever heard of the Waford, with Angel exclaiming that they had just left that island some time ago. Zypho reveals that besides Brain, the five other members were all previously imprisoned there, with Taco remembering Cruella telling them about how five pirates were left as captives after the revolutionaries freed it.  

Yato asks if they know where they are currently, and Ken replies that they were seen operating around the New World for a bit, but they had recently tracked their base to be somewhere deep in Woodsworth’s forest. Mulin asks the other two captains if they need any preparation, but Shocker says no, stating that the Phantom-Devil-Face Alliance is ready to go. Dewyane states that with this in mind, they need to formulate a plan, but Shocker simply grins excitedly and states that that isn’t how he does things, before dashing up tha beach trail and into the forest. As he looks back, he tells the rest of the alliance that he bets he could beat them to it. Mulin irritatedly demands to know where he’s going, before ultimately sighing and following him, with the others soon following. 

Dewayne, having been left on the beach alone, sighs, but then looks back and notices Zypho has not gone yet, either. Dewayne chuckles and says that he thinks it’s strange, as he would have bet Zypho would have been the first to follow Shocker. As he tells the man they should get moving, however, Zypho’s eyes suddenly glow red, and he stabs Dewayne in the back, causing the large man to stumble. As he looks baffled at Zypho and wonders why, he notes the blade must have been coated in poison, and states he can feel himself slipping, before ultimately falling unconscious. Zypho then begins to morph, transforming into a smallish, blue humanoid creature with angelic wings. The creature laughs to itself, before flying off after the alliance.